Controller Tool Help

Transcript

1 Controller Tool Help No. LIT-1201 1147 Code 13.0 Release Software 2018 December Issued for the most up-to-date Exchange of this document. Refer to the Knowledge website version 21 Getting ... Started ... 21 Tool Information About for this Release What's 22 New ... and Field Package Licensing ... 22 CCT Controller ... Supported 24 Controllers Steps ... Getting Started 24 and Simulation Tasks... 24 Configuration and Servicing Commissioning 25 Tasks... Using System ... 25 the Help Options ... Search 25 27 Help... Context-Sensitive Interface ... 30 User User ... 30 Interface Concepts ... 30 System ... 30 Application Controller Application ... 30 File (CAF) ... Modules 30 Logic Blocks ... 30 Interface User 31 ... Menu Bar... 37 Settings ... 39 Modes ... 39 Release Modes 40 ... ... 41 Operations ... Commissioning-Only 42 Software Classic View Workspace ... 42 ... Simple View Workspace 62 Bar... 64 Status Details Dialog Box... 69 Interface User ... 69 Steps Opening Application File... 69 a Controller Modes 70 Changing ... Release Modes ... Changing 70 Setting View Menu Options ... 70 Printing Summary Reports ... 71 Saving a Controller File... 71 Application a CAF... Closing 71 Exiting the Tool... 71 Interface Screens User 71 ... User Interface Screen ... 71 Control Tab Screen ... 72 Logic ... 72 Tab Screen System Information Details Dialog ... 72 Features Panel Screen ... 74 Details Dialog Box... 76 1 Controller Tool Help

2 Application Tab Screen 77 ... Selection Information ... 77 System Tab Screen Options ... Summary Report 77 Confirm Boxes ... 79 Mode Dialog Change Release ... Perspectives 81 ... 82 Concepts Perspectives ... 82 Perspective Components 82 ... Container 84 Widget ... Criteria ... 91 Data ... 92 Classic View Components ... 95 View Components Simple Associated Perspectives ... 97 Organization Folder 97 ... Templates 98 ... Perspectives ... Custom 99 ... Layout 99 Perspective Perspectives Tab... 100 Tab... 101 System Configurations ... 103 Steps Perspectives Working with Components ... 103 with Perspectives Working 107 ... Perspectives ... 111 Screens Management 111 Perspective ... Screens ... 111 Container Details Widget ... 111 Data Table Data Widget ... 112 Confirm Dialog Box... 112 Specialized Widgets 113 ... Edit Dialog Box... Mass 113 Files... System 114 Upgrading Perspectives Concepts ... 114 and File Upgrades System 114 Module ... Upgrade Utility ... 114 Bulk CAF Enhancements and Compatibility ... 114 Release of Upgrading Effects 119 ... Steps Upgrading ... 119 Next After Upgraded Modules ... 119 Modules New 121 ... System Selection Updates ... 122 Backup Files... 123 Perspectives Steps ... 123 Upgrading a CAF... 123 Multiple Using the Bulk CAF Upgrade Utility ... 124 Upgrading Systems System Rerunning ... 124 Selection Adding New Features to Existing Applications ... 126 Upgrading Custom Control Modules ... 126 Perspectives Screens 127 ... Upgrade System Modules) Screen ... 127 (with System Upgrade (without Modules) Screen ... 127 Bulk CAF Upgrade Utility Dialog Box... 127 2 Help

3 Setting Preferences 129 ... Preferences Concepts 129 Setting ... and Signal Preferences 129 Object Naming ... ... Preferences 131 System Selection Unit Preferences ... 131 Import 132 and Export Preferences ... ... 133 Preferences Localization Steps ... 134 Setting Preferences Naming Default Preferences ... 134 Setting and Signal and Signal ... 135 Naming Preferences Filtering and Signal Preferences ... Sorting Naming 135 and Pasting Naming and Signal Preferences ... 135 Copying Naming and Signal Preferences ... Resetting 135 Exporting and Signal Preferences ... 135 Naming Naming and Signal ... 136 Importing Preferences System Preferences ... 136 Default Selection Setting Selection Preferences Resetting 136 System ... System Selection Preferences ... 136 Exporting System Selection Preferences Importing 137 ... Setting Preferences ... 137 Localization Localization ... 138 Exporting Preferences Localization Preferences ... 138 Importing Setting Screens ... 138 Preferences Preferences - Naming and Signal ... 138 Preferences - System Selection Screen ... 139 Preferences - Localization ... 139 Screen a System ... Configuring 142 Concepts 142 Preferences ... Setting System Selection Wizard ... 142 Wizard System Screen ... 142 Selection Help Types and Configurations ... 143 System Selection Tree... 143 System ... Configuration 144 Configuration ... Details 144 144 ... Simulation Definition ... 144 Hardware Communication Peer-to-Peer 144 ... Control Option in Logic View... View Connections 146 FSM Explorer ... 146 Setting Preferences Steps ... 146 Selecting a System a New System) ... 146 (Creating a Controller File... 147 Opening Application or Viewing Job Information ... 147 Entering Renaming ... 147 a System Viewing and Modifying System Selections ... 147 Viewing and Modifying Details ... 148 Viewing Controller ... 149 Information and Modifying Connections Viewing 150 ... Viewing and Modifying Parameters ... 151 Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables ... 151 Viewing and Modifying a Module’ s Logic ... 152 3 Help

4 Modifying an Input Signal ... 152 or Output a Module ... Adding 153 ... Renaming 153 a Module 153 Deleting a Module ... the Actuator Stroke Time... 153 Setting Logic View Steps ... 154 Applications ... 169 Custom Creating ... Creating a Sideloop 221 Up Peer-to-Peer ... 222 Setting Communication Communication 223 Peer-to-Peer ... Disabling Explorer ... Viewing the FSM 223 Preferences Screens ... 223 Setting System ... 223 New System Selection ... 225 Wizard Operations Wizard 225 Online ... 227 View... Control View... 230 Logic 235 Details ... Dialog Box... 235 Finder Enum Ports for Connection ... 235 Expose Ports Dialog ... 236 Clone Reference ... 236 Select Dialog Confirm (Delete) ... 236 (Module/Block) Rename 237 ... Job Information ... 237 FSM Details Screen ... 237 Configuring Advanced Controller Features ... 238 Configuring Advanced Features Concepts ... 238 Controller ... 238 Calendars ... Intrinsic 238 Alarming Schedules ... 238 239 Trends ... 239 ... SA Bus Diagnostics Device Information ... 239 Management (BBMD) Object Broadcast 239 ... Configuring Controller Features Steps ... 240 Advanced ... Calendars 240 up Alarms ... 242 Setting Schedules 243 ... Working with Trends ... 244 Device Information ... 245 Working with a Broadcast (BBMD) Object ... 245 Management Advanced ... Features Screens Configuring 247 Controller Screens Calendar 247 ... Intrinsic Alarming Screens ... 248 Schedule Screens ... 256 Trend Screens 257 ... Device Information Screen ... 260 Broadcast Management (BBMD) Object Screen ... 265 Configuring ... 266 the Display Configuring the Display Concepts ... 266 4 Help

5 Display Configuration 266 ... the Display Steps 266 Configuring ... ... 266 Setting Up DIS1710 267 Creating a New Display Page... on Display Pages or Idle Page... 267 Points Selecting to Appear and Descriptions of Points ... 267 Names Specifying User in the Display ... 268 Renaming Folders for Read-Only Points ... 268 Selecting Display on the Display Tree... 268 with Points Pages Working Page and Idle Page Order Defining 268 Display ... DIS1710 Display Settings ... 269 Specifying DIS1710 Display Timeout Settings Specifying 269 ... Defining Display Authorization ... 269 DIS1710 and Exporting Display Files... 269 Importing Configuration ... to the Controller 270 Transferring Screens ... Configuring the Display 270 Widget ... 270 Display Name Dialog Boxes ... 272 Page a System ... 273 Simulating a System ... 273 Simulating Concepts Simulation Overview ... 273 Bar... 273 Control Debugging ... 274 Conditions ... 274 Break a System Steps ... 274 Simulating Starting Simulation ... 274 Adjusting the Simulation Refresh Rates ... 274 and Commissioning and Modifying Parameters 274 Viewing ... Table... the State 275 Viewing Viewing Connections ... 275 Details Viewing 275 and Modifying ... and Hiding Involvement ... 275 Showing Items ... 275 Commanding Network Commanding and Network Outputs ... 275 Inputs Logic 276 Viewing ... and Modifying Details ... 276 Viewing Simulation Conditions ... 276 Break Working with Break Conditions ... 276 Stopping Simulation ... 277 Simulating a System ... 277 Screens Screen 277 Simulation ... Refresh Rate Dialog Box... 278 Adjust Command Box... 278 Dialog Break Conditions Detail Dialog Box... 279 Break Condition Dialog Box... 279 Simulation Exit - Confirmation Box... 279 Dialog Hardware ... Defining 280 Defining Hardware Concepts ... 280 Hardware Definition Tabs... 280 Hardware ... 280 Considerations Defining Hardware Steps ... 281 5 Help

6 Defining Hardware 281 ... Definition Tabs... Hardware 286 Tab... Controller 286 Selection 289 Tab... Assignment Point Settings 290 Network Tab... Packages 292 Tab... 292 Default Controller Tab... 293 ... Operations Transfer Transfer Operations Concepts ... 293 ... Transfer Wizard 293 to Computer ... 293 Transfer (Upload) (Download) 293 to Device Transfer ... Connections ... 293 293 Code File Types... Communication Mode ... 294 Switch Workflow Steps ... 295 Transfer Operations to a Computer Transferring 295 ... Transferring ... 297 to a Device Operations Screens 299 Transfer ... Wizard 299 to Device ... Transfer Transfer to Computer Wizard ... 305 Working ... 309 with the Trunk Utilities with the Trunk Utilities Concepts ... 309 Working Started with Trunk Utilities ... Getting 309 Updates Workflow ... 309 to the Trunk Utilities CAF and Attributes ... 311 Transfer to Controller CAFs to Multiple Controllers ... 311 Transfer Upgrade Radio ... 312 Firmware Read/W Online Utility ... 312 rite Attributes Manage Attribute Templates ... 312 Transfer Controller to Computer Trunk Utility ... 312 CAFs Controller Software ... 313 Upgrade Trunk Utility Utilities ... 313 with the Trunk Steps Working to Devices ... Transferring a CAF and Attributes 313 CAFs to Multiple Controllers ... 315 Transferring Radio Firmware ... 316 Upgrading and Writing Attributes Online ... 317 Reading Attribute ... 318 Managing Templates Controller CAFs to Computer ... 318 Transfer Multiple Controllers ... 319 Upgrading a Trunk from a Multiple Recovering or Transfer to Device Failure ... 320 Upgrade Working with the Trunk Utilities Screens ... 322 Trunk Utilities - Transfer to Controller Wizard ... 322 CAF and Attributes - Transfer to Multiple Controllers Wizard ... 324 Trunk Utilities CAFs - Upgrade Radio Trunk Utilities Wizard ... 327 Firmware Trunk Utilities - Read/W rite Attributes Wizard ... 329 Trunk Utilities - Manage Attribute Template Tool... 330 Select Attribute Box... 331 Dialog Host Manage and IP Address List Dialog Box... 331 Name Trunk Utilities - Transfer Controller CAFs to Computer Wizard ... 332 Trunk Utilities - Upgrade Controller Software Wizard ... 334 6 Help

7 Commissioning a System 336 ... a System Concepts 336 Commissioning ... 336 Control Bar... ... and Device System 336 Connections Balancing Feature ... 336 Test Mode ... 336 337 ... EWMA Diagnostics FSM Explorer ... 337 Steps Commissioning 338 a System ... Connections 338 Making ... Rate... the Refresh 339 Adjusting Commissioning a Device ... 339 Viewing ... 339 and Modifying Attributes Connections ... 339 Viewing View Steps ... Control 340 Logic ... 341 View Steps with the Test Mode ... Working 342 Feature 342 the Balancing ... Using Exiting Commissioning Mode ... 343 Viewing ... 344 the FSM Explorer a System Screens ... 344 Commissioning Device Commissioning ... 344 Wizard Adjust Rate Dialog Box... 348 Refresh Operations Box... 348 Online Dialog Involvement Dialog Box... Show 350 Balancer Override Module Balancing Tasks... 350 FSM Details Screen ... 351 Box Flow Test Overview 352 ... Test Concepts ... Box Flow 352 352 Test... Box Flow Test Steps ... 352 Box Flow Positions ... 352 Setting Starting Test... 352 a Box Flow Performing Reading Results ... 353 the Results ... 354 Saving a Box Flow Canceling 354 Test... Test Screens 355 Box Flow ... Box Flow Test Screen ... 355 ZFR1810 Operations ... Wireless 359 Wireless ZFR1810 Operations Concepts ... 359 Connections ... 359 ZFR Channel Configuration ... 359 Upgrade ZFR1810 ... 359 Coordinators Single Coordinator ... 359 Upgrade ZFR1810 ZFR1810 Operations Steps Wireless 360 ... Performing a ZFR1810 Channel Configuration ... 360 Upgrade ZFR1810 Coordinators ... 360 Upgrade Single ... 361 ZFR Coordinator Wireless Operations Screens ... 362 ZFR1810 ZFR Channel Configuration Wizard - Select ZFR Country Code ... 362 Wireless - Upgrade ZFR Coordinators Wizard ... 362 7 Help

8 Wireless - Upgrade ZFR Coordinator ... 365 Single ... 367 Applications ... Descriptions 367 Application 367 Application Overview ... Logic Modules ... 367 Core ... 367 Mechanical System Selection ... 368 Selection Logic Control Air Handling Unit Applications ... 369 Duct Applications ... Mixed Air Single 370 Air Single (MASD) Core Logic ... 370 Mixed Duct Duct Mechanical Selection ... 370 Air Single System Mixed Duct Control Logic Selection Mixed 396 Air Single ... Air Dual Duct Applications ... 400 Mixed Air Dual Duct Core Mixed ... 400 Logic Mixed Duct Mechanical System Selection ... 400 Air Dual Air Dual Duct Logic Selection ... 416 Mixed Control Air Single ... Applications Outdoor 420 100% Duct Outdoor Duct Core Logic ... 420 100% Air Single Outdoor Air Single Duct Mechanical System 100% ... 420 Selection 100% Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection ... 438 Outdoor Outdoor Duct 100% Applications ... 441 Air Dual 100% Air Dual Duct Core Logic ... 441 Outdoor 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection ... 441 100% Outdoor Logic Selection ... 454 Air Dual Duct Control Unit Applications ... Rooftop 460 Logic Rooftop ... Core 460 System ... 460 Mechanical Rooftop Selection Logic Rooftop ... 467 Control Selection (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Applications ... 470 Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Multizone Core Logic ... 470 Duct) Multizone Air Dual Duct) Mechanical System Selection ... 470 (Mixed (Mixed Control Duct) Multizone Logic Selection ... 487 Air Dual ... 490 Fan Coil Applications Fan Coil Core Logic ... 490 Modules (FC)... 490 Fan Coil Mechanical System ... 491 Selection Fan (FC)... Supply 491 Coils (FC)... 492 Optional Equipment (FC)... 493 (FC)... 493 Sensors Safeties (FC)... 494 Monitored (FC)... Misc 494 Feedback (FC)... Position 494 N2 Compatibility Options (FC)... 494 Fan Coil Control Logic Selection ... 495 Occupancy (FC)... 495 Features (FC)... 496 Optional Pump Applications ... 497 Heat Heat Pump Core Logic ... 497 Modules 497 (HP)... Heat Pump Mechanical System Selection ... 498 8 Help

9 Supply Fan (HP)... 498 Fan (HP)... 498 Exhaust 499 (HP)... Coils 500 (HP)... Optional Equipment (HP)... Sensors 500 Safeties 501 Monitored (HP)... Misc (HP)... 501 501 (HP)... Feedback Position N2 Compatibility Options (HP)... 501 Heat Logic Selection ... 502 Pump Control (HP)... Occupancy 502 (HP)... Suitability 502 Economizer Reversing Valve Output(s) (HP)... 502 Optional 503 Features (HP)... Applications ... 504 Unit Ventilator Mechanical System Selection ... 504 Unit Ventilator Supply Fan (UV)... 504 (UV)... 504 Coils (UV)... Equipment 506 Optional Sensors 506 (UV)... Monitored (UV)... 506 Safeties Misc (UV)... 507 Feedback (UV)... 507 Position N2 Compatibility Options (UV)... 507 Control Logic Selection Unit Ventilator 508 ... ASHRAE Control (UV)... 508 Cycle (UV)... Occupancy 508 Economizer Suitability (UV)... 508 Features (UV)... 509 Optional Plant Applications ... 510 Central Central Cooling Applications ... 511 Central Cooling Core Logic ... 511 Central Cooling System Selection ... 511 Mechanical Cooling Control Selection ... 520 Central Logic Applications 522 Heating Central ... Heating Logic ... 522 Central Core Heating Mechanical System Selection ... 522 Central Heating Control Logic Selection ... 530 Central Central Applications ... 533 Simple Plant Central Plant Control Logic Simple 533 ... Simple Central Plant Mechanical System Selection ... 533 Simple Central Plant Control Logic Selection ... 537 Central Cooling Applications ... 540 with Optimization Cooling Mechanical System Selection ... 540 Central with Optimization System Enable Cooling ... 540 (CPO) Plant Layout Configuration (CPO) ... 540 Chillers (CPO) ... 552 Primary Chill Water Pumps ... 556 (CPO) Primary Water Pumps (CPO) ... 563 Cond Condenser Water System (CPO) ... 569 Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping (CPO) ... 577 9 Help

10 Heat Exchangers ... 582 (CPO) Cooling with Optimization Logic Selection ... 585 Central Control (CPO) ... Chiller Options 585 ... (CPO) 586 Condenser Options ... 586 Basin Options (CPO) ... 586 (CPO) Chill Water Options Secondary Options (CPO) ... 587 Heat Exchanger Options (CPO) 587 General ... (CPO) 587 Options ... Optimization Sideloop Applications ... 588 ... 588 Sideloop Selection ... 588 Control Feedback Analog to Binary Control ... 589 Interlock Control ... 589 Binary Create State to Interlock this Side Loop... 590 Selection Feedback (Sideloop) 590 Position ... Supervisory Only Applications ... 591 and Monitoring Control Custom System Custom/Monitoring ... 591 Mechanical Selection Items (Custom/Monitoring) ... 591 Zone Air Items (Custom/Monitoring) ... 592 Outdoor Items (Custom/Monitoring) ... 593 Duct Mounted Items ... 594 Pipe (Custom/Monitoring) (Custom/Monitoring) ... 595 Generator Items Power Items Electrical ... 596 (Custom/Monitoring) Medical (Custom/Monitoring) ... 597 Gas Items Water Items (Custom/Monitoring) ... 597 Domestic Light Items (Custom/Monitoring) ... 598 Sand Filter (Custom/Monitoring) ... 598 Items Gas Items (Custom/Monitoring) 599 Natural ... (Custom/Monitoring) Misc ... Temps 599 Monitoring ... 600 Alarm Misc (Custom/Monitoring) Misc (Custom/Monitoring) ... 602 Status Items Control Logic Selection ... 603 Custom/Monitoring Motor (Custom/Monitoring) ... Command 603 Command Equipment or Lighting (Custom/Monitoring) ... 603 General Heat ... 604 Command Tape (Custom/Monitoring) Output (Custom/Monitoring) ... 605 Voltage Output (Custom/Monitoring) ... 605 Current ... VAV Applications 606 VAV Single Duct Applications ... 607 VAV Single Duct Mechanical System Selection ... 607 VAV Single Duct Logic Selection ... 611 Control Single Applications ... 613 VAV Slave Duct Single Duct Mechanical System Selection VAV Slave 613 ... VAV Slave Single Duct Control Logic Selection ... 615 VAV Dual Duct Applications ... 616 VAV Dual Duct Mechanical System ... 616 Selection Logic 619 ... VAV Dual Duct Control Selection VAV Slave Duct Applications ... 621 Dual VAV Slave Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection ... 621 VAV Slave Dual Duct Control Logic Selection ... 622 10 Help

11 Master and Slave Communication ... 624 VAV Box Peer-to-Peer and Slave Single Peer References ... 624 VAV Master Duct Dual Duct References ... 625 VAV Master and Slave Peer ... Options N2 Compatibility 627 N2 Compatibility Options Concepts ... 627 Tree Compatibility Option ... 627 System Selection 627 Tab... N2 Mapping 630 Device Types... Network Inputs ... 631 N2 Compatibility Outputs N2 Compatibility 633 Network ... Modules Overview ... 634 N2 Compatibility or MA Unit Mode Input... 637 N2 100OA Mode N2 Box Heating ... 638 Output Outputs ... N2 Common 641 - SD VAV ASC... Outputs 644 N2 Common N2 Occupancy Mode Input... 647 N2 Flow 649 Override ... Mode Input - ASC... 650 N2 Occupancy Mode Output ... N2 Occupancy 651 N2 Occupancy Output ASC... 652 Mode Determination 653 Unit Enable ASC... N2 VAV Box Mode Input... 656 Input... 658 N2 VAV SD Mode Outputs ... 660 N2 VAV DD Common N2 VMA DD Mode Input... 664 N2 Terminal Unit Mode Input... 665 N2 Compatibility Options ... 668 Steps a New N2 Mapping Object 668 Creating ... Mappings 668 N2 Point ... Viewing Mappings ... Editing N2 Point 669 and Removing N2 Points ... 669 Adding a PRN or DDL File ... 669 Creating Removing an N2 Mapping ... 670 Object Options ... 671 N2 Compatibility Screens N2 Mapping Tab... 671 ... 673 Modules Descriptions ... 673 Module Module Category Overview ... 673 Module Group Overview ... 674 Module Overview 674 ... Use in Applications ... Module 674 674 ... Attributes States ... 675 Primary ... Reliability 675 Network Modules ... 676 Input Interface Modules ... 676 Generator Enable Modules ... 678 Sensor Modules ... 680 and Setpoint Rotation and Switch Modules ... 687 Central Plant Interconnection Modules ... 689 Generic (Add New) Modules ... 695 11 Help

12 Input Modules 696 ... Input Modules 697 Miscellaneous ... ... 698 Setpoint/Miscellaneous Modules 698 Alarm Management ... AND... 698 Alarm Alarm OR... 699 701 Plant Central ... ... 701 Enable 3rd Party 702 Add-8 ... ... Calculation Capacity 703 Upstage 704 Forced ... Chiller Load Setpoint Reset ... 705 Chiller Percent Differential Pressure Setpoint Reset ... 707 Pump CHW Diff Calc... 709 CW Temperature Alarm Device 711 ... Interlock ... Equipment 713 Determination 719 Direction ... Flow Load Calculator ... 720 721 Load Filter... Reset By Coil Position ... 724 dP Setpoint PCHWP Status OR... 726 ... Subtract 728 Waterside Suitability ... 729 Economizer Enable 731 Device ... Availability ... 731 Economizer Availability RA-T Compare ... 734 Economizer Mode Determination ... 735 Device Analog Status Determination ... 735 Dual Fan Command 737 OR... Fan Speed High ... 738 Dual Select Alarm ... Fan Status 739 Dual Determination Determination ... 741 Flow Status Device Enable Determination Parallel ... 743 Staged Staged Device Determination Series ... 744 Enable Alarm ... 745 Status Determination Mode Determination ... SummerWinter 748 WarmupCooldown Determination ... 749 Fan Lockout ... 751 Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout ... 751 Unocc Heating ... 752 Fan Lockout Calculation 752 Flow ... Calculation ... 753 Flow Differential Flow ... 757 Calculation Flow Sum Calculation ... 757 Minimum Flow Calculation ... 758 Required Flow... 759 Calculation ... Miscellaneous 759 Degrees to Direction ... 759 Equipment Count ... 762 Setpoint ... 763 Calculation Damper Minimum Flow Reset by CO2... 763 12 Help

13 Damper Minimum Determination ... 764 Position Request Determination 765 Pressure ... Determination Temperature ... Request 766 Reset 768 Position by CO2... Damper Minimum ... 769 Discharge Air Setpoint Determination ... 770 Reset Air Setpoint Discharge Setpoint Calculation ... 771 Flow Differential by OA... Setpoint Reset 772 Compensation 773 Winter ... Summer Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation ... VAV Dual Duct 775 Duct Minimum Flow Determination ... 776 VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow VAV Dual Calculation ... 777 Endpoint VAV Single Minimum Flow Determination ... 779 Duct Setpoint Determination 781 ZN-T ... Conditioning 785 Signal ... Sideloop Inputs ... Sideloop Average 785 Maximum Selector ... 786 Sideloop Minimum Selector ... Sideloop 787 Sideloop Inputs ... 788 Sum ... Timing 789 Enum, Float) ... 789 Last Value (Boolean, Status 790 AND... Module Use in Applications (Status AND) ... 791 Attributes (Status AND) ... 791 Damper Trouble ... 792 Detection Trouble Detection 792 Damper ... Modules 794 Generation State ... ... 794 Alarm Management Fan Alarms 794 Dual ... Latching Alarm Manager ... 795 Pump Low OA Alarm ... Preheat 799 Central ... 800 Plant ... CW Sequencer 800 Device Enable Determination ... 805 Heating Low Temp Control Central 806 ... Load Calculation v2... 807 Count On Inputs ... 810 Device Availability Calculation (Count True Inputs) ... 811 PID Sequencer ... 812 Sequencing-Building Load... Plant 813 ... 815 Sequencing-Decouple Plant Sequencing-Discrete ... 816 Plant Plant ... 818 Sequencing-Modulating Plant Sequencing-OA-T ... 820 Secondary Bypass Valve Sequencing ... 821 System Enable ... 822 Tower Speed v50... 824 Sequencing-1 Tower Sequencing-2 Speed v50... 825 Tower Sequencing-3 Speed v50... 827 Tower ernier v50... 829 Sequencing-V Tower Start Determination ... 831 13 Help

14 Waterside Economizer ... 832 Sequencer Enable ... Device 837 (Device Pass 837 Enable) Through ... 838 ... Availability Determination Suitability Determination ... 840 Recovery Enthalpy Heat Determination ... 843 Recovery Heat Suitability General Sequencing ... 844 Check Analog 845 Override ... Mode ... 849 Application Override Check 849 Override Binary 01, 04, and 08... Sequencing ... 852 Coil Circulation Pump v3... 852 Dehumidification Sequencing Dual Fan No Airflow Sequencing ... 855 Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL Smoke 858 ... Heat Low Limit Sequencing ... 861 Recovery Sequencing ... Humidification 863 Sequencing 866 of Airflow ... Loss ... 869 PID Tuning Reset Sequencing (AHU 100 OA)... 871 Stop Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air)... 875 Start Sequencing ... 880 Occupied Sequencing 100 OADD) ... 881 Occupied (AHU Sequencing (AHU 100 OASD) ... 884 Occupied Occupied Sequencing MADD) ... 887 (AHU Occupied (AHU MADD w HR)... 889 Sequencing Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD) v51... 892 Occupied Sequencing MASD w HR) v51... 894 (AHU Sequencing (Single ... 897 Occupied Device) Sequencing v51... 900 Zone (FC/AHU) Occupied Sequencing (HP) v51... Occupied Zone 902 Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 1) v51... 904 Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 2) v51... Occupied 907 Occupied Sequencing (UV Cycle 3) v51... 911 Zone Zone (UV Cycle W) v51... 913 Occupied Sequencing Zone Sequencing (VAV) v51... 915 Occupied Zone Sequencing (VAV) HFR... 918 Occupied Pass Through ... 920 Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) ... 921 State Determination 922 ... Mode ... 922 Application Determination Energy Hold Off Determination ... 923 Status ... Fan Alarm 925 Fan Determination Units) ... 927 (Terminal Mode Determination ... 928 Occupancy Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ)... 931 System Mode ... 932 Determination Determination ... Unit Enable 933 Zone Low Limit Determination ... 936 Timing ... 937 Last Value (Boolean, Float) ... 937 Enum, Unoccupied Sequencing ... 938 14 Help

15 Unoccupied Sequencing v100... 938 (Common) Sequencing (AHU) 940 Unoccupied v100... (AHU Unoccupied ... 943 Mixed Sequencing Air ZN-T) v100... (MZ) Unoccupied Sequencing 946 v100... 948 Unoccupied Sequencing (UV) 950 Sequencing Unoccupied (VAV)... VAV Specific Sequencing ... 952 v50... 953 Autocalibration Sequence ... Balancer Override 955 960 Test... Box Flow Device Enable Determination Parallel ... 962 Staged Staged Determination Series ... 963 Device Enable Sequencing ... 964 WarmupCooldown ... VAV Fan Determination 966 Fan Determination Flow Based) ... 966 (VAV Parallel (VAV Parallel Temp Based) 968 Fan Determination ... ... (VAV Series) 969 Fan Determination Output Control Modules ... 971 Cascaded ... 971 Zone Control DA Setpoint Determination ... 971 Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Cascaded v51... 973 Determination Flow (VAV Dual Duct) v51... 978 Setpoint Setpoint Duct) v51... 980 Flow (VAV Single Flow Setpoint HD Constant 983 ... Min Flow Control (VAV Dual Duct) ... 984 Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control ... 985 Slave Supply Setpoint Control HFR... 987 Flow Supply Flow Control Dual Duct... 989 Slave Setpoint Setpoint 990 HFR... Flow Supply Control ... Plant Central 993 Block Protect ... 993 ... 994 Changeover Output Control ... 995 Chiller Selector 996 Chiller ... Cooling Tower Control ... 1013 Tower PID Control Cooling 1018 v61... CPO30 Twr Run Switch ... 1020 Cooling Tower Selector ... 1020 Cooling Tower Speed Count Determination ... 1025 Heat Exchanger Water Control v51... 1026 with Return Command 1028 Damper OR... Exchanger Selector ... 1029 Heat Open Tower Control with Low Limit... 1035 Loop Plant Control ... 1039 Open Loop Tower Control with Low Limit v61... 1040 Pump Control 1044 v2... Output Control Pump 1046 ... Pump Selector ... 1048 Pump Startup Determination ... 1057 Ramp to Command with Limit... 1058 Rotation Small ... 1060 15 Help

16 Secondary Pump 1063 PID v50... Output ... Sequenced 1066 v2... Tower 1066 Control v61... Variable 1068 Speed CW with Low Limit VF Primary Min Flow Control ... 1071 v61... 1073 Min Flow VF Primary Control ... 1076 Control Damper for UV Cycle Damper 1076 Control 1, 2, or W v51... Control v51... 1079 Damper with Low Limit - AHU ... 1082 Control Econ Damper for Economizer v50... Damper Control 1082 Control for Relief Fan v50... 1085 Damper Control for Volume Matching v50... Damper 1089 Damper - AHU Min OA... 1091 Control Minimum Position by OA Flow v50... 1092 Damper Controlled ... 2 Position 1093 Min OA Damper Output ... Min OA Damper Proportional 1095 Capacity ... 1096 Min OA Fan Constant Capacity Flow Control v50... 1098 Min OA Fan Variable Control Damper 1101 - VAV... Damper ... 1101 Exhaust Control Control (VAV Supply) v51... 1104 Damper Damper ... 1108 and Fan Control Module Use in Applications (Damper and Fan Control) ... 1108 Attributes (Damper and Fan Control) ... 1108 Device OR... 1109 Use in Applications (Device 1109 Module OR)... OR)... (Device 1109 Attributes Dual Pump Sequencer ... 1110 (Dual Pump Module ... 1110 Use in Applications Sequencer) (Dual Pump Sequencer) ... 1111 Attributes ... Fan Control 1112 Fan Proportional 1112 ... Fan Control 1113 Parallel ... Single Speed Fan Control ... 1114 Speed ... Fan Three 1115 Fan VAV Series 1118 ... - AHU... Fan Control 1119 Dual Fan Lead-Lag ... 1119 Dual Fan Run-Standby ... 1120 Dual Fan Run Together 1122 ... Speed 1123 Fan Single ... Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control v50... 1124 BSP for UL-864-UUKL Fan Relief 1126 v50... Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control ... 1128 Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL v50... 1130 Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking ... 1132 1134 Fan Return Match Control ... Volume or Exhaust Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL v50... 1137 Fan Supply Duct Static Control ... 1140 Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL v50... 1142 16 Help

17 Heating & Cooling - 2 Pipe... 1145 Control Valve v51... 1145 2 Pipe 2 Position Low Limit Valve with DA-T v51... 2 Pipe 2 Position 1149 v50... Valve with Low Limit 2 Pipe FBPD 1153 2 Position 2 Pipe Proportional Valve v51... 1157 v51... 1161 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit 1165 v51... 2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit Heating & Cooling Control - Cooling ... 1170 Valve v51... Cooling 2 Position 1170 FBPD Valve with Dehumidification v50... 1172 Cooling 2 Position Valve v51... Proportional Cooling 1175 Valve with Dehumidification v51... 1178 Cooling Proportional Outputs v51... 1181 Cooling Staged Staged with Dehumidification v50... 1184 Cooling Outputs & Cooling Control - Heat Heating ... 1187 Pump Heat Staged Compressors v51... 1187 Pump & Cooling Control Recovery ... 1191 Heating - Heat Glycol v51... 1191 Recovery Loop Heat Wheel v50... 1194 Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers v50... 1197 Recovery Heat Recovery Wheel Heat Dampers v50... 1200 with Bypass Heating Control - Heating ... 1204 & Cooling 2 Position 1204 Heating Valve v51... 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit v51... Heating 1207 Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit v51... 1210 Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit v50... 1212 Heating FBPD Valve with Low Limit v51... 1215 Proportional Proportional Valve v51... Heating 1220 Valve with DA-T v51... 1222 Proportional Low Limit Heating Valve with Low Limit v51... Heating Proportional 1225 Sequenced Valves with Low Limit v50... 1229 Heating Staged Outputs v51... 1232 Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit v51... 1235 Heating Staged with Low Limit v50... 1238 Heating Outputs Valves w Shared AO v50... 1241 HeatingCooling Preheat Proportional Water Control v51... 1244 Valve with Return Box Heating Control v50... 1248 Staged Heating Proportional with Enable ... 1250 Humidity Control 1252 ... Packaged 1252 Humidification Unit v51... Humidification Proportional Steam Output v51... 1255 Scrubber Output v51... Humidification 1257 Humidification Outputs v50... 1261 Staged Lighting ... 1264 Control Lighting ... 1264 Motor Protection ... 1266 Blocking Protection 1266 ... Zone Control Multizone 1269 ... Zone Damper v50... 1269 Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve v50... 1271 Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve v51... 1274 17 Help

18 Zone Damper Heating v50... 1278 w Staged ... 1282 Sequencers MSC 01 through 12... MSC 1285 16... Sequencer 1296 Sequencer 01 through Global Sequencer ... 1303 ... Sideloop 1330 Control v2... 1330 Binary Sideloop Binary to Analog ... Sideloop Interlock 1331 Interlock to Binary ... 1332 Sideloop Binary Output 1333 PI Proportional v51... Sideloop Output v100... 1336 Sideloop PI Proportional Proportional Output v51... 1339 PI with Reset Sideloop PI Staged Output v51... 1342 Sideloop Sideloop PI with Reset Output v51... 1345 Staged Reset Output 1348 Sideloop ... 1349 ... Timing Float) ... 1349 Enum, Last Value (Boolean, ... Totalization 1359 Totalization (Enum Runtime) ... 1359 Output Modules ... 1363 Network Output Control Modules ... 1363 Interface Plant Modules ... 1363 Central Interconnection Interconnection Modules ... 1367 VAV Application (Add New) Modules ... 1368 Generic Output Modules ... 1369 Miscellaneous Output Modules ... 1370 Input and Output ... 1371 Objects Priority Levels 1371 Command ... ... Attributes 1372 Object Enum Set Mapping Rules ... Binary to Multistate 1373 (Counter Input) Object ... 1375 Accumulator (Counter Input) Attributes ... 1375 Accumulator (Counter Accumulator Commands ... 1377 Input) Input ... 1379 Analog Object Input Attributes ... 1379 Analog Analog Commands ... 1385 Input Analog Output Object ... 1386 Analog Output Attributes ... 1386 Analog Output ... 1389 Commands Value ... 1390 Analog Object Analog Value Attributes ... 1390 Value Commands ... Analog 1394 Binary Object ... 1395 Input Input Attributes ... 1395 Binary Binary Input Commands ... 1396 Binary Object ... 1398 Output Binary Output Attributes ... 1398 Binary Output Commands ... 1403 Binary Object ... 1405 Value Binary Value Attributes ... 1405 18 Help

19 Binary Value Commands 1408 ... Value Object ... Multistate 1409 ... 1409 Multistate Value Attributes ... Multistate 1412 Commands Value Position ... 1413 Adjust Output Object Output Attributes ... 1413 Position Adjust Output Adjust ... 1416 Position Commands 1417 ... Logic ... 1417 Inputs Activity Outputs 1417 Activity ... Boolean ... 1418 ... 1419 Calculation Exponentially Weighted Averages (EWMA) ... 1419 Moving (Boolean Output) 1420 Expression ... Output) 1421 (Float ... Expression Line Segment ... 1424 ... 1425 Span (Analog Integration) ... 1426 Totalization (Boolean Totalization ... 1427 Event) (Boolean ... 1429 Totalization Runtime) (Enum Event) Totalization 1430 ... Totalization (Enum Runtime) ... 1431 Compare ... 1433 Constant ... 1435 Block ... Container 1435 1436 ... Control ... 1436 Lead Compensator ... 1437 Pre-Processor MSC Optimal Open Loop Cooling Tower Control ... 1439 Near ... PID Pre-Processor 1441 1443 PID... ... 1451 PVDC Math ... 1453 Controller Multi-State 1454 ... Psychrometric ... 1454 Absolute Humidity ... 1454 Dew Point... 1455 Enthalpy ... 1455 Cooling ... 1456 Free is Available Relative Humidity ... 1458 1458 Wet Bulb... ... 1459 Selection Sequencer ... 1461 Statistical ... 1461 Timing ... 1463 Execution ... 1463 Status Last Value (Boolean) ... 1464 Last Value (Enum) ... 1465 Last Value (Float) ... 1466 Latch ... 1467 Rate Limiter ... 1467 19 Help

20 Timer... 1468 Blocks Used ... 1470 Logic as Modules (Add) ... Module Use in Application 1470 ... (MAX) 1471 Module Use in Application ... Module Use in Application (MUX) 1471 1472 ... Custom 1473 Troubleshooting ... ... Functionality Application 1473 ... Functionality 1477 Controller Tool Functionality ... 1481 ... Wireless Functionality 1486 Commissioning Overview ... 1487 PID PRAC Recognition Adaptive Control (PRAC+) Overview ... 1487 Pattern of PRAC+ Benefits Tuning ... 1487 Adaptive and PRAC+ Adaptive ... 1487 PID Control Tuning and Properties 1490 Outputs, ... PID Inputs, ... Lead Compensator 1497 Studies ... 1497 Trend Data Points ... 1497 Critical Systems Not Suited ... 1502 for PRAC+ Systems 1502 Redundant ... Time Dominant Systems ... 1502 Delay Oversized Systems ... 1502 Staged Systems Controlled with a Sequencer ... 1502 Nonlinear Systems ... 1503 Additional Factors Performance ... 1503 that Affect PRAC+ Requirements ... Commissioning 1506 Checklist 1506 Tuning ... Automatic Checklist ... Manual Tuning 1507 Commissioning Steps ... 1508 PID PRAC a Trend in an Advanced Application Controller ... 1508 Adding Trend Data Reviewing Application Controller ... 1508 in an Advanced Tuning ... 1508 Resetting Parameters and Adding Unmapped Objects Viewing 1509 ... Creating Custom Tuning Parameters ... 1511 Changing Saturation Times... 1511 Disabling PRAC+ Tuning ... 1511 Loop a Step 1512 Performing Test... PID Values Reset by Upgrading or Opening CAF in Post 5.1 Release Environments Preserving ..1512 Troubleshooting ... 1513 Mechanical System Troubleshooting ... 1513 CCT/PCT Programming Troubleshooting ... 1513 CCT/PCT Troubleshooting ... 1513 Commissioning Tailored Summaries ... 1514 Appendix: Process IDs... 1515 Software Terms ... 1520 Index ... 1521 20 Help

21 Getting Started provides information using the software, including basic information about the This section on how to get started of common gather you can perform using the tool. Before you begin, and an overview any information application tasks these to complete tasks. you need provides basic tool application About Tool Information information. are categorized as follows: The tasks • and Simulation Tasks —Configuration and simulation tasks include how to create Configuration and configure your system, your system, and define its associated hardware. simulate • Commissioning Tasks —Commissioning and servicing tasks include transfer of a Controller and Servicing File (CAF) to a device, transfer of a device's CAF to a computer , and commissioning devices Application by viewing the controller tool software. live data through System on upgrading to the next release, For information Upgrading your system Files section. see the About Tool Information The available features of the tool can differ depending on the version or release mode you are using. The Controller Tool includes an About box that provides basic information on your tool. You can view this dialog box Tool dialog the Help menu, About Tool. The following table provides descriptions of the information by selecting then opening box. in this dialog 1: About Box - Release Figure Version 13.0 Tool Dialog Tool Dialog Table 1: About Box Description Field Indicates the build of the tool. Tool Version Indicates the current version of the opened CAF. If no CAF is open, the description is File Not Open. File Information Version Indicates the database of the Release Mode . Release Information version Indicates of the current Release Mode for the tool. Mode Name the name Indicates the database build of the current Release Mode. Build Number Indicates build. Build Date the date of the database Indicates the build of the installer for the tool. Installer Version 21 Controller Tool Help: Getting Started

22 What's New for this Release information is new or revised Configuration Tool (CCT) at Release 13.0: The following for the Controller packages • CCT software activation at Release 13.0. You can license CCT and require and field controller license the Software the CCT Manager (SAM), which is installed through using field controller packages Activation Help information licensing, refer to the Software Activation Manager For more installation wizard. on software . (LIT-12012389) • Explorer ® Programmable Controller CCT and the are no longer separate software tools. Facility Tool (FX-PCT) and commissions using controller package file licensing through SAM. CCT now configures products the Finite to view the Machine (FSM). You can use the FSM Explorer a new way of viewing • CCT provides State and possible of an application state, in Configuration, Simulation and Commissioning mode. next states, current Explorer for more information. FSM See • CCT 10.3 / Firmware Mode has been removed from this release. Release Modes 10.2 / Firmware 7.0 Release 6.2 and 10.4 / Firmware at CCT Release 13.0. 8.0 are available screen has been to the new CAF workflow to help you pick the correct Release Mode for • A new optional added Selecting for more information. See a System your application. • to Device (Download) feature provides enhanced file transfer The You can now control when Transfer options. transferred files on a controller , and, once the files are activated, modify the runtime logic of applications to activate in a device. the Online Library , a resource that enables you to download, publish and share CAF Files, • You can now access Templates, Definitions, and CCT Modules. This feature is only available to Technician Controller Equipment licensed users. • SA Bus Provisioning. feature SA Bus Provisioning CCT now supports updates the firmware of devices The attached Bus without having to manually connect and update each one. You can check on the Sensor/Actuator the status of SA Bus devices using the SA Bus Status option in Transfer Operations . • Support for IP controllers Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) is enabled, which provides you with BACnet to configure BBMD using CCT. with the ability functionality to N2 capable of an N2 using background transfer . The transfer can now be transferred • N2 applications devices to a device background transfer does not require explicit communication switching. application that supports Information tool is now renamed to Online Operations. • The Controller Package CCT and Field Controller Licensing and field controller packages require license activation using the SAM, which is installed during CCT CCT software installation. The availability packages per brand and the license key is based on local market business rules of field controller packages controlled system. Once field controller the ordering are obtained, import a field controller package through by double-clicking on the package collection file or use the Package Importer , located in the Start menu. The Package Importer displays Finished importing when the import is complete. the message Start CCT software open the SAM from the packages menu. To add a license, click To license and field controller Add License button and then choose the activation method the like to use for the license: Online with you would a Product , or Offline with a License Activation Key . Once added, CCT software and field controller package File licenses display in the License Inventory . If CCT is licensed, the application you must accept the End User License Agreement before the first time you open you can use CCT. If you do not license CCT, the Software License Check displays the following message: This to launch software is currently unlicensed. the Open Software Activation Manager button Click SAM and license CCT software. 22 Controller Tool Help: Getting Started

23 If you do not license field controller certain limitations occur . For example, if you open an application with packages, device, a dialog box informs you that the device is not licensed. Unlicensed field controllers are set an unlicensed to Artificial Field Device or Artificial IO Device and cannot be set in the Define Hardware wizard. In addition, the with Trunk Utilities transfer to controllers is disabled for unlicensed devices. See the Getting Started of CAFs and Transfer Wizard sections. 23 Controller Tool Help: Getting Started

24 Controllers Supported support for a wide range across multiple brands. For simplicity , some of the field CCT provides of field controllers in this document have classified according to their particular functionality . See Table 2 below been controller brands on what they are referred to throughout the document. and for information controllers, for a list of CCT compatible Controllers Table 2: CCT Compatible Field to as: Controller Controller Name Referred Type Air Volume VAV Variable Controller VAV Controller Modular Assembly Controller Variable Air Volume VMA Variable Air Volume Box Controller FX-PCV Programmable CH-PCV Variable Terminal Equipment Controller , MS/TP CVM Air Volume General Controller Field Equipment Controller FEC Purpose Purpose Programmable FX-PCG General Controller CH-PCG Application Controller Advanced Application Field Equipment Controller FAC Advanced Application Programmable Controller FX-PCA Advanced CH-PCA General Application Controller , MS/TP CGM Purpose Expansion Module Input/Output Point IOM Module Input/Output Expansion FX-PCX Module CH-PCX Getting Started Steps Configuration and Simulation Tasks Configuration and simulation include the following: tasks if you plan to add Set or import preferences and System Selection Wizard defaults and signal 1. (Optional) naming ( Setting Preferences ). a new system a new system or open an existing system ( Configuring a System ). 2. Create If you are prompted to upgrade your system when opening an existing file, if you wish to add a newly Note: section. feature, to rerun system selection, released Upgrading System Files or if you want see the 3. (Optional) Use or manage perspectives for your applications ( Perspectives ) 4. Edit a system ( Configuring a System ): • (Optional) Add Inputs and Outputs. and parameters. • Edit attributes Change Input and Output signals. - (Optional) Set up peer-to-peer communication on Network Inputs - (Optional) Outputs. or Network Note: As you make selections in the System Selection Wizard, you can press F1 to view the Help screen. The Help screen displays the Help section of the item you are viewing and changes as you select different items Click the links on the Help screen to view module information. in the wizard. • (Optional) Edit the State Table. • (Optional) Add custom logic. • (Optional) Add break conditions. 24 Controller Tool Help: Getting Started

25 5. Simulate a system Simulating a System ). ( hardware ( Hardware ). 6. Define Defining > 7. Press the CAF. Save File to save Tasks and Servicing Commissioning Commissioning tasks include the following: and servicing ( Transfer 1. Transferring and Working with the Trunk Utilities ): CAFs Operations a connection: • Make - Bluetooth ® connection on SAB - Bluetooth connection on FCB - NxE Passthru 4.2+/BACnet Router connection - MAP ® Technology - ZigBee connection Ethernet - Direct • Transfer or transfer to device to computer 2. If you have a Box Flow test for all the appropriate devices of a MS/TP bus (optional). VAV Box Controllers, perform this process Repeat buses ( Box Flow Test Overview ). for other 3. Commission ( Commissioning a System ): a system a connection: • Make - Bluetooth connection on Sensor/Actuator Bus (SAB) - Bluetooth connection on Field Controller Bus (FCB) - NxE Passthru - MAP Router connection 4.2+/BACnet Technology - ZigBee connection - Direct Ethernet • Observe the connected application. • Test a system in Test mode. offsets, COVs, and polarity values as necessary • Adjust . • Exit commissioning. during File Save to save the CAF if you made 4. Press > commissioning. changes Using the Help System You can access both the online Controller Tool Help and the PDF to quickly find information. The tool supports when context-sensitive provides you instant access to a help topic which you press F1 anywhere within the help, tool. However , in some instances, such as when searching with multiple keywords, the PDF provides the better option information. for finding Search Options The following table provides the best option for searching for information when using the help system. 25 Controller Tool Help: Using the Help System

26 Table 3: Recommended Help Use for Finding Information System System PDF Help System Information Online Help -- Details about a Module F1 or click the help icon ( Press ) when any module viewing . Details -- Block a Logic about Press F1 or click the help icon ( ) when any logic block. viewing -- a Dialog about Details Box ) when F1 or click the help icon ( Press viewing box. any dialog . Searching for string of text the PDF and search -- Open . -- Searching for single word Open the PDF and search -- Tree Information Selection System Press ) to F1 or click the help icon ( help system the online open . Information Sequencer Global -- ) when F1 or click the help icon ( Press any page Sequencer viewing of the Global Configuration Wizard. Tool online has the following search options available in the toolbar: The Controller help the Click in the toolbar Contents: the Table of Contents and browse through the tree. Click Contents • to display signs to expand and collapse the contents. plus and minus Index: Click Index in the toolbar to display an alphabetical list of index entries. For example, • you click when Process , the Process ID Predefined Parameters topic appears in the right pane. IDs Search: This search Search in the toolbar to search the content. • does not support Boolean logic and is Click where A multiple search finds instances keyword both keywords appear in the same help not case-sensitive. topic, including when keywords appear together . For example, if you search for Process ID , the results include instances where and ID appear on the same page as well as instances of Process ID . When searching Process of text, we recommend that you search for a string the PDF. help, F1 provides you instant access to a help topic when you press context-sensitive The tool supports which the tool. anywhere within The Controller Tool PDF has the following search options: Table of Contents: Click any heading within the table of contents • within the PDF. In the to go to that section tree, click the plus and minus to expand and collapse the contents. signs Index: within a list of alphabetical index entries and click any entry to go to that topic • the PDF. For Browse to the example, Process IDs , the PDF opens you click Process ID Predefined Parameters section. when • Find/Advanced Search: Use the Find and Advanced Search options within Adobe Reader to search the PDF with multiple keywords. Search provide options to search based on whole words only Both Find and Advanced search and case-sensitive 1, for example, if you perform a case-sensitive In Figure for Process ID , keywords. the results include Process ID but do not include process id . When you use the Find option, the PDF finds the next instance the keyword or phrase appears. You can then continue to find the next or previous instance where of the keyword or phrase using the right or left arrows. This search does not support Boolean logic. When you search use the Advanced the results appear populated in a separate Search, window . 26 Controller Tool Help: Using the Help System

27 Figure 2: Multiple in Online Help Example Word Search Help Context-Sensitive in multiple ways within the tool. Select help functions of the user interface, such as Context-sensitive a component logic block, or dialog box, and press F1 to display a module, component. For example, the help topic for that selected if you select Generation Tower Start Determination the State and press F1, the Tower Start Determination module help topic appears in a separate window . When viewing a dialog box, you can also click the help icon to display the help in a separate window . working within the System When Wizard, press F1 or click the Help icon ( ) to display application Selection information in the right pane. The upper-right pane includes application help content. The lower-right pane shows within the relationship the node selected in the left pane and other nodes between the tree. See the following figure. 27 Controller Tool Help: Using the Help System

28 Figure 3: Return Differential Example Water Temperature Selections Affecting lists nodes that affect the node you currently have selected and the current status The table For example, node the Return Water Temp Differential nodes. in the Type of Chiller Sequencing of these if you select of the tree, the Affecting Return Water Temp Differential lists Variable Speed Pump with a status section Selections that if Variable Speed Pump is selected, then Return Water Temp Differential of Allow. This means is no longer selectable. you select Variable Speed Pump while Return Water Temp Differential is selected, the Type of When Sequencing the Return changes to Chiller Load because Chiller Water Temp Differential option is no longer option valid. that may be unavailable Affected by table lists nodes The or available based upon the current node Selections selection. For example, if you select the Return Water Temp Differential node, the Selections Affected by Return Water Temp Differential section Return Temperature and Primary Supply Temperature with a status lists Primary . This Disallow means that if you select the Return Water Temp Differential node, the control logic of Disallow status under Chiller Options for Primary Return selections and Primary Supply Temperature become Temperature unavailable. section of the right pane, the In the lowest that may be laid down table lists modules that may be created Modules based upon the current node selections. Some module names appear as links, which, when clicked, open a separate help window that provides information on that module or module category . For example, if you select the to a topic Chiller Load node, the Load Filter Module appears in the table. When you click Load Filter Module, the help topic for Load Filter appears in a separate window . 28 Controller Tool Help: Using the Help System

29 Figure Filter Module Example 4: Load When working with the Global Sequencer Wizard, press F1 or click the Help icon ( ) to display information for each page of the Global Sequencer Configuration Wizard. 29 Controller Tool Help: Using the Help System

30 User Interface to configure, simulate, devices, such as Field Controllers, I/O Modules, and VAV This tool is used and commission in three Box Controllers. , Simulation , and Commissioning . modes: The tool operates Configuration you are viewing using the UI of the tool when one of the standard perspectives This section describes an application View. Components of the UI can vary depending on your view and if interfaces)—Classic (user View and Simple a customized perspective, but the functionality of these components you have configured is the same. on perspectives, Perspectives . For information see you can do in these , and see the Configuring a System , Simulating a System on the tasks For information views, a System sections. Commissioning tasks in the tool, see the Before Started section for guidance. performing Getting User Interface Concepts System is represented by the mechanical and the logic needed to control that equipment, In the tool, a system equipment definition. Selection Wizard describes the make-up of a mechanical system of hardware The System independent of logic components that work together to control to aid you in creating system. See System the group the mechanical and Configurations in the Configuring a System section. Types Application An application of the components that make up the control logic of a system, including modules, logic is a collection blocks, logic, and hardware definition. For information on the types of applications you can create, see the custom section. Applications Application File (CAF) Controller Application File (CAF) A Controller contains all the logic components needed to represent a system. is a file which The tool prompts you to save a controller application file for each system you create. Saving this file allows you to access it again changes or to use it for additional systems. later to make location to save Application File is C:\Users\ The default a Controller characters characters saving use certain Application File. Invalid when include: You cannot a Controller : * ? " < > | / \ Modules is a component made up of logic blocks used to create portions of the overall control logic of a system. A module Module inputs to influence the state or values of outputs. You can view and edit modules highlighted in are used changes and the effect of changes the default configuration tan, but do not make on the until you understand see outputs. connected values used in a module, To view or change Details Configuration in the Configuring default a System section. To view or change connections to a module, see Configuration in the Configuring a System section. Logic Blocks is a component to construct the control logic of a system. You can view and work with logic blocks A logic block used the Logic Tab or by using using menu of a module. Logic block inputs influence the state or values of the right-click outputs. You can view and edit logic contained within modules highlighted in tan, but do not make changes until you understand logic and you consider the effect of changes on the connected outputs. To view or change the default default values used in a block, see Details Configuration in the Configuring a System section. See the Logic section for information on logic blocks. 30 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

31 User Interface differs depending on the perspective configured. By default, the tool includes two The user interface you have View and Simple customized perspectives—Classic perspectives for your standard View. You can also create Perspectives . application. See Classic View View perspective is built into the tool and always available. When you first open The Classic the tool an application, defaults perspective of the application's system configuration. The following figure shows the Classic to the last used of the user interface. The table describes the components. View perspective you run a simulation When mode, changing values are highlighted by a color. or view live data in the commissioning Colored highlighting is determined by the frequency that the value changes. As poll cycles return consistent values, to expose the highlight brings attention to changes throughout the application data system away. This feature fades potential relationships between values and modules and assist in troubleshooting. Note: Temporary color highlights appear in three color stages (blue, yellow , and red). After the third stage (red) on has been all subsequent consecutive changes continue to display red. For more information reached, status color, see Table 9 . 31 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

32 Figure 5: Classic View Perspective User Interface Screen 32 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

33 Table 4: Classic View Perspective Interface Screen Details User Screen Description Area Callout Menu Bar 1. in the tool. See the section. available the menus Menu Includes Bar between of operation in the tool. The mode the modes 2. working Toolbar Button Mode Use to switch while are: buttons • Configuration • Simulation • Commissioning section See the and buttons. on the modes for information Modes it to a different area of If desired, you can undock the Mode button toolbar and move the screen. specific in the tool. The operation tasks and buttons are: Operation 3. Buttons tasks Use to perform • System Select • Hardware Define • Sideloop See the , and Define Hardware sections for descriptions of Select System , Sideloop the operations. and Logic Control tabs. 4. Panel Application the Application To make title bar. double-click a full screen, panel the Application panel between the Control tab (system overview) and Logic tab. See the 5. Tabs Control Use to navigate and Logic Tab Logic and Tab Control . or maximize panel or the Features panel. Use to minimize the Applications 6. Minimize and Maximize Buttons or the Features Note: You can also minimize or maximize the Applications panel the title bar. by double-clicking panel Opens the Help system. Help Button 7. Indicates the current connection type, connection status, current mode, perspective 8. Bar - Application Status mode. Status section. release and current name, See the Bar name, capacity assignment indicator , system the system indicator , Indicates hardware 9. Bar - System Status section. Bar Status link. See the and system information 10. Features Panel Panel tabs: the following Features Use to view and work with key data. The contains • ) Parameters tab (see Parameters • Connections ) Connections tab (see • Tables ) State Tables tab (see State • ) Display tab (see Display • ) Advanced tab (see Advanced Data • BACnet tab (see ) BACnet Exposed ® Exposed double-click panel title bar. a full screen, panel the Features the Features To make bars in all views Slider and have arrows allowing you to expand the The slider 11. Bars are active view. Click the arrows to show and hide the panels. If panels to achieve the desired clicking bar and drag it to the desired location, you click the slider the arrows returns bar. Clicking a second time the slider you moved the view to the location the arrows Many , but not all, sliders maintain their location between shows/hides the entire panel. sessions. 33 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

34 Table 4: Classic View Perspective Interface Screen Details User Screen Callout Area Description tab or Logic tab contents settings. See the following sections for more 12. View Workspace Classic Control information in Tab Shown (Control and details: ) 5 Figure • View Workspace Classic • Tab Screen Control and Tab Control • and Tab Logic Logic Tab Screen or System link format. in a clickable CAF Name If you click the name link, the 13. Name Name dialog Information System box appears. Simple View The Simple View perspective is built into the tool and always available. When you run a simulation or view live data in the commissioning mode, changing values are highlighted by a color. Colored highlighting by the frequency that the value changes. As poll cycles return consistent values, is determined exposes fades brings the highlight to changes throughout the application data system, away. This feature attention potential relationships between values and modules, and assists in troubleshooting. Note: Temporary color highlights appear in three color stages (blue, yellow , and red). After the third stage (red) is on status reached consecutive changes continue to display red. For more information all subsequent color, see Table 9 . 34 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

35 The following figure the Simple View perspective of the user interface. The table describes the components. shows 6: Simple User Interface Screen Figure View Perspective View Perspective User Interface Screen Details Table 5: Simple Screen Area Callout Description Menu Bar 1. the menus available in the tool. See the Includes Menu Bar section. Use to switch between the modes of operation while 2. Toolbar Button Mode are: buttons in the tool. The mode working • Configuration • Simulation • Commissioning See the Modes section for information on the modes and buttons. toolbar and If desired, you can undock the Mode button area of the screen. it to a different move 35 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

36 Table 5: Simple Details User Screen View Perspective Interface Description Screen Area Callout in the tool. The operation Operation 3. Buttons Use to perform specific tasks tasks and buttons are: • System Select • Define Hardware • Sideloop , and Define Hardware See the Select System , Sideloop of the operations. for descriptions sections Selection Information Application Tabs and System 4. Navigation tabs. System Selection Information See the Application Tab and sections. Tab 5. Edit Button Use to edit parameters. the Help system. Help Button 6. Opens Use to view and edit outputs. 7. Outputs Table Inputs Table 8. Use to view and edit inputs. and parameters. Parameters Table 9. List of modules the hardware 10. indicator , system Bar - System Status assignment Indicates link. See the information indicator capacity , and system Status Bar section. Bar - Application Indicates type, connection status, 11. connection Status the current name, release and current current mode, perspective section. Status See the mode. Bar or System Name in a clickable link format. CAF Name 12. Name If Information dialog link, the System you click the name box appears Perspectives A perspective is a representation of the entire UI related to displaying data of an application, which includes all perspectives components button, and status bars. You can build customized for menu, using a variety of except containers and widgets. Perspectives allow a simple view of an application without the complexity of the application shown by default. an Perspectives for customization of the UI to enable the user to more easily commission or understand also allow application. See Perspectives . 36 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

37 Menu Bar bar includes The menu the following options: Table 6: Menu Bar Options Keyboard Option Description Menu Shortcut Ctrl + N New File a System Opens the New System dialog box. See the Configuring section. the Open dialog box to select an existing CAF to use. Opens Open Ctrl + O in the following default The Controller Application File is found location: C:\Users\ the open be in Configuration mode to close Ctrl + F4 Close Closes CAF. You must a CAF. the current system as a CAF. If you have not already Saves Save Ctrl + S saved the Save box. the system, the tool opens dialog include: characters Invalid for CAF file names : * ? " < > | / \ Opens the Save dialog box to allow you to save the system as a As Save name. a different CAF using characters Invalid include: : * ? " < > | / \ Ctrl + P Print Opens dialog box to print a summary Summary the Report Options CAF in PDF format. of the open a recently viewed CAF. This menu holds up to ten recent Files Opens through Recent Ctrl-0 Ctrl-9 files. the software. Closes Exit any resized panels to default Restores F7 Reset Layout View size. Restores view to one monitor . F8 Reset to Default Screen the view across multiple monitors. F9 Arrange Multiple Arranges Screens Saves any edits made to the perspective layout (custom perspectives Perspective F10 Save only). Layout Discards any edits and restores perspective to the last saved version F11 Restore Perspective (custom perspectives only). Layout 37 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

38 Table 6: Menu Bar Options Description Option Keyboard Menu Shortcut Box Flow Test Tools See the Test Overview Test feature. Box Flow Opens the Box Flow section. Configuration Screen. Wireless Opens the Wireless > ZFR Channel > ZFR Channel Configuration Opens the Upgrade ZFR Coordinator wizard. Wireless > Upgrade ZFR Coordinators Single ZFR Coordinator wizard. Opens > Upgrade the Upgrade Wireless ZFR Single Coordinators the Trunk Utilities to Controller - Transfer Opens > Trunk Utilities CAF and Attributes Transfer CAF and with the Trunk Utilities Working See the wizard. section. Attributes to Controller Trunk Utilities - Transfer to Multiple Controllers the Trunk Utilities CAFs > Opens Transfer CAFs to . See the Working with the Trunk Utilities section. wizard Controllers Multiple Radio Firmware wizard. - Upgrade Opens > the Trunk Utilities Trunk Utilities See the Radio Upgrade section. with the Trunk Utilities Working Firmware - Read/W rite Attributes Trunk Utilities wizard. See Opens the Trunk Utilities > Online rite Attributes Read/W section. Working the with the Trunk Utilities Online the Trunk Utilities - Manage Attribute Templates wizard. See Trunk Utilities > Opens Manage Attribute section. Working with the Trunk Utilities the Templates the Trunk Utilities - Transfer Controller CAFs to Computer Opens Trunk Utilities > Transfer Controller section. wizard. See the Working with the Trunk Utilities CAFs to Compute r the Trunk Utilities Opens wizard. See - Upgrade Controller > Software Trunk Utilities Upgrade Controller with the Trunk Utilities Working the section. Software Operations Online Commissioning mode, opens the Online Operations dialog in When to which you are box to display information from the controller Commissioning currently section. connected. See the a System mode, the Online Operations Wizard Configuration opens When in or display to send from one or more certain commands information Configuring a System section. on a field bus. See the controllers Opens the Job Information dialog box to enter information specific Job Information job and the open CAF. to the current the System dialog box to upgrade the open CAF to Opens Upgrade Upgrade System Upgrading System Files section. version. the latest See the Bulk CAF Upgrade the Bulk CAF Upgrade See the Upgrading Opens screen. Utility Utility System Files section. the CPO 10 Parameter Value Calculator (PVC). The CPO CPO 10 Parameter Opens calculates the performance Value Calculator 10 Parameter Value Calculator Plant Optimization 10) systems for parameters of Central 10 (CPO of the tool. modules use in control 38 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

39 Table 6: Menu Bar Options Option Menu Description Keyboard Shortcut To from the device Ctrl + U Transfer an application wizard Transfer to transfer Opens the Transfer to the computer . Computer (Upload) transfer an application from the computer Ctrl + W Transfer to Device wizard the Transfer Opens ) (Download to the device. Help system. Topics Help F1 Opens the online Opens the Help PDF. Topics PDF Tool dialog box displaying the tool version, Tool About Opens the About Field tool library version, database version and version, product Controller See the About Tool Information patch information, and file version. section. Settings includes options: menu the following The Settings Table 7: Settings Menu Options Description Option UI in the Classic is only available when an application is open. Perspective > Classic View View. This menu option View. This menu option is only available when an application is open. Perspective > Simple View UI in the Simple the Perspective dialog box, which enables you to create and edit perspectives. Perspective Management Management Opens Modes to use a different Release Mode for opening and creating new CAFs. Switches Release the application see the Release Modes section. For more information, Opens the Localization Localization screen. the Naming and Signal and Signal Opens screen. Naming Selection System Selection the System Opens screen. Rate Rate dialog box, which allows you to change the refresh rate of Opens the Adjust Adjust Refresh Refresh Commissioning or Simulation sessions. Hides when selected. Hide Last Value Modules the Last Value modules block Hide flags. Hides Warning Flags warning summary in a dialog box. Use Involvement Dialog Involvement Opens the Break Conditions dialog box. This menu option is available in simulation and Break Simulation mode. configuration Conditions Modes . The UI includes modes: Configuration , Simulation , and The tool operates in three buttons for moving Commissioning between the modes: Configure, Simulate, and Commission. See the Configuration , Simulation , and Commissioning sections for descriptions of the modes. Also, see the Changing Modes section. For information on Release Modes, see Release Modes . 39 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

40 Configuration The Configuration is the default mode. When you add or select a system, it opens the system in Configuration mode This mode allows and edit a system. Configuration tasks include selecting a system, modifying mode. you to design custom logic (as necessary), tasks to set up a system. See the Configuring a System parameters, creating and other for details. section to switch when you need acts as a transitional from Simulation to Commissioning The Configuration mode mode See the Changing Modes section. mode and vice versa. Modes to Back Simulation you to set the Simulation the Simulation dialog box appears allowing mode, Speed (up you enter Simulation When real time) and the startup values for the simulation session. The settings you select are saved and to 10 times [10x] in the Simulation dialog box the next time you enter Simulation mode. Simulation mode appear you to see allows your system it were in Commissioning mode. Simulation mode allows you to test your system and make as though before transferring . See the Simulating a System section for information on how to simulate adjustments it to a device your system. When mode, you can troubleshoot problems as they occur . When you start Simulation, the you use Simulation Debugging dialog box appears, which allows you to add break conditions and control debugging Simulation functionality with command The command buttons allow you to pause the simulation (Break), start the simulation after buttons. the control (Go), the control a break to execute once (Single Step), or command command sequence to sequence advance 1 second. Back to Modes Commissioning Commissioning mode you to connect to a device and view actual data from that device. You can use this allows to monitor your device COVs, and Polarity in addition to other Parameter and Detail changes. mode and set Offsets, the Min Out and Max Out values to fine tune the range you can change of a 2 to 10 VDC For example, of an Output In addition, valve. mode has a balancing feature for VAV applications to easily proportional the Commissioning VAV boxes and set flow constants in one location. See the Commissioning autocalibrate section. a System Back Modes to Modes Release two ways to change Release modes. See Changing Release Modes and Selecting a System CCT provides for further information. you first install the controller tool application, When to select one of the various Release mode's you are prompted databases. The differences between Release modes include available objects, properties, signal types, feature functionality , and device these in mind when determining which Release mode database to work compatibility—keep Release Enhancements and Compatibility for more information. in. See Most Note: are only compatible with a limited set of Release modes, determined by the field controller field controllers packages installed. To work with a given field controller you must switch a specific Release mode that supports the field controller package opening or creating a CAF. before release The current of your application is shown both in the status bar and the application title bar. Unique mode preferences for system selection, common object naming, and default controllers are preserved when changing between Release modes. Corresponding Firmware 40 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

41 Release modes to specific device family firmware releases. For example, the 10.4 / Firmware 8.0 Release correspond corresponds to the firmware released with Metasys 10.0. Mode and controllers Notes: are allowed mode is newer than the Release mode that the CAF was if your current Release • CAF upgrades family as the current Release mode. device created in, and if the CAF is in the same Release modes • CAFs and commissioned, but some attributes may not display as from older can be opened expected. users to switch to the matching Release tool prompts (required for editing or upgrading) or • The controller mode read-only . Editing CAFs is restricted to changing the default value property on your objects, if you do to open the CAF to the current not upgrade mode. Release and Release Mode Simulation Compatibility for the your CAF to the current mode to simulate, or switch to the matching Upgrade mode Release Note: Release CAF to simulate. Release Modes and Software Tool Release Functionality tool's release version is independent from the CAF's The software mode—allowing you to switch between Release Release without losing software tool functionality . All software UI features remain accessible to you for the modes in. For example, tool no matter Release mode you work what if you are working in Release Mode 10.2 / current Firmware 6.2 you will have the same features. See also Changing Modes . Release Operations The UI has the following Select System, Define Hardware, and Sideloop. See the Select System , buttons: operation , Define Hardware sections for descriptions of the operations. Sideloop and Select System System operation opens the System The Select Wizard to select, review , and change the options for a Selection system. topics in the Configuring a System section for details on the wizard and how to use it: See the following • System Selection Wizard • Selecting a System (Creating a New System) Also, see Rerunning System Selection in the Upgrading System Files section for guidelines on viewing and modifying system selection. to Back Operations Sideloop operation opens the System Selection Wizard for creating a sideloop. See the The Sideloop a Sideloop Creating and Sideloop Applications sections for more information. Back to Operations Define Hardware screen The Define opens the Hardware Definition operation to define the hardware and manage packages Hardware for your system. See the Defining Hardware section for details. Back to Operations 41 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

42 Commissioning-Only Software Commissioning mode of the software is available for individuals who only perform commissioning A only version balancing tasks software allows you to focus on the commissioning contractors). (for example, The Commissioning two modes. without distracted by the tasks done in the other to perform For example, you can you need tasks being and commission devices, but you cannot issue configuration changes, define hardware, transfer commands make , transfer or simulate devices. You can print the system, use the Test Mode, a CAF to a computer a CAF to a device, selections, definitions, controller information, connections, and item details. The and view system hardware and Simulation Configuration are disabled in the Commissioning software. modes Classic View Workspace contains the Control tabs. You can view an overview of a system using the Control tab, This workspace and Logic or individual modules using the Logic tab, or view additional system details view the logic of the entire application the System information link on the status bar. See the Control Tab and using Tab sections for more information. Logic Control Tab 5 design. the Control tab in the workspace. The Control tab allows you to view and modify your system Figure shows components to provide information about your system. The control components in this view This view displays correspond to the device’ s inputs, logic, and outputs, which flow from the left side of the workspace to the right. The Control tab is divided relating to the main items that make up a system (for example, Network Inputs into categories from the items Outputs). in these sections are derived listed selected for your system in the and Network The items Selection Wizard. For information on this wizard, see the System Selection Wizard in the Configuring a System section. System on the mode in which the tool is operating, you are able to perform certain tasks using the Control tab. Depending the tasks on the modes, Modes section. The following table describes For information you can perform using see the the Control tab in the different modes. Table 8: Control Tab Tasks Available in Different Modes Mode Task Simulation Configuration Commissioning X View Logic X X X Logic Modify X Add Modules X Modules Rename X X Modify a Module’ X in s Details the Details Dialog Box X Delete Modules 1 Send a Command X X Send a Hardware X Command X Modify Input and Output Signals X Use the Debugging Functionality X X Show Involvement X 1 Only available in Test Mode. 42 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

43 Control Tab Module Categories categories are the sections tab representing the main items that make up a system (for The module of the Control Inputs Outputs sections). The modules in the sections are automatically added the Network example, and Network selected for your system in the System Selection Wizard. For information on this wizard, see based on the items Selection in the System Configuring a System section. the Wizard sections tab are: category The module in the Control • Network Inputs • Inputs • Miscellaneous (Inputs) • Setpoint/Miscellaneous • Generation State • Output Control • Network Outputs • Outputs • (Outputs) Miscellaneous 5 for the location See categories on the UI. Figure of these Inputs Network Inputs category appears in the Control tab ( Figure 5 ). This section lists the network The Network defined for inputs the system. inputs are typically used to read and write values to and from a supervisory device over the Network it uses network. input is not mapped to a supervisory device, a network its default value. During Simulation When and Commissioning modes, a network input may be commanded. During Simulation modes, the Network Input category displays a second row of text. This row and Commissioning the Network Input value. provides present device sensor an Outdoor Air Temperature use is that a supervisory from one device and writes reads An example input of other devices. to the network its value inputs connect into other modules Network Table. or the State See Input Modules for information on network input modules. Also, see Peer-to-Peer Network in Communication the Configuring a System section for information on peer-to-peer communication in the tool. Back to Control Tab Module Categories Inputs The Inputs appears in the Control tab. This section lists the inputs defined for the system. An input defines category to the actual hardware in a system. An input can represent a physical sensor in the system or an input an interface associated with a sensor . Inputs get data directly from hardware input points of a device. a second During modes, the Input category displays and commissioning row of text. This row provides simulation the Input present value. See Input Modules for information. Back to Control Tab Module Categories 43 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

44 Miscellaneous (Inputs) category appears tab below the Inputs category ( Figure 5 ). These modules This module on the left side of the Control monitoring. A miscellaneous reads the current Present Value and Priority of PAO, AO, are used for override input and BO objects. monitoring is not available during Simulation mode. Note: Override Input Modules for information. See Miscellaneous Control Tab Module Categories Back to Setpoint/Miscellaneous category in the Control tab ( Figure 5 ). This section lists the setpoint The Setpoint/Miscellaneous and appears defined for the system. A setpoint or miscellaneous module contains logic that calculates a miscellaneous modules or provides other calculations for a system. This section lists modules setpoint miscellaneous calculations for other required by a system. simulation and commissioning the Setpoint/Miscellaneous category displays a second row of text. During modes, present or present state. the key output value This row provides Modules for information. See Setpoint/Miscellaneous Control Tab Module Categories to Back State Generation Generation category appears in the Control tab ( The State 5 ). This section lists the state generators defined Figure for the system. generators are listed according to priority , where the state generators appearing at the top The state This order have than those listed below them. priority corresponds to the order in a State Selection Table a higher when viewing the State Tables. A state generation module calculates a state that is prioritized by the State Table, which calculates to be controlled by an Output Controller . a mode simulation and commissioning the State Generation category displays a second row of text. This row During modes, the key output present or present state. provides value Generation Modules for information. See State to Control Tab Module Categories Back Control Output Control defined appears in the Control tab ( Figure 5 ). This section lists the output controllers The Output category logic associated An output module defines the specific control with each state, as determined by the for the system. State Tables’ mode. For example, if the State Tables determine that the Proportional Box Heating Control output controller should Control mode, the Proportional Box Heating Control output controller defines the PID control be in in this state. logic to use while simulation and commissioning modes, the Output Control category displays a third row of text. This row During the status from the state generator that is in control and the name of the State Generator module that is provides generating the state. The status is shown in parentheses followed by the text Generated by: and the name of the State module. For example, (Satisfied) Generated by: Zone Temperature Determination . Generator See Output Control Modules for information. Back to Control Tab Module Categories 44 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

45 Network Outputs Outputs category in the Control tab ( Figure 5 ). This section lists the network outputs defined The Network appears output read from a supervisory acts as a network variable A network device. When a network for the system. module is not mapped device, it uses its default value. During Simulation and Commissioning modes, output to a supervisory output may be commanded. Network outputs connect from other modules a network Table. or the State During and Commissioning modes, the Network Outputs category displays a second row of text. This Simulation the Network present value. row provides Outputs Network Output Modules for information. Also, see Peer-to-Peer Communication See Configuring a System in the for information communication in the tool. on peer-to-peer Back Control Tab Module Categories to Outputs The outputs category appears in the Control tab ( Figure 5 ). This section lists the outputs defined for the system. An output defines to the actual hardware in a system. An output can represent a physical hardware point an interface or a point with an output. Outputs send data to hardware output points of a device. in the system associated simulation and commissioning modes, the Output category displays During row of text. This row provides a second the Output value. present Output for information. See Modules to Back Tab Module Categories Control Miscellaneous (Outputs) This module category appears on the right side of the Control tab below the Outputs category ( Figure 5 ). A miscellaneous output to the Stroke Time and Min Pulse of PAO objects. writes Miscellaneous Output See for information. Modules Back to Control Tab Module Categories Control Tab Application Example Show The following shows how modules in the Control View interact (using figure Involvement in Simulation mode). 45 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

46 Figure 7: Fan Coil Application (Show Involvement) Example shows a Fan Coil application. on the network inputs and input readings in this example, the This example Based have that should that the highest priority state generator Tables be in Control is Occupied Zone State determined v51, which is set to the Cooling state. As a result, the Proportional Cooling Control v51 output Sequencing (FC/AHU) is set to Control, control modulates the cooling valve open (CLG-O output). which The following and text further explain the interaction between the cooling modules. drawing 8: Fan Coil Application (Cooling Interaction) Figure Example in this example are as follows: The interactions network • The FLUSHPOS provides an input to the Proportional Cooling Control v51 output control. input • The ZN-SP input provides a Hardware Setpoint input to the ZN-T Setpoint Determination module. • The ZN-T input input to the following modules: provides Temperature to the Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC/AHU) v51 state generator - Zone input Variable input to the Proportional - Process Control output module Cooling • The ZN-T Setpoint Determination module provides input to the following modules: - Cooling Setpoint input to the Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC/AHU) v51 state generator - Setpoint to the Proportional Cooling Control v51 output control input • The Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC/AHU) v51 state generator provides the ZNT-ST ATE input to the State Tables. 46 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

47 • The State Tables the Mode input to the Proportional Cooling Control v51 output control. provide Cooling Control control provides the Percent Cmd output to the CLG-O output. • The Proportional v51 output input graphic in the State Generation section provide how the modules to the State Tables and The following shows configuration within the State Tables how the state input to the modules in the Output Control section. The provides individual in the State Tables are the State Generators and the column headings are the Output Controllers. tables State Tables section. See the Figure 9: Fan Coil Application Example (State Tables) In this example, the Water System Flush Pass Through has the highest priority and Fan Determination has the lowest. When Flush Pass Through state is set to False, and the cells have an X, which means the Water System change and the next table is evaluated. no behavior occurs Reset state is False, the cells are set for no behavior changes, and the next table If the PID Tuning If is evaluated. the PID Tuning Reset state is True, then the Mode is set to Hold for the Proportional Cooling Control v51 and Proportional Heating Control v51. When Determination state is set to Shutdown, then the Mode is set to Off for the Proportional Cooling the Unit Enable Control v51, Proportional Heating Control v51, and Single Speed Fan Control. When the Unit Enable Determination occurs state the cells have an X, which means no behavior change is set to Enable, and the next table is evaluated. 47 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

48 When the Heating is False, no behavior changes occur , and the next table is evaluated. When set Override Check Heating Control to True, then the Mode is set to Hold for Proportional v51. is evaluated. Check no behavior Override occur , and the next table is False, When set the Cooling When changes Cooling Control v51. to True, then the Mode is set to Hold for Proportional apply to the rest of the State Tables. The same principles Colors Tab Status and Icons Control colors and icons used in the Control tab of the UI. Table 9 lists the status Colors and Icons Tab Status Table 9: Control Description Appears in Status Mode Color a self-contained Indicates the system does not allow you to view the logic. All modes logic block for which ) ( White that contains logic that you can view and edit. You can use the right-click menu Indicates a module All modes to Tan ( ) edit or view logic for this type of module. the involvement of other modules to the selected Output module. All modes Magenta Shows ) ( mode, indicates when the software value does not match the hardware value of the Orange In Commissioning Commissioning inputs the tool displays (does not apply to network two values or network mode, item. mode In Commissioning ( ) outputs): units. • The first value is the software value, including • The second value, including units. value is the hardware than that of the control higher at a priority is commanded if the object may be different two values These is offline (for example, an I/O Module logic or if the device that is offline). module. All modes Deep Blue the selected Indicates Border ( ) a single value change has occurred in the device's inputs, outputs, or modules. Configuration Indicates Temporary 3 and Simulation ( ) Blue modes a second consecutive value change has occurred for the device's inputs, outputs, or modules. Configuration Temporary Indicates 3 and Simulation Yellow modes ( ) a third consecutive value change Temporary for the device's inputs, outputs, or modules. Indicates Configuration has occurred 3 reached, all subsequent consecutive changes continue to display Note: After the third stage and Simulation has been ( ) Red modes red. an issue or possible misconfiguration with the block. (Yellow Indicates All modes Triangle) . See Block Flags the icon is appearing. provides over the block a tooltip with the reason Hovering a module that has been modified All modes (Green Identifies by a user. 2 Triangle) this icon appears directly in Configuration were made mode, If the changes to the left of the module made in Simulation or Commissioning mode, the green triangle name (first row). If the changes were Element appears row). directly to the left of the module’ s Default value (second the user-modified (tan blocks). that support on modules This icon only appears Note: attribute 2 modules cannot be upgraded. User-modified 48 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

49 Table 9: Control Tab Status and Icons Colors Appears in Status Description Color Mode defined. All modes a module Identifies that has an alarm (Alarm) that has a schedule All modes a module Identifies defined. (Schedule) defined. All modes a module Identifies that has a trend (Trend) or output is assigned to a Network Sensor (Network Duct Sensors, Identifies that the input All modes Network or Network Zone Sensors). Sensors, CO (Network 2 1 Sensor) or output is assigned to a wireless sensor Identifies Ethernet signal. All modes that the input and has a wireless (Wireless Ethernet Sensor) that the input or output is assigned to an Eaton Identifies Speed Drive (also serves a Variable All modes Variable (VSD) Frequency Drive [VFD]). if the input or output connections. All modes (Peer to Identifies is set up for peer-to-peer Peer) All modes Identifies to a Field Controller . or output (Field that the input is assigned 1 Controller) that the input or output is assigned to an I/O module. Identifies All modes (I/O 1 Module) and Port label information appears after the module name for assigned Inputs and Outputs. 1 Device conditions change the user-modified flag and prevent the module from being upgraded: new connections, new 2 The following blocks, deleted blocks, modified descendent activity , changes to block attributes (excluding BACnet Exposed, Default Element, Standard Name, Name, Exposed Ports List, and State Text). Description, User changes fades of refresh cycles as the value intensity stop. 3 Color over a series Flags Block displaying a yellow triangle ( ) indicate an issue or possible misconfiguration with the block. You can discover Blocks reason the specific over the yellow triangle icon and reading the tooltip that appears. flag by hovering for a block lists the reasons for a block flag: table The following Flag Icon Instances Table 10: Block Meaning Reason is in the State Generation column, but not connected The block Selection to the State is not connected Generator This State should only Tables to the State Selector . The State Generation column hold blocks that determine the active states of the Output A block that is not in the State column Controllers. Generation at the end of the is displayed Selector to the State connected is sorted in ascending order). list (when the column The block is a Network Input, but has no destination connections any destination not have does This block with no destination connections. A Network Input connections of the application, but it is taking does not affect the behavior . memory up object 49 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

50 Table 10: Block Flag Icon Instances Reason Meaning is a Network Output, not have does This block connections The block connections. but has no source any source is not affected connections with no source Output A Network of the application, by the behavior up object but it is taking . memory is an activity that either has no input and no output output and/or any exposed The block not have does This activity input ports ports, or has ports, but they are not exposed for connection. An by for connection exposed is not affected activity with no ports an affect on not have , and it does behavior application other up object behavior application memory , but it is taking . Menus (Control Right-Click Tab) lists the right-click menu table on the Control tab and indicates the mode and item in which The following options is available. Menu options appear in the right-click the menu when an item is selected. menu Table 11: Right-Click (Control Tab) Menus Control in Menu Option Appears Description View Section Mode NI=Network Control Inputs OC=Output I=Inputs Outputs NO=Network MI=Miscellaneous Inputs O=Outputs MO=Miscellaneous S/M=Setpoint/Miscellaneous Outputs SG=State Generation MO O NO OC SG S/M MI I NI Adds a new module or X X X X X X X X X Configuration New (Header Only) point. Simulation Commissioning the module. X X X X X X X X X Configuration Delete (Delete Removes key) Simulation Commissioning X the name (F2 key) X X X X Changes X of the X X Configuration Rename X module. Simulation Commissioning Details dialog box to view View Details Configuration X X X X X X X X X of the selected the details X X X X X X X X X Simulation module. X X X X X X X X X Commissioning Configuration Opens Explorer View FSM the FSM X Explorer Explorer FSM See wizard. X Simulation for more information. X Commissioning 50 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

51 Table 11: Right-Click (Control Menus Tab) View Section in Menu Option Description Appears Control Mode Inputs OC=Output Control NI=Network I=Inputs Outputs NO=Network MI=Miscellaneous O=Outputs Inputs S/M=Setpoint/Miscellaneous MO=Miscellaneous Outputs Generation SG=State S/M OC SG MO MI I NI NO O the New Module Insert Logic Opens Configuration X X X 1 box for the dialog Selection (Insert key) Simulation This menu module. selected Commissioning option is available only the module has logic when or that can be viewed (indicated modified by a tan background). 1 the Logic Configuration X X X Opens View for View Logic This the selected module. X Simulation X X is available option menu X X Commissioning X only when the module has logic that can be viewed or modified (indicated by a tan background). 1 Opens X X Configuration X Module the Save Module Export box. This menu dialog Simulation only is available option Commissioning the module when has logic or that can be viewed by a tan (indicated modified Importing See background). . a Module and Exporting Opens the Default Configuration X X X Default Element Select 1 box. This Selection dialog Element Simulation is available option menu Commissioning the module has only when or logic that can be viewed by a tan modified (indicated Default See background). . Element Selection Opens Configuration Commands the Commands dialog box to command Simulation X X X X X X X X X items. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Commissioning X X X X X X X X X Opens the Hardware Hardware Configuration box to Commands Commands dialog Simulation to the a command issue X X X X Commissioning item. selected 51 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

52 Table 11: Right-Click Menus (Control Tab) View Section Menu Option in Control Description Appears Mode Inputs OC=Output NI=Network Control I=Inputs NO=Network Outputs MI=Miscellaneous Inputs O=Outputs S/M=Setpoint/Miscellaneous MO=Miscellaneous Outputs SG=State Generation O NO OC SG S/M MI I NI MO Modify the signal Use to change Signal Configuration X X X X type of Inputs and Outputs Simulation mode. in Configuration Commissioning X Opens Show Configuration X the Show Involvement dialog box that Involvement X X Simulation connected shows modules X X Commissioning highlighting. in magenta 1 Only available containing logic that can be viewed or modified indicated by a tan background). See the Control for modules Colors and Icons section. Tab Status 2 Only available in Test Mode. Logic Tab The Logic tab allows you to view and modify the control logic used in your system. This view displays the logic blocks visually information about your system. Depending on the mode in which the tool is operating, you are to provide able to perform certain tasks in the Logic tab. For information on the modes, see the Modes section. and the table The following shows the Logic tab in the Classic View workspace, figure describes the components. 52 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

53 Figure 10: Logic Tab View Screen Details Table 12: Logic Description Screen Area Callout you can perform in the Logic View. Toolbar 1 Icons for the actions you to view the logic for the entire application, a tree view that allows Contains 2 Tree Activities Activities Tree section. or select to view the logic of an individual module. See the the Application tree. called tree was previously The Activities Logic Note: Control of the blocks to drag and drop into the logic diagram Contains 3 Palette Block a tree view (folders) See the Control Block Palette and Launch and the Launch Wizard search feature. palette when viewing logic not appear Block The Control sections. Wizard does of the Activities tree). of the entire application (Control View Connections option 4 Diagram Logic of the selected module’ s logic. See the Logic Displays a graphical representation on the diagram for information section Diagram and its components. Features Panel 5 section for information on this panel. See the Features Panel 53 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

54 Table 13: Logic Tab Tasks Modes Available in Different Mode Task Commissioning Simulation Configuration View Logic X X X Use the Launch Wizard X X Add Blocks X Rename Blocks Modify Blocks and Their X X X Dialog Details in the Details Box Delete X Blocks Blocks Connect X Align Blocks X X Show/Hide Connection Lines X Delete Connections Export a Module X 1 X Send a Command X Select Default Element X to test mode. 1 Applies (Logic Menus Tab) Right-Click describes the right-click menu options available in the Logic tab. The right-click menu The following table options in the Control View Connections view of the Activities tree. are not available Table 14: Right-Click Menus (Logic Tab) Menu Option Description Module Export it to the Custom folder in the Control Block Palette . Use the module logic by adding Exports custom modules. This option is available in the Configuration to share the export feature mode only. Selects a default The default element indicates the value element Element Default Select for the block/module. Simulation This option and is displayed in the Control View in modes. Commissioning only. mode in the for configuration available Configuration dialog box to view the details of the selected block (available in all modes). View Details Details additional block. View Logic (Insert key) logic for the selected Displays the New Module Selection Insert box for the selected module. This menu option is Opens Logic dialog the module has logic that can be viewed or modified (indicated by a available only when tan background). Opens dialog box to select input/output ports to show for connections in the Port Exposure > For Connection Ports Expose only). mode Configuration View ( the Logic Removes the connection lines in the Logic View and displays the hidden edge labels Hide Configuration only). ( mode Removes the hidden edge labels and shows the connection lines in the Logic View Unhide Configuration mode only). ( 54 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

55 Table 14: Right-Click Menus Tab) (Logic Menu Option Description dialog the name of the block. Rename (F2) Opens box to change the Rename right, left, center , top, or bottom when viewing logic. Use to align logic blocks Align the Clone dialog box, which allows you to duplicate Ports that are exposed Opens Clone Ports ports and not connected. the block from the system. To delete multiple blocks at once, press and hold the Removes key) (Delete Delete item, Ctrl the Delete menu item. each selecting key while then select and pastes blocks, including any connections, in one step. To duplicate Copies the selected (Ctrl-D) Duplicate press and hold the Ctrl multiple selecting each item, and then blocks at once, key while Duplicate menu item. the select Copies the selected block or blocks. To copy multiple blocks and their connections at once, (Ctrl-C) Copy Ctrl key while each item, and then select the Copy menu item. and hold the press selecting the copied blocks. (Ctrl-V) Pastes Paste Tree Activities Note: The Activities called the Application Logic tree. tree was previously tree appears at the top of the left panel in the logic view. This selection tree allows you to view the The Activities logic for the entire application, to view the logic of an individual module. or select application, second View Connections option (appears To view the logic of the entire in the list, just click the Control below folder). The logic of the entire application appears in the right panel of the logic view. The Control the Activities Block Palette does not appear when the Control View Connections option is selected. Note: By default, View Connections option is selected when you first click the Logic tab. the Control module, of the Activities the folders To view the logic of a particular tree (organized by module category) browse and click the desired The logic diagram of the module appears in the right panel and the Control Block module. Palette appears below the Activities tree in the left panel. Logic Diagram appears on the right side of the workspace ( The logic diagram 11 ). The logic diagram consists of logic blocks, Figure their inputs and outputs, and the connections between them. The following figure identifies the main components you may find in a logic diagram. 55 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

56 Figure 11: Logic (Example) Diagram lines between elements or hidden. When hidden, each connection has a hidden edge Connection may be visible and at each point, point. At the origination point the hidden edge label may contain label at the origination destination where indicates the connection number and the second indicates the number of two numbers, the first number For example, a hidden edge instances. of 5:7 means there are seven instances of connection number five. label Note: the label of a hidden edge. See Changing the Hidden Edge Label of a Connection in the You can change Configuring a System section. Element, Logic you can select one parameter/attribute For each block, which becomes the value that as the Default displays dynamic data in Simulation and Commissioning modes. In some instances and Commissioning mode, two values appear next to one another instead of one. in Simulation value in the state the value the block sends out if the logic were The first (left side) currently being displayed, indicates sent out from the block and the second value indicates the value being side) due to the actual state of the (right logic. Figure 12 is an example of the CLG-OUTST ATE block in the Water Flush state (highlighted state). Since the current state not Water Flush, two values appear next to some connections. The left value is the value of the logic is Failsoft, that would be expected when the logic enters the Water Flush state (100.00% and Overridden). The right value is the Present Value of the connections (47.89% and Normal). 56 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

57 Figure 12: Double in Logic View (Logic State) Values , when you command of a block to a different value, the existing value appears first and is followed Similarly the output Figure is an example of a block with double values. value. by the commanded 13 Values in Logic View (Commands) Figure 13: Double and default your cursor or output of a logic block, the input/output name over an input value appear . When you place making a connection, a tooltip indicates if no valid connection exists for the selected input/output. An invalid When connection is when and destination do not match (for example, a Boolean source and a the data type of the source destination). Float logic blocks, see the Logic section. Also, on the individual Logic View Status Colors section. For information see the on configuring logic blocks, including information For information Activity block works, see Logic on how the Hybrid View Steps Configuring a Hybrid Activity in the and a System section. Configuring Control Block Palette The Control Block palette allows you to select or search for blocks to add to the logic diagram. The Logic View supports drag and drop functionality blocks. For more information on the logic blocks, see the Logic for adding The Palette text-filtering capabilities which allow you to quickly filter on the name of section. tree offers immediate Parent nodes in the Palette tree display when children the node. match the filter. nodes Table 15: Logic Blocks Item/Folder Description Name Palette Launch Contains and folders of blocks you can add to the logic diagram. the Wizard Launches the New Module Selection dialog box for the module you have selected in the Activities Wizard Launch tree. Text (up to 400 characters) for display within the logic diagram or in a Control Contains a text string State columns). or Output Control (Setpoint/Miscellaneous, You can View column Generation, text for different or anywhere within the logic diagram. The Name label of the Text define blocks block appears in the logic diagram or Control View column. View the Details dialog container the text string. enter equations or other text that may provide For example, box to view or modify information for the application/activity in the logic diagram or Control View. useful 57 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

58 Table 15: Logic Blocks Name Description Item/Folder and enumeration blocks. Activity Inputs Boolean, input Contains float, and enumeration output blocks. Activity Outputs Contains Boolean, float, a single Boolean on one or more inputs, producing functions output. Boolean that perform blocks Contains that perform various fixed calculations Contains blocks that control the blocks Calculation (for example, can change logic execution or extrapolates an output using two amount per control an output for reference). inputs Contains such as Greater Than or Not Equal. Compare blocks, comparison that pass a constant value to block inputs. Constant Contains blocks the Activity and Hybrid Activity blocks that act as containers for other blocks. Container Contains blocks Contains feedback control algorithms (for example, blocks that perform Control or help configure on multiple output). producing a single functions control that perform inputs, producing that perform functions on one or more inputs, blocks a single Contains Math mathematical output. blocks that provide sequencing operations for multi-stage systems. Multi-State Controller Contains producing blocks functions on the defined inputs, psychrometric a single that perform Psychrometric Contains output. Command Hierarchy MUX, and Translation blocks that perform multiplexing for multiple Selection Contains producing a single output. inputs, Contains the Global and Sequencer 1 through Sequencer 16. Wizard Sequencer Configuration Sequencer . Sequencers See that perform statistical functions on multiple inputs producing a single output Contains Statistical blocks of the Statistics block, which provides multiple location and spread statistic (with the exception outputs). Contains timing functions such as Pulse, that perform , and Off Delay . Timing blocks Timing On Delay to break up feedback loops. blocks are used any exported/shared modules. The Custom folder appears once a module is exported, Contains Custom module is placed in the Custom Control Modules directory on the computer running or a shared the tool. Launch Wizard containing Wizard Block palette before the folders in the Control available blocks for selection. The Launch appears a module within After you select tree, you can drag the Wizard to the logic diagram workspace to launch the Activities the New Module Selection dialog box. Within this dialog box, you can select multiple logic blocks to add to the module. When you click Finish , the logic blocks appear in the logic diagram. Adjust the placement of the blocks as needed. See the Launch Wizard in the Using a System section. Configuring Logic Execution Table 16 answers common questions about how logic executes within the tool. 58 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

59 Table 16: Logic Execution Answer Question is a single Does engine. The each module (activity , hybrid activity , or logic process The Control Sequence in the control in the tool translate Control Sequence executes its application as follows: block) into one independent process? (activity every executes Sequence the Control module , • On startup, , or logic block) at the Control Sequence level one hybrid activity time. an input modules only those completes, startup • After that have or an internal logic block that requests execution run. This change, on every that not every means activity executes execution of the to the logic blocks Sequence. Control and This also applies sub-activities an activity . activity or hybrid inside execute once on startup, without Yes. Do all processes the need to see a change of state? order is generated based on the connections between the in any particular order A sequence execute Do processes (top-to-bottom the data flow (typically modules. on how they following executed is generally Logic based or left-to-right) , a left-to-right the logic diagram). appear on the screen? flow across module within the control sequence (or logic block or activity within of Each change on any binary trigger process each Does An input a module) timer? predetermined COV, or on some analog state, executes whenever an input changes. change when a change happens occurs in the value, , or reference reliability on the process based execute PID loops not based signature. period, of input values. on change No. Is there any way to exclude selected triggers? to execute within a module are always the Last Value one including a process, within is created If a loop The last blocks or more blocks. the loop does and where LVs, when start the data flow. The process follows the execution Otherwise, the number per input the of times change. only executes If the process feeds the output once and stop and what controls loop executes? of the block, to one of the inputs around back of the Last Value block in a short amount of time. This amount of the process executes again moment. is at that particular on how busy time depends the processor Tables execute large process. Each column is The State large as a single execute Tables Do the State as a single top-to-bottom runs due to an table Selection the State when evaluated process or as independent tables? change. input change, the Event Yes. On an input executes to determine the into translate Layer each does Activities, For Hybrid section it. the blocks executes that State Then, State. active an independent within with one of these process, processes enabled and the rest disabled at any given time? The last reliable value. If the hardware output has never received a to one it through data makes of unreliable If a piece what value. value, reliable of the hardware outputs, it uses gets written to that Default the Relinquish output? inputs are not processed. Instead, the failsoft, default, or last its value but is flagged Unreliable If a hardware input changes reliable is used. as unreliable, do the affected process executions value continue? No. The timer are set as On Delay with a duration of 60 Does the Timer block require logic blocks a change to of state execute For example, the input of for the first time? an example timer application. During seconds. Figure 14 shows , however is set to True on at startup; an On Delay in a controller or Commissioning Simulation , both of the outputs not execute. the timer function does come The top time. connected to the Enum Outputs on at the same to True. Timer block defaults input 59 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

60 Figure 14: Timer Execution Example Logic View Status Colors Logic colors in the Logic View. Table 17 lists the status used Table 17: Logic View Status Colors in Mode Status Color Description Appears input. an activity Yellow Block Indicates All modes an activity All modes Turquoise Block Indicates output. a block that contains logic that you can edit. Indicates Tan Block All modes Indicates that does not contain logic you can edit. Block White All modes a block block with the State Activity The Hybrid Note: is white selected state highlighted in blue. a Hybrid Activity State block. All modes White Block with Blue State Indicates Indicates a connected input. All modes Block with Yellow Input Indicates an input All modes Block with Orange Input that is not connected. an input available from the selected All modes Block with Green Input Indicates for connection block. the default element Indicates All modes Black Block of a module/block. Indicates a regular connection line. All modes Black Line Indicates the connection units or enumeration sets do not Line with Red Circle All modes Black match. a selected connection line. All modes Blue Line Indicates Indicates connections traced by the selected block. All modes Magenta Line All modes Indicates edge label connected to an input. a hidden Yellow Circle 60 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

61 Table 17: Logic View Status Colors Appears in Mode Color Description Status edge All modes to something other Indicates a hidden Gray Circle label connected than an input. a block that has an alarm, trend, or schedule All modes Identifies defined. Item: (Advanced Trend, or Alarm, Schedule) System Dialog Information figure shows the System The following Details dialog accessed in the Classic View workspace. The Information System Information Details dialog appears when the user clicks the System Name link under the menu bar or the System Information bar. link in the status 15: System Details Dialog Figure Information Information Details The System you to view system details, diagnostic data, and rename a system. allows You are able to view system details in all modes (Configuration, Simulation, and Commissioning), but are only able to rename in Configuration mode. a system Features Panel The Features panel appears across the bottom of the Classic View workspace. You can view this panel regardless of the application tab that currently appears. 61 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

62 Different trees appear depending on if the controller is an Advanced Application, General Purpose, or and features . VAV Controller in which the tool is operating, you are able to perform certain tasks in the Features Panel. Depending on the mode see the the tasks section. The following table describes on the modes, you can perform in For information Modes modes. in the different the panel Available in Different Modes Table 18: Panel Tasks Task Mode Commissioning Simulation Configuration X X View Connections X Connections ) ( Modify X Connections ) ( Connections X X View Parameters X ( Parameters ) 2 1 2 X Modify Parameters X X Parameters ( ) X Configure the Display Display ) ( X X View the State Tables X ( State Tables ) X Modify the State Tables ( State Tables ) X View Advanced X Program Features Advanced ) ( Data 3 X Advanced Program Modify X Features Advanced Data ) ( X X View BACnet Exposed X Information ( Exposed ) BACnet modify outputs 1 You cannot from the Parameters table. of modules 2 Select parameters only. 3 You can edit the details of advanced features in Commissioning mode, but you cannot add or delete advanced objects in this mode. Simple View Workspace contains the Application and System This workspace Information tabs. You can view inputs, outputs, and Selection parameters using the Application tab, or view system configuration selections using the System Selection Information Tab tab. See the Tab and System Selection Information Application sections for information. 62 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

63 Application Tab 6 shows tab in the workspace. The Application tab provides a simpler view of your system Figure the Application for your system listed are derived from the items selected sections in the System Selection The items in these design. on this wizard, see the System Selection Wizard in the Configuring a System section. Wizard. For information into categories The Application Parameters, and Outputs (see Inputs , Outputs , and for Inputs, tab is divided you run a simulation or view live data in the commissioning mode, changing values are highlighted ). When Parameters highlighting is determined by the frequency the value is changing. As poll cycles return by a color. Colored consistent values fades away. The intention of this feature is to bring attention to changes across the application the highlight to expose relationships between values and modules, and to assist in troubleshooting. data system, potential Temporary color highlights appear in three color stages (blue, yellow , and red). After the third stage (red) Note: has been reached, consecutive changes continue to display red. For more information on all subsequent color, see Table 9 . status on the mode in which Depending you are able to perform certain tasks using the Application the tool is operating, tab. For information on the modes, see the Modes section. The following table describes the tasks you can perform using the Application modes. tab in the different Tab Tasks Available Modes Table 19: Application in Different Task Mode Commissioning Configuration Simulation X View Input and Output X X Details Rename Input or Output X X Add Input or Output X X Modify a Module’ s X Parameters Delete or Output X Input 1 X Send a Command X X a Hardware Command Send X Modify Input and Output Signals X X X Show Involvement 1 Applies to test mode. Selection Tab System Information 16 shows the System Selection Information tab in the workspace. The System Selection Figure tab Information provides a read-only view of your system design. This view enables you to see the system selection summary without the need for you to print a System Selection Summary report. For information on the System Selection wizard, see Reports, the Selection Wizard in the Configuring a System section. For information on Summary System see Summary Report Options . 63 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

64 Figure 16: System Information Tab Selection Bar Status bar displays the hardware assignment indicator , system capacity indicator , system information link, The status current connection connection status, current mode, type, perspective, and current release mode. current For details on upgrading a file, see the Upgrading System Files section. For details on the system capacity indicator , information including counts, see System Capacity Indicator . For details, on the system object link, see the System Information Dialog section 64 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

65 The hardware assignment options are: indicator Model Name Address and Instance Number (Green) • Device with the MAC (Red) • Not Assigned and Instance with the MAC Address Name Number (Red) • Device (Unlicensed) Model features are disabled for unlicensed devices. Please see the Defining Hardware and the Transfer Note: Certain section for more Operations information. are: type options The connection • Bluetooth • NxE Passthru • MAP 4.2+/BACnet Router • ZigBee • Direct Ethernet options are: status The connection • Connecting • Connected (Sensor/Actuator Bus) (Field Controller • Connected Bus) • Disconnected mode status are: The current options • None • Configuration • Simulation • Commissioning that appears The perspective on if you are using a default or custom perspective. Custom perspectives name depends as the name you have configured. The default perspective appear are: options • Classic View View • Simple release mode version is displayed on the end of the status bar. The current Capacity Indicator System capacity indicator displays the percentage of maximum objects that your application is currently using. The system This percentage is calculated by the application's object count divided by the maximum object count of the selected controller model to the controller's technical specifications). For example, 2,500 objects in the application (refer table by 3,000 indicates 83% capacity . See the following objects for determining object counts. divided maximum If your system capacity is greater than 85%, we recommend that you run Simulation mode before you transfer Note: the application to the device you have not exceeded the controller Object ID (OID) count. . This step confirms starting on the device Depending error messages when you are using, you may see one of the following Simulation mode or when transferring to a device: • BACnet OID count exceeded maximum limit of [number] . Devices have maximum BACoid object (Object Count) limits. To find out more about controller BACoid Object limits, see the following capacity table. • OID count [number] exceeded Controller limit of [number] . This error only occurs when maximum you start Simulation mode. When you transfer to a device , this results in a transfer failure with an error of . The value of this limit accounts for OIDs used in a controller for objects that instances deleted are removed for Simulation, such as hardware points. To find out more about controller OID Object limits, see the following table. 65 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

66 Table 20: BACnet and Controller OID Limits OID Limits Controller Name Controller Type OID Limits BACnet Controller CH-PCA361 1 Advanced Application 11,200 4,112 Controller 1 FX-PCA261 FX-PCA2612 1 FX-PCA361 MS-F AC261 1 AC2612 MS-F AC361 MS-F 1 6,000 14,000 C4-CGM09090 CH-PCA2513 CH-PCA3613 CH-PCA491 1 F4-CGM09090 FX-PCA2513 FX-PCA3613 FX-PCA491 1 M4-CGM09090 MS-F AC2513 AC3613 MS-F MS-F AC491 1 7,000 3,000 FX-PCG16XX Purpose General Controller FX-PCG26XX 1 MS-FCU161 MS-FEC16XX MS-FEC26XX 14,000 6,000 FX-PCG251 1 MS-FEC251 1 Engine 14,000 MS-NCE25/NIE29 Network Control 6,000 (NCE) 66 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

67 Table 20: BACnet and Controller OID Limits Controller Name Controller Type Controller OID Limits BACnet OID Limits Point Expansion Module CH-PCX2713 3,000 7,000 CH-PCX3723 CH-PCX3733 FX-PCX1711 FX-PCX2711 FX-PCX2721 FX-PCX2723 FX-PCX3711 FX-PCX3721 FX-PCX3723 FX-PCX3731 FX-PCX3733 FX-PCX4711 MS-IOM171X MS-IOM271X MS-IOM2721 MS-IOM2723 MS-IOM371X MS-IOM3721 MS-IOM3723 MS-IOM3731 MS-IOM3732 MS-IOM3733 MS-IOM471X 67 Controller Tool Help : User Interface

68 Table 20: BACnet and Controller OID Limits BACnet OID Limits Controller Name Controller Type Controller OID Limits Controller VAV C4-CVM03050 7,000 3,000 CH-PCV1617 CH-PCV1632 CH-PCV1930 F4-CVM03050 FX-PCV1610 FX-PCV1615 FX-PCV1617 FX-PCV1620 FX-PCV1626 FX-PCV1628 FX-PCV1630 FX-PCV1632 FX-PCV1656 FX-PCV1826 FX-PCV1832 M4-CVM03050 MS-VAV1611 MS-VMA1610 MS-VMA1615 MS-VMA1617 MS-VMA1620 MS-VMA1626 MS-VMA1628 MS-VMA1630 MS-VMA1632 MS-VMA1656 MS-VMA1826 MS-VMA1832 MS-VMA1930 FX-PCV1930 Table 21: BACnet OID Count (Object Count) Determination Number of Objects Type 1 object Module Physical and Miscellaneous Inputs and Outputs 3 objects (input/output, priority connection, actual object) : User Interface 68 Controller Tool Help

69 Table 21: BACnet OID Count Count) Determination (Object of Objects Type Number Input Network 1 object Network 1 object Output 1 object Connected and Disconnected Logic Block Ports per 1 port for Connection per port 1 object Port Not Exposed Point Not Exposed for BACnet per point 1 object Connecting Not counted as objects Lines Dialog Details Box box provides s on and allows you to modify the selected module or block’ dialog The Details information and outputs, and hardware attributes/parameters (if available). You can access this attributes/parameters, inputs box from a module’ s right-click menu dialog of whether the Control Tab or Logic Tab appears in the regardless workspace. the Details dialog box by double-clicking a module. You also can access dialog box shows of the selected module on the left (including any hardware The Details the attributes/parameters attributes/parameters), and outputs of the module appear in tables on the right. related and the inputs dialog box retains The Details displayed view. If you closed the right panel the last time you accessed the previously the dialog is hidden the next time you open the dialog box. Click the arrows box, the panel bar to on the splitter restore the inputs and outputs panel. If there are no inputs and outputs for a module (as is commonly the case for Network Inputs), the right panel appears hidden and cannot regardless of the previously displayed view. be opened you can also view the details or block value BACnet Exposed outputs, analog and configure If the module includes information for the output. the COV-related working with enum values, you can access the Enum Finder through When dialog box for advanced the Details enum and enum set information. searching see the screen Dialog Box Also, section. Details Steps User Interface Opening a Controller Application File For details on creating a new system (File > New), see the Configuring a System section. 1. Open the CAF using ways: one of the following File > Open to the location of the saved CAF, and select the file to open. Click Open . • Go to , browse The default Note: of a CAF is C:\Users\. location • For a recently viewed CAF, go to File > Recent Files and click the file (or use keyboard shortcuts Ctrl-0 through Ctrl-9). • If the tool is closed, the file in Windows ® Explorer . The Tool opens with the selected file. double-click 2. If you have an application that differs from the current release mode, a dialog box will appear prompting you to choose how to proceed with the file: 69 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

70 • Select Open and click Continue to switch the exact mode needed for CAF editing. for Editing Upgrade to 10.X Continue to switch to the 10.X Release Mode and upgrade the CAF. • Select and click except read-only Continue to open a CAF version that cannot be edited, and click for • Select Open in 10.X values. default with an unlicensed device, a dialog box will inform you that you do not have a license 3. If you open an application with an unlicensed device, it will be set to Artificial Field to use the device. If you opt to load an application note that CCT prohibits to unlicensed devices. . Please Device transfers Changing Modes The tool opens Application File (CAF) in Configuration mode by default. Note: a Controller from Configuration mode to Simulation or Commissioning mode, To change or Commission. click Simulate To return mode from Simulation or Commissioning mode, click Configure. to Configuration The Configuration mode mode when you need to switch from Simulation to Commissioning Note: acts as a transitional you must To change mode to Commissioning mode, for example, and vice versa. first mode from Simulation to Configuration mode. change stopping simulation, a Confirm dialog When prompting you to save or discard the changes made box appears during simulation. changes box in a particular mode, the tool opens the Save Confirmation dialog If you made to the system prompting Click Yes to save the changes before changing modes or No to discard them. you to save. When viewing the Logic tab in the Classic View, if you switch from Configuration mode to Simulation mode or Commissioning mode changes, the Confirm dialog box has Yes, No, and Cancel options. after making box does not cancel you click the X in the upper-right corner of the dialog. The dialog when Modes Release Changing sure any open CAF is closed. 1. Make > Release Mode 2. Click Settings . the release version. A Confirm dialog box appears. 3. Select The Confirm dialog box does not appear Note: opted not to see it every time. if you have 4. Click . Yes • For information a System a release mode when opening a new CAF see Selecting Note: . on how to select on how to upgrade to an available release mode when opening an existing CAF see • For information Opening a Controller Application File . Setting View Menu Options On the View menu: • Select Layout (F7) to restore any resized panels to the default size. Reset Restore to Default Screen (F8) to display the application • Select one computer screen. across • Select Multiple Screens (F9) to display Arrange across more than one computer screen. the application • Select Save Perspective Layout (F10) to save any edits you made to the perspective layout (custom perspectives only). • Select Perspective Layout (F11) to discard Restore you made to the perspective layout and restore any edits the perspective layout to the last saved version (custom perspectives only). 70 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

71 Printing Summary Reports on printing the logic diagram, Printing the Logic Diagram in the Configuring a System section. For information see report of the information To print a summary in the tool: Print . The Summary select Options dialog box appears. 1. On the File menu, Report the check boxes for the information you want to print. See the Summary Report Options screen 2. Select section for descriptions. containing OK Adobe ® Reader ® software a PDF using the selected information in report 3. Click . The tool creates format. If the Summary Note: does not open in Adobe Reader software, see the workaround in the Report Troubleshooting section. 4. Print or save the PDF as desired from the Adobe Reader software. Saving a Controller Application File 1. On the File menu, click . The Save dialog box appears. Save the default or type a name for the file and click Save . Invalid characters include: 2. Accept name : * ? " < > | / \ The default location to save Note: a CAF is C:\Users\. Closing a CAF a CAF, select Close on the File menu. To close changes, the tool opens the Save Confirmation dialog If you made box prompting you to save. Click Yes to save the changes before closing or No to discard them. to remove Note: mode to close a file. You must stop Commissioning mode be in Configuration a system You must from the UI. Exiting the Tool To exit the tool, select Exit on the File menu. User Interface Screens User Screen Interface See the User Interface topic for information on the UI screens and their components. 71 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

72 Control Tab Screen tab is part of the Classic The Control Tab in the Classic View Workspace . See the View workspace. See Control for information of operation. section Modes on the modes Table 22: Control Tab Description Screen Area in the selected system in categorized sections. Module is Sections Modules used The flow of the content on the left, control/logic/state are from left to right where the inputs appear components The module View in the Control on the right. in the center , and outputs categories appear are: • Modules Input Network • Input Modules • Miscellaneous Modules Input • Setpoint/Miscellaneous Modules • Generation Modules State • Output Modules Control • Output Modules Network • Modules Output • Miscellaneous Output Modules Categories See the for information on these types. Tab Module Control section Logic Tab Screen The Logic tab is part of the Classic View workspace. For information on the Logic View UI and its components, see the figure and table in the Logic Tab section of Classic View Workspace . For information on the modes of operation, see the Modes section. Information Details System Dialog when Information dialog (formerly the System tab) appears Details you click the System Name link The System the menu bar or click the System Information link in the status below System Information Details bar. Use the dialog information. to view system-related Information Dialog - Configuration Mode Table 23: System Details Field Description the name of the System you have open. Object - Name Indicates Indicates if a device has runtime logic enabled. - Enabled Object status of that runtime logic is enabled; False indicates An enabled indicates True disabled. that logic has been Indicates the last time the file was changed structurally . Setup - Revision Indicates the software version of the tool with which the application was originally Version Setup - Standard built. the language used in the application. Setup - Language Indicates Indicates the unit set of the devices. Setup - Unit Set Opens the Help system. 72 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

73 Table 24: System Information Dialog - Simulation Mode Details Field Description of the System you have open. Object - Name Indicates the name Object has runtime logic enabled. if a device - Enabled Indicates logic is enabled; indicates status of True indicates An enabled that runtime False disabled. that logic has been Indicates structurally . Setup - Revision the last time the file was changed version of the tool with which the application Indicates the software Setup - Standard Version was originally built. used in the application. Setup - Language Indicates the language Setup - Unit Set Indicates the unit set of the devices. of break or view details Debug - Break Conditions Use to add, remove, conditions. if the system has stopped because of a break condition. Debug Indicates - Break Indicates mode has been activated (Simulation screen). Debug - Debug Mode if Debug Debug the elapsed simulating with Debug mode. has been - Elapsed Debug Time time the system Indicates the last blocks executed while the system has been simulating with Debug Executed Indicates - Last Blocks mode. Debug a counter that tracks how many times the control sequence has fully Provides Operational Data - Execution Run Count executed. Indicates of the percentage of time that the control sequence is not Idle Time - Average the EWMA Data Operational minute. each calculated executing, once Indicates the EWMA of the control sequences total execution time per hour. Operational Data - Average Executing Time Indicates the EWMA of control sequence executions per hour. Operational Data - Average Execution of the number Frequency Indicates of the time between a request to run by an asynchronous the EWMA Delay Execution - Average Data Operational starts. to when inputs) (including block execution the EWMA of the time elapsed during a control sequence execution. Operational Data - Average Indicates Execution Duration the EWMA sequence of times sliced per control Indicates of the number Operational Data - Average Slice Count execution. Indicates the EWMA of cumulative time elapsed during all slices per control Duration Sliced Operational Data - Average execution. sequence the Help system. Opens Table 25: System Information Details Dialog Mode - Commissioning Description Field the name of the System you have open. Object - Name Indicates if a device - Enabled logic enabled. Object Indicates has runtime of True indicates logic is enabled; False indicates status An enabled that runtime that logic has been disabled. Indicates structurally . Setup - Revision the last time the file was changed Indicates the software version of the tool with which the application was originally Version Setup - Standard built. Setup the language used in the application. Indicates - Language 73 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

74 Table 25: System Details - Commissioning Mode Information Dialog Field Description Indicates Setup - Unit Set the unit set of the devices. that tracks how many times Provides sequence has fully a counter Operational Data - Execution Run Count the control executed. the EWMA of the percentage of time that the control sequence is not Data Idle Time - Average Indicates Operational minute. executing, calculated each once Data of the control total execution the EWMA Operational sequences - Average Executing Time Indicates time per hour. the EWMA of the number of control sequence executions per hour. Operational Data - Average Execution Indicates Frequency Indicates of the time between a request to run by an asynchronous the EWMA Operational Data - Average Execution Delay starts. block (including inputs) to when execution Indicates the EWMA during a control sequence execution. Operational Data - Average Execution of the time elapsed Duration Indicates of the number of times sliced per control sequence the EWMA Operational Data - Average Slice Count execution. Indicates the EWMA of cumulative time elapsed during all slices per control Duration Sliced Operational Data - Average execution. sequence Opens the Help system. Features Panel Screen The Features Panel is part of the Classic View workspace. See the location of this panel in the Classic View section. See the Classic View Workspace . 74 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

75 Table 26: Features Panel Area Description Screen that are exposed for connection Table (Parameters Tab) Parameters Lists the parameters/attributes of all modules Parameters and to BACnet are listed > For Connection) Ports (Expose systems. in alphabetical order. The components are: table of the Parameters Edit of default button: Enters • Edit mode and allows modification values. parameter/attributes to parameter/attributes values. • Apply button: Saves the changes made Cancels • Cancel button: the edits and exits Edit mode. of the parameters/attributes. • Item column: Lists the names • values of the parameters/attributes Value Current column: Current calculated only). modes Commissioning and ( Simulation Default values of the parameters/attributes. • Default Value column: of measurement used • Units column: Units for the parameters/attributes. descriptive Displays text for the parameters/attributes. column: Name Standard • Note: table. You cannot modify outputs of modules from the Parameters and destination exposed ports with the associated input and output Table (Connections Tab) Connections Source The Connections table into three connection of the selected modules. is divided and Destination. Module, sections: Source, Selected modules at once, a table appears in the When selecting Note: multiple module selected. area for each Connections box allows The Freeze the Connections Note: Connection check you to prevent as you select modules. table from dynamically changing section The the selected module Source module lists the module from which and has the following its input receives columns: Displays • Block: of the connected module. the name • Port: Displays connected. the port being and has of the selected module Module Selected section The the name indicates columns: the following used for the connection. • Input: Displays the exposed port inputs used the exposed • Output: Displays port outputs for the connection. lists the module the selected module section The Destination to which module sends its output and has the following columns: module. of the connected Displays • Block: the name • Port: Displays the port being connected. for more information and right-click menu options. See the Connections section Use to modify Tab which are used to set the hierarchical priority of Tables State the State Tables, mode output of each the appropriate incoming states and to define of operation Selection in the State See the State Tables section state for each controller Tables. State Selection Tables . and the Viewing and Modifying Use to set up the display Local Controller Display or MAP Gateway . for the DIS1710 Display Tab the Display section. See the Configuring 75 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

76 Table 26: Features Panel Area Description Screen advanced program features, Advanced Tab The Advanced you to view and configure tab allows calendars, schedules, and trends. such as controller information, intrinsic alarming, to device information. Device The Device Information folder provides access name. on the device by clicking and edited can be viewed information See the section for details on using this Configuring Advanced Controller Features tab. BACnet system and switch between all Use to view the parameters Tab Exposed BACnet of an exposed and BACnet See the section for details. points. exposed Exposed points BACnet Dialog Box Details dialog box displays software and hardware attributes/parameters for modules or logic blocks. The Details Dialog Box Table 27: Details Screen Description Area Enters Edit mode and allows of items in the view. Edit Button modification to items in the view. Apply Button Saves the changes made Cancel Button and exits Edit mode. the edits Cancels s attributes/parameters, Attribute values, and units. Lists the selected module/block’ Table their defined the Standard Name appears in the UI. Note: If the Name field is blank, Logic Input and Output Objects sections. , Modules , and See the both an Inputs and an Outputs Input for the selected module/block. These tables and Output Tables Displays table data: the following include • that has an alarm, or output defined. an input : Identifies trend, or schedule or output. : Name Name • of the input standard used for the input or output. Standard name Controls : Johnson • Name of the inputs and outputs. Default Value • values : Default used for the inputs and outputs • Units : Units of measurement Precision Display used for the inputs and outputs (for • Precision : Display value example, 10ths). for the input or output parameter is exposed : Indicates Exposed BACnet • whether systems. BACnet Exposed analog value output launches an Note: Double-clicking a BACnet box which additional COV-related Details dialog allows you to configure information. and outputs (as is commonly the case for are no inputs for a module Note: If there hidden Network be opened regardless Inputs), this panel appears and cannot view. displayed of the previously Logic , and Input and Output Objects sections. See the Modules , Opens Finder for advanced searching of enum sets. the Enum Enables you to add or remove inputs and outputs. IO Modifications Check Box Closes dialog box. Close Button the Details Opens the Help system. 76 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

77 Application Tab Screen View workspace. See the figure in the Simple View section. See Simple The Application tab is part of the Simple UI and its components. for information View Workspace Tab Table 28: Application Area Screen Description Inputs Table Lists the Inputs . defined for the system. See Inputs of all modules that are exposed for connection (Expose Ports Table Parameters Lists the parameters/attributes Parameters are listed order. The and to BACnet > For Connection) in alphabetical systems. are: of the Parameters components table Enters Edit mode and allows modification of default parameter/attributes • Edit button: values. button: the changes to parameter/attributes values. Apply • Saves Cancels the edits made and exits Edit mode. • Cancel button: Lists the names column: • Item of the parameters/attributes. • Current of the parameters/attributes values column: ( Simulation calculated Current Value only). modes Commissioning and Value column: Default values of the parameters/attributes. • Default column: Units used for the parameters/attributes. • Units of measurement column: descriptive text for the parameters/attributes. Name Standard • Displays outputs of modules from the Parameters table. Note: You cannot modify Table Outputs See Outputs . defined for the system. Lists the Outputs System Selection Information Tab Screen The System Selection Information tab is part of the Simple View workspace. See the figure in the System Selection System Information See Simple View Workspace for information UI and its components. See the section. Tab Selection Wizard for information on the wizard. Summary Report Options See Printing Summary Reports . in the For information the logic diagram, see Printing the Logic Diagram on printing Configuring a System section. 77 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

78 Table 29: Summary Report Options Field Description project information: Information Prints Project the following Version • Software • Configuration File (CAF, name) Date • Configuration • Engineering box) from the New System or Metric (Imperial Units dialog entered in the New System dialog box; also available • Application Name (System Name on the System tab) defined during hardware definition) devices (list of the hardware • Assigned to Controller (%) Capacity • System • Naming Defaults or System Defaults/Modified) and Signal Preferences (System Preferences Defaults or System Defaults/Modified) Selection • System (System Job Information the information in the Job Information dialog box. Prints entered the selections made during System Selection. System Prints Summary Selection Prints of the hardware network settings, including: a summary Controllers • Device • Address • Type (of device) • BACnet ID Prints a list of all attributes of the hardware point assignments: Inputs/Outputs (Input, Output) • Label Name • Object • Attribute • Value • Units of the hardware Inputs/Outputs assignments: Prints a brief summary Summary point Input, • Label and Network Output) (Input, Network Output, Name • Object • Attribute (Description and Signal only) • Value • Units Prints a list of all attributes of the network points: Inputs/Outputs Network Input, (Network • Label Output) Network • Object Name • Attribute • Value • Units is not currently available. Modules This option the State Tables. State Tables Prints Prints a brief summary of the Units: Unit Validation (Module) for Activity (includes these classes: Reliability Merge, Last Value, • Name Comparison 2) and Passthru (includes Inputs and Outputs) 2, MUX Totalization, • Name (Logic Block) Value (Current value in Commissioning mode) • Default • Units 78 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

79 Table 29: Summary Report Options Field Description list, including: Prints the Parameters Parameters and Parameters) • Item (Module these classes: for Activity Type, Module Name, (includes Comparison (includes 2) and Passthru Totalization, Reliability Merge, Last Value, 2, MUX and Outputs) Inputs • Default Value • Standard Name tables, including the following for each Prints the Connections Connections table: and Port • Source Block and Output Input • Selected Module Block and Port • Destination objects, including: Prints a list of duplicate Names Duplicate name • Object Type • Object • Standard Name Creates of the selected data in PDF format that you can print and/or save. OK a report Closes box without creating a printable PDF. Cancel the dialog the Help system. Opens Release Mode Confirm Dialog Boxes Change table provides a description of the different confirm dialog boxes that appear when changing Release The following Table 30 when modes. changing Release modes using the command on the Settings menu. The dialog appears when boxes Table 31 and Table 32 appear to opening CAFs created in a release that differs from that correspond the current Release mode. See Release , Changing Release Modes , and Opening a Controller Application File . Modes Release Mode Dialog Box (Settings Menu) Table 30: Change Confirm Field Description to the selected Release mode. Yes Changes the dialog box without switching the Release mode. No Closes dialog box to not show again upon switching Release modes. Do not show this Configures again dialog the help system. Opens Release Mode Table 31: Change File Created in an Earlier Release Compatible Mode) (Opening Description Field Select Open and click Continue to switch the exact mode needed for CAF editing. for Editing List Open for Editing and upgrade Continue to the 10.X Release mode to switch Select to 10.X Upgrade and click the CAF. in 10.X and click Continue to open a CAF version that cannot be Select Open read-only values. edited, except for default the help system to context-sensitive locations—providing Links information about Opens Additional Information additional compatibility content. upgrading CAFs and release-to-release 79 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

80 Table 31: Change Release File Created in an Earlier Release Compatible Mode) Mode (Opening Field Description Executes command and closes the dialog box. Continue the Upgrade or Open box without opening the file. Cancel the dialog Closes the help system. Opens Release (Opening File Created in an Incompatible Release Mode) Mode Table 32: Change Description Field Open Switch and click Continue to switch the exact mode needed for CAF to List Select for Editing editing. to 10.X and click Continue to switch to the 10.X Release mode and Select Upgrade the CAF. upgrade the help system locations—providing additional information Opens to context-sensitive Additional Information Links compatibility content. upgrading about and release-to-release CAFs Executes the Switch selection and closes the dialog box. Continue Closes box without opening the file. Cancel the dialog Opens the help system. 80 Controller Tool Help: User Interface

81 Perspectives Perspective allows you to customize the UI display by creating perspectives that define the components management locations within your view. With the exception of the menu and status bar, the entire UI and component that appear a single perspective broken into customizable containers and widgets. represents are dependent allowing Perspectives you to create a set of perspectives for each application on the application, would For example, type. Operations (CPO) applications Central have a different set of perspectives than the Plant Mixed Air Single Duct (MASD) set of perspectives. However , all perspectives that you create appear in the Perspective Management library this library with or without an application open. , and you can manage Tool includes View. The Classic perspectives—Classic View and Simple The Controller View is the same two default UI that was used 10.0 version of the tool. The Simple View is a simplified version of the Classic View in the Release that also includes a new tab named System Selection Information. These perspectives are always available for use View and cannot within the Perspectives Management dialog box. See Classic be edited and Simple View . 81 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

82 Perspectives Concepts Components Perspective a collection of components that can be categorized as either containers or widgets. Each of Perspectives comprise configure includes panel that allows you to further configuration data included in that components a custom these Container and Widget for descriptions of the components. See Classic View Components widget. See for an example View is organized of perspective components. See Simple View Components for an in terms of how the Classic View is organized in terms of perspective components. of how the Simple example Container you build a perspective, containers allow When the content according to specific properties. Container you to organize types Frame, Orientation, and Tab. Each container type can be added individually . In addition, after adding include container , you can change , such as switching an Orientation type of container to a a container the type to another . Tab container Types and Properties Table 33: Container Description Properties Icon Orientation a Frame container , which can only be added at the root level. Indicates Orientation container Indicates an Orientation or horizontal. , which can be vertical Resizable Visible Position of the UI. Indicates a Tab container , which can be positioned in various locations Visible Frame container is only available (or root level) and specifies that the subcomponents of The Frame at the perspective as frames. appear of each frame stems from the name of the associated perspective information The name For example, the Classic View is a root frame container that defines the Application subcomponent. and the Features panels as frames. Orientation The Orientation specifies the orientation of components (vertical or horizontal). For example, in the Classic container View, the Network Inputs, and Miscellaneous components are arranged in a vertical orientation, where they Inputs, appear stacked vertically . However , within the Control tab, the module categories are arranged horizontally , or next to each other. See 18 for an example of Vertical and Horizontal orientation. Figure 17 two figures The following property . Figure illustrate shows two Table Data widgets within a Vertical the Orientation Orientation container and two Table Data widgets within a Horizontal Orientation as the configuration appears within how these the Perspectives Management dialog box. Figure 18 shows tab of the Perspective widgets appear in the UI. 82 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

83 Figure 17: Perspective Orientation Container Configuration Tree Example 18: Perspective and Horizontally Oriented Table Data Widgets Figure View of Vertically containers also include Orientation property . When selected, the container includes splitter bars so you a Resizable can adjust the size of the subcomponents. When Resizable is not selected, you cannot adjust the size of the subcomponents. in Figure 19 , the container on the left is not resizable, and decreasing the size of the For example, container does not affect the size of the subcomponents. Consequently , you must use the scroll bar to view all of figure) the subcomponents. on the right is resizable and includes a splitter bar (circled in the following The container to resize the subcomponents as the size of the container decreases. 83 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

84 Figure 19: Resizable Example Property Tab The Tab container contained within its children as its own tab. For example, in the Classic shows the information panel type with multiple widgets that each appear as a separate tabs View, the Features is a Tab container Connections, State Tables, Display , Advanced, (Parameters, Exposed). and BACnet The Tab container a Position property that determines where the tabs appear within the container . You can includes shows position . Figure 20 left, or right of the container the Position property behavior tabs to be on the top, bottom, in the UI. Figure 20: Tab Container Position - Top, Bottom, Left, Right Widget Widgets that display specific information and include specific functional behaviors. The Classic are items View perspective includes all of the following widgets, except for the System Selection Information widget. Note: The Advanced Data, BACnet Exposed, Connections, Local Display , Logic View, Parameters, State Tables, because and System Information widgets are known as specialized widgets Selection they have no configurable data. 84 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

85 Table 34: Widget Property Section Icon Selection Specialized widget you to view and work with advanced controller Visible that allows Advanced information. Data See widget. that allows with points in the widget you to view and work Visible Specialized Exposed widget. application. See BACnet that allows you to view and work with connections of the widget Specialized Visible See Connections widget. Control Sequence. Type Data Configurable widget that allows you to view the details of a BACoid (BACnet Criteria ID). See and Data widget Object Data Criteria . Details Visible Specialized widget that allows you to view and configure the display device. Visible Display widget. See Visible Specialized that allows you to view and work with application logic. widget Logic View See widget. Visible widget you to view parameters. See Parameters Specialized that allows widget. widget that allows Visible with State Table Specialized you to view and work See State Tables widget. information. Specialized widget that allows you to view system design Visible See information. System Information widget. Selection Criteria multiple Type BACoids Configurable widget that allows you to select and display Data and using data criteria. See Table Data widget . Data Criteria Visible Order Advanced Data The Advanced tab allows you to view and configure advanced program features, such as controller information, intrinsic alarming, calendars, and trends. schedules, trees and features on the Advanced tab depending on if the controller is an Advanced Application, Different appear or VAV Controller Purpose, . General folder provides access to device information. The Device information can be viewed and edited Information Device on the device name. by clicking Configuring Advanced See the Features section for details on using this tab. Controller Note: Data widget does not show the N2 object. For information on Advanced data functionality , The Advanced N2 Compatibility see Controller Features . For N2 information, see the Advanced Options section. Configuring BACnet Exposed The BACnet Exposed widget allows you to view the parameters exposed for BACnet systems in a tree format. The names of the nodes, and the structure of the tree all update if changes are made to the application. In this objects, you can switch only the points viewing all points or viewing widget, that are BACnet Exposed. Within these between you can quickly filter on the name of the node, or show the description of the node. This widget also contains views, the Mass Edit Dialog Box . The Mass Edit feature allows you to filter on name, show all points, show only BACnet points), Exposed show hardware (control points, sensors, and miscellaneous points, show duplicate points, and edit values. 85 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

86 The BACnet Exposed is shown in the Features Panel of the Classic View workspace; however , you can add widget to any Perspective you configure. Classic View section to view the location of the BACnet Exposed this widget See the the Classic within View workspace. widget Connections appears in the Connection tab of the Features Panel in all modes. This table can show The Connections table the for one or more and the State Selection tables. modules table displays the source connections The Connections module and port data with the associated input and output connection of the selected module. In and destination inputs appear yellow and outputs appear turquoise. this table, , State tab, you can select multiple modules in a module category for one module, In the Control to view connections only, or you can click Show All to view all connections. Selector tab, you can select a module in the Activities tree to view the connections for the selected module. You In the Logic can also select a module Exposed tab to view and update the Connections table. in the BACnet table Select Connection Note: box to prevent the Connections the Freeze from dynamically changing as you check select modules. Figure 21: Connections Table Show All Menu For Inputs and Outputs, value appears after the input/output name during Configuration mode (for example, the default Value - False value - False). During Simulation and Commissioning mode, the current value/present Present or Input after the input/output table The following appears describes the right-click menu options of the Connections name. table. Table 35: Connections Table Right-Click Menus Description Context Menu Option Disconnects the current connection and leaves the connection Connection Input Break blank. Output a dialog box allowing the user to choose from a tree Connection Launches Change Input blocks and ports. of available Output the Port Exposure dialog box to show Selected from Opens Ports Expose Header Module or hide ports ports connection. You cannot remove the selection for connected box. ports as such are disabled in this dialog a dialog Make the user to choose from a tree Launches Input Connection box allowing of available blocks and ports. Output 86 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

87 Table 36: Connections Table Buttons Boxes and Check Button or Check Description Box table view, which is showing all module Show All the Connections to the default Returns connections. When shows only the State Selector . Show State Selector selected, this option the Port Exposure dialog box to hide ports from connection. You cannot Ports Opens Expose ports the selection ports are disabled in this dialog as such for connected remove box. Prevents table from dynamically changing as you select modules. Freeze Connections the Connections See the Panel Screen section for a description of this table’ s components. Features Details Data The Details Data widget shows the details of a module or point. This view is identical to the Details dialog box that appears when of an item within the Classic View ( Figure 22 ). The Details Data widget supports a you view details points, BACoid type, and does not allow hardware as the data criteria advanced objects, or elements of a single primitive to appear as the main reference of the view. See BACoid for more information. the specified Note: message appears in this widget when Data BACoid does not exist in the open A Missing application. Figure 22: Details Dialog Box (Left) and Details Data Widget in Perspective (Right) 87 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

88 Display The Display appears in the Features Panel in Configuration mode. Use this tab to set up the Display for the widget Local Controller Gateway . See the Configuring the Display section. DIS1710 or MAP View Logic tab. This widget to the previous release's Logic functionality does not need to The Logic is identical View widget anywhere within the UI. For more information, see Logic Tab . appear as a tab and can be located Parameters of the in Features Panel of the Classic View workspace and in the Application Tab appears widget The Parameters View workspace, in all modes. The Parameters widget lists key parameters/attributes in alphabetical order Simple by the system. In Configuration mode, default values appear only for parameters/attributes that can be edited. used parameters/attributes table, To add other enable the inputs and outputs for BACnet network to the Parameters by editing the individual s BACnet Exposed attribute to True in the Details dialog box. You cannot exposure module’ section of modules outputs See the Features Panel Screen from the Parameters for a description of modify table. s components. this table’ You cannot modify outputs of modules Note: table. from the Parameters Table 37: Parameters Widget Screen Area Description and allows modification Enters parameter/attributes values. Edit Edit mode of default the changes Saves values. Apply to parameter/attributes Cancels the edits made and exits Edit mode. Cancel Lists the names of the parameters/attributes. Item Value Current values of the parameters/attributes Simulation and Commissioning modes ( calculated Current only). Default Default Value values of the parameters/attributes. used Units of measurement Units for the parameters/attributes. Displays descriptive text for the parameters/attributes. Standard Name State Tables states Tables to set the hierarchical priority of incoming is used and to define the appropriate mode The State widget of each Output Controller for each of operation in the State Selection Tables. You can modify the State Tables state only in mode. Configuration tables Tables correspond to the State Generators and the column headings are the Output The individual in the State For each Controllers. Generator state, there is a corresponding Output Controller state. The States column State lists the states from highest priority to lowest priority in descending order from top to bottom. An asterisk (*) appearing instead of a valid Output state indicates that the current State Generator has no interaction with the Output Controller , and the Output Generator is controlled by the next highest priority State Controller showing a valid Output Controller Controller state. Generator state column and the Output Controller state column are scrollable. A Both the State scroll bar at the bottom of the Output Controller state column allows you to move right and left. In Commissioning mode, the State tables highlight both the present values of the incoming states and Simulation and the value of the Output Controllers being controlled by State Generators. Active states appear as green and Values represent State Generators are in control. which with asterisks (*) are not highlighted. 88 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

89 For information on how to use the State see Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables in the Configuring Tables, section. To see an example Tables are used, see the Control Tab Application Example a System of how the State section. Selection Information System widget provides a read-only The System design. This view enables you Information Selection view of your system summary without the need to see the system Selection Summary report. The selection for you to print a System Selection widget type does not support Information types or any properties. For information System any data criteria Selection wizard, see the System Selection Wizard in the on the System a System section. Configuring Table Data type displays blocks Each row in the table provides a label, icons, associated The Table Data widget as rows in a table. provides and actions Additionally , the header of the table block. the ability to create new values, for the referenced blocks. The Table Data application type supports two data criteria types—BACoid and UI Column. The Table widget Data does not allow hardware points or advanced objects to be displayed widget in the table. See the as rows following sections for more information on data criteria. The Table Data widget includes an Order property that allows you to configure the order in which the blocks appear . For example, Figure shows defined Table Data circled in red and the corresponding Table Data columns above. 23 column the BACoid data in As Defined order, and the Table Data column on the The Table Data on the left shows BACoid data in Alphabetical order. Notice that the order of BACoids in the table on the left matches the right shows of the BACoids configuration in red in the Table Data order panel. circled order When As Defined for State Generation Table Data, Note: appear in the same you select as the the blocks State Table. See Figure 24 . When running a simulation or viewing live data in the Commission mode, changing values are highlighted by a color. The color of the highlighting by the frequency with which the value is changing. As poll cycles return is determined values, attention fades away. The intention of this feature is to bring consistent to changes across the highlighting values the application's potential relationships between expose and modules, and assist in data system, troubleshooting. Note: Temporary color highlighting appears in three color stages (blue, yellow , and red). After the third stage (red) information has been all subsequent consecutive changes continue to display red. For more reached, on status color, see Table 9 . 89 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

90 (Left) Figure Order Property - As Defined 23: Table Data and Alphabetical (Right) 90 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

91 Figure 24: Table Data Property for State Generation - As Defined (Middle) and Alphabetical (Right) Order Criteria Data has a data criteria type, which may be configurable or not configurable depending on the widget. Each widget Exposed, widgets, Logic View, Parameters, BACnet Data, Connections, Details Data, Specialized such as Advanced Display , State Tables, and System Local Information, do not have configurable data criteria. The data Selection criteria widgets displays only as Not Applicable. Configurable widgets include Table Data and Details for these Data widgets. The following sections provide more information on configurable data criteria. UI Column The UI Column data criteria type is supported by the Table Data widget only. This data criteria type allows you to select a group or points from a list of UI column options: of modules Points • Control Inputs • Miscellaneous • Miscellaneous Outputs Inputs • Network Outputs • Network Controllers • Output • Sensors • Setpoint Determination • State Generation • State Selector Each UI Column data criteria Table Data widget can support one or multiple categories of information (such as Network only, or all types of Inputs—Sensors, Miscellaneous Inputs, and Network Inputs). Inputs BACoid Note: We recommend that only advanced users and users who require custom applications configure the BACoid revisions data criteria Assigned BACoids may change between type. of the controller tool. 91 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

92 The BACoid data criteria you to specify objects by BACoid. When you have an application open, you type allows a BACoid the entire application. This tree also presents user-friendly naming. can select from a tree that represents you can specify a BACoid similar to a peer reference (a combo box for selecting the object's class, and Otherwise, the instance a field for specifying ID). Data widget and the Table Data widget support the BACoid data criteria type. When The Details with a working Table Data you can specify the BACoids that appear widget, the Table Data configuration panel. See in the UI using Figure 25 . When working with the Details Data widget, you can specify that details data of a chosen BACoid appear and in the UI. The following an example of a Table Data widget configured for BACoid data criteria, provides figure a Details Data widget configured to show the details of HTGMODE. Figure 25: Table Data with BACoid Data Criteria (Left) and Details Data with BACoid Data Criteria (Right) Classic View Components The following figure and tables show how the Classic View is broken into components of a perspective. 92 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

93 Figure 26: Classic View with Callouts Perspective Table 38: General Components Perspective Component Callout Container - Vertical Frame 1 Tab Container 2 Orientation Container - Horizontal 3 System Information Details Data Widget - BACoid 4 Table Data - UI Column 5 Widget Orientation Container - Vertical 6 Perspective Name 7 Specialized, Non-configurable Widget 93 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

94 Table 39: Description of Classic Components View as Perspective View Description Direct Subcomponents Type Classic Orientation/ Appearance Component Location/ Data Criteria (Application) Tab Container The vertical orientation of this frame View Classic Entire Vertical Frame Container the direct container orders (Features) Tab Container subcomponents to arrange themselves stacked vertically , so Panel the Application and Features Panel appear stacked on top of other. each that Top (Control - Horizontal Tab Container Orientation The Tab Container type dictates Panel Application Container appear subcomponents Tab) the direct as tabs within . The this container (Logic Tab) View Widget Logic provides Top orientation the location . of the tabs within the container Container container Orientation type The orientation (Inputs) Tab Control Orientation Horizontal specifies Container that the subcomponents Table Data Widget - UI Column , or next to each horizontally appear (Setpoint/Miscellaneous) other in the UI. Widget Table Data - UI Column (State Generation) Table Data (Output - UI Column Widget Control) (Outputs) Orientation Container The orientation container type Inputs, Network Orientation Vertical (Network - UI Column Table Data Widget Inputs) Inputs, specifies that the subcomponents Container stacked Miscellaneous in the UI. appear vertically Table Data (Inputs) - UI Column Widget Column - UI Column Widget Table Data (Miscellaneous) data widget with UI Table Data Setpoint/ The table UI Column None that specifies Widget data criteria Miscellaneous Column blocks Setpoint/Miscellaneous in UI. appear with UI Generation State Table Data UI Column The table data widget None that specifies Widget data criteria Column blocks appear in State Generation UI. The table data widget with UI Control Output Table Data UI Column None data criteria Widget specifies that Column in UI. appear Output blocks Control - UI Column type Network container Widget Outputs, (Network The orientation Orientation Vertical Table Data specifies Container Inputs) that the subcomponents Outputs, Outputs in the UI. Miscellaneous appear stacked vertically (Outputs) - UI Column Table Data Widget Column Widget - UI Column Table Data (Miscellaneous) The Logic is designed None Not View widget Logic View Logic Tab view. Applicable Widget specifically for the Logic 94 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

95 Table 39: Description of Classic Components View as Perspective Classic Description Appearance Direct View Type Orientation/ Subcomponents Component Location/ Data Criteria that Top Features Panel Tab The Tab Container Widget Parameters type dictates the direct Container subcomponents appear Connections Widget . The as tabs within this container provides Top orientation the location Tables State Widget of the tabs within . the container Display Widget Local Advanced Data Widget Widget BACnet Exposed widget is designed The Parameters Tab None Not Parameters Parameters Widget specifically parameters. for viewing Applicable widget The Connections Tab Connections Connections Not None is designed Applicable connections Widget for viewing specifically Sequence. of the Control The State Tables widget is designed Tab Tables State Tables None Not State Applicable the state for viewing specifically Widget tables. Display widget is Not Tab Display Local The Local None Applicable the Display for viewing specifically designed device. configuration Widget of the display Data widget is Tab Advanced None Not Advanced The Advanced specifically for the viewing Applicable designed Data Widget details. Advanced Exposed widget is The BACnet BACnet None Not BACnet Exposed designed specifically for viewing Applicable Tab Exposed Widget exposed BACnet data. Simple View Components The following table shows how the Simple View is broken into components of a perspective. 95 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

96 Table 40: Description View as Perspective of Simple Components Type Direct Orientation/ Location/ Appearance View Simple Subcomponents Criteria Component Description Data View Container View Simple Entire Tab Container Top Orientation The Simple (Application) is a tab container that specifies Selection System that the two Widget Information subcomponents Selection (System as tabs. appear tab) Information Table Data Application Container Orientation Horizontal The orientation - UI Widget Tab type Column (Inputs container column) specifies that the Widget Parameters three column) (Parameters subcomponents be arranged Widget Table Data - UI horizontally , or column) Column (Outputs next to stacked other. each None UI Column Table Data Widget Inputs The Table Data widget with UI data Column specifies criteria that Miscellaneous Network Inputs, and Inputs, appear Sensors the same within in the UI. table Not Applicable None Parameters The parameters Parameters Widget displays widget application and parameters be cannot configured. 96 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

97 Table 40: Description of Simple Components View as Perspective Simple Location/ Type Orientation/ View Direct Appearance Criteria Component Description Data Subcomponents Table Data UI Column None Outputs The Table Data Widget widget with UI Column data criteria specifies that Control Points, Miscellaneous and Outputs, Outputs Network within appear the same table in the UI. The System Selection System Information Selection System Not Applicable None Tab Information Selection Widget Information widget displays system selection choices and cannot be configured. Associated Perspectives Perspectives are associated with the applications provided by the tool, such as VAV, Central Cooling Plants, Air Handling Units, Perspectives view on the System Configurations tab of the Perspective and so on. The Associated screen Configuring you to edit the associated perspectives for your applications. See Management Associated allows Perspectives and Configuring Associated Perspectives for All Applications . See Applications for Per Application more information on applications provided by the tool. Folder Organization Grouping organize of similar perspectives You can easily groups perspectives into folders prevents the into folders. tree of perspectives from becoming too cluttered if you happen to use many perspectives. See Creating Folders for Perspectives . 97 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

98 Templates The Controller package includes a set of commonly used perspective templates. These templates Tool installation in a folder media. To easily customize the view for your specific application, you can are included on the installation one of these templates and make adjustments as needed. The following table provides an overview of the import templates See and associated applications. available Importing a Perspective for procedures. with this release Templates Table 41: Perspective File Name Application Air Air Duct (Mixed Unit Air Dual Air Single Duct Duct Rooftop Multizone Mixed Mixed 100%Outdoor 100%Outdoor AHU DualDuctApplications Applications Applications AHU VAV Single VAV Slave Single Duct Applications AHU Applications VAV Slave Dual Duct Duct Applications AHU Applications VAV Dual Duct Air Dual Duct) Applications AHU Applications Fan Coil Applications Single Unit Ventilator Applications AHU Applications Heat Pump Applications X X X X X AHU-Cooling X Control.pml X X X X AHU-Heating X X Control.pml X X X AHU-Econ X Damper Control.pml X X X X X AHU-Fan X Control.pml X HP-Cooling Control.pml HP-Heating X Control.pml UV-Cooling X Control.pml X UV-Heating Control.pml X Fan Coil-Cooling Control.pml X Fan Coil-Heating Control.pml X X VAVDD-HD Damper Control.pml X VAVDD-CD X Damper Control.pml X X VAVSD-Damper Control.pml X X VAVSD-Heating Control.pml X X X X X X X X X X X X X Module-Logic.pml 98 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

99 Custom Perspectives to importing configured and templates, you can also build a perspective to suit your application. In addition perspectives figure a perspective the following used for balancing. shows For example, Perspective for Balancer 27: Custom Figure Perspective Layout In addition the components of the perspective, you can also customize the layout of the perspective to customizing by moving containers and components. You can also configure the perspective based upon your monitor and resizing display . For example, if you work with the same perspective in different locations, such as viewing the perspective the perspective on multiple you can choose to ignore changes to the layout to ensure or on a laptop, always monitors opens using one screen or both. In addition to the steps shown in Configuring Perspective Layout Saving , when you change the layout of your the layout. perspective to another perspective, a dialog box appears prompting you to save and switch Figure 28: Confirm Dialog Box for Perspective Layout 99 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

100 If you have no layout configured in Perspective Management, when this dialog box appears, you have preference choices: the following : Saves the current layout only. • Click Yes to the layout my decision Yes : Saves the changes Remember and saves any further changes • Select and click switching between perspectives by default without prompting when you. • Click : Discards the changes to the layout. No Remember to the layout and click No : Discards the changes • Select and discards any further my decision when switching between perspectives by default without prompting you. changes If you have selected Remember my decision and want to change your preference later, see Configuring Perspective Layout Saving . The View menu Save Perspective Layout and Restore Perspective Layout options. Note: also includes you open an application When to the active perspective of the selected system file, the tool defaults configuration when displaying the application. Perspectives Tab The Perspectives tab provides a list of perspectives available within your perspectives library . Every perspective that you have appears in this view, including the default Simple and Classic View perspectives (these in your library cannot be edited or deleted). See the following figure and table for a description of the Perspectives Tab. Figure 29: Perspectives Tab 100 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

101 Table 42: Perspectives Tab Field Description Component of configurable components. See Container and different Widget . a list of perspectives Displays types and Trees the tree, a menu you to delete, that allows within cut, copy, or When you right-click a component appears component. the selected paste be reordered. by default and cannot Note: Subcomponents Perspectives in alphabetical order are listed Order property can be reordered using the Display . Provides buttons for managing perspective components in the tree. When you hover your mouse over Toolbar action appears the action. a tooltip an icon, showing • : Import • : Export • : Add Perspective • : Add Container • : Add Widget also includes The toolbar box where you can select the number of components to add (1 to 10). a number Provides specific information that applies to the selected node within the component tree. Custom Configuration Panel an application is open, clicking this button applies a change to the current perspective or switches to Apply When to the UI. For example, and click Apply , that widget appears in the perspective if you add a widget a different perspective. If you select a different perspective and click Apply currently to that displayed , your UI changes When is open, you can make and apply no application to a perspective within the perspective. changes tree, but you do not see these changes until you open an application showing the perspective. Perspectives Closes box. Close the dialog Opens the online help system. System Configurations Tab The System Configurations tab allows you to manage your library of perspectives based upon all system configurations, of the System or specific See the following figure and table for a description applications. Configurations Tab. 101 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

102 Figure 30: System Tab Configurations Configurations Table 43: System Tab Description Field Use to view all associated perspectives or system-based perspectives. System Configurations Tree Displays perspectives and allows you to select or clear all associated boxes to configure associated Associated check Perspectives perspectives. Pane Perspectives perspectives for that system type. a list of all associated are ordered alphabetically . Provides Perspectives header to reverse the order of the list. You can click the column Not used. Apply Closes the dialog box. Close Opens the online help system. 102 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

103 Perspectives Steps with Components Working Adding a Container and select 1. Click . The Perspective Management window appears. Perspective Settings Management perspective to add the container container to which you want the . The 2. In the tree on the left pane, select or a subcomponent component you choose. you add becomes container of the perspective Note: You cannot add containers to widgets. ( ). 3. Click Add Container or 4. Select . The container appears nested under the component you selected in Step 3 . Orientation Tab later that you want type container If you decide , you can switch your choice for Orientation or Note: a different You do not need to delete the container and add a new Tab type at any time for the container you added. container . Configuring a Tab Container or Configuring an Orientation 5. See for more information. Container Configuring Container a Frame Management dialog the Frame container you want to configure. 1. In the Perspective box, select and a Description in the status for the Frame container . The name appears a Name bar of the 2. Enter (optional) you of the Perspective) as a tooltip, with the CAF location, when appears UI (as the name and the description over the name in the UI. hover the Save 3. Click Behavior drop-down box and select one of the following: Layout • Ask: Choose the option to always be prompted by a dialog box to choose whether to save the layout Always See Figure 28 . changes. Auto Save: • this option to always save the changes to your perspective layout. Choose • Auto Ignore: Choose this option to always discard the changes to your perspective layout. 4. Click the drop-down box and select Vertical or Horizontal . (See Figure 18 in Orientation for Orientation examples.) ) to reorder click the up arrow ( ) or down arrow ( field, subcomponents. (See Changing 5. In the Display Order Order of Components for more information.) the Display Apply . 6. Click Close 7. Click . an Orientation Container Configuring Management box, select the Orientation container you want to configure. 1. In the Perspective dialog a Name and a Description (optional) 2. Enter container . The name appears in the UI and the for the Orientation description appears as a tooltip when you hover over the component in the UI. Note: If you are using the Orientation container for organization only, you do not need to name the container . 3. Select the check box to show the container within the UI, or clear the check box to hide the container in Visible the UI. (See Orientation drop-down box and select Vertical or Horizontal. 4. Click Figure 18 in Orientation for examples.) the 5. Select the Resizable check box to allow resizing the container within the UI (recommended), or clear the check box to lock the size of the container Figure 19 in Orientation for an example.) . (See 6. If the Orientation container has subcomponents in the Display Order field, click the up arrow ( ) or down arrow Order ( the items. (See Changing the Display ) to reorder of Components for more information.) 103 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

104 7. Click Apply . Close . 8. Click a Tab Container Configuring box, select the Tab container you want to configure. Management 1. In the Perspective dialog (optional) for the Tab container . The name appears in the UI, and the description 2. Enter a Name and Description you hover over the component in the UI. as a tooltip appears when Visible 3. Select box to show the container within the UI, or clear the check box to hide the container in the check the UI. Position drop-down list box to choose the location in the container for where the . (See 4. Click the tabs appear 20 in Tab for examples.) Figure has subcomponents in the Display Order field, select 5. If the Tab container subcomponent and click the up the arrow ) or down arrow ( ) to reorder the items. ( Apply . 6. Click . 7. Click Close a Widget Adding and select Perspective 1. Click . The Perspective Management window appears. Settings Management select the perspective or container to which you want 2. In the tree on the left pane, The widget to add the widget. you add becomes of the perspective component you choose. a subcomponent Add Widget widgets. ) and select a widget from the list of available 3. Click ( You cannot Note: than one specialized widget (see Widget for a list of specialized widgets). add more 4. Select the parent container , and using the up ( ) and down ( ) arrows on the right pane, change the Display Order of the components. a Table Data or Details widget, see Configuring a Table Data Widget for UI Column Data 5. If you added Data Configuring Widget Data or for more information. Criteria a Details Apply 6. Click . 7. Click Close . Configuring a Table Data Widget for UI Column Data Criteria Management 1. In the Perspective box, select the Table Data widget you want to configure. dialog 2. Enter and Description (optional) for the Table Data widget. The name appears in the UI, and the description a Name as a tooltip you hover appears over the component in the UI. when the 3. Click Criteria Type drop-down box and select UI Column. Data 4. Select the Visible check box to show the widget within the UI, or clear the check box to hide the widget in the UI. 5. Click Order drop-down box and select whether you would like the table data to appear in Alphabetical order the (See 23 or As Defined. in Table Data for examples.) Figure window 6. In the selection one or more categories (UI Columns) you would like to display in the Table Data , select widget. To select multiple categories, press and hold down the Ctrl key and click each category you would like to display . Note: When you select As Defined for Order and State Generation UI Column , the blocks appear in the same order as the State Table. 7. Click Apply . 104 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

105 8. If you create multiple widgets and want to organize them within the perspective UI, nest the group Table Data widgets within container . See Adding a Container for more information. of Table Data a Tab or Orientation Data Criteria a Table Data Widget for BACoid Configuring box, select the Table Data Management you want to configure. 1. In the Perspective dialog widget and Description (optional) for the Table Data widget. The name appears in the UI and the description 2. Enter a Name when you hover over the component in the UI. appears as a tooltip panel Data Type drop-down box and select the The Table Data configuration Criteria changes 3. Click BACoid. the Control Sequence points. to show the Visible check box to show the widget 4. Select the UI, or clear the check box to hide the widget in the within UI. the Order box and select whether you would like table data to appear in Alphabetical order or 5. Click drop-down (See Figure in Table Data for examples.) As Defined. 23 to display in your table data widget: 6. Choose the BACoids If you have • open , follow these steps to build table data using the tree: an application In Settings, the Show All check box to view all points in the application, select clear the a. otherwise, to view only BACnet Exposed points. checkbox b. For Expansion Level, use the slider bar to expand the tree to the details level you would like to view. c. In the Filter box, type part of the node to filter the results. name tree, select the item you want within the table data widget. d. In the BACoid to show multiple press and hold down the Ctrl key and click each item. To select Note: items, e. Click . Notes: shows the order of the table data if you chose As Defined for the Order type. - The list in the right-pane the order of items, you can select If you wish to change ( ) or down the item and click the up arrow arrow ). ( like to remove data list in the right pane, select the item and click - If you would an item from the table key or - (hyphen) key to delete items as well. . You can also use the Delete box to view all points a. In Settings, Show All check the in the application, otherwise, clear the select checkbox to view only BACnet Exposed points. b. For Expansion Level, bar to expand the tree to the details level you would like to view. use the slider box, type part of the node to filter the results. c. In the Filter name tree, select the item you want to show within the table data widget. d. In the BACoid To select multiple items, press and hold down the Ctrl key and click each item. Note: e. Click . • If you do not have an application open , follow these steps to build table data manually: a. Click the Identifier drop-down box and select the type of object. Object enter the Object ID for the BACoid. b. In the field, c. Click to add the BACoid to the table data. d. Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 until you have built your table. 105 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

106 Notes: - The list of BACoids is the order of the table data if you chose As Defined for the Order that appears If you wish to change the order you can select the item and click the up arrow ( ) or type. of items, ( ). down arrow data list, select - If you would the item and click like to remove an item from the table 7. Click Apply . . Close 8. Click Table Data widgets and want to organize them within the perspective UI, nest the group 9. If you create multiple within widgets container . See Adding a Container . of Table Data a Tab or Orientation Data Widget a Details Configuring that you have an application open before Note: the Details Data widget. If no We recommend you configure is open, you must specify application by Object ID using the Manual Entry section of the Details the BACoid Data panel. configuration Management dialog the Details Data widget you want to configure. 1. In the Perspective box, select for the Details Data widget. The name appears in the UI. 2. Enter a Name If you enter a description for the widget (optional), this description appears only when Note: Data the Details widget in a tab container and you hover over the tab. is located box to hide the widget the check box to show the widget 3. Select the UI, or clear the check Visible in the within UI. 4. Choose the BACoid for which to show details: • If you have an application open , follow these steps to select a BACoid using the tree: In Settings, select Show All check box to view all points in the application; otherwise, clear the check the a. points. Exposed box to view only BACnet use the slider like to view. the tree to the details level you would b. For Expansion bar to expand Level, name to filter the results. box, type part or all of the node c. In the Filter tree, select the item you want to display details for within the perspective UI. d. In the BACoid If you select the Details , or an invalid BACoid, Note: Data widget displays a data unavailable a folder within UI. message the perspective If you do not have an application open , follow these steps • the BACoid manually: to enter a. Click the Object Identifier drop-down box and select the type of object. b. In the field, enter the Object ID for the BACoid. 5. Click Apply . Close 6. Click . Changing the Display Order of Components Order property organizes how components appear The Display the UI. For example, a series of components within nested in a tab container is displayed from left to right, such that the component appearing at the top of the list in the custom configuration panel is located as the far left tab within the UI. In a vertical orientation container , the component at the top of the list appears . In a horizontal orientation container , the component at the top of the container Order appears on the far left of the container in the UI. at the top of the Display Note: You cannot change the order of the Classic View or Simple View components. Management 1. Click and select Perspective Management . The Perspective Settings window appears. 106 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

107 2. In the left pane, select perspective or container with subcomponents to reorder . The right pane populates a items to reorder Order box. with the available in the Display up 3. Select ) or down arrow ( ) to change the display order. arrow ( an item and click the . 4. Click Apply 5. Click Close . Copying and Pasting Components and select 1. Click Management . The Perspective Management window appears. Settings Perspective of the Perspective window , select the component you want to copy. Management 2. In the left pane Copy or press Ctrl+C . and select 3. Right-click the area where you want to paste the copied component 4. Right-click Paste , or press Ctrl+V . and select Showing Perspective Components and Hiding of the Perspective Management box, select the component you want to show or hide. 1. In the left pane dialog select a perspective frame or container at the root level to show or hide. Note: You cannot select the Visible check box to show 2. In the right-pane, or clear the Visible check box to hide the the component, component. also has nested subcomponents, these are automatically shown or hidden based If the component the choices you made for the parent component. upon 3. Click Apply . 4. Click Close . Deleting a Perspective Component or Perspective You cannot delete View or the Simple View perspectives. Note: the Classic and select Settings Management . The Perspective Management window appears. 1. Click Perspective right-click a perspective or component and select Delete. A Confirm dialog 2. In the left pane, box appears prompting your delete action. you to confirm Yes 3. Click . Working with Perspectives Adding a Perspective from a template, see To add a Perspective a Perspective . Importing 1. Click Settings and select Perspective Management . 2. Click Add Perspective ( ). The Input dialog box appears. 3. Enter a name and click OK . The new perspective appears in the tree. for the Perspective a Perspective Importing Settings and select Perspective Management . The Perspective Management 1. Click appears. window 2. Click Import ( ). The Open dialog box appears. 3. Browse for the PML file you would like to import and click Open . The imported perspective appears in the tree. Exporting a Perspective When you export a perspective, any custom Note: and layouts are not preserved in the exported file. sizing 1. Click Settings and select Perspective Management . The Perspective Management window appears. 107 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

108 2. Select the perspective you wish to export. Export ( dialog box appears. 3. Click ). The Save to save the PML file you would and click Save . like to export 4. Browse to the location Perspectives and Pasting Copying and select Perspective Management . The Perspective Management window appears. 1. Click Settings Management of the Perspective , select the perspective you want to copy. 2. In the left pane window Copy and select Ctrl+C . 3. Right-click or press 4. Choose an area to paste the copied perspective: like to create a new perspective, in the empty area below the perspective tree, right-click and • If you would select Paste Ctrl+V . or press like to paste the perspective another perspective, click the parent perspective , then within • If you would Paste or press Ctrl+V . and select right-click You cannot paste a Frame container within another Frame Note: . In addition, you cannot copy and container paste widget into a perspective that already contains that specialized widget. a specialized Creating for Perspectives Folders Note: You cannot place the Classic View or Simple View perspectives into folders. 1. Click Settings and select Perspective Management . The Perspective Management window appears. 2. Select the first perspective like to place in a folder . you would field, create name by preceding the perspective name with [Folder Name]/ . For example, the folder 3. In the Name Perspective 1 into a folder named Test, you would type Test/Perspective 1. to place if you want A folder does Note: in the tree. Folder names are identified by [Folder Name]/ only. For example, not appear Figure shows a VAV folder and a Central Plant folder 31 . Figure 31: Folder Structure within Perspectives Tree 4. Select the next perspective you want to add to a folder . 5. In the Name field, folder naming convention as Step 3 to add that perspective to the same folder use the same name a different or type a new folder folder . to create you have 6. When creating folders, click Close . completed 7. To confirm your folder was created, go to Settings > Perspectives . Your folder name should appear in the list 31 of available Figure 32 shows how the folder organization in Figure perspectives. appears within the Controller Tool Settings menu. 108 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

109 Figure 32: Folder within Settings Menu Structure The preceding steps how to organize within one folder level; however , you can add multiple folder Note: show by following Name1].../[Subfolder of [Folder Name]/[Subfolder simply levels the convention . Name] NameN]/[Perspective Perspectives Per Application Associated Configuring Management , click the System Configurations tab. 1. In the Perspective window select any configuration, such as Fan Coil, or folder of configurations, 2. In the left pane, as VAV. such 3. In the right pane, or clear the check boxes for the perspectives that you want available for that application. select a perspective All heading and click Select All or Deselect You can also right-click . or a column Perspectives in alphabetical Note: order. To reverse the order, click the Perspective column heading. are listed you have completed your selections, click Close . 4. Once Configuring Associated Perspectives for All Applications 1. In the Perspective Management , click the System Configurations tab. window select Configurations . 2. In the left pane, All System select or clear the check boxes for the perspectives that you want available for each 3. In the right pane, application. You can also right-click or a column heading and click Select a perspective or Deselect All . All Note: Perspectives are listed in alphabetical order. To reverse the order, click the Perspective column heading. . 4. Once your selections, click Close completed you have Configuring Perspective Layout Saving 1. Click Settings and select Perspective Management . The Perspective Management window appears. 2. In the left pane, the Perspective for which you want to configure the layout. select 3. In the right pane, click the Save Layout Behavior drop-down box and select one of the following: 109 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

110 • Always Choose the option to always be prompted by a dialog box to choose whether to save the layout Ask: See 28 . changes. Figure Auto Save: Choose this option to always save the changes to your perspective layout. • Auto Choose • this option to always discard the changes to your perspective layout. Ignore: Apply . 4. Click 5. Click Close . Switching between Perspectives You can switch between Perspectives by using the Settings menu or the Perspective Management dialog box. The list of Perspectives accessible menu is determined by how you configured your associated perspectives in the Settings application. for the active Settings , select Perspective , and choose 1. Click to which you want to switch. The Status bar at the Perspective the bottom of the UI changes to reflect the active Perspective name. 2. To switch using the Perspective Management dialog box, select a different Perspective in the Perspectives Perspectives tree and click Apply . The Status bar at the bottom of the UI changes to reflect the active Perspective name. 110 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

111 Perspectives Screens Management Perspective screen The Perspective and System Configurations tabs. See Perspectives includes Management the Perspectives Configurations Tab . and Tab System Container Screens provides information on selections found in the container custom The following panel. table configuration Screens Table 44: Container Description Field Indicates that appears within the perspective UI. Name the name Indicates that appears within the UI when you hover over the container . Description the text included in the tooltip the container type: Frame, Tab, Orientation. Type Container Indicates containers can only exist at the root level. Frame whether the container within the UI. Visible Indicates appears container within the UI. Resizable if the Orientation can be resized Indicates Save Layout are made Indicates See Perspective Layout . the action to take when changes to the perspective. Behavior where Indicates within the container: Top, Bottom, Left, Right Position the tab appears Indicates or horizontal orientation of the Orientation or Frame container . Orientation the vertical they appear direct of the container and indicates what order Shows within the UI. Display Order subcomponents Moves a subcomponent up in the display order. Moves a subcomponent in the display order. down Data Widget Details panel. provides on selections found in the details data custom The following information table configuration Data Widget Table 45: Details Description Field the name that appears within the perspective UI. Name Indicates the Details Data widget is located within a Tab container , the Description text appears as Description When the UI when over the tab. within a tooltip you hover is only selection. Type Criteria BACoid Data Indicates appears within the UI. Visible if the widget When selected, shows all points within application. When cleared, shows only BACnet Exposed All - Show Settings points. appears an application open. This attribute Note: only when you have the level of details the tree (1 to 5). within Indicates Level Expansion that appear appears you have an application open. This attribute Note: only when Provides a text box to search the selection tree based on the node name. The search results Filter the matching and its ancestors. include node Indicates the object type and Object ID of the associated BACoid. Manual Entry - Object Identifier 111 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

112 Table Data Widget information on selections found in the table data custom configuration panel. The following table provides Table 46: Table Data Widget Field Description within the perspective UI. Name the name that appears Indicates that appears within the UI when you hover over the widget's the text included Description Indicates in the tooltip . header you to select Enables types. UI Column: table Type Criteria data from a set of UI Column Data table you to specify Enables BACoid: data by BACoid. appears within the UI. Visible Indicates if the widget that table data appears in alphabetical order. Specifies Alphabetical: Order that table data appears in the order you defined the data. This order type As Defined: Specifies to the BACoid applies data criteria more type. that State the table data (UI Column) appear As Defined, you specify Note: When Generator data appears in the same order as the State Table. Generator State table selected, shows all points within the application. When cleared, shows only BACnet Exposed When All - Show Settings points. only when an application open. appears This attribute Note: you have the level of details that appear within the tree (1 to 5). Level Expansion Indicates appears only when you have an application open. Note: This attribute Provides a text box to search tree based on the node name. The search results the selection Filter node and its ancestors. include the matching up in the display order. Applies a subcomponent the Order property is set to As Moves when Defined. This attribute appears only when you have an application open. Note: a subcomponent in the display Moves order. Applies when the Order property is set to As down Defined. Note: appears only when you have an application open. This attribute Allows define a BACoid to display in the widget. Object Identifier the user to manually Adds the manually defined Object Identifier to the widget's list of BACoids. Removes the manually Object Identifier to the widget's list of BACoids. defined the selected in the list from the widget. Removes points the selected Adds in the list to the widget. points Confirm Dialog Box The following table provides a description of the confirm dialog box. See Perspective Layout . Table 47: Confirm Dialog Box Field Description Saves changes Yes to the UI. Discards changes to the UI. No Always saves or discards changes to the UI based upon your selection of Yes or No. Remember my selection 112 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

113 Specialized Widgets fields appear widgets: Advanced Data, BACnet Exposed, Connections, Local Display , The following for specialized State Selection and System View, Parameters, Information. Logic Tables, Widgets Table 48: Specialized Description Field of the widget. This name Indicates within the UI, and can be changed, if you wish. Name the name appears Data Criteria Type Only Not Applicable. if the widget Indicates within the UI. Visible appears Edit Dialog Box Mass box allows you to filter and mass The Mass Exposed and hardware points. Edit dialog edit BACnet Edit Dialog Box Table 49: Mass Description Screen Area all points. All Shows Show only those points Shows Exposed. Show BACnet Exposed that are BACnet Shows control points, sensors, miscellaneous points, and edited rows. Show Hardware Shows points Show BACnet Exposed Duplicates that have duplicates. points edited values. Show Edited Values Shows that have based on partial or full search terms. Filter Use to filter your results the BACnet property of the point. To select or deselect all entries, Exposed BACnet Exposed Use to change right-click the heading of this column. for the point. Use to type a name User Name the Standard Name is used. Note: If this field is blank, Use to enter for the point. Description a description Displays the full name of the point. Long Name Displays a Johnson Controls standard name for the module. Standard Name Saves and closes the dialog box. OK changes Discards changes and closes the dialog box. Cancel 113 Controller Tool Help: Perspectives

114 Upgrading System Files process allows upgrade an existing Controller Application File (CAF) to the latest modules The upgrade you to easily multiple default Utility allows you to upgrade The Bulk CAF Upgrade CAFs at once. selection or system selections. custom modules, see Importing and Exporting a Module in the Configuring a System For information on sharing section. Concepts Perspectives and File Upgrades System Module a CAF that requires you to either the tool automatically displays a dialog box prompting you open When an upgrade, the modules the modules at the current version. Depending on the type of upgrade, the tool displays upgrade or keep dialog boxes: a dialog two different modules that need to be upgraded and a dialog box that appears box that displays if no modules upgrading. The following list describes the two dialog boxes: require upgrades with module • system upgrades upgrades, included box appears displaying a list of standard modules module If the file requires then a dialog This dialog box also displays a list of user-modified modules, if any. The tool as part of the upgrade process. not upgrade user-modified modules; does , the tool does upgrade any proportional-integral-derivative however (PID) blocks located within user-modified modules. User-modified modules appear and PID Pre-Processor in the Control View with a triangle next to the module. • system upgrades without module upgrades If the file does not require module upgrades, then a smaller dialog box appears prompting you to upgrade the system. The tool upgrades blocks located within the application. any PID and PID Pre-Processor not to upgrade the modules, of Upgradeable is displayed to the right of the system name If you choose the status limited. With this limited functionality , the tool only allows you to: and the functionality of the tool becomes • edit detail views • commission the current application (default values only) • edit parameters Definition Wizard • view the Hardware Selection • view the System tree If necessary , the tool provides a menu option to upgrade your file at a later time (Tools > Upgrade System). CAF Upgrade Utility Bulk at once. Utility you to upgrade multiple CAFs allows The CAFs must reside on the same The Bulk CAF Upgrade computer as the tool. The utility upgrades the selected CAFs to the current version of the tool, including changes to system selection selections and any necessary updates to the modules defined within the files. The tool default any PID and PID Pre-Processor within located upgrades the application. blocks Utility Upgrading See the Using the Bulk CAF Upgrade Multiple and the Bulk CAF Upgrade Utility Dialog Systems Box sections for more information. Release Enhancements and Compatibility of the main, The revision of the software and the revision Note: number boot, and wireless firmware are numbers not in sync. For example, the software may be 10.2.0.3000 and the main code may be 6.2.0.1054. Release Modes 114 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

115 CCT offers a Release mode that allows you to work within and switch between various Release modes. You option Release modes Settings > Release Mode . See Changing Release Modes for more can change by selecting a System an available when you open a new CAF. See Selecting mode information. You can also choose Release information. for more an available Release mode when you first install CCT. If you open a CAF that is at a You are required to choose incompatible mode mode of the tool you are prompted to upgrade. See Opening a Controller Release with the Release for more information. You are also prompted to upgrade a CAF if you change to a newer Release Application File using the Settings > Release Mode menu. For further information see Change Release Mode Confirm Dialog mode . Boxes between Release modes include available objects, properties, signal types, feature functionality , The differences compatibility . In addition, field controllers are only compatible with a limited set of Release modes, and device most packages by the field controller installed. determined field controller you must switch If you wish to work Release mode that supports the field with a given to a specific before opening or creating a CAF. Release modes correspond to specific hardware controller releases. or firmware For example, 8.0 Release mode corresponds to the firmware and controllers released with the 10.4 / Firmware 10.0. Metasys is some general information to be considered before changing Release modes: The following installations that require controller upgrades to the latest release, we recommend that you transfer • For existing both Main Code and Boot Code to the device before transferring the CAFs. • In general, all controllers not need to be set at the same release level. You can use the latest on the site do of the tool to open and commission applications created at earlier revisions. revision any controller revisions that you can add Release engine . This means controller 10.x • You can mix and match on any network controllers 6.0 network engine . The only risk from mixed versions is that some enumerations based to a Release in the Release 10.x CAFs do not display properly in the engineering tab of the field bus. created process • The tool upgrade between major and minor revision levels (for example, 2.1 to 2.2 and 2.1 to works Applications do not automatically during Alpha and Beta site releases 10.x). upgrade (for example, 3.0.22 created to 3.0.25). transferring CAFs to controllers that have the same version as the CAF regardless of the • The tool supports version of the software. For example, you can transfer a CAF from a controller to a computer without upgrading the file, make any necessary to the parameters during Commissioning, and then transfer the CAF to changes . the controller This scenario does not apply when transferring Release 5.3 applications to a device from Release 6.0 Note: tool. configuration created by the tool are independent of the version of Microsoft • The CAFs SQL Server ® software (that is, you ® can open a CAF created on a computer running Microsoft SQL Server Express software on a computer running Microsoft SQL Server Engine [MSDE] software). Desktop transferring • The tool only supports Code and Boot Code to devices at the 6.x firmware version. Main For information on upgrading a CAF to a new Release mode see: • of Upgrading Effects • Next Steps After Upgrading • Upgrading a CAF 115 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

116 Point Expansion Revision Level Compatibility Module you upgrade field controllers Expansion Modules on the SA bus, you may need to upgrade • When with Point to the latest certain you transfer an application to a device . If this workflow is required, release devices before devices require an upgrade. an alert appears that indicates which on specific see the: information For more releases, • 10.3 / Firmware 7.0 and Later Release Mode • Mode 6.1 Compatibility Release 10.0 / Firmware • 5.1 Compatibility Release • Release 5.0 Compatibility 7.0 and Later Release Mode 10.3 / Firmware in mind upgrading to Release Mode 10.3 / Firmware 7.0 that any application built prior to this release Keep when Schedules, Notifications, Trend Logs, and Event Logs will have new date and time range with Calendars, validation rules be reviewed to verify functionality . and should Mode 10.3 / Firmware modifications were made In Release 7.0 the following Updates Scheduling • ime fields on Calendars, Schedules, New validations Event Logs, and Notification are run on the Date/T Trend Logs, Lists during the upgrade. This may change the current date/time settings of the object so it needs to Recipient post-upgrade be validated correct operation. It removes unspecified times and default them to zero to ensure Any dates (that is, a month of the range values. value over 12 or a day value over 31) are changed that are outside to show date. an unspecified • Updates to Inputs and Outputs to a Block or Module A new State output is added to the Occupancy Mode Determination for advanced object configuration support for field controllers. Interstage on Rotate is added to the Sequence Primitive which allows you to ignore stages for continuous Delay testing and configuration. device data or inform the system's ability to collect Reliability current you of for the Trend Log displays trend errors. communication testing the Set Present Value input has been added to hardware Analog For advanced Preset allows Inputs, you to manually value for testing, and the Interstage Delay on Rotate on the Sequence set a Totalization testing Primitive stages for continuous device you to ignore and configuration. allows • Upgrading Applications Controller models can only be used when there is a firmware release available in the release mode you are upgrading to. To use an application device, you must change your CAF to target a new for an incompatible This allows Refer the logic from an old application and use it with a compatible device. device. to you to keep a CAF for more details. Upgrading Mode 10.0 / Firmware Release 6.1 Compatibility Output Controller Module Upgrades The internal algorithm of the PID block has been updated to eliminate the rare possibility of adaptively tuning to a the PID Proportional state In these rare cases, where control. Band was calculated to a value very of two-position close to 0, the adaptive tuning logic now automatically slows down the sampling rate of the PID by a factor of 10 and resets the tuning parameters to their original values. 116 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

117 Central Plant Applications with Optimization box appears that notifies modules are included as part of the upgrade process. For • A new dialog you which at the current controller these modules are not upgraded. modules that are user-modified tool release, Mode 6.1, the upgrade process upgrades all chiller built prior to Release • For applications 10.0 / Firmware selectors, tower selectors, and equipment interlocks. After the upgrade, verify application selectors, pump some connections may have been removed during the upgrade process. An alert message functionality because needs if a connection appears to be replaced. N2 Protocol Compatibility Field Controller 10.1 / Firmware Mode communication modes between MS/TP and N2. When you At Release 6.2, you can switch to an N2 compatible controller , it appears as MS/TP . However , as you proceed through the upgrade first transfer process with the Transfer you will automatically switch communication modes. wizard, 5.1 Compatibility Release System Capacity Calculations Field Controller you upgrade 5.x to Release 6.0 or later, or use the System Selection update as When from Release Important: the calculated object part of your upgrade may increase, which could potentially exceed process, count capacity . system Controller Module Upgrades Output • Starting at Release Output Controller modules (including custom and user-modified modules) 5.1, the tool updates PID and PID Pre-Processor changes: that contain logic block Output Controllers used with Proportional Outputs with the latest logic and all of the - The tool fully upgrades necessary internal connections. Output Controllers used - The tool upgrades Outputs with the latest logic block changes; with Staged/MSC however , the tool is unable to make the connections between the blocks if they do not reside at the same level within the module the PID exists inside a Hybrid Activity , but the PID Pre-Processor exists (for example, of the Hybrid Activity the module). Instead, the PID logic blocks calculate their starting tuning outside within and deadtime. from the time constant parameters Controllers for 2-Pipe (Common - The tool upgrades Coils) with the latest logic block Output Heating/Cooling however , the tool does not make the connections between the blocks. Instead changes; the PID logic blocks calculate tuning parameters from the time constant and deadtime. their starting at Release parameters you rerun System Selection, the tool adds four EWMA • Starting that are 5.1, when (VAV Boxes, exposed Controllers doing Zone Control automatically Fan Coils, Unit Vents, to all of the Output and Heat Pumps). • Starting at Release 5.1, the tool makes changes during the upgrade process for Chiller Plant Automation (Central Cooling with Optimization) The tool updates the Chiller Selector for more efficient chiller selection, enhancements. for capacity chiller or less than the designed accounting lift, support for all 24 of the large tonnage at more standard and sequences, and to work with the new Cooling Tower Selector . configurations • Starting at Release 5.1, when you rerun System Selection for Chiller Plant Automation (Central Cooling with pumping. Optimization) for variable speed condenser water you can add support applications, Custom or Manual Tuned PID Value Upgrades Starting at Release 5.1, select custom-set attributes of the PID Pre-Processor are reset to default values after opening or upgrading the CAF in a later release of CCT. 117 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

118 PID Attributes affected are: Band • Proportional • Integral Time • Derivative Time • Saturation Time • Deadband • Interval Attributes are: affected Accumulator 4.1 and later) • Periodic Update (Release 4.0 and earlier) (Release Interval • Update Interval attribute became the Periodic Update attribute at Release 4.1. Note: The Update on PIDs, information Pattern Recognition Adaptive Control (PRAC+) Overview section. For more For more see the CAF in the PID values, Preserving PID Values Reset by Upgrading or Opening on preserving information see the Environments section. Post 5.1 Release Release 5.0 Compatibility Controller Field Capacity Calculations System Important: you upgrade from Release 5.x to Release 6.0 or later, or use the System Selection update as When process, the calculated count may increase, which could potentially exceed object part of your upgrade . capacity system Output Controller Module Upgrades at Release 5.0, a new Tuning Reset Network Input was added. The tool only creates • Starting this and connects feature System Selection. During the upgrade process, the interface to the PID is created, but is not if you rerun connected. • Starting 5.0, the Adaptive Tuning logic is disabled at Release the Output point associated with the Output when Controller is overridden. The tool only creates and connects this feature if you rerun System Selection. • Starting at Release feature updates were made to all Output Controllers: 5.1, the following PID Process ID updates parameters and timer settings per control loop type. The tool - General to key tuning these during the upgrade process or when you rerun System Selection. makes changes logic occurs when the current heating command is zero and the zone - Fast Switching is greater temperature than or equal cooling setpoint. This feature bypasses saturation timers when zones need to to the effective major transition to cooling (for example, during from heating changes to space load conditions or quickly setpoints). The tool only creates this logic if you rerun System Selection. - A new Lead Compensator is automatically integrated into Output Controller modules for zone control block on proportional This block valves. loops acts as an anticipator and reduces the impact of the non-linearity water ball or globe valves. The tool only creates this logic if you rerun System Selection. of typical Note: When Discharge Air Reset from zone is selected, the Lead Compensator is not used. - The PMAC is now 1/180th of the time constant rather than 1/30th with a minimum value of one second. Period This value change allows the Multi-Stage Controller (MSC) modules to reduce cycling of stages while 118 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

119 maintaining setpoint or unoccupied modes. The tool makes this change if you rerun in both the occupied Selection. System used to determine how long the unit stays on during unoccupied operation is - The Satisfied Timer Duration this change now 30 seconds. Selection; however , you may choose to if you rerun System The tool makes Timer Duration. the Satisfied manually update Effects of Upgrading mode enables you to load new firmware for the device and configure features Upgrading a CAF to a new Release The upgrade available of updating standard modules. with the new firmware. also has the benefit object upgraded, you have for system selection, common unique naming, and default controllers After preferences The current release mode of your application is displayed in both the status bar and the application are preserved. title bar. For further see: information • Next Steps After Upgrading • a CAF Upgrading • Release Enhancements and Compatibility After Upgrading Next Steps during an upgrade, verify all network settings and point assignments on the If you are changing the field device Hardware screen. After an upgrade, Define command points back to the previous state. Commands do you must not persist application file. If you transfer an application to a device, the previous application is deleted in the control . from the controller Controller Display was added at Release The Local a Local Controller Display into a controller 3.0. To incorporate installed at a release prior to 3.0, after upgrading, you must open the display configuration application within the tool (Display tab) and select points to display . Transfer the Main Code and Boot Code to the device, then the desired the upgraded CAF to the device. transfer the CAF to a device: the following to verify property functionality before After the upgrade, steps perform transferring your system capacity (memory usage). • Check As a best practice, keep your capacity at 80% or below . Note: • Review Schedules, Notifications, Trend Logs, and Event Logs. Refer to the Release Mode your Calendars, 10.3 / Firmware 7.0 and Later section for additional information about the changes that may occur in Scheduling. • Review your connection alerts. For additional information about the changes that may occur in connection alerts, refer to the Release 10.0 / Firmware 6.1 Compatibility section. Mode your logic and any customized you have. • Review modules • For more information on running a Simulation, see Simulating a System Run a Simulation. . For further see: information • Release and Compatibility Enhancements • Effects of Upgrading • Upgrading a CAF Modules Upgraded lists modules that may appear in the module upgrade Table 50 box when you upgrade your system. Use this dialog table to help determine whether to upgrade the system. This table lists the modules upgraded since the last release. 119 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

120 Table 51 lists modules state machine (FSM) details. that are updated with finite Table 50: Updated Modules Module Description Added 2 Pipe Pump LV, Cooling Pump Output LV, X Command Control: Float) Enum, Last Value (Boolean, X Command Command LV, OA Command LV, EA Damper2 Command EA Damper LV, OA Damper X Command LV, Reheat Pump X Command Pump LV, Preheat Command Damper2 LV. Alarm Added Alarms, 2 Pipe Pump X Alarms, Cooling Setpoint/Miscellaneous: Manager 2 Pipe Pump Latching X Alarms, Pump X Alarms. Pump Preheat X Alarms, Reheat Pump Added HW Pump Interlock Zone X Pump A Interlock, Zone Equipment Setpoint/Miscellaneous: X Interlock, B Interlock. X Pump state machine (FSM) detail. Added finite State Generator: Secondary Bypass Valve Override Check. Analog Override Check Added (Enum Control: dual pump totalization logic for 2 Pipe Cooling, Output and Runtime) Added Totalization Preheat, configurations. Reheat Control: Secondary Output Valve PID v50. Secondary Pump PID v50 Bypass Output Control: Added dual pump blocking protection logic for 2 Pipe Cooling, Preheat, Protection Blocking configurations. and Reheat Output Control: Added Sideloop. MSC 01 Through MSC 12 Output Control: Added information for ranking devices. Global Sequencer Input Setpoint/Miscellaneous: support for dual duct applications. N2 VAV SD Mode Added 120 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

121 Table 51: Modules Updated State Machine (FSM) Detail with Finite Group Module Module Name Status Setpoint/Miscellaneous Determination Flow Status Alarm Determination Equipment Interlock State Generation CW Sequencer Sequencer Economizer Waterside Dehumidification Sequencing Sequencing Smoke UUKL Control for UL-864 Low Limit Sequencing Recovery Exchanger Sequencing) Heat (Heat Humidification Sequencing of Airflow Sequencing (AHU Air Flow Loss Proving) AHU Stop Sequencer 100 OA Start Mixed Air Start AHU Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OADD) Sequencing Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OASD) Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD Occupied w HR) Occupied (AHU MASD w HR) Sequencing Sequencing Single Occupied Device Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC/AHU) (Fan Coil Zone Sequencing) Occupied Zone Sequencing (HP) v51 Occupied Zone UV Cycle 1 v51 Sequencing Zone Sequencing 2 v51 Occupied UV Cycle Sequencing UV Cycle Zone Occupied 3 v51 Occupied Zone Sequencing UV Cycle W v51 Zone Sequencing (VAV) v51 Occupied Zone Occupied (VAV) HFR Sequencing Sequencer) Sequencing Mixed Air ZN-T) (AHU Unoccupied Unoccupied (AHU Zone Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV) Autocalibration Sequence WarmupCooldown Sequencing Open Loop Control with Low Limit (Low Limit Control) Tower Control Cooling Tower Control (Fan Speed) Output Speed (Three Speed Motor) Fan Three Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve (Texas Multizone Sequencing) New Modules to the system lists and describes the new modules that have been added Table 52 since the last release. 121 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

122 Table 52: New Modules Description Module Control: Provides control. Damper Command OR Output OR logic for damper Provides Control: damper position in flow control control Output Control logic for the exhaust Damper Exhaust v51 module. Control on the VAV-Supply based modules, Damper Provides flow setpoint controlled by the Supply Damper Control module. Setpoint Control Output Flow Supply Control: Slave strategy . a heating uses HFR This module flow reset Valve Provides logic for secondary bypass valve PID, based on system State control Bypass Secondary Generation: pumping PID. and output Sequencing enable of the secondary mode. Enables Generation: AHU operation user to override Application Mode Override State the current Provides AND Setpoint/Miscellaneous: status. Status AND logic for the dual pump Output Translates the controllers' cooling control status commands into the Control: Outputs N2 VAV DD Common application. for the legacy outputs required the N2 mode Mode into the outputs required for Setpoint/Miscellaneous: commands N2 Terminal Translates Input application. the legacy Translates the VAV Dual Duct Box Mode, Water Flush, Warmup N2 VMA DD Mode Input Setpoint/Miscellaneous: required for the legacy application. Command, and Cooldown Command into outputs Selection System Updates the CAF, you have to replace the logic originally created by System Selection to receive After you upgrade the option modules and the functionality found for the system the updated in Table 53 . types Important: All previous user modifications are lost if you make changes to the system selections. (Lost changes include: sideloops, user added inputs, outputs, network inputs, network outputs, modules, changes in state tables, logic, and input/output setup.) parameters, Rerunning the System wizard on an application created at the current software release reflects Important: Selection made previously . When you rerun the System Selection wizard on an application the exact selections with software at a release earlier than Release 5.1, we recommend that you check the selected created in the tree to ensure that they match the equipment properly before completing the System nodes wizard. is especially important for Air Handling Unit (AHU) , Central Selection This recommendation Central Cooling with Optimization, and Central Cooling, applications, as these applications Heating have been updated with new and updated selection options over time. Table 53 lists system types and their changes since the last release of the tool. Use this table to help determine whether to modify Selection. See Rerunning System Selection for more information. the System Selection Table 53: System Tree Updates System Selection Tree Description changes All System the last release. No overall Types since No changes the last release AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Applications since No changes since the last release AHU 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Applications No changes since AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Applications the last release No changes the last release AHU 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Applications since No changes since the last release AHU Rooftop Unit Applications No changes the last release AHU Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Applications since No changes since the last release Fan Coil Applications 122 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

123 Table 53: System Selection Tree Updates System Selection Description Tree the last release No changes Unit Ventilator since Applications Heat Pump the last release Applications No changes since No changes since the last release VAV Single Duct Applications VAV Dual Duct Applications since No changes the last release the last release VAV Slave Single Duct Applications since No changes the last release VAV Slave Dual Duct Applications No changes since the last release No changes Heating Applications since Central the last release Cooling Applications since Central No changes the last release Central Cooling No changes Applications since with Optimization since the last release Custom Applications No changes since No changes Monitoring Supervisory Control Only Applications the last release No changes the last release Sideloop Applications since Files Backup your system, the tool creates a backup version of the original file and stores the file in the same When you upgrade file. The backup file has the same name as the original file; however , the backup file has a directory as the original extension. To use the backup file, you need .bak the extension from the file name. to remove Note: location of a CAF is C:\Users\username. The default Steps Perspectives a CAF Upgrading Notes: • creates a backup The tool automatically upgrading it. See the Backup Files section if you need of the CAF before to revert to the saved backup file, or for more information. • The Define button is disabled if the open CAF requires an upgrade and hardware is undefined. Hardware a system: To upgrade File menu, select Open . A dialog box asking the release mode the CAF should be opened in appears. 1. From which the CAF that requires the upgrade 2. Select OK . One of two dialog boxes appears, depending on whether and click the file you selected module upgrades: requires module • If the file requires a dialog box appears displaying a list of standard and user-defined upgrades, modules. Standard modules are included as part of the upgrade process. For more information about these standard modules, Upgraded Modules . see not require prompting upgrades, a smaller dialog box appears • If the file does you to upgrade the module CAF. Note: If the CAF has a field device that is not available in the current release mode, you will be prompted to change the CAF's field device. The CAF is converted to target a different device during upgrade if your a package device mode or you don't have in the new release for the device in your new is not supported release mode. 3. Click OK . The tool upgrades the system to the latest version. 123 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

124 Notes: • If you do not want the system or you want to upgrade the system at a later time, click No . to upgrade you can perform this process System Upgrade from the Tools menu. • At any time, by selecting complete 4. After Next Steps After Upgrading . the steps the upgrade, in Using Utility CAF Upgrade Systems Upgrading Multiple the Bulk a file, it upgrades you upgrade release mode of the tool. For example, if you are working When Note: to the current 10.2 / Firmware 6.2, the file is upgraded to Release in Release 10.2 / Firmware 6.2. For more Mode Mode on release see Release Modes . information modes, select . The Bulk CAF Upgrade CAF Upgrade Utility the Tools menu, Utility dialog box appears. Bulk 1. From Utility Dialog Box section. Bulk CAF Upgrade See the the Browse button next to the Directory field. The Select Directory dialog box appears. 2. Click to the location 3. Browse the CAFs are located on the computer . in which Open . The path appears field. 4. Click in the Directory within check of the selected directory , select the search in sub-directories are located 5. If the CAFs sub-folders box. of time it takes in sub-directories may lengthen the amount to search to load the CAFs into Note: Selecting the utility. Load CAF Files . The utility searches the selected directory 6. Click if selected) for existing (and sub-directories, CAFs, in the List of CAF Files in selected directory section of the utility. An Open and lists all files found indicates status the file. A No Upgrade Required status indicates that the file is already that you can upgrade version. at the current the check box next to each CAF you want 7. Select To upgrade all files, select the check box in the to upgrade. Selected column heading. Note: You can only select with an Open status. CAFs Perform Upgrade process begins with the first item in the list and indicates a status of 8. Click . The upgrade . After upgrading Successfully indicates an Upgrade Completed in progress status Upgrade the file, the utility to the next file in the list. and continues device has been selected If an incompatible you are upgrading, the upgrade is not Note: for any of the CAFs and a Missing Field Device successful message displays. CAFs with incompatible devices must error be upgraded (refer to Upgrading a CAF ). individually the status file. 9. Review for each Close . 10. Click to the previous After Note: command points back the upgrade, state. Commands do not persist in you must the control application file; and when the application transfers to the device , the previous application is deleted from the controller . System Selection Rerunning already selected Important: or opened a CAF in the tool, you can view and change the If you have a system made. All previous user modifications are lost if you make selections to the system selections changes (lost changes sideloops, user added inputs, outputs, include: inputs, network outputs, modules, network changes in state tables, parameters, logic, and input/output setup). For information on the types of systems available, see the User Interface and Applications sections. and selections Important: See the System Selection Updates section for a list of the system types and their changes since the system last release important details to know before rerunning of the tool, as well as other selection. 124 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

125 Important: Rerunning Selection wizard on a application created at the current software release reflects the System selections made . the exact previously the System When on an application created with software at a release Selection you rerun wizard that you check that nodes in the tree to ensure 5.1, we recommend earlier than Release the selected properly completing the System Selection wizard. This recommendation the equipment they match before for AHU, Central is especially Central Cooling with Optimization, and Central Heating important Cooling, because applications have been updated with new and updated selection options applications, these over time. When you use the System Selection update as part of your upgrade process from Release 5.x to Important: 6.0 or later, the calculated object count may increase, which could potentially exceed system Release . capacity information on object counts and calculating system capacity , see System Capacity Indicator . For more Selection Logic and Modification Rules System Upgrade taking an application modifications before rebuilding we recommend in the As a best practice, note of any important modifications after completing the System Selection Wizard. You can print a tool to aid you in making the custom System Selections using the System Selection Summary option copy of the current Report Options in the Summary dialog Printing Summary Reports in the User Interface section. box. See and use a CAF as a basis applications, other similar If you plan to create do not make any custom for building to the master modifications the changes to the new applications after rerunning the System Selection file. Make Wizard as needed. If you run System Selection after upgrading a CAF, the original logic created by System Selection in the previous version of the tool is completely with the logic that would result if you make the same selections for a new replaced with the newer version system of the tool. apply you modify the System Selections: rules any time The following Outputs, Network Inputs, and Network Outputs • Additional to the application are lost. Inputs, added or standard modules added to the application manually are deleted. • Any custom added to the application are deleted. • Any sideloops in the State • All values created by the System Selection process return to their default values, thus matching Tables created a system with the File > New option. you make to the logic created from the original System Selection process are lost. • Changes definitions from the original CAF are preserved, including the base controller , I/O Modules, Network • The hardware Devices, and parameters for each device (for example, the Device Address and BACnet ® ID). You may need to reassign Selection created points to the desired slots. System System To rerun Selection: rerunning system selection, we recommend saving a copy of the CAF to a location on your computer as a Before backup. Wizard Select System button. The System Selection 1. With a CAF open, appears with the Mechanical click the System Selection screen active. Note: If you made custom logic or changes after the initial System Selection process, do not add Inputs and Outputs for monitoring-only purposes by modifying the System Selection. For information on manually used adding modules, see the Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules) . 2. View the mechanical options for your system and make any changes. 125 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

126 Note: You can only make to System Selection in Configuration mode. See the System Selection Tree changes for information on tree behavior using the check boxes, radio buttons, and section and use (for example, and hide selections). in the tree to show the + and - next to a node System Selection Wizard appears Next Logic Selection screen active. 3. Click . The with the Control for your system and make any changes (Configuration mode only). 4. View the control logic options If you did not make any changes any of the changes you made), click Cancel to close 5. (or do not wish to apply system Cancel the selections Clicking laid down over your previously selected prevents the wizard. from being any customization changes made. Stop here. and overwriting changes made are lost when your selections are laid down. If you made changes , Any customization A Rebuild dialog Warning click Finish. box appears. Click Yes to continue. The software rebuilds Application and closes the wizard. you selected appears in the Control View in Configuration mode. your system The system to Existing New Features Applications Adding Enhancements and Compatibility section for information See the added at this release. Release on the new features to an existing application: To add new features the CAF to the new release. See the Upgrading a System section. 1. Upgrade 2. Reselect the system that are not automatically added to the application by the upgrade procedure: for the features any custom Configuring See Importing and Exporting a Module in the a. Export a System section. modules. section. b. Rerun See the Rerunning System Selection selection. This step rebuilds your application system with all current tool features. Important: When you use Select System to add features, it rebuilds your application in the same manner as building a new application selecting File > New). All previous user modifications (for example, changes to the system (lost changes include: sideloops, user are lost if you make selections outputs, modules, inputs, network outputs, inputs, changes in state tables, network added and input/output setup). Depending on the original application size, your logic, parameters, size increases from 4 to 8% when you add features using Select application System. c. Import modules and make connections. See Importing and Exporting a Module and Making a any custom in the a System Connection section. Configuring Custom Modules Upgrading Control modules containing If you exported logic blocks, or both, the modules do not receive the PID, PID Pre-Processors PID and PID Pre-Processor changes when brought back into the application (either by selecting the module from the Custom folder block palette of the Logic view, or by right-clicking a module category in the Control in the control New, and then adding Selection dialog box). view and selecting it from the Module custom control modules ( recommended To upgrade ): method 1. Create an application containing your custom modules at a version prior to Release 5.0 if you created the original module prior to Release 5.0. Otherwise, create an application containing your custom modules using Release 5.0. 2. Open 5.1 or later software and upgrade the CAF (including the modules) to the this file with the tool Release See the Upgrading a System section. new release. 3. View and verify the logic of your modules. Note: You may need to make connections between the PID and PID Pre-Processor logic blocks. 4. Export the module, and use this new version for all future applications. 126 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

127 To upgrade custom modules ( alternative method ): control View, add your custom module (New Module Selection). 1. In the Control from the palette 2. View the logic of the module. block, and a new PID block. 3. Add a new PID Pre-Processor and connect 4. Connect of the PID Pre-Processor to the PID inputs. of both blocks, the inputs the outputs connections of the old PID block and connect the outputs 5. Delete to the outputs. the output of the new PID block the old PID and PID Pre-Processor 6. Delete blocks. the logic of your modules. 7. View and verify 8. Export the module, for all future applications. and use this new version Perspectives Screens Upgrade (with Modules) System Screen See a System . Upgrading Upgrade (with Screen Table 54: System Modules) Field Description Displays information. Version Information tool version that require upgrade. Standard Modules Modules Modified that have modified by a user. User-modified modules are not Modules Modules User been in the upgrade. included Closes the System Upgrade screen and upgrades the CAF and modules. Yes Closes the System Upgrade screen and does not upgrade the CAF and modules. No Opens the Help system. Help Upgrade (without Screen System Modules) a System Upgrading . See (without Table 55: System Screen Upgrade Modules) Field Description the System Upgrade screen Closes the CAF. Yes and upgrades Closes Upgrade screen and does not upgrade the CAF. No the System the Help system. Help Opens Bulk CAF Upgrade Utility Dialog Box See the Upgrading Multiple Systems Using the Bulk CAF Upgrade Utility and the Bulk CAF Upgrade Utility sections for more information. CAF Upgrade Dialog Box Table 56: Bulk Utility Field Description file directory . Directory Text Box Selected Opens the Select Directory dialog box to choose the directory that contains the CAFs Button Browse to upgrade. CAF Files the selected file directory for CAFs to upgrade. Load Searches Button 127 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

128 Table 56: Bulk Dialog Box CAF Upgrade Utility Description Field selected, the utility searches within sub-folders of the selected directory . Check Box When in sub-directories Search the amount may lengthen in sub-directories to search Selecting of time it takes Note: to load the CAFs into the utility. version, and status of all CAFs found in the selected directory . List of CAF Files in selected directory Lists the file name, files appear Entries followed by version (descending), are sorted first), by status (Open Section and file name (alphabetical). Status: status) • Open: indicates the file is open (initial file being • Upgrade in progress: indicates the current processed completed • Upgrade successfully the file upgrade indicates Successfully: Completed • No Upgrade the software Required: indicates that the file version already matches (also indicated by a shaded row) version, and does not require an upgrade Begins process. Perform Upgrade Button the upgrade Closes the dialog box. Close Button 128 Controller Tool Help: Upgrading System Files

129 Setting Preferences the tool is set up to apply the Johnson ® standard object names, signals, System Selection type By default, Controls localization, and default The preferences option allows you to modify the selections, language controllers. default and create your own preference files for use in a specific region or customer Controls Johnson preferences job site. of preferences are: Example usage the default Johnson suffix for all temperature points is -T. You can edit the suffix so that • For Naming, Controls are -TMP. points all temperature Johnson Controls selection for all non-Zone Temperature • For Signals, is Nickel. You can the default Sensors so that the Zone Temperature is Platinum. edit the signal Selection preferences, you can set preheat coils on Air Handling Units to defaults • For System climates. for colder You also can match strategies to defaults for the local climate. economizer Selection preferences, has electric heat on its VAV boxes instead of the default • For System if your site typically the preference has electric new system you create , you can change heat selected by hot water so that each default. preferences, you can edit the preferences to run the tool in one of the available languages (for • For Localization German, French, or Greek), and change or create example, text of the UI to match local and the translated regional conventions. naming Controllers if your site uses a different VAV Box Controller instead of the default model • For Default preferences, for VAV systems, you can change defined to the other model. the setting Preferences are unique to the computer in which the tool is installed. The preferences are configured in the tool and used as defaults for any files created by the tool on that computer . Changing the preferences does not affect existing systems, only those after changing the preferences. created and export preference and signal preferences and for each System Selection You can import files for the naming or to use specific for different computers sites. tree to use on other preferences Preferences Setting Concepts Object Naming and Signal Preferences naming and signal preferences determine the naming conventions Object adding input and output to use when objects (through the System Selection process or when you manually add inputs and outputs after to your system preferences System and signals you define in the object naming The names are used when adding inputs Selection). and outputs during the System Selection process, as well as when adding them manually in the Control View. An object name of a defined Object Name Prefix and a defined Object Name Suffix. The object name is consists BLDG created For example, the Object Name Prefix them. added to the Object Name Suffix of SP by combining results in an object name of BLDG-SP . Similar functionality is available to define an expanded identifier for each object. A signal the physical communications connection for a given specifies or output. This connection allows the input controller to receive input values and send output values. types Use to determine the signal to use for point Table 57 on your system. 129 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

130 Table 57: Field Controller Types and Signals Point Supported Point Signals Type 1 Resistive Input (UI) Universal 1k RTD Nickel 1k RTD Platinum A99B Silicon NTC Type 2 Thermistor 2.25k 10K NTC Type L Thermistor Pressure VAV Velocity 0-10 VDC 2 4-20 mA 1 Dry Contact Maintained Dry Contact Binary Input (BI) Maintained Dry Contact Pulsed 0-10 VDC (AO) Analog Output 4-20 mA 3 (BO) Output Binary 24 VAC Incremental 24 VAC Maintained 24 VAC Pulse 4 24 VAC Start Stop 0-10 VDC (CO) Output Configurable 3 24 VAC Incremental 24 VAC Maintained 24 VAC Pulse 4 Stop 24 VAC Start Universal Output (UO) 0-10 VDC 4-20 mA 3 24 VAC Incremental 24 VAC Maintained 24 VAC Pulse 4 Stop 24 VAC Start 130 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

131 Table 57: Field Controller Types and Signals Point Supported Signals Point Type 3 5 Output (RO) Relay 24 VAC Incremental 24 VAC Maintained 24 VAC Pulse 4 24 VAC Start Stop 3 VAC Incremental 24 VAC-240 24 VAC-240 VAC Maintained 24 VAC-240 VAC Pulse 4 Stop VAC Start 24 VAC-240 Velocity Pressure on VAV Box Controllers Velocity Sensor Pressure Integrated Integrated suffix (such as SA-VP). Note: Velocity Application types use -VP as the named The Digital Integrated 1615 Velocity and 1630 Series VAV Box Controllers use the and 1620 versions Pressure signal type. The signal type for the earlier 1610 . Pressure Velocity Integrated of the VAV Box Controllers was actuator on VAV Box Controllers Integrated Actuator Integrated type is used the point. Examples of this include Network The SAB signal Sensor/Actuator Bus (SAB) Interfaces to provide Zone Sensor) and Network VSD. Sensor (Network Duct Sensor or Network Wireless Ethernet is used to indicate that a wireless Many to One sensor Interfaces Ethernet signal A wireless object value (AV, BV, MV) is created provides the data for this input. An appropriate the sensor passes Controller the Supervisory to which data. Input (UI) is scanned once per second. There 1 The Universal of up to one second in reading a contact status may be a delay change. 2 The UI on VAV Box Controllers does not support the 4-20 mA signal. 3 Incremental outputs use two binary hardware slots for opening and closing an actuator . 4 Start stop outputs hardware slots for starting and stopping a device. use two binary Outputs to drive 3-wire actuators; however , we recommend using triac outputs instead 5 You can use Relay incremental/floating Diff, Bldg Static, for the following Outputs VAV Flow Control, Airflow , Airflow%, Airflow control and Duct of Relay loop types: Static. System Selection Preferences Selection preferences set the default values The System trees of the System Selection Wizard as of the selection specified if your site requires a discharge air sensor on all VAV boxes, select Discharge by the user. For example, on the VAV Single Air Temperature Duct Tree. preferences before going through the System Setting process for similar systems allows you to save time Selection during selection and helps keep your systems consistent. Set preferences on the selection trees to match your local climate conditions. preferences only specify the starting values for the System Selection options. System These preferences you from making Selection particular selections on any given system. do not prevent Unit Preferences of measurement to use when working in the tool from the New System dialog box (File > New) You can set the units during the System Selection process. After setting the units and closing the tool, the tool remembers the last unit’s a System setting. units are used until you change them in the New System dialog box. See Selecting The selected (Creating a New System) in the Configuring a System section. 131 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

132 Import and Export Preferences and import object signal, and System Selection preferences using the Export and Import You can export naming, computer allows This functionality files (export) to access them from the same you to save for buttons. preferences or you can copy the files to use on other computers. later use (import), you export the naming and signal preferences , the default file name and location to save the preferences When are: • ObjectNaming.properties Controls\MetasysIII\\Configuration\Backup\Object • C:\ProgramData\Johnson Naming to save System preferences , the default you export and location Selection the preferences are: When file names • [applicationname].properties: Air Single - Mixed Duct.properties - 100% Air Single Duct.properties Outdoor Air Dual Duct.properties - Mixed Outdoor Air Dual Duct.properties - 100% - Rooftop Unit.properties - Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct).properties - Fan Coil.properties - Unit Ventilators.properties - Heat Pumps.properties Duct.properties (for VAV) - Single - Dual Duct.properties (for VAV) - Slave Duct.properties (for VAV) Single - Slave Dual Duct.properties (for VAV) Central Plant.properties - Simple Heating.properties - Central Cooling.properties - Central Cooling - Central with Optimization.properties - Custom Applications.properties Supervisory Control - Monitoring Only.properties - Sideloop.properties • C:\ProgramData\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\\Configuration\Backup\SelectionT ree When you export the localization preferences , the default file name and location to save the preferences are: • Application-PortFunction.properties (Naming tab) (Systems • System.properties Tab) • View.properties (Views tab) • [applicationname].properties Trees tab): (Selection - Mixed Air Single Duct.properties - 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct.properties - Mixed Air Dual Duct.properties - 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct.properties - Rooftop Unit.properties 132 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

133 - Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct).properties - Fan Coil.properties - Unit Ventilators.properties - Heat Pumps.properties (for VAV) - Single Duct.properties (for VAV) - Dual Duct.properties Single Duct.properties (for VAV) - Slave Dual Duct.properties (for VAV) - Slave - Simple Central Plant.properties Heating.properties - Central - Central Cooling.properties - Central Cooling with Optimization.properties - Custom Applications.properties Supervisory Control - Monitoring Only.properties - Sideloop.properties (that is, Application for the UI Resources tab) • CCTAppi18nResources.properties Resources • C:\ProgramData\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\\UI\i18n_user_modified\com\jci\resources the file names to indicate specific sites or uses. You also can save You can adjust locations. the files to different Localization Preferences preferences for the language that the tool UI uses. You can set localization you have support for more than When one language, the tabs of the Preferences - Localization screen contain content. The Localization screen also provides the option language. to set a default (United is the default language used by the tool UI, but you can change the default language to any English States) that appears in the Language list. When you set a default language, language appears in the any CAF file opened default rather than the CAF file language. A base translation language, languages is automatically of the following provided in the tool UI: • Japanese (Japan) • Norwegian (Norway) (China) • Chinese (France) • French • Dutch (Netherlands) • Swedish (Sweden) • Polish (Poland) • English (United States) • Czech (Czech Republic) • Spanish (Spain) • German (Germany) • Italian (Italy) • Portuguese (Brazil) • Russian (Russian Federation) 133 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

134 Note: For devices Controller Display , work on and save the application CAF in the desired language with a Local the CAF to the device so that its Local Display screen updates in the tool UI, and then transfer Controller (for The Local screen does not support non-ASCII characters Display Controller language. with the specified Japanese, and Russian). Chinese, example, as an environment to translate the other languages listed You can use the localization preferences in the Languages tab. and Localization tabs to run the tool in one of the available languages, You can edit the preferences of the Languages or Japanese. as German such tabs to change the translated View and modify local and regional naming conventions. the other text of the UI to match you can change the text that appears for the Configure button For example, in the tool UI. You also can edit the English tab. text on the UI Resources Setting Localization and Preferences - Localization Screen sections for details. See the Preferences Steps Setting Preferences Setting Default Naming and Signal Preferences menu, click Naming and Signal . The Preferences 1. On the Settings and Signal screen appears. See - Naming the - Naming and Signal section. Preferences a non-shaded text. and type the desired 2. Click cell to change Notes: • You also can use Ctrl+C text from a cell and use Ctrl+V to paste the copied text to another cell. See to copy Copying and Pasting Naming and Signal Preferences . • You cannot edit data in columns gray. Use the filter and sorting features to locate and view that are shaded and Signal items. Naming and Signal Preferences and Sorting Naming Filtering data of specific See the sections. Preferences 3. Repeat Step 2 for other name changes. To return to the original Johnson Controls standard Note: use the resetting options. See the preferences, Resetting and Signal Preferences section. Naming list. You also can type the first a cell in the Signal and select 4. Click signal from the drop-down column the desired letter of the signal type to quickly select it from the list. Note: You also can use Ctrl+C to copy text from a cell and use Ctrl+V to paste the copied text to another cell. See Copying Naming and Signal Preferences . and Pasting Use the the Signal has a drop-down menu, you cannot Because to select cells. column use your mouse Shift and arrow keys on your keyboard to select the desired cells in this column to copy and paste. You also can move the Signal column to another location in the table after changing one of the items to the desired and then use your mouse to select the cells to copy and paste. signal, 5. Repeat Step 4 for other signal changes. 6. Click OK . appear Note: to naming and signal preferences Edits in bold text. 134 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

135 Filtering Naming Preferences and Signal and signal preferences, characters that appear in the data you want to view. The To filter naming type one or more and rows filter searches Only items that contain the characters typed in the filter for items all columns that match. if you type te in the filter box to search for temperature preferences, the on the screen. box appear For example, all instances where te appears, results of case and location in the word. For example, te shows include regardless e Mainte nance Switch, Ste am, Boiler1 mperature, ring, and so on. The filter characters appear underlined in T Ente the results. Filtering is based on function or application name. For example, Temperature is a function. If you want to Note: change the suffix from -T to -TMP, you can change for Temperature and copy (Ctrl+C) and paste one entry the change to the other After you change the cell entry, the text in the entire row appears bold. (Ctrl+V) rows. and Signal Naming Preferences Sorting preferences, click the header of the desired To sort naming Clicking the header repeatedly results and signal column. switching between ascending and descending alphabetical order. in the items If necessary Note: move columns around. To move a column, select the column and move it to , you can manually location. the desired and Pasting Naming and Signal Preferences Copying column, 1. In the desired the non-shaded cell you want to copy. select 2. Press Ctrl+C to copy the preference. 3. Select the non-shaded cell to which you want to paste. To paste to multiple cells, click and drag multiple cells in the column. 4. Press to paste the preference. Ctrl+V Notes: • To mass columns for Application or Function. edit names, first filter on the gray-shaded column to select menu, you cannot use your mouse the Signal cells. Use the Shift has a drop-down • Because to select the desired cells in this column to copy and paste. keys on your keyboard and arrow the Signal column to another location You also can move after changing one of the items to the in the table desired and then use your mouse to select the cells to copy and paste. signal, Naming Preferences Resetting and Signal naming and signal preferences in a single row to the Johnson To reset standard default value, select a cell Controls in the row to reset and click Reset. To reset naming and signal preferences in all rows to the Johnson Controls standard default values, click Reset All. Note: The Reset All functions reset the preferences to the Johnson Controls standard default values and Reset of user session. regardless Naming and Signal Preferences Exporting Export dialog box appears. 1. Click . The Save the default file name 2. Keep or adjust the name to indicate a specific site or use. of ObjectNaming.properties Note: It is not necessary to export/save a separate copy of the Johnson Controls standard preferences because the Reset All functions reset the preferences to the Johnson Controls standard default values and Reset regardless of user session. 3. Keep the default location to save the file or adjust it as desired. 135 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

136 Note: The default is C:\ProgramData\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\\Configuration\Backup\Object . The file saves and you can access it from the same computer for later use or you can copy the file 4. Click Save . to use on another computer Preferences Naming and Signal Importing Import . The Open dialog box appears. 1. Click file to import. The default file name is ObjectNaming.properties. the object 2. Select properties to browse to the location where Note: the file if you saved it to a different location You may need you saved or received from the default the file from others. . The preferences Preferences and populates the Naming and Signal Open screen. file opens 3. Click System Selection Preferences Default Setting on the System Selection tree types, see the Applications section. For information on the System For information Selection Wizard, System Selection Wizard in the Configuring a System section. see System Selection To set default preferences: Selection click Selection menu, - System System screen appears. The left 1. On the Settings . The Preferences contains the different System Selection trees available. See the Preferences - Naming and Signal section. pane 2. Navigate to and select Selection tree to modify . The tree appears in the right pane of the screen. the System and remove here determine to fit your specific needs. The options you choose 3. Select how the tree selections or make in the System Wizard when you add a new system appears changes to an existing system’ s Selection selections. Make selections by: • selecting a check on and clearing a check box to turn a setting off box to turn a setting an option button that item from among several possible options • clicking to select to the original use the Reset Controls standard preferences, To return option. See the Resetting Johnson Note: Preferences section. Selection System 4. Click OK . System Selection Resetting Preferences To reset Selection preferences, click Reset. The current System Selection tree resets to the Johnson Controls System default standard tree values. The Reset function resets the preferences to the Johnson Note: standard default values regardless of Controls user session. Exporting System Selection Preferences 1. In the Preferences - System screen, select the System Selection tree that you want to export. Selection Export dialog 2. Click box appears. . The Save the default file name 3. Keep or adjust the name to indicate a specific site or use. of [application].properties Notes: • The default file name for each selection tree is listed in the Import and Export Preferences section ([applicationname].properties). to export/save a separate copy of the Johnson Controls standard preferences because • It is not necessary the Reset function resets the preferences of the displayed selection tree to the Johnson Controls standard default values regardless of user session. 136 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

137 4. Keep the default to save the file or adjust it as desired. location The default location Controls\MetasysIII\\Configuration\Backup\SelectionT ree 5. Click it from the same computer for later use or you can copy the file Save . The file saves and you can access . to use on another computer Importing System Selection Preferences Selection preferences: To import System System - screen, select the System Selection tree that matches the type you want 1. In the Preferences Selection to import. Import . The Open dialog box appears. 2. Click 3. Select the desired file to import. You may need to browse to the location where you saved the file if you saved it to a different location Note: or received the file from others. from the default, Open . The preferences and populates the System Selection preferences tree. 4. Click file opens Preferences Localization Setting States) is the default language English by the tool UI. However , you have the option to set a different (United used as the default language. When you set a default language, language appears in the default any CAF file opened language, than the CAF file language. A base translation of the other languages is provided (see Localization rather listed ). You can use the localization as an environment to translate the other languages Preferences in preferences the Languages tab. To set localization preferences: 1. On the Settings menu, select Localization . The Preferences - Localization screen appears. See the Preferences - Localization Screen section. tab, select the check of the desired language used by the tool UI. 2. On the Languages boxes locale, as German (Germany). tab, click the desired such 3. On the Localization like to set this language as the default Note: select the Use Default Language When If you would language, Any CAF is opened CAF Language) check box. If you select this check box, any CAF file (Ignore opened in the default language, rather than the CAF file language. appears to If you are selecting Important: exit the tool. Then, open the tool again a locale/language for the first time, automatically populate the language data. 4. On the Naming tab, type the desired text translation in the Translated Value column. 5. On the Systems tab, type the desired in the Translated Value column. text translation text translation Value column. 6. On the Views tab, type the desired in the Translated Trees tab, select a selection tree in the navigation pane and type the desired text translation 7. On the Selection Value column in the right pane. in the Translated 8. On the Local Display Dictionary tab, type the desired text translation in the Translated Value column. 9. On the UI Resources tab, type the desired text translation in the English Value and Translated Value columns. Note: your UI Resources changes, you must export the changes, then restart the tool. See Exporting To save Localization Preferences . 10. Click Save . 11. Click Close . 137 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

138 Exporting Localization Preferences tab of the Preferences - Localization click Export . The Save dialog box appears. 1. On the desired screen, file name 2. Keep to indicate a specific site or use. or adjust the default the name Notes: for each file name in the Import and Export Preferences section. • The default tab is listed a separate copy of the Johnson Controls standard preferences because • It is not necessary to export/save All functions the Reset the preferences to the Johnson Controls standard default values and Reset reset of user session. regardless 3. Keep to save the file or adjust it as desired. location the default location is C:\ProgramData\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\\UI\i18n_user_modified\com\jci\resources Save 4. Click and you can access it from the same computer for later use or you can copy the file . The file saves to use on another . computer Localization Preferences Importing - Localization dialog click Import . The Open 1. On the desired box appears. screen, tab of the Preferences properties file to import. the localization 2. Select Notes: file name for each tab is listed in the Import and Export Preferences section. • The default • You may need to browse where you saved the file if you saved it to a different location from to the location or received the default the file from others. Open . The preferences file opens and populates the Preferences 3. Click screen. - Localization Setting Preferences Screens Preferences - Naming and Signal See Setting Default Naming and Signal Preferences . Table 58: Preferences - Naming Screen and Signal Field Description of the table. Type one or more letters appearing in the data you Use to filter the content Text Box Filter preferences, in the field. See the heat to view heating to view. For example, want type section. Filtering Naming and Signal Preferences (Sorting) Headers Column Naming and You can sort the contents in ascending/descending order. See the Sorting section. Signal Preferences edit items of the application the object belongs. Name in which in this column. Application Name Column You cannot Function of the object (for example, used for an Analog Input or for a command). You cannot Column Name Function in this column. edit items of the object’ s name. You cannot edit items in this column. Name Derived Column Format Object Object Prefix and a defined of a defined Name Suffix. An object name consists Name them. For example, the Object Name Prefix is created name The object by combining Name Suffix of SP results in an object name of BLDG-SP . BLDG added to the Object Full prefix name. You can edit items in this column. Name Prefix Column of the object Full suffix of the object name. You can edit items in this column. Name Suffix Column 138 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

139 Table 58: Preferences - Naming and Signal Screen Field Description Full prefix Description Prefix Column of the object’ in this column. s Expanded ID. You can edit items Description Suffix Column ID. You can edit items s Expanded Full suffix of the object’ in this column. Signal See the Object Naming and Signal Preferences Default signal used for the application. section. Reset Controls standard default value. See the Resetting the selected Resets row to the Johnson Preferences and Signal Naming section. All Reset Controls values. all rows to the Johnson Resetting Naming standard Resets See the default section. Preferences and Signal a saved object naming preference file and populates the naming and signal Opens Import with its data. preferences and Export Preferences section. screen See the Import and signal to a file so you can access it from the same computer naming Saves preferences Export . See the Import and Export for later use or you can copy the file to use on another computer Preferences section. Applies the changes and closes the Preferences - Naming and Signal screen. Save the Preferences - Naming and Signal screen without applying the changes. Close Closes the Help system. Opens - System Selection Screen Preferences Setting Default System Selection Preferences . See - System Selection Screen Table 59: Preferences Description Field Tree Selection System available. For information on the system types, see the Applications System Selection trees Panel Navigation Selection Selection Wizard in see Wizard, System section. on the System For information section. Configuring a System the Panel Display changes to the default See the Setting Selected tree and allows selections. you to make section. Preferences System Default Selection the selected tree to the Johnson Controls standard default tree values. See the Resets Reset Selection Resetting section. System Preferences a saved file and poplulates Selection tree preference Opens the screen with its data. System Import and Export Preferences section. Import See the Saves System Selection tree preferences to a file so you can access it from the same computer Export the file to use on another computer Import and Export . See the for later use or you can copy section. Preferences the changes and closes the Preferences - System Selection screen. Save Applies applying Closes Selection screen without - System the changes. Close the Preferences Opens the Help system. Preferences - Localization Screen by the tool UI. A base English is the default language used States) translation of the other languages is (United provided (see Localization Preferences ). You can use the localization preferences as an environment to translate the other languages listed in the Languages tab. 139 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

140 Note: with a Local , work on and save the application CAF in the desired language For devices Controller Display Controller screen updates so that its Local Display in the tool UI, and then transfer the CAF to the device Controller Display screen does not support non-ASCII with the specified (for language. The Local characters Japanese, and Russian). Chinese, example, See Setting Localization Preferences . Screen Table 60: Preferences - Localization Description Field Displays and allows you to choose the language the tool UI uses. The Tab Localization available, a list of the locales tab. on the Languages locales listed on this tab are defined when you select the Use Default Language Use to set a chosen language as the default language When check box. CAF Language) (Ignore Any CAF is opened the locale for the first time, additional localization data must be loaded. Prior to Note: When changing the tool. any applications, building restart When changing the locale for the first time, additional localization data must be loaded. Prior to Naming Tab Note: the tool. restart building any applications, text in the tool. For example, text in the desired Filter, Use to enter language for the English for Exhaust that should appear in place of the English text. The table in this you can enter text in another language tab has the following columns: • where the item appears in the tool software (for example, Application). Context Indicates Id: English text to be translated. English • Value: • Translated Value: Indicates the text translation. the preferences on this tab. You can import and export Use to enter Systems text in the tool. For example, for Rooftop Unit, Tab text in the desired language for the English appear of the English text. The table in this that should you can enter text in another language in place tab has the following columns: Unit Indicates in the tool software (for example, Air Handling the item appears • Id: Context where Configuration). English text to be translated. • English Value: Indicates Value: Translated the text translation. • You can import and export the preferences on this tab. text in the desired language for the English text in the tool. For example, for Device Views Use to enter Type, text in another that should appear in place of the English language in this you can enter text. The table columns: tab has the following Context Id: Indicates where the item appears in the tool software (for example, HW device view). • English Value: English • text to be translated. Indicates the text translation. Value: Translated • and export the preferences on this tab. You can import text in the desired language Selection text in the System Selection trees. For example, Trees Use to enter for the English text in another language that should appear in place of the English text. Type, you can enter for Device of all the system selection trees (for example, Fan Coil) to This tab has a navigation tree in the left pane The right pane the context. columns: select has a table with the following English text to be translated. English • Value: Value: Indicates the text translation. • Translated the preferences on this tab. and export You can import 140 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

141 Table 60: Preferences - Localization Screen Field Description settings for the tool UI. The table in this tab has the following columns: Tab Languages Use to define the locale the numerical Id: Locale • ID of the locale. Indicates country (Sweden) Swedish • or English Name: of the language. Indicates and associated the name for example. (United States), the abbreviation code for the country • (Sweden), the code is Country Code: Indicates . For Swedish the code SE. For English (United States), is US. the code for the language Indicates in the country . For Swedish (Sweden), Code: Language • spoken States), the code is en. the code is sv. For English (United the locales available on the Localization tab. • Published: for selection Indicates on this tab. or sort the preferences import, You cannot export, text in the desired language for the English text in the tool dictionary (enumeration sets). Local Display Use to enter sets typically in this tab has the by the display . The table enumeration This tab includes Dictionary Tab only those used following columns: Indicates of the enumeration set and the ID of the item in the dictionary . Id: the name • Context • English Value: English text to be translated. the text translation. Indicates Value: Translated • on this tab. Changes made on this tab apply only to your You cannot import and export the preferences of the tool. local instance text for items UI Resources and dialog box names, for example) in the Tab in the tool UI (buttons, Use to enter messages, the name text in another button, you can enter to change desired language. For example, of the Configure in place text in the button.configure row. The table in this appear that should language of the English tab has the following columns: Value: item to be translated. • English English Indicates Value: the text translation. • Translated on this tab, as desired. You must import You can edit both the English and the selected language and on this tab, and then restart the tool for the changes to take effect. the preferences export Resets all values to the defaults. Reset All Import Import file and populates the screen with its data. See the preference and Export Opens a saved section. Preferences Saves preferences to a file so you can access it from the same computer for later use or you can copy Export computer . See the and Export Preferences section. the file to use on another Import the changes and closes the screen. Save Applies Closes the screen. If you did not save your changes, a dialog box appears asking if you want to save Close before closing the screen. them Opens the Help system. 141 Controller Tool Help: Setting Preferences

142 Configuring a System a system involves or selecting a system, modifying a system, and defining hardware for a Configuring opening an existing system. Open option from the File menu, select a new system CAF in the tool using You can open the Wizard, device a Controller Application File from an existing Selection to a computer . using the System or transfer set naming a new system Selection Wizard, you can optionally the System preferences and selecting Before using Wizard defaults to customize to your specific System See the Setting Preferences section for more Selection needs. information. standard file or the System Selection Wizard, you can create systems in the tool If you use a Johnson Controls system Controls We recommend using Johnson to common standards whenever possible. according configurations. customization outside what is provided by the Johnson Controls standards, you can create If your system requires control custom removing, and modifying items. logic in the tool by adding, This section how to add and configure a system in Configuration mode. For information on transferring a covers Application File, see the Operations section. See the Simulating a System and Defining Hardware Controller Transfer your system. after configuring sections the user interface, see the User Interface section. For information about For information of systems about the types and details on the selections available, see the Applications sections. you can create Setpoint/Miscellaneous Modules , State See the Modules , and Output Control Modules sections for Generation information in the tool and the applications in which they are used. on the modules performing in the tool, see the Getting Started section for guidance. Before tasks Preferences Concepts Setting Selection Wizard System Selection Wizard to identify Use the System equipment, its related control components, and the control mechanical strategy . The Mechanical System Selection screen allows you to choose the mechanical components for your system, such as actuator Use the Control Logic Selection screen to select the control logic strategies to type or fan type. the mechanical system. control you to a new system, File > New option to open the New System dialog box, which When use the creating allows a release and select compatible field devices. mode to specify the name of the system specify You are also prompted the desired system type and configuration. After completing this dialog box, the System Selection and to choose opens Wizard you to make the selections corresponding to your system. See the Selecting a System prompting a New System) (Creating section. New System dialog box also provides access to the Online Library , a resource that enables The to download, users publish CAF Files, Controller Templates, and share Definitions, and CCT Modules. This feature is only Equipment available to Technician licensed users. Use the Select button to open the System Selection Wizard and to review and make changes to previously System selections. overwrite changes you make are lost because these selections made the previous Any customization See the System and Modifying selections. Selections section. Viewing System See the and Configurations and System Selection Tree sections. Types Click Sideloop to open a System Selection Wizard specific to defining a sideloop. See the Creating a Sideloop and Sideloop sections for more information. Applications System Selection Wizard Help Screen As you make selections in the System Selection Wizard, you can press F1 to view the Help screen. The Help screen in the wizard. displays Help section for the item you are viewing and changes as you select different items the module Click the links on the Help screen to view module information. 142 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

143 System Types and Configurations selecting a system, the overall type of system and a specific configuration to create. For When you first choose VAV as the system Duct as the specific configuration to use. See the you may select example, type and Single (Creating a New System) steps and the Applications section for details on the System Selection Selecting a System options: Units Air Handling • Duct Applications Mixed Air Single • Outdoor Duct Applications 100% Air Single • Mixed Air Dual Duct Applications • 100% Air Dual Duct Applications Outdoor • Rooftop Unit Applications • (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Multizone Applications Fan Coil -- Fan Coil Applications -- Unit Ventilator Unit Ventilators Applications -- Pump Applications Pumps Heat Heat VAV • VAV Single Duct Applications • VAV Dual Duct Applications • VAV Slave Single Duct Applications • VAV Slave Dual Duct Applications Heating Central Central Heating Applications -- Central Plants Cooling • Central with Optimization Applications Cooling • Cooling Applications Central Central Plant -- Simple Central Plant Applications Simple Custom Applications -- Custom and Monitoring Supervisory Control Only Applications Monitoring Supervisory Only -- Custom and Monitoring Supervisory Control Only Applications Control Selection Tree System and Control Wizard System Selection The System has a Mechanical Logic Selection screen Selection screen selection tree/folder structures for selecting system options. containing The selection trees folders that you can expand and collapse, check boxes, and radio buttons. The check contain let you include or exclude an option. The radio buttons let you select one option from a list. Click the + and - boxes next to a node in the tree to show and hide selections. When you select node in the selection tree, its child nodes become available for selection. You cannot a parent a child node its parent first selecting select node. without another are tied together Nodes a node option, logically node option activates or deactivates so that if you select accordingly . This functionality helps prevent you from making selections that are not used together . For example, as in the VAV Single Tree’s Mechanical System Selection screen, when you choose Box Heating Duct Selection Electric Staged, the Hot Water option is disabled. 143 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

144 Another example Discharge Air Control for Temperature Control Strategy on an Air Handling Unit is if you choose the Discharge Air Temperature on the Control Logic Selection portion of the wizard is disabled. The system, sensor sensor is disabled a Discharge Air Temperature sensor is required for the Discharge Air Temperature because selected. , and is automatically strategy control check boxes and radio Nodes are options that are automatically selected in the selection tree that do not have buttons nodes are required for a system such as a Fan for a Fan Coil application or a Zone Temperature by the wizard. These Unit Control application. Sensor for any Terminal for each type define commonly expected system configurations and control provided system The tree selections selections are simply a place to start. You can customize strategies. configurations, if necessary . The default these As you make selections in the System Selection Wizard, you can press F1 to view the Help screen. The Help Note: displays the module Help section of the item you are viewing and changes as you select screen different items Click the links on the Help screen to view module information. in the wizard. Configuration In Configuration and modify the contents of your system. For example, you can add mode, you can add, remove, state inputs You can also modify your system’ s control logic. You can connect and define and an input generators. Steps add and remove ports. See the Setting Preferences and expose section for details on outputs, logic blocks, the configuration tasks. See the User Interface section how to perform of the user interface and its for a description contents. a system and configured using the System Selection Wizard, the modules and logic provided Once is selected your system as expected. Only modify logic if you require a unique control control Selection Wizard that the System did not address. Configuration Details dialog box allows you to view and modify the attribute/parameter The Details output, and hardware details of , input, modules/blocks. In addition, you can view the details of any BACnet Exposed AV output within a module or block. See the Setting Steps section for details on how to perform the configuration tasks in the Details dialog Preferences User Interface for a description of the Details dialog box interface and its contents. box. See the section Simulation your system, your system is configured properly After configuring mode. Simulation mode allows verify in Simulation it were in Commissioning mode. This option allows you to test your configuration as though you to see your system adjustments before setting up communications to devices and make further in the workflow . See the and going Simulating section for information on how to simulate your system. a System Definition Hardware configuring your system, define the hardware for your system using the Define Hardware dialog box. This After to hardware box allows the target controller , map points you to identify slots, manage package files, map dialog points to an N2 controller , and define network settings. See the Defining Hardware section for details. Peer-to-Peer Communication configuration communication directly between two devices on a trunk (for example, The peer-to-peer provides between two Field Controllers). This setup allows a device to read values communication device or from another write to it using Network Input Modules or values Output Modules . To read a value from another device, Network set up peer-to-peer communication using a Network Input. The recommended method for peer-to-peer communication to devices). is reading devices (as opposed to writing values from other To write a value to another device, values set up peer-to-peer communication using a Network Output (for example, to send a value to a third-party device). to enable Configure Reference attribute in the Network Input or Output the Peer or disable the communication. 144 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

145 Peer-to-Peer Communication Devices: N2 devices do not support communication. Note: peer-to-peer Controls • communication occurs between two Johnson Controls devices (for Devices: Johnson Peer-to-peer The updates are done inputs Controllers). based on change of value (COV). example, for network two Field to the output reference when its value changes. write Network outputs MS/TP Device: Peer-to-peer • occurs between a Johnson Controls device and a Third-Party communication MS/TP (for example, a Field Controller and a TEC). In this case, the reference is a poll with a third-party device only when cannot which output writes to its output reference be changed. poll rate of 30 seconds, The network changes. a value Guidelines for Peer-to-Peer Communication: not exceed 15 network • You should with peer references per device. outputs • We recommend input references to a single device. That is, do not define a single device a limit of 50 network of peer-to-peer data to more devices. For example, if you have 10 network input as the source than 50 other you have devices, input references on four devices, on three 50 total references (3 x references and 5 network 10 + 5 x 4). Peer-to-peer communication requires processor time on both devices and bandwidth on the MS/TP Note: bus. communication that you do not exceed a token loop time of 2 seconds (2,000 milliseconds) under normal • We recommend conditions. the longer in mind that the more peer-to-peer references you define, operating it takes for the Keep to pass around the loop. token method of peer-to-peer • The preferred for Field Controllers is to use Network Inputs to reference communication a source. Using a Network Input with a referenced source allows the reliability of the reference to be used in logic (for example, for referencing analog input). the OA-T Outputs to send to a peer controller , make sure that the destination is only sent a • If you use Network a value source using fan-in references from multiple Network Outputs). from a single (that is, avoid value peer-to-peer communication • You must mode. configure in the Configuration If you change peer-to-peer references in Commissioning mode, the communication works until the Note: loses power controller the controller resets, the peer-to-peer reference changes are lost. To resolve . When this problem, the necessary peer-to-peer communication changes in the Configuration mode, then make the application . transfer to the controller of Peer-to-Peer Communication: Examples Air Temperature applications • Many Input for Outdoor provide when a physical sensor is not installed. a Network You can use peer-to-peer communication to reference the OA-T analog input on a different controller on the same MS/TP Bus. Field BI (SF-S) the Unit Enable only VAV boxes to reference the Supply Fan Status of cooling • You can configure input Unit that serves them. of the Air Handling need to configure Global • You may no longer in the Supervisory Controller . For example, in previous Data Sharing releases you had to define an Outdoor Air Temperature object in the Supervisory Controller and use Global Data Sharing to write the Outdoor Air Temperature to the necessary Field Controllers. Using peer-to-peer MS/TP communication, analog inputs on the Field Controllers located on the same the OA-T Field reference Bus. For more information, see the following sections: • Setting Up Peer-to-Peer Communication • Peer-to-Peer Communication Disabling • Input and Output Objects (see the specific object listed) 145 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

146 Control View Connections in Logic View Option View Connections option tree on the Logic View to view the logic of the entire Use the Control in the Activities is available application. in all modes This option of operation. Use this feature logic. You can use standard this feature. to view and print application edit logic using You cannot as select, pan, zoom, Logic and print. When you are viewing application logic, the View options such Trace mode, palette, the Set Default Element button, and the Export Module button Control . Block do not appear logic diagram in the same order as the Control View columns. The modules flow from The application is organized order: and Miscellaneous Inputs, Inputs, to the right side in the following (Inputs); the left side of the screen Network State modules; modules; Output Control modules; and lastly, Network Outputs, Setpoint/Miscellaneous Generation and Miscellaneous (Outputs). Outputs, Viewing See the Application Logic section. and Printing Explorer FSM Machine (FSM) Explorer enables you to view the current state and all potential states of an application. The Finite State States State the current Current or pseudo-state, while the Possible Next list displays columns display The state next states for the current state. the possible Explorer provides The FSM functionality during Simulation and Commissioning. For further information additional see . FSM Explorer about module, see State Generation Modules . For information a specific on the various For information to view the FSM Explorer , see Viewing the FSM Explorer . ways Setting Preferences Steps Selecting a System (Creating a New System) For information on the types you can create and details on the selections available, see the User Interface of systems Applications sections. and (create a system a new system): To select . The 1. On the File menu, dialog box appears. New select New System 2. Select Field Device and a Release Mode , and then click Ok . an Intended If you select a device, the Release Mode Note: to the earliest switchable release mode that is list defaults applicable A release mode does not appear in the list if it is incompatible with a field to that device. Similarly with a release is incompatible device. mode it is grayed out. A status message , if a field device if there are no available release modes for the selected field device. appears 3. Select the Online Library option to download customized CAF files along with a sequence of operation, flow diagram, and points list. This feature to Technician licensed users only. Note: is available System Name field, enter a name 4. In the Invalid characters include: for the system. : * ? " < > | / [ ] # @ 5. From the System Type list, select a type. 6. From the System Configuration list, select a type, if the options appear . 7. From System of Units list, select Imperial or Metric . the Note: After setting the units and closing the tool, the units that you select are recorded, and are selected the next time that you use the tool. See Unit Preferences in the Setting Preferences section. 146 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

147 8. To cancel the current and restart the process, click Change Release Mode , otherwise click OK . The action Selection Wizard with the Mechanical System Selection screen active. See the System Selection System appears for information on tree behavior how to use the check boxes, radio buttons, and use (for example, Tree section and hide selections). in the tree to show and the + and - next to a node options for your system, then click Next . 9. Select the mechanical logic options for your system, then click Finish . Your selection is applied to your system, and 10. Select the control closes. the wizard Notes: applications outside of the options • If you wish to create in the standard system selection specialized available see the Creating Custom Applications section. trees, • As you make selections Selection Wizard, you can press F1 to view the Help screen. The in the System displays the module of the item you are viewing and changes as you select different Help screen Help section Click in the wizard. to view module information. items the links on the Help screen Opening a Controller Application File Opening a Controller Application File in the User Interface section. See on the types For information and applications, see the User Interface and Applications sections. of systems or Viewing Entering Job Information or view job information associated with the open CAF: To enter select Job Information . The Job Information dialog box appears. 1. On the Tools menu, 2. Enter or view the data in the Operator Name , Job Name , Contract Number , and History fields as described in the Job Information section. screen OK . 3. Click Renaming a System The steps vary depending on your perspective. The following steps apply to editing the your system to rename using the Classic View perspective. If you are using a different perspective, navigate to the details system name Sequence object and begin at Step 2. view of the Control open, 1. With a system System Information link on the status bar. click the Edit 2. Click . Name field, type the desired name. Invalid characters include: 3. In the : * ? " < > | / [ ] # @ 4. Click OK . Note: This option does not change the name of the CAF. Viewing and Modifying System Selections Important: If you have selected a system or opened a CAF in the tool, you can view and change the already made. to the system user modifications are lost if you make changes selections selections All previous network include: user added inputs, outputs, (lost changes inputs, network outputs, modules, sideloops, changes in state tables, parameters, logic, and input/output setup). For information on the types of systems available, see the User Interface and Applications sections. and selections See Rerunning System Selection in the Upgrading System Files section for guidelines on viewing and modifying system selection. 147 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

148 Viewing and Modifying Details Details Dialog concept and Details Dialog Box screen topics in the User Interface section. See the Box related For information and output data of a selected module/block, see attributes/parameters, on hardware input, sections. Logic , and Input and Output Objects , the Modules Blocks Details: To view and modify dialog box for the desired module block as follows: 1. Access the Details in a Table Data • , double-click the module or right-click the module and select View For a module widget Details. For a module • view , click View Details. Tables in a State For a block View , right-click the block to view and select View > Details. • in the Logic For a module in the Logic View Activities tree , right-click the module and select View Details. • For a module • Exposed widget , right-click the module and select View Details. in the BACnet dialog box appears or block or state selection modules. A table of The Details with the data for the module in the left pane appear of inputs and outputs appears in the right attributes/parameters of the view, and tables of the view. pane you to achieve has left and right arrows allowing The splitter the desired view. Click the the panes bar between to show or hide the panes. If you click the splitter bar and drag it to the desired arrows clicking the left location, or right arrows the view to the location you moved the splitter bar. Clicking the left or right arrows a second returns and hides pane. time shows the entire dialog box retains the previously displayed view. If you closed the right panel The Details the last time you accessed the dialog box, the panel is hidden the next time you open the dialog box. Click the arrows on the splitter bar to restore the inputs and outputs panel. If there are no inputs for a module (as is commonly the case for Network Inputs), the right panel and outputs hidden and cannot regardless of the previously displayed view. appears be opened Exposed you can double-click for a module or block, are BACnet or right-click the output and AV outputs If there of the output. the details view or modify 2. Click Edit . changes to the attribute/parameter , input, and output data using the fieldes 3. Make menus and and drop-down click Apply . Notes: make to your input data after a device restart, modifications sure to select the Default check • To prevent losing Restart box under Options. • Select menu in the BACnet Exposed True from the drop-down to expose inputs and outputs for column BACnet systems, if they are not already configured to the desired setting by default. For any BACnet Exposed value output, double-click or right-click the output to view and modify details. analog Close 4. Click . Notes: the enumeration set for an input or output associated with a binary object, • If you change set for the enumeration the binary object is also updated if the set exists in the Two State enumeration set list. Otherwise, the binary object’ s enumeration set defaults to the Inactive/Active set. When this happens, the binary object’ s States Text attribute is set to the Inactive/Active set instead of the set you selected. enumeration of the value you change for analog • When the function the units does not change. For all modules, the values, value passes, but the units do not. For example, if you change timers from seconds to minutes or hours, the function of the number does not change. 148 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

149 Adding Inputs to a Block or Module and Outputs these steps and outputs to the following blocks and modules: Follow to add inputs OR, XOR) • Boolean (AND, • Calculation blocks) (Expression Activity , Hybrid • Container blocks) (Activity • Math (Add, Multiply) • Selection (All blocks) (All blocks) • Statistical you want to add ports to and select View Details . 1. Right-click the block box for the check . 2. Select IO Modifications or outputs: 3. To add inputs appears. (+) icon in the Inputs or Outputs section. Click or Add Outputs window the a. Add The Add Inputs the type of input or output and increase the count. b. Select OK . c. Click 4. To delete inputs or outputs: a. the or output you want to delete. A Confirm message box appears Click (-) icon next to the input Delete your delete you to confirm prompting action. to confirm or Yes to cancel. b. Click No 5. Click Close when finished. Finder Enum 1. In the Details box, click Edit . dialog the icon. The Enum Finder dialog box appears. 2. Click Search enum search 3. Enter text or numerical strings in the Search Criteria field. The Results table auto-populates criteria with results listed in priority order by best matches against search criteria. Note: For optimal add more search criteria by clicking the Additional Search Criteria (+) icon. searching, . The the select the enum set, then click OK table, Enum Finder closes and the set is populated 4. From Results attribute of the Details view dialog box. in the selected Apply box to save Details view dialog 5. Click changes. in the Controller Viewing Information information for one or more controllers on the field bus in the Configuration mode: To view controller 1. On the menu, select Online Operations . The Online Operations Wizard appears. Tools 2. Select a Connection Type: NxE Passthru, Bluetooth, MAP 4.2+/BACnet Router , ZigBee, or Direct Ethernet Connection. 3. Enter Parameters. See Transferring to a Computer for further information. Connection . If you select a discovery MAC Address or Instance Number 4. Select MAC Address, enter the device process: address. If you select Instance Number , enter the device BACnet instance number . mode For information information of a controller while it is being commissioned ( Commissioning on viewing only), see the Commissioning a System section. 149 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

150 Viewing and Modifying Connections selection makes connections required for your system. You do not need to review System all the necessary logic after selecting connections the system. if you are not modifying To view and modify connections: the The connection data for the entire application, or the selected module’ s connection widget. Connections 1. Click tab. See Connections in the Perspectives section. in the Connections data, appears multiple modules (within a module Note: to view connections on the selected modules You can select category) Hold down selecting the modules. A table appears in the Connections area at once. the Ctrl key while selected. module for each connections are shown by default The State you click the Connections table. If you select other Selector when in the Control View and the State Selector modules do not appear , click Show State Selector , or connections click All to return to the default view. Show View, you can select a module tree to view the connections for the selected module. In the Logic in the Activities view, showing to the default connections, on the Connections table, click Show All. To return all module Exposing Ports for Connection , Making a Connection , Changing a Connection , and Breaking 2. See . a Connection Exposing Ports for Connection for connected all ports You cannot remove the selection for connection. ports because the By default, are exposed ports in the Expose Ports for Connection dialog box. are disabled 1. On the Features panel, click Connections . 2. Click Expose Ports . The Expose Ports for Connection dialog box appears. Notes: • Some in the lists may appear disabled because they are automatically exposed for connection and items be changed, or if they are already cannot connected. such items, within an activity , may not appear in the Connections view. For these items, • Some as a block by right-clicking a block and selecting Expose Ports For Connection you can expose ports box, enter part or all of the node name. 3. In the Filter 4. Select ports (or remove the selection on ports to hide) from the Input Port List and Output Port List to expose buttons of the dialog the sections All and Deselect All box, using as necessary , and click OK . Select Making a Connection 1. On the Connections tab, right-click an input or output that has no connections and select Make Connection . The Select Reference box appears. dialog Notes: modules dialog box is populated with only those Reference that are available for • The left pane of the Select connection. output can have • A module than one connection (fan-out). A module input cannot have more than one more connection (fan-in is not allowed). 2. In the Filter box, type part or all of the node name to filter the results. 3. Select an available The available ports appear in the right pane. module. 4. On the right pane, the input/output port in which to connect and click OK . select Note: If you are having trouble making connections for loops, see the related entry in the Troubleshooting section. 150 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

151 Changing a Connection tab, right-click an input that has an existing connection and select Change 1. On the Connections or output Reference dialog Connection . The Select box appears. Notes: Reference with only those modules that are available box is populated • The left pane of the Select dialog for connection. • A module than one connection (fan-out). A module input cannot have more than one output can have more is not allowed). connection (fan-in name box, type part or all of the node 2. In the Filter to filter the results. module. ports appear in the right pane. an available The available 3. Select the input/output port in which to connect and click OK . 4. On the right pane, select Breaking a Connection on the Connections tab, right-click an input a connection that has an existing connection and To break or output select Connection . Break Viewing Parameters and Modifying the Parameters if not already active. See the Parameters description in the Perspectives section. 1. Click widget . Edit 2. Click to the parameters/attributes using the fieldes and drop-down 3. Make and click Apply . changes menus Notes: modify outputs of modules from the Parameters table. • You cannot save or switch • You cannot while editing in the Parameters tab. Click Apply or Cancel before proceeding. modes and Modifying Selection Tables Viewing State Selection makes all the necessary state configurations System for your system. You do not need to review required state configurations if you are not modifying logic after selecting the system. To view and modify State Selection tables: 1. Click the Table tab in the Features panel. The State Selection tab appears with the system’ s state selection State within tables and the states in the left pane of the screen. The panes allow you data populated in the right pane, State both vertically the first column visible. See the , keeping Selection (State Tables to scroll and horizontally screen section. Tab) Notes: • The individual in the State Tables are the State Generators (yellow heading) and the turquoise column tables and are the Output See headings Tables in the Perspectives section Controllers. Control Tab Application State Example in the User Interface section. • Each State Generator state has a corresponding Output Controller state. The States column lists the states from highest priority priority in descending order from top to bottom. An asterisk (*) appearing instead to lowest Controller State indicates that the current of a valid Output Generator has no interaction with the Output state Controller Controller is controlled by the next highest priority State Generator showing a valid , and the Output Output Controller state. An * also indicates that the field should not be modified unless certain control specifications are required. 2. Click Edit . 3. To change the Output Controller state for a given State Generator state, click the cell and select the Output Controller state from the drop-down menu. 151 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

152 4. To change the hierarchy Generators (reordering tables), in the right pane, click the up or down arrow of the State State Selection appear in the desired order. to the left of the corresponding Table until the tables making Note: around the State Selection Table appears green if the changes are a change, After the border there are problems with the changes made. appears OK. The border red when 5. Click Apply . one of the rows in a state table Note: must have all of its options defined to prevent an At least for an input Controller an unreliable mode input. Output from having State Customizing Tables section for making changes for custom applications. See the Selection and Modifying a Module’ s Logic Viewing a module’ s logic: To view and modify For a module in a Table Data , right-click the module that contains logic that can be viewed or modified • widget and select tan in the column) (appears View Logic. in the Logic View Activities tree , click the module. • For a module in a BACnet Exposed widget , right-click the module and select View Logic. • For a module View appears and displays The Logic for that module. See the Logic View Steps section for details the logic diagram on how to modify logic. an Input Signal Modifying or Output You can designate default input and output signals before Note: systems from the Signal column in the creating Naming and Signal Preferences screen. With the Modify Signal feature's Select Signal Type table, users have advanced signal type selection capabilities. The tool analyzes hardware available ports, and typical recommendations to compile a table of best-fit signal points, for a standard-application inputs and outputs. Custom-application users are not limited to standard types user's type recommendations and can select unique signal types to better meet system needs. signal If you are creating sorting application we suggest Note: signal types by the Device Supported column. a standard an input signal: To change or output Signal the input module points 1. Right-click Modify or output . The Select Signal Type window appears. and select See the Modify Signal (Input or Output) screen section. 2. Select the Definition row to highlight the new signal type. To determine how the table is populated, see Signal Setting Preferences section for details. the Wireless Ethernet Network Tips: Tips: • For inputs such as Temperature, Setpoint, Warm/Cool Adjust, and Temp Occ, select the Wireless Ethernet signal. • Make any unused Network Sensor (Network sure you remove , Network Zone Sensor , or Network Duct Sensor CO2 Sensor) inputs or outputs from the system. box and 3. If the new selected type is on the Sensor/Actuator Bus, click the Device Assignment drop-down signal select one of the following: 152 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

153 • To an existing : Choose this option to assign the input or output point with a Network Sensor that device in your CAF. exists To an existing device , select the specific device you want to assign the point to from Note: If you select below Device Assignment drop-down box. table the the Device : Choose this option to create a new device and then assign the input or output • to the To a new device point new device. . The Select Signal Type window closes Update updates. 4. Click and the point a Module Adding Selection adds all the necessary modules required for your system. You do not need to add modules if you System are not modifying logic after selecting See one of the following sections to add modules: the system. • Adding a Network Input • an Input Input Adding or Miscellaneous • Module Adding a Setpoint/Miscellaneous • a State Generation Module Adding • an Output Control Module Adding • Adding Output a Network • Adding or Miscellaneous Output an Output Renaming a Module the module to rename and select 1. Right-click . The Rename dialog box appears. See the Rename Rename (Module/Block) screen section. Note: You also can select a module and press the F2 key to perform this function. 2. Type a name for the module Name field. in the User OK . 3. Click Deleting a Module To delete a module: to delete and select Delete , or select 1. Right-click modules by holding down the Ctrl key while the module multiple the modules, then right-click and select Delete . The Confirm dialog selecting asking you to confirm box appears that you want the modules. See the Confirm (Delete) screen section. to delete You also can select and press modules Note: the Delete key to perform this function. one or more Yes . 2. Click Setting the Actuator Stroke Time The following procedure defines the proper method for setting or changing the actuator stroke time for a VAV Single Duct or VAV Dual Duct damper PAO. For all other edit the stroke time through the Details dialog box. PAOs, Stroke To set the Actuator Time: the Setpoint/Miscellaneous Modules category 1. From the Supply Damper Stroke Time, Hot Deck Damper , right-click Stroke Time, Cold Deck Damper Stroke Time, or Exhaust Damper Stroke Time module and select View Details . dialog You also can double-click the Details dialog box. The Details to open box appears. the module 2. Click Edit . 3. Adjust the default value of the output. 4. Click Apply . 153 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

154 5. Click Close . time change is fed to all of the modules to the changed module. The stroke connected Logic View Steps the Activities Using Tree in the logic view. at the top of the left panel The Activities tree appears application , click the Control View Connections option (appears second To view the logic of the entire in the folder). The logic of the entire application appears in the right panel of the logic view. the Activities list, just below Palette does not appear The Control the Control View Connections option or a module category folder Block when Output is selected. (for example, Control) the Control option is selected when you view Logic. By default, View Connections Note: of a particular To view , browse the folders of the Activities tree (organized by module category) the logic module or right-click the module and select View Logic . The logic diagram and click the module, appears in of the module the right panel Block Palette appears below the Activities tree in the left panel. and the Control a Block from the Control Palette Selecting Block palette at the bottom of the left panel in the logic view, below the Activities tree. The Block appears The Control palette does Control when the Control View Connections option or a module category folder (for Block not appear Output Control) in the Activities example, tree is selected. To select from the Control Block palette: a block through User in the palette to locate the block. See the Logic View screen description in the 1. Browse the folders section. Interface Or, use the Launch Wizard to locate and add one or more Note: See Using the Launch Wizard . logic blocks. 2. Drag and drop the block from the palette to the logic diagram in the right panel. Using the Launch Wizard the Launch Wizard block palette to the logic diagram in the right panel. The New Module 1. Drag from the control box appears. section. New Module Selection screen dialog Selection See the results to locate of the block The search displays and filters in the Filter for each letter you 2. Type the name field. of where the letter type regardless in the block name. For example, if you type co , Co nstant appears appears as well as A S and Lead Co mpensator . Your filter text is indicated by the bolded letters of the block name. CO or reverse You can click the heading to sort the results in alphabetical column alphabetical order. Name Note: The filter box is not case-sensitive. 3. Click the Count box next to the block you want to add and adjust the number of blocks to add using the up and down arrows. highlighting appears when you change the quantity . To add another block, go back to Step Green for that block Wizard You do not need to close the Launch 2 and search to add a different block. name. . The blocks you have 4. When blocks, click Finish finished you added appear in the logic diagram. adding Renaming a Block We typically do not recommend renaming logic blocks because their names identify their function. You may wish to the logic it contains. rename (Activity or Hybrid Activity) to identify logic block a Container To rename a block in the Logic View: 1. Right-click the block to rename and select Rename . The Rename dialog box appears. See the Rename (Module/Block) screen section. 154 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

155 Note: You also can select and press the F2 key to perform this function. a block for the block in the User field. 2. Type a name Name . 3. Click OK a Block Deleting a block View: in the Logic To delete and select Delete , or select 1. Right-click blocks by holding down the Ctrl key while the block to delete multiple then right-click and select selecting . The Confirm dialog box appears asking you to confirm the blocks, Delete to delete See the Confirm (Delete) screen section. that you want the blocks. one or more blocks and press the Delete key to perform this function. Note: You also can select Yes . 2. Click a Block Copying you copy a block, you can paste the block into the same state section or activity of the copied block, or a When state or activity . different section the block and select Copy . To copy multiple blocks at once, press and hold the Ctrl key while selecting 1. Right-click item, multiple Copy . When you select each blocks, the associated connections are also copied. and then select within Paste and select 2. Right-click . the logic diagram the copy You also can select Note: and Ctrl-V keys to perform a block and paste function. and use the Ctrl-C Duplicating a Block The duplicate feature copies and pastes the selected blocks, including any connections, in one step. When you duplicate a block, into the same state section or activity of the blocks that you duplicate. you can only paste a block in the Logic To duplicate View: press and select . To duplicate multiple the block at once, Duplicate and hold the Ctrl key while Right-click blocks each item, and then select Duplicate . When you duplicate multiple blocks, selecting connections are also the block duplicated. You also can select and use the Ctrl-D keys to perform this function. Note: a block Exposing Ports ports You can expose them available for connection. If you expose ports for BACnet systems, the BACnet to make exposed ports are viewable objects through the Supervisory Controller . You cannot remove the selection for connected ports because are disabled in the Port Exposure dialog box. the ports To expose for BACnet systems using the Details dialog box: ports 1. Right-click a block and select View > Details. The Details dialog box appears. See the Details Dialog Box and Viewing Details sections. and Modifying 2. Click Edit . 3. For the BACnet Exposed selection, select True. 4. Click Apply . 5. Click Close . 155 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

156 Cloning a Port ports using Ports dialog box. Only ports that are exposed and non-connected can be You can duplicate the Clone Clone duplicated. section. Ports See the Dialog of the ports depending on which type of port you clone: properties Specific are copied, type - name, default value, and states text • Enum type • default value, active text, and inactive text Boolean - name, Float - name, default value, units, and display precision • type The Clone Ports dialog is not available for Activity Input or Activity Output blocks, with the exception of the Note: block State Activity . of a Hybrid a port: To clone any block and select Clone Ports . The Clone Ports dialog box appears. 1. In the Logic View, right-click box appear boxes the Clone Ports dialog within unavailable for any logic blocks that do not Note: The check the criteria for cloning ports. meet 2. In the Input Port List and Output select the check boxes of the ports you wish to clone, or use Port List columns, All or Deselect the Select All button. 3. Click OK . Blocks Connecting description blocks View (see the Logic Tab Screen To connect in the User Interface section): in the Logic 1. Place the pointer over the starting connection point or right side of an Activity Input block (appears yellow) until it changes shape to a magic wand ( ), and click the starting connection point. Compatible from an arrow of all blocks color from orange to green indicating where you can connect. inputs/outputs change If you do not wish to complete the connection, press the Escape (Esc) key or click within the empty space Note: to remove point. connection in the logic diagram the starting the pointer and click the point. wand) to the desired destination connection point 2. Drag The connection (magic in the logic diagram and the connected input point appears yellow . line appears Notes: • A tooltip appears when you place your pointer over an invalid connection point. An invalid connection is when the data type of the source and destination (for example, a Boolean source and a Float do not match destination). in a translation • The tool automatically the hierarchy table creates block when you connect an and configures Activity Input block to an Activity Output block of different types (Boolean to two-state Enum or two-state Enum See Configuring the Translation Blocks for details. to Boolean). • If you are having trouble making connections for loops, see the related entry in the Troubleshooting section. 156 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

157 Figure 33: Connecting Process a Block and Hiding Connection Showing Lines Tab Screen in the User Interface section. Logic description See the To hide a connection line and select Hide . The connection line becomes a hidden edge line, right-click a connection (numbered circle next to an Activity Input, Activity Output, block input, or block output: label , or ). , To show line, right-click a hidden edge label and select Unhide . The hidden edge label becomes a a connection connection line. a Connection Deleting Logic Tab Screen description in the See the Interface section. User To delete a connection line: 1. Right-click the connection line or hidden edge label (numbered circle next to an Activity Input, Activity Output, block input, output: , , or ) and select Delete . The Confirm dialog box appears asking you to or block the deletion. screen Confirm (Delete) confirm section. See the key to perform You also can select line or hidden Note: label and press the Delete a connection this edge function. 2. Click Yes . Note: When a hidden edge label indicates multiple connections (for example, 1:5), only the connection added the last is deleted. a specific connection, unhide the connection lines and remove to delete If you need appropriate connection. Changing the Hidden Edge Label of a Connection See the Logic Tab Screen description in the User Interface section. To change the hidden edge label of a connection: 157 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

158 1. Double-click the connection’ edge label (numbered circle next to an Activity Input, Activity Output, block s hidden or block output: , or ). The Hidden Edge Label dialog box appears. input, , for the label OK . The label text changes as defined. or number 2. Type a name and click Activity Configuring a Hybrid different Activity state-based logic. You can define contains logic for each state in the chosen A Hybrid block set. See the Logic Tab Screen description in the User Interface section. For information on the Hybrid enumeration container see Activity Container Block in the Logic section. block, to the logic View, drag and drop the Hybrid block from the Control Block palette Container 1. In Logic Activity diagram. 2. Select the enumeration set to use for the block: If you choose to change the enum set for the state output, and the enum Note: has fewer set you are choosing members enum set, check the state sections to be deleted to ensure that there than the current are no blocks or connections in them. This does not include inputs and outputs. a. Right-click the Hybrid Activity and select View > Details . The Details dialog box appears. b. Click Edit . the desired enumeration Text attribute/parameter . c. Select set to use for the States . Apply d. Click Close . e. Click to view another block Note: Activity block to refresh the enumeration set You may need and view the Hybrid in the Logic View. visible the Hybrid 3. Double-click block or right-click the block and select View Logic to access the Hybrid Activity’ s Activity View. Logic By default, the Hybrid Activity’ Note: Table’s State is selected (blue background). s State 4. With the State header selected, create logic that determines how the states change in this view. 5. Double-click a state for the State header is hidden.) and create logic for this particular (The logic you created state. 6. Repeat all states. Step 5 for figures show the Hybrid The following logic of the Proportional Box Heating Control module . The Activity State block is the HTG-OUTST ATE. This example shows details for only two of the module's seven states. See information Heating Valve v51 in the Output Control Modules section for more Proportional on the Proportional Box Heating Control module. 158 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

159 Figure Box Heating Control - State Logic 34: Proportional Figure 35: Proportional Box Heating Control - Enum Off Logic 159 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

160 Figure 36: Proportional Control - Enum Control Logic Box Heating the Text Block Configuring text within the logic diagram or in a module column (Setpoint/Miscellaneous, State Use the Text block to display or Output columns). You can define text for different blocks or anywhere within the logic diagram. Generation, Control on the Text blocks, see the Control For information Palette section. Block To configure the Text block: as follows: 1. Add the Text block From a module column , • the Setpoint/Miscellaneous, a. Right-click Generation, or Output Control header and select New . The State New Module Selection dialog box appears. (See the New Module Selection screen section.) b. In the Filter box, type Text. box, click the up and down to adjust the number of Text blocks you want to add. c. In the Count arrows Finish . The Text block appears in the module column. d. Click in the logic diagram. In Logic , drag the Text block from the palette to the desired location View • 2. Double-click the Text block. The Details dialog box appears. 3. Click Edit . block 4. In the Name for the block. The Name label of the Text container type a name appears in the logic field, diagram or module column. 5. In the Text box, enter equations or other text that may provide useful information for the application/activity . You can enter up to 400 characters. 160 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

161 6. Click Apply . Close . 7. Click Hierarchy Block the Command Configuring block, Logic Selection in the For information section. see on the Command Hierarchy block: Hierarchy the Command To configure Hierarchy block. The Details dialog box for the Command Hierarchy (Enum Output) 1. Double-click a Command (Boolean Hierarchy appears. See the Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean or Command Output) section. screen Output) IO Modifications check box to add, remove, or reorder 2. Select Adding inputs creates new columns the inputs. hierarchy in the command in the left pane. Removing inputs removes columns in the command hierarchy table in the left pane. inputs allows you to change the view of inputs in the left pane. See Adding Inputs Reordering Hierarchy to a Block Reordering Inputs in a Command or Block for detailed procedures. and Outputs or Module By default, I1 is an Enum input (Off, On), and I2 is a Boolean input (False, True). Note: Tips: • To add an enumeration column, select the IO Modifications check box, and then click the plus sign to input When add an Input. dialog box appears, adjust the count file next to Input (Enum) and then the Add Inputs click OK . After adding an enumeration input, make sure you select the appropriate enumeration set (Units) to use. To change the units, the new value, and click Apply . The default set is Off/On. click Edit, select input column, the IO Modifications check box, and then click the plus sign to add • To add a Boolean select file next to Input the Add Inputs When adjust the count dialog (Boolean) to add inputs, an Input. box appears, then click OK. a column, select the IO Modifications • To remove box, and then click the minus sign next to the check corresponding column in the right pane. When removing a column that you wish to replace with another input , make sure you remove the existing column first, and then add the new column. For example, to replace the I1 column that has an Off/On enumeration input with a Boolean input column, first remove the existing I1 column, and then add a Boolean column and rename it I1. input Edit 3. Click . field, type a new name to identify 4. In the Name Hierarchy object. This name appears in the logic the Command diagram and replaces the Command Hierarchy heading in the Details dialog box. 5. In the left pane, columns, use the drop-down menus for each cell to select a value to assign when in the input in the State listed in the State column for that row. The cell color changes to green when you change a value. 161 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

162 Notes: • Shaded rows with asterisks indicate that when the block is in a particular state, it accepts any value. table complete configuration all possible combinations of inputs and values are represented in the rows • A is when has an Off row and an On row in (for example, ). Figure the I1 column 38 in the rows is when configuration combinations listed the input do not cover all of incomplete • An and value The output of the command hierarchy holds the last value the possible is flagged combinations. and the output Output be determined . Use an incomplete configuration to hold the last value if an unlisted or as cannot condition The condition does not match any of the rows in the table (that is, none of the undesirable occurs. are true) and the output remains at the last value. When the configuration is incomplete, a dialog box rows stating: Hierarchy appears table is Underspecified (missing some possible combinations). This Command border surrounding cells indicates that the combination of inputs and values configured is • A yellow the table rows A means that there are multiple configuration that cover the same combination redundant. redundant and values. The command hierarchy selects the row that has higher priority (appears higher) of inputs in the table the output. In the first and third rows in Figure 37 , for example, when the Mode is Off and to generate Switch both rows the Maintenance are True. Since the first row is of greater priority , the State is Disable, output Additionally , to create an Else condition, add a row of asterisks as the last row in the is set to False. table with a True state. When using redundant rows, lower priority rows may not be active, which could indicate unused or an improperly configured command hierarchy block. rows 37: Command Hierarchy Example Figure Redundancy Tips: the label in the right pane, click the Name cell of the corresponding input • To change or output of a column, The cell appears when you enter a new value. Click Apply . We recommend and type a new name. green the label field empty so that you can use dynamic naming from the Standard Name menu. that you leave the enumeration (including • To change the State column), click Edit and in the right pane, set of a column a new value. a new value green when you enter The cell appears Click OK . select for Units. a cell and select Insert Row • To add a row, right-click . • To add 5 rows, a cell and select Insert 5 Rows . right-click right-click a cell and select Insert 10 Rows . • To add 10 rows, • To remove a row, right-click a cell and select Delete Row . • To copy a row, right-click Copy Row . The copied row appears at the end of the table. a cell and select Row a row, right-click Move • To move Up or Move a cell and select Down . Or, select a row and use Row the up or down arrows to the right of the table. • To indicate a state to use when the input is not a specific value (for enumeration input columns only), right-click to occur a cell and select when you want an event For example, during any other state than the ! Value. Satisfied state and you use ! Value, the state is indicated as ! Satisfied. To remove the ! Value indication and use a regular right-click the cell and select Value. value, 6. Click Apply . 162 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

163 For example, the following indicates: figure Input 1 (I1) is Off and Input the Output State is False. • Row 1: When 2 (I2) is False, 1 (I1) is On, the Output is True regardless of Input 2 (I2). Input State • Row 2: When Hierarchy (Boolean Figure Example 38: Command Output) Inputs in a Command Hierarchy Block Reordering a Command Hierarchy block. The Details dialog 1. Double-click Hierarchy (Enum Output) box for the Command or Command (Boolean Output) appears. See the Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean Hierarchy section. Output) the IO Modifications check box. The Reorder button 2. Select ( ). appears 3. Click . You can now reorder the inputs. Note: You cannot add or delete inputs once you enter reorder mode. Figure 39: Command - Reorder Inputs Mode Hierarchy next to an input, in the list. You can also click a column header 4. Click and then drag the row to a new location to sort the entries in ascending or descending order. Apply . The left pane 5. Click Hierarchy Details view updates to show the input reordering changes. of the Command 6. Click Close . Configuring the Line Segment Block Logic For information see Calculation in the block, section. on the Line Segment To configure the Line Segment block: 1. Double-click a Line Segment block. The Line Segment Details dialog box appears. 2. Click Edit . 163 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

164 3. In the Name field, to identify the block. This name appears in the logic diagram and replaces type a new name heading in the Details box. the Line Segment dialog and Output 4. In the Input select a cell and type the desired values. Points Points columns, must order. points Note: The input be in increasing Tips: a cell and select Row . • To add a row, right-click Insert a cell and select Insert 5 Rows . • To add 5 rows, right-click a cell and select • To remove Row . a row, right-click Delete . Apply 5. Click the MUX Block Configuring blocks, see the Selection For information in the Logic . on the MUX section the MUX block: To configure a MUX block. The MUX Details dialog box appears. 1. Double-click the check 2. Select box to add or remove inputs. Adding inputs creates new Input X - Modes IO Modifications for configuration in the left pane. inputs removes the corresponding Mode button in the left buttons Removing procedures. Adding and Outputs to a Block or Module for detailed See pane. Inputs Edit . 3. Click field, type a new name to identify the block. This name 4. In the Name in the logic diagram and replaces appears the MUX in the Details dialog box. heading blocks drop-down Mode, select the enumeration set to use from the Units 5. For MUX list. with Enum Note: for MUX blocks with Enum Mode only and is disabled for Boolean Mode. If you change This field is used the Units, the Input X - Mode(s) fields are cleared and must be configured. 6. Click an Input button. The Mode Selection dialog box appears. X - Modes the value or values and click OK . 7. Select to use for the mode value The Default the input that is passed to the Present Value if the Mode value is not assigned Note: defines If every member of the Mode Enum Set is not associated with an Input, you must define a to an input. input. Default Apply . 8. Click the Translation Configuring Blocks creates and configures the hierarchy table in a translation block when you connect an Activity The tool automatically (Boolean Input Output block of different types to an Activity to two-state Enum or two-state Enum to Boolean). block The Enum input or output block must have a two-state enumeration set for the connection and automatic creation of the translation block . to occur block blocks manually add and configure the Translation types, according to the following To connect of other procedure. on the Enum For information Translation and Boolean to Enum Translation blocks, see the Selection in to Boolean the Logic section. To manually configure the Translation block: 1. Double-click block. The Details dialog box for the Enum to Boolean Translation or Boolean to Enum a Translation Translation dialog box appears. See the Translation (Enum to Boolean or Boolean to Enum) screen section. 164 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

165 2. Select the check box to add, remove, or reorder inputs. Adding inputs creates new columns IO Modifications in the left pane. Removing removes columns in the table in the left pane. Reordering inputs in the table inputs the view of inputs allows Adding Inputs and Outputs to a Block or Module or in the left pane. you to change See Hierarchy for detailed in a Command procedures. Reordering Inputs Block Tips: input select the IO Modifications check box, and then click the plus sign to • To add an enumeration column, the Add Inputs dialog box appears, add an Input. the count file next to Input (Enum) and then When adjust adding input, make sure you select the appropriate enumeration set (Units) click OK. After an enumeration click Edit, select and click Apply the units, . The default set is Off/On. to use. To change the new value, input select the IO Modifications check box, and then click the plus sign to add • To add a Boolean column, When the Add Inputs dialog box appears, an Input. the count file next to Input (Boolean) to add inputs, adjust then click OK. a column, select check box, then click the minus sign next to the corresponding • To remove the IO Modifications in the right pane. with another removing a column that you wish to replace column , make sure input When column first, then add the new column. For example, to replace the I1 column that you remove the existing input with a Boolean input column, first remove the existing I1 column, then add has an Off/On enumeration input a Boolean and rename the column to I1. column Edit 3. Click . field, type a new name to identify the object. This name appears in the logic diagram and replaces 4. In the Name heading in the Details dialog box. the Translation in the input columns, 5. In the left pane, menus for each cell to select a value to assign when use the drop-down in the State listed in the State column for that row. The cell color changes to green when you change a value. Notes: • Shaded rows with asterisks indicate that when the block is in a particular state, no behavior change table and the block checks listed. occurs, for the next state are represented configuration all possible combinations complete and values is when in the rows • A of inputs the I1 column has an Off row and an On row). (for example, incomplete configuration is when the input and value combinations listed in the rows do not cover all of • An combinations. the possible of the command hierarchy holds the last value and the output is flagged The output Output to hold the last value be determined . Use an incomplete configuration as if an unlisted or cannot undesirable occurs. The condition does not match any of the rows in the table (that is, none of the condition rows are true) and the output remains at the last value. When the configuration is incomplete, a dialog box appears stating: table is Underspecified (missing some possible combinations). This Translation border of inputs the table cells indicates that the combination • A yellow and values configured is surrounding redundant configuration means that there are multiple rows that cover the same combination . A redundant of inputs and values. The command hierarchy selects the row that has higher priority (appears higher) in the table the output. Additionally , to create an Else condition, add a row of asterisks as the last row to generate in the table with a True state. When using redundant rows, lower priority rows may not be active, which could indicate unused rows or an improperly configured block. 165 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

166 Tips: • To change of a column, in the right pane, click the Name cell of the corresponding input or output the label The cell appears green you enter a new value. Click Apply . We recommend and type a new name. when field empty leaving from the Standard Name menu may be used. so that dynamic the label naming set of a column the State column), click Edit and in the right pane, the enumeration • To change (including and select a new value. In the left pane, the cells appear green click the drop-down box for Units, to indicate Click . the change. OK Insert . a cell and select Row • To add a row, right-click a cell and select Insert 5 Rows • To add 5 rows, right-click . right-click a cell and select Insert 10 Rows . • To add 10 rows, a row, right-click a cell and select Delete Row . • To remove a row, right-click Copy • To copy Row . The copied row appears at the end of the table. a cell and select a row, right-click a cell and select Row Up or Move Row Down . Or, select a row and use • To move Move to the right of the table. arrows the up or down to use when the input is not a specific value • To indicate input columns only), right-click a state (for enumeration ! Value. For example, when a cell and select an event to occur during any other state than the you want Satisfied and you use ! Value, the state is indicated as ! Satisfied. To remove the ! Value indication and state value, right-click the cell and select Value. use a regular Apply 6. Click . Setting the Default Element of a Module 1. Click the Set Default Element button in the Logic View toolbar or right-click within the white space of the Logic diagram and select Element. (Alternatively , right-click any block or node within the Table Data widget Set Default Exposed widget Select Default Element .) The Default Element Selection dialog box or BACnet and select appears. . The default of the desired element and click OK button element appears black in the logic 2. Select the radio diagram. and Exporting Importing a Module a module, click the Export Module button from the Logic View toolbar , or right-click within the white space To export diagram Module. Export of the Logic The module currently displayed in the logic diagram and its children and select and reopen are added in the palette. You may need to close folder the CAF for the folder and modules to the Custom to appear . By default, the exported module is saved in a file in the C:\ProgramData\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\\UI\Custom Control directory on your computer using the current name of the module with a Modules , file extension. a different .caf.module for the file, and specify a different directory; however You can specify name only exported modules saved to the default directory are available for use in the tool. You can share this file with other users. Place a copy of the file in the Custom Control Modules directory on a different computer appears in the Custom folder in the palette the next time the tool is started on that , and the module computer . You can add the custom module by dragging it into the Logic diagram of an existing module or Activity . You also can right-click category in the Control view and select New, and then add the custom module a module from the Module Selection dialog box. 166 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

167 Important: When a custom module created with a version prior to Release 5.0, you must verify that the sharing logic blocks are updated 5.1 or later. See Upgrading Custom PID and PID Pre-Processor to Release in the System Files section. Modules Upgrading Control a custom module When at the current release with a computer using a previous release sharing created verify that the module does not contain any logic blocks introduced in the later of the tool, you must (for example, introduced block release at Release 5.1). the Statistics on upgrading rerunning system selection, and other versioning details, see For information modules, Upgrading System Files section. the or use the module by adding the module the same way you add other modules. See the Adding a You can import and Selecting a Block from the Control Block Palette sections. Module Panning See the Logic description in the User Interface section. Tab Screen To pan in the logic diagram: View diagram Tool ( ) icon in the Logic Pan Canvas vertical toolbar . 1. Click the and hold the pointer down while 2. Click the mouse. moving 3. Release you reach the desired location. the hold when Note: (-) keys to zoom in and out, and the arrow keys move up, down, You also can use the plus (+) and minus left, or right. You can also use the scroll wheel to move up and down, hold the Shift key and scroll to move left and right, and hold the Ctrl key and scroll in and out. zoom Zooming See the Logic description in the User Interface section. Tab Screen In addition to the Zooming Icons in Table 61 , you can also use the plus (+) and minus (-) keys to zoom in and out, and the arrow up, down, left, or right. You can also use the scroll wheel to move up and down, hold the keys move Shift key and scroll to move left and right, and hold the Ctrl key and scroll zoom in and out. 167 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

168 Table 61: Zooming Icons Function Description Zoom In icon from the Logic View diagram to zoom in on diagram details. Click the In Zoom Click Zoom Out icon from the Logic View diagram to zoom out of the diagram. the Zoom Out Menu View diagram. the Fit To Window The following table Opens from the Logic Menu the Fit To Window shows Icons Fit To Window Table 61: Fit To Window Menu Icons Description Icon the Click icon to center the full diagram in the available visible Fit To Window window . Ctrl + F Shortcut: Fit Horizontally to fit the diagram to the width of the window the Click . Ctrl+ + H Shortcut: the Fit Vertically to fit the diagram to the height Click . of the window Shortcut: Ctrl + E and Printing Logic Viewing Application logic only in Configuration You can view and print application (Control View Connections). See the Control mode View Connections Option in Logic View section. 1. Click the tab. Logic folder The Control appears second in the list, just below the Activities option in the Note: View Connections tree. Activities View’s select, pan, and zoom options to view the application logic. 2. Use the Logic Panning and Zooming See the sections for details. Printing View’s Print Preview to print the logic of the entire application. 3. Use the Logic and Print options See the the Logic Diagram section for details. Printing the Logic Diagram See the Tab Screen description in the User Interface section. Logic For information on printing summary reports, see Printing Summary Reports in the User Interface section. To print the logic diagram: Preview Print Click the Print Preview button in the Logic View toolbar . The Print Preview screen appears with the following options: • Print Setup 168 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

169 Note: The Print Setup box contains a Page Setup button that allows you to change the orientation of the dialog from Portrait to Landscape page and vice versa. • Print In • Zoom Out • Zoom • Fit In Window Print in the Logic View toolbar . The Print dialog box appears. Select the desired print settings and Click the Print button and click OK. properties Applications Creating Custom applications by modifying custom CAF or making changes to a selected system. For You can create an existing on specific applications, modules, and logic, see the Applications , Modules , and Logic details sections. To create applications, perform the steps that apply: custom Controller creating according to the steps in Modifying an Existing application Application File 1. Begin a custom System . or Selected The Custom Applications and Monitoring Supervisory Note: Only options have system selection trees Control with common You can create one of these applications with the desired options. from the selection items tree, then create any additional items as follows. 2. Create custom logic by adding the desired modules and modifying them as necessary . See Creating Custom Logic (Adding . Modules) logic for the modules in the Logic . See the Logic View Steps . 3. Create View as necessary Viewing connections and make according to the instructions in the between and Modifying 4. Expose the modules section. Connections Generation modules 5. Add the State in the State Tables and add the Output Control modules as columns as tables in the State as necessary . See the Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables and Customizing State Tables Selection Tables sections. 6. Make connections between the State Selection Table and the State Generators and Output Controllers as necessary . See and Modifying Connections . Viewing Modification Custom Example you may want to add lighting control to a Mixed Air Single For example, Unit application where Duct Air Handling the lights turn on/off when the AHU turns on/off. To add lighting control to a Mixed Air Single Duct Air Handling Unit application: module 1. With your MASD open, add the Output Control Lighting module and the LIGHT-C Output application ( Figure 40 ). 169 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

170 Figure 40: MASD with Lighting Module and LIGHT-C Output Application 2. Select Output Control module and click the Connections tab. the Lighting 3. Right-click the Present Value output and select Make Connection . The Select Reference dialog box appears ( 41 ). Figure 4. In the Filter box, type Light and select LIGHT-C. On the right pane, select I1 ( Figure 41 ). 170 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

171 Figure and Making Connections (Lighting/LIGHT-C) 41: Viewing 5. Click OK . The connection appears in the Destination section ( Figure 42 ). Figure Connection Complete 42: Lighting/LIGHT-C 6. Click State Tables and add a Lighting column. 171 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

172 Click Edit a. . Column State Create State Selection Column . The Create State Selection and select b. Right-click Tables box appears ( Figure 43 ). dialog box, type Lighting c. In the Name OK . and click Figure Lighting Column to the State Tables 43: Adding to Off when DA-T 7. In the Start Stop Sequencing Edit and set the Lighting table, the State is Off and On when click the State is On. Figure 44: Start Stop Sequencing DA-T and Lighting State Table Configuration 8. Click Apply . Output Connections Show All . In the State 9. Click and column, right-click Lighting [undefined] and Selection click Make Connection . In the Select Reference dialog box that appears, select Lighting, and then select Input Lighting in the right pane the Lighting output to the Output Control to connect module. 172 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

173 Figure 45: Viewing Connections (State Selection/Lighting) and Making 46: State Selection/Lighting Complete Figure Connection Controller File or Selected System an Existing Application Modifying application To create an existing CAF) or selected system: a custom by modifying an existing CAF or a select a system similar to the one you wish to customize. 1. Open Opening a Controller See the Application and Selecting a System (Creating a New System) sections. File The default location of a CAF is C:\Users\username. Note: the remaining steps 2. Follow Creating Custom Applications section. in the Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules) Adding a Network Input View perspective. that follow to adding a Network Input when viewing the application using The steps apply the Classic These steps may be different if you are using a different perspective. See the Perspectives section. 1. Hover over the Network Inputs header until the Add ( ) icon appears in the right corner and click the icon. The dialog New Module Selection for Network Inputs) (Module box appears. See the New Module Selection Selection screen section. 2. Choose the type of network input you want to add. 173 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

174 3. Click the Count input you want to add and adjust the number of network inputs to add box next to the network the up and down arrows. highlighting appears when you change the quantity . To add another block, using Green another go back to close the New Module Selection dialog box to type. to Step 2 and select You do not need network add a different input. 4. In the User Name field, type a name for the input. . The input appears in the Network Inputs section of the Control View. 5. Click Finish or Miscellaneous Adding an Input Input default in the Naming signals before creating systems from the Signal column You can designate and input Note: screen. See the Setting Preferences section for details. Preferences Signal that follow apply to adding an Input or Miscellaneous Input when viewing the application using The steps the Classic View perspective. steps may be different if you are using a different perspective. See the Perspectives section. These over the Inputs or Miscellaneous header until the Add ( ) icon appears in the right corner and 1. Hover (inputs) New Module (Module for Inputs) dialog box appears. See the Selection click the icon. The New Module Selection screen section. Selection of the input to locate in the Filter field. For example, if your system requires a 0 to 10 VDC Humidity 2. Type the name , you can type Humidity , or 0 10 VDC to narrow the results. The search displays and filters results for sensor data type, letter of where each appears in the input attribute (application, signal, you type regardless the letter and so on). For example, if you type chw , CHW Loop appears as well as PCHW P. Your filter text is indicated by the bolded letters of the input attribute. You can click any column header to sort the results in alphabetical or reverse alphabetical order. Notes: • The filter box is not case-sensitive. an input to which you wish to provide a control strategy , use an appropriate input type from • When choosing inputs attributes/parameters tuning Populated for use with PID Pre-Processors and the list provided. carry PID logic blocks. the Count 3. Click you want to add and adjust the number of inputs to add using the up and box next to the input arrows. Green highlighting appears down you change the quantity . To add another input, go back to Step when 2 and search attribute. You do not need to close the New Module Selection dialog box to add a for that input input. different Name field, type a name for the input . 4. In the User To rename Note: module later, right-click the module and select Rename (or use the F2 shortcut key). the input 5. Click Finish . The input appears in the Inputs or Miscellaneous (Inputs) section of the Control View. Note: If you must the signal, right-click the module and select Modify Signal. See Modifying an Input change Signal or Output . on adding an effective command input for an output, see the Adding an Effective For information Command Miscellaneous for an Output (Override Monitoring Input section. Feature) Adding a Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module The steps that follow apply to adding a module when viewing the application using the Classic View perspective. These steps if you are using a different perspective. See the Perspectives section. may be different over the Setpoint/Miscellaneous header until the Add ( ) icon appears in the right corner and click the 1. Hover icon. The New Module Selection (Module Selection for Setpoint/Miscellaneous) dialog box appears. See the New Module Selection screen section. 174 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

175 2. Type the name of the module in the Filter field. The search displays and filters results for each letter to locate of where the letter in the module attribute. For example, if you type heat , Heat you type regardless appears as well as Preheat Recovery by the bolded letters of the module Pump. appears Your filter text is indicated to sort the results header or reverse alphabetical order. You can click any column attribute. in alphabetical Note: The filter box is not case-sensitive. box next to the module you want to add and adjust the number of modules to add using the up 3. Click the Count Green and down appears when you change the quantity . To add another module, go back arrows. highlighting box to for that module to close the New Module Selection dialog You do not need to Step 2 and search name. module. add a different Notes: to create your own non state-based custom logic, choose Activity from the palette and be sure • If you need a meaningful to provide for the module to indicate the type of logic it contains. name modules of this type also appear • Any custom in the palette. field, for the module. Name type a name 4. In the User . The module appears in the Setpoint/Miscellaneous 5. Click of the Control View. Finish section a State Generation Module Adding that follow apply to adding a module when viewing the application using the Classic View perspective. The steps steps These if you are using a different perspective. See the Perspectives section. may be different over the State and click the icon. header until the Add ( ) icon appears in the right corner 1. Hover Generation box appears. Selection The New Module for State Generation) dialog (Module See the New Module Selection Selection screen section. 2. Type the name of the module to locate in the Filter field. The search displays and filters results for each letter you type regardless of where appears in the module attribute. For example, if you type heat , Heat the letter appears as well as Preheat Your filter text is indicated by the bolded letters of the module Recovery Pump. header You can click any column in alphabetical or reverse alphabetical order. attribute. to sort the results Note: The filter box is not case-sensitive. the Count box next to the module you want to add and adjust the number of modules to add using the up 3. Click arrows. appears highlighting and down when you change the quantity . To add another module, go back Green for that module Selection You do not need to close the New Module to Step 2 and search dialog box to name. module. add a different Notes: to create your own state-based custom • If you need choose Hybrid Activity from the palette and be sure logic, to provide a meaningful name for the module to indicate the type of logic it contains. • Any custom modules in the palette. of this type also appear Name type a name for the module. 4. In the User field, Finish . The module appears in the State Generation section of the Control View. 5. Click Adding an Output Module Control viewing that follow to adding The steps when apply the application using the Classic View perspective. a module These steps may be different if you are using a different perspective. See the Perspectives section. 1. Hover Control header until the Add ( ) icon appears in the right corner and click the icon. The over the Output New Module Selection (Module Selection for Output Control) dialog box appears. See the New Module Selection screen section. 175 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

176 2. Type the name of the module in the Filter field. The search displays and filters results for each letter to locate of where the letter in the module name. For example, if you type ch , Ch iller appears you type regardless appears and Cascaded as well as CH by the bolded letters of the Disch ANGEOVER arge Air. Your filter text is indicated column to sort the results You can click the Name in alphabetical or reverse alphabetical header module name. order. The filter box is not case-sensitive. Note: box next to the module you want to add and adjust the number of modules to add using 3. Click the Count the up arrows. highlighting appears when you change the quantity . To add another module, go back and down Green box to for that module to close the New Module Selection dialog You do not need to Step 2 and search name. module. add a different Notes: to create your own state-based custom logic, choose Hybrid Activity from the palette and be sure • If you need a meaningful name for the module to indicate the type of logic it contains. to provide modules of this type also appear • Any custom in the palette. field, for the module. Name type a name 4. In the User . The module appears in the Output 5. Click section of the Control View. Finish Control a Network Output Adding that follow apply to adding a Network Output when viewing the application using the Classic View The steps These steps may be different if you are using a different perspective. See the Perspectives section. perspective. over the Network header until the Add ( ) icon appears in the right corner and click the icon. 1. Hover Outputs Selection (Module Selection for Network Outputs) The New Module box appears. See the New Module dialog Selection screen section. 2. Choose the type of network output that you want to add. 3. Click the Count box next to the network output that you want to add and adjust the number of network outputs to add using the up and down Green highlighting appears when you change the quantity . To add another arrows. go back to Step 2 and select type. You do not need to close the New Module Selection dialog block, another output. network box to add a different field, type a name for the output. Name 4. In the User View. . The output Finish Outputs section of the Control appears 5. Click in the Network an Output or Miscellaneous Output Adding You can designate default output signals Note: creating systems from the Signal column in the Naming and before Signal screen. See the Setting Preferences section for details. Preferences that follow viewing to adding an output when The steps the application using the Classic View perspective. apply steps may be different if you are using a different perspective. See the Perspectives section. These 1. Hover over the Outputs or Miscellaneous (outputs) header until the Add ( ) icon appears in the right corner and click the icon. The New Module Selection Selection for Outputs) dialog box appears. See the New (Module Selection section. Module screen of the output to locate in the Filter field. For example, if your system requires a 0 to 10 VDC 2. Type the name to narrow control you can type Humidifier , or 0 10 VDC point, the results. The search displays and Humidity filters results for each letter that you type, regardless of where the letter appears in the output attribute (application, Bypass signal, if you type chw , CHW and so on). For example, Loop appears as well as Hx PCHW P. data type, Your filter text is indicated by the bolded letters of the output attribute. You can click any column header to sort the results in alphabetical or reverse alphabetical order. 176 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

177 Note: The filter box is not case-sensitive. the Count box next to the output to add and adjust the number of outputs to add using the up and 3. Click you want Green down when you change the quantity . To add another output, go back to Step highlighting arrows. appears You do not need the New Module attribute. Selection dialog box to add a 2 and search for that output to close output. different Name field, type a name for the output. 4. In the User the output later, right-click the output and select Note: (or use the F2 shortcut key). To rename Rename Finish module or modules appear in the Outputs or Miscellaneous (outputs) section of the 5. Click . The output View. Control Signal. the signal, right-click the module and select Modify If you must See Modifying an Input Note: change Signal . or Output an Effective Command Miscellaneous Input for an Output (Override Monitoring Feature) Adding explains This topic the Output Override Monitoring feature. how to implement Command inputs the current command and the priority of the current command to an output object Effective monitor values are currently for use within the application. These values these used by the Override and make available the actual feature from winding up and tuning incorrectly when PID logic blocks control Monitoring that prevents are overridden. outputs where you might want Scenarios Command input for an output include: to add an Effective • a system has more stages than are currently supported by the application. An example of this when is a unit with more This configuration stages of cooling. scenario requires that you manually add extra than eight replace outputs stages. Then, you must binary the MSC 08 module with the appropriate MSC for the additional for the actual number of stages present in your application (up to 12 stages). To add override monitoring for the additional stages, add Effective Command inputs to match the new binary outputs you just added. you must when you need control loop. We recommended you select a Sideloop for a custom control • to add a custom if the logic within enough is not complete Even to meet the specification for your application, loop. the sideloop monitoring for the outputs is automatically added. Then, you can modify the logic that enables the override feature loop to meet the specification. the control that you manually output, If a loop requires and you want to use the override monitoring feature, you add an analog add an associated Command input to the Miscellaneous Inputs column of the Control View to provide must Effective this feature. command for an output: To add an effective input module. For detailed instructions on how to add an output 1. Add the output see Adding an to your application, Output or Miscellaneous Output . 2. Select and add the appropriate effective command miscellaneous input module using Table 63 . For detailed instructions on how to add an input see Adding an Input or Miscellaneous Input . to your application, identify you added in Step 1. The right side of the table indicates the On the left side of the table, the output to use when adding the associated effective criteria miscellaneous input module. The table includes command the following columns to help configure the input/output pair: • Standard Name - Indicates the standard name of the module visible via the Rename dialog box. in the Output • the name of the module visible - Indicates and Miscellaneous Input columns of the Control Name View after the module is added to the application. A value of N/A in this column indicates that there is no available input/output pair. 177 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

178 • Application the Application filter to select in the Input Selection and Output Selection dialog - Indicates boxes. • the Function filter to select in the Input Selection and Output Selection dialog boxes. Function - Indicates pair, the output have a unique standard name within the application than one input/output To add more must dialog box). (visible via the Rename of the miscellaneous input module matches that of the associated output module 3. Verify that the Object Identifier Identifier attribute in the Details dialog box for both modules. by viewing the Object Command Configuration Information Table 63: Effective Input Configuration Output Configuration Miscellaneous Application Name Function Function Application Name Standard Standard Name Name 2 Pipe Command 2 Pipe HCP1-C Circulation Circulation 1 Pump 1 BO Pump 3 Pipe 2 Pipe Command HCP2-C Circulation Circulation 2 Pump 2 BO Pump Blr1 AO Output BLR1-% Eff Blr1 Cmd Effective Boiler1 BLR1-O Blr1 Command N/A Command Boiler1 BLR1-C Blr1 BO Effective AO Boiler1 Circ Blr1 Pump BP1-% Eff Blr1 BP1-O Circ Output Boiler1 Cmd Pmp Command Pump Pmp Boiler1 BP1-C Blr1 Pump BO Command Circ N/A Pmp Boiler1 Ena BLR1-EN N/A Command Blr1 BO Command Boiler1 Iso BLR1ISOV-C Blr1 Iso Valve N/A Valve BO Output Boiler1 SP BLR1SP-O Boiler 1 SP N/A AO Effective Blr2 BLR2-% Eff Blr2 Cmd Output Boiler2 BLR2-O Blr2 AO Command Command Boiler2 BLR2-C Blr2 BO N/A Output Boiler2 BP2-% Eff Blr2 Effective Circ Boiler2 Circ BP2-O Blr2 Pump AO Pmp Pmp Cmd Pump Command N/A Command Circ Boiler2 BP2-C Blr2 Pump BO Pmp N/A Boiler2 Ena BLR2-EN Blr2 BO Command N/A Boiler2 Iso BLR2ISOV-C Blr2 Iso Valve Command Valve BO N/A Output Boiler2 SP BLR2SP-O Boiler 2 SP AO Blr3 AO Effective Blr3 BLR3-% Eff Blr3 Cmd Output Boiler3 BLR3-O Command N/A Command Boiler3 BLR3-C Blr3 BO 178 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

179 Table 63: Effective Command Configuration Information Configuration Input Output Miscellaneous Configuration Standard Name Application Name Standard Application Function Function Name Name Boiler3 Circ AO BP3-% Eff Blr3 Blr3 Pump Effective Output Boiler3 Circ BP3-O Pmp Pump Pmp Command Cmd Boiler3 BP3-C Blr3 Pump BO Command Circ N/A Pmp Boiler3 Ena BLR3-EN N/A Command Blr3 BO Command Boiler3 Iso BLR3ISOV-C Blr3 Iso Valve N/A Valve BO Output Boiler3 SP BLR3SP-O Boiler 3 SP N/A AO Blr4 AO BLR4-% Eff Blr4 Cmd Output Boiler4 BLR4-O Blr4 Effective Command Command Boiler4 BLR4-C Blr4 BO N/A Circ Boiler4 Circ AO BP4-% Eff Blr4 Blr4 Pump BP4-O Output Boiler4 Effective Pmp Command Pmp Cmd Pump Boiler4 Command BP4-C Blr4 Pump BO N/A Circ Pmp Command Boiler4 Ena BLR4-EN Blr4 BO N/A Command Boiler4 Iso N/A BLR4ISOV-C Blr4 Iso Valve Valve BO N/A Output SP BLR4SP-O Boiler 4 SP Boiler4 AO Blr5 AO BLR5-% Eff Blr5 Cmd Output Boiler5 BLR5-O Blr5 Effective Command Command Boiler5 BLR5-C Blr5 BO N/A AO Boiler5 Circ Blr5 Pump BP5-% Eff Blr5 BP5-O Effective Output Boiler5 Circ Pmp Cmd Pmp Command Pump Command BP5-C Circ Boiler5 N/A Blr5 Pump BO Pmp Command Boiler5 Ena BLR5-EN Blr5 BO N/A N/A Command Boiler5 Iso Blr5 Iso Valve BLR5ISOV-C Valve BO Output SP BLR5SP-O Boiler 5 SP N/A Boiler5 AO Blr6 AO Blr6 BLR6-% Effective Output Boiler6 BLR6-O Eff Blr6 Cmd Command N/A Command Boiler6 BLR6-C Blr6 BO Effective AO Boiler6 Circ Blr6 Pump BP6-% Eff Blr6 BP6-O Circ Output Boiler6 Cmd Pump Pmp Command Pmp N/A Command Boiler6 Circ BO BP6-C Blr6 Pump Pmp 179 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

180 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Standard Function Application Name Standard Application Function Name Name Boiler6 Ena BLR6-EN Blr6 BO N/A Command Boiler6 Iso Blr6 Iso Valve BLR6ISOV-C N/A Command Valve BO N/A SP BLR6SP-O Boiler 6 SP Output Boiler6 AO Blr7 AO BLR7-% Effective Output Boiler7 BLR7-O Blr7 Eff Blr7 Cmd Command Command Boiler7 BLR7-C Blr7 BO N/A Circ Boiler7 Effective AO BP7-% Eff Blr7 Blr7 Pump BP7-O Output Boiler7 Circ Pmp Command Pump Pmp Cmd Command Boiler7 N/A BP7-C Blr7 Pump BO Circ Pmp N/A Boiler7 Ena BLR7-EN Blr7 BO Command Command Boiler7 Iso Blr7 Iso Valve BLR7ISOV-C N/A BO Valve Output SP BLR7SP-O Boiler 7 SP N/A Boiler7 AO Effective Blr8 BLR8-% Eff Blr8 Cmd Output Boiler8 BLR8-O Blr8 AO Command N/A Command Boiler8 BLR8-C Blr8 BO Circ Effective Eff Blr8 Output Boiler8 BP8-% BP8-O Blr8 Pump AO Boiler8 Circ Cmd Command Pmp Pump Pmp Boiler8 Command N/A BP8-C Blr8 Pump BO Circ Pmp N/A Boiler8 Ena BLR8-EN Blr8 BO Command Command Boiler8 Iso N/A BLR8ISOV-C Blr8 Iso Valve BO Valve Output Boiler8 SP BLR8SP-O Boiler 8 SP N/A AO Box Heating Box Heating 2 HTG-EC Eff Box HTG-C Box Heating Effective Command Position BO 2 Heating Vlv 2 Position Position Command Cmd Binary Box Heating HTG1-EC Eff Box Box Heating HTG1-C Stage 1 Effective Box Heating Stage Stage 1 Command Stg Heating 1 BO 1 Stage Command Cmd Binary 2 Box Heating Effective Eff Box Box Heating HTG2-C Box Heating Stage HTG2-EC Stage Stage 2 2 BO Stg Heating Command 2 Stage Command Cmd Binary 180 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

181 Table 63: Effective Configuration Command Information Configuration Output Input Miscellaneous Configuration Standard Name Application Name Standard Application Function Function Name Name Box Heating Box Heating HTG3-C Box Heating HTG3-EC Effective 3 Eff Box Stage Heating Command 3 Stage Stage 3 BO Stg Stage 3 Command Cmd Binary HTG-% Eff Box Box Heating Output Box Heating HTG-O Box Heating Effective Command Valve AO Heating Valve Cmd Effective HTG-% Eff Box Output_P AO Box Heating HTG-O Box Heating Box Heating Heating Command Valve PAO Valve Cmd N/A Command Box Heating HTG-EN Box Heating Enable Enable BO BYPV-% HW Bypass HW Bypass Effective Eff HW BYPV-O Loop Output Bypass Valve Valve AO Bypass Command Valve Cmd N/A Command Calibration ACSOL-C Calibration BO Solenoid Command Chiller 1 CHW CH1CHWISOV N/A Chiller 1 CHW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve -C N/A Chiller 1 CW Command CH1CWISOV-C Chiller 1 CW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Chiller 2 CHW Command Chiller 2 CHW N/A CH2CHWISOV-C Iso Valve Iso Valve BO Command Chiller 2 CW CH2CWISOV-C N/A Chiller 2 CW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Command Chiller 3 CHW N/A CH3CHWISOV-C Chiller 3 CHW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Command Chiller 3 CW N/A CH3CWISOV-C Chiller 3 CW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve N/A Command Chiller 4 CHW 4 CHW CH4CHWISOV-C Chiller Iso Valve Iso Valve BO Command 4 CW CH4CWISOV-C Chiller 4 CW N/A Chiller Iso Valve Iso Valve BO N/A Chiller 5 CHW 5 CHW CH5CHWISOV-C Chiller Command Iso Valve Iso Valve BO N/A Command Chiller 5 CW 5 CW CH5CWISOV-C Chiller Iso Valve Iso Valve BO Command Chiller 6 CHW N/A CH6CHWISOV-C Chiller 6 CHW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve N/A Command Chiller 6 CW 6 CW CH6CWISOV-C Chiller Iso Valve Iso Valve BO 181 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

182 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Standard Function Application Name Standard Function Application Name Name Chiller 7 CHW CH7CHWISOV-C Chiller 7 CHW N/A Command Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Chiller Command N/A CH7CWISOV-C Chiller 7 CW 7 CW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve CH8CHWISOV-C 8 CHW N/A Command Chiller 8 CHW Chiller Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Command Chiller 8 CW 8 CW CH8CWISOV-C Chiller N/A Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Command Chiller1 CH1-EN Chlr1 BO N/A Output Chiller1 N/A CH1CHWISOV-O Chlr1 CHW CHW ISO Valve AO Iso Valve CH1CHWISOV-C CHW N/A Command Chlr1 CHW Chiller1 Iso Valve BO Iso Valve CH1CL-% Chlr1 Curr Curr Effective Eff Chlr1 Chlr1 CH1CL-O Output Chiller1 CurrLim Command Curr Limit Limit Limit AO Cmd N/A Output CW CH1CWISOV-O Chlr1 CW ISO Chiller1 Iso Valve Valve AO N/A Command Chiller1 CW CW Iso CH1CWISOV-C Chlr1 Iso Valve Valve BO Chiller1 Chlr1 CH1SP-% Eff Chlr1 Effective Chlr1 Output CH1SP-O Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint AO Setpoint Command Cmd Command Chiller2 CH2-EN Chlr2 N/A BO N/A Chiller2 CHW Output CH2CHWISOV-O Chlr2 CHW ISO Valve AO Iso Valve Command Chiller2 CHW N/A CH2CHWISOV-C Chlr2 CHW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Effective Curr Chlr2 Curr Chlr2 CH2CL-% Eff Chlr2 CH2CL-O Chiller2 Output CurrLim Limit Command Limit AO Curr Limit Cmd Output Chlr2 CW Chiller2 CH2CWISOV-O N/A CW ISO Valve AO Iso Valve Command Chiller2 CW N/A CH2CWISOV-C Chlr2 CW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Effective Chlr2 Chlr2 CH2SP-O CH2SP-% Eff Chlr2 Chiller2 Output Setpoint Setpoint Command Setpoint AO Setpoint Cmd Command Chiller3 CH3-EN Chlr3 BO N/A N/A Output Chiller3 CHW CHW CH3CHWISOV-O Chlr3 Iso Valve ISO Valve AO 182 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

183 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Application Standard Name Name Chiller3 CHW CHW CH3CHWISOV-C Chlr3 N/A Command Iso Valve Iso Valve BO Output Curr Effective CH3CL-% Eff Chlr3 Curr Chlr3 Chlr3 Chiller3 CH3CL-O CurrLim Curr Limit Limit AO Limit Command Cmd Output Chiller3 CW CW ISO CH3CWISOV-O Chlr3 N/A Valve AO Iso Valve Command Chiller3 CW N/A CH3CWISOV-C Chlr3 CW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Chlr3 Effective CH3SP-% Eff Chlr3 Chlr3 CH3SP-O Chiller3 Output Command Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint AO Setpoint Cmd Command Chiller4 CH4-EN N/A BO Chlr4 N/A Chiller4 CHW Output CH4CHWISOV-O Chlr4 CHW ISO Valve AO Iso Valve Command Chiller4 CHW N/A CH4CHWISOV-C Chlr4 CHW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Effective Curr Chlr4 Curr Chlr4 CH4CL-% Eff Chlr4 CH4CL-O Chiller4 Output CurrLim Limit Command Limit AO Curr Limit Cmd Output Chiller4 N/A CH4CWISOV-O Chlr4 CW ISO CW Valve AO Iso Valve N/A Chiller4 CW CH4CWISOV-C Chlr4 CW Iso Command Iso Valve Valve BO CH4SP-O Chlr4 Chlr4 CH4SP-% Eff Chlr4 Effective Chiller4 Output Command Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint AO Setpoint Cmd Command Chiller5 CH5-EN Chlr5 BO N/A N/A Output Chiller5 CHW CHW CH5CHWISOV-O Chlr5 Iso Valve ISO Valve AO Command Chiller5 CHW N/A CH5CHWISOV-C Chlr5 CHW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Effective Curr Chlr5 Curr Chlr5 CH5CL-% Eff Chlr5 CH5CL-O Chiller5 Output Curr Limit Limit Command Limit AO CurrLim Cmd N/A Output Chiller5 CW CW ISO CH5CWISOV-O Chlr5 Iso Valve Valve AO N/A Command Chiller5 CW CW Iso CH5CWISOV-C Chlr5 Iso Valve Valve BO 183 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

184 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name Chlr5 Effective CH5SP-% Eff Chlr5 CH5SP-O Chiller5 Output Chlr5 Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint AO Command Setpoint Cmd Chiller6 BO Chlr6 Command N/A CH6-EN Chiller6 Output CH6CHWISOV-O Chlr6 CHW N/A CHW Iso Valve ISO Valve AO Command Chiller6 CHW Chlr6 CH6CHWISOV-C N/A CHW Iso Valve Iso Valve BO Curr Chlr6 Effective CH6CL-% Eff Chlr6 Curr Chlr6 Output Chiller6 CH6CL-O CurrLim Command Curr Limit Limit AO Limit Cmd Output CW CH6CWISOV-O Chlr6 CW ISO N/A Chiller6 Iso Valve Valve AO Command N/A CW Chiller6 CH6CWISOV-C Chlr6 CW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Chlr6 Chlr6 CH6SP-O CH6SP-% Eff Chlr6 Chiller6 Effective Output Setpoint Setpoint Setpoint Command Setpoint AO Cmd N/A Command Chiller7 CH7-EN Chlr7 BO N/A Chiller7 Output CH7CHWISOV-O Chlr7 CHW CHW ISO Valve AO Iso Valve CH7CHWISOV-C CHW N/A Command Chlr7 CHW Chiller7 Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Chlr7 Chlr7 Curr Curr CH7CL-% Eff Chlr7 Effective CH7CL-O Output Chiller7 CurrLim Command Limit Limit AO Curr Limit Cmd Output Chiller7 N/A CH7CWISOV-O Chlr7 CW ISO CW Iso Valve Valve AO Command Chiller7 CW N/A CH7CWISOV-C Chlr7 CW Iso Valve BO Iso Valve Effective Chlr7 CH7SP-% Eff Chlr7 Output Chiller7 CH7SP-O Chlr7 Setpoint Command Setpoint Setpoint AO Setpoint Cmd N/A Chiller8 CH8-EN Chlr8 BO Command Output N/A CHW CH8CHWISOV-O Chlr8 CHW Chiller8 Iso Valve ISO Valve AO N/A Command Chiller8 CHW CHW CH8CHWISOV-C Chlr8 Iso Valve Iso Valve BO Effective Curr Chlr8 Curr Chlr8 CH8CL-% Eff Chlr8 CH8CL-O Chiller8 Output Limit Curr Limit Limit Command CurrLim AO Cmd 184 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

185 Table 63: Effective Configuration Information Command Output Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Standard Standard Function Application Name Function Application Name Name Name Chlr8 Output CH8CWISOV-O Chiller8 CW ISO CW N/A Valve AO Iso Valve Chiller8 CW CH8CWISOV-C N/A Chlr8 CW Iso Command Iso Valve Valve BO Effective Chlr8 CH8SP-% Eff Chlr8 Output Chiller8 CH8SP-O Chlr8 Setpoint AO Setpoint Setpoint Command Setpoint Cmd Output Bypass CHWBYPV-% Eff CHW Effective CHW CHW Bypass CHWBYPV-O CHW Bypass Loop Valve Bypass Command Valve AO Valve Cmd N/A ime Cold Deck PARAM-CD-ST CD PAO StrokeT Damper Stroke Time Output Cold Deck Deck CD-% Eff Cold Cold CD-O Cold Deck Effective Deck Damper Damper AO Damper Command Cmd Damper Cold Deck Deck Eff Cold Effective Output_ PAO Cold Deck CD-O Cold CD-% PAO Deck Damper Damper Damper Command Cmd Damper Cold Deck CD-% Eff Cold Effective Output_P AO_ Cold Deck CD-O Cold Deck PAO Damper Deck Command Damper Damper Integrated Cmd Damper N/A Cold Deck Deck PARAM-CD-MINP Cold MinPulse Damper PAO - Minimum Pulse Width Command Combustion N/A COMBDPR-C Combustion Damper BO Damper Effective Compressor COMP1-C Compressor Compressor 1 COMP1-EC Eff Stage 1 BO Compressor 1 Command Stage Stg Stage Command Stage 1 Binary Cmd 2 Compressor COMP2-EC Effective Compressor COMP2-C Compressor Stage Eff Stage Stage 2 2 BO Stg Compressor Command Stage Command 2 Cmd Binary 2 Pipe Cooling Command CP1-C Circulation Circulation 1 Pump 1 BO Pump 2 Pipe Cooling Command CP2-C Circulation Circulation 2 Pump Pump 2 BO CWP1 N/A Cond Water AO CWP1-O Output Pump1 185 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

186 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Application Standard Name Name Cond Water CWP1 CWP1-C N/A BO Command Pump1 N/A Water Output CWP2-O CWP2 AO Cond Pump2 N/A Cond Water CWP2-C CWP2 BO Command Pump2 Output Cond Water AO CWP3-O CWP3 N/A Pump3 N/A Cond Water Command CWP3-C CWP3 BO Pump3 N/A Water Output CWP4-O CWP4 AO Cond Pump4 N/A Cond Water CWP4-C CWP4 BO Command Pump4 Output Cond Water N/A CWP5-O CWP5 AO Pump5 N/A Cond Water Command CWP5-C CWP5 BO Pump5 Output Cond Water CWP6-O CWP6 AO N/A Pump6 N/A Command Cond Water BO CWP6-C CWP6 Pump6 Output Water N/A CWP7-O CWP7 AO Cond Pump7 Command Water CWP7-C N/A CWP7 BO Cond Pump7 N/A Cond Water CWP8-O CWP8 AO Output Pump8 Command Cond Water CWP8-C N/A CWP8 BO Pump8 Effective Valve CLG-% Eff Cooling Cooling Output Cooling CLG-O Cooling Valve Cmd Valve AO Command Valve Effective Cooling Cooling CLG-EC Eff Cooling CLG-C Command Cooling Valve Binary Valve Vlv BO Command Cmd Valve Effective Cooling CLG-% Eff Cooling Cooling Output_P AO Cooling CLG-O Valve Cmd PAO Command Valve Cooling Cooling Effective Eff Cooling Output Cooling Face CLGFBD-O CLGFBD-% Command Damper & Bypass AO Cmd Damper Damper Damper 186 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

187 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Miscellaneous Output Configuration Standard Function Application Name Standard Function Name Application Name Name Cooling Effective Eff Cooling CLGFBD-% CLGFBD-O Output_P AO Cooling Face Cooling & Bypass Cmd Damper Damper PAO Command Damper Damper Cooling CP-C Cooling Command Pump N/A Circulation Pump BO Cooling Effective Eff Cooling Cooling Stage Stage 1 Cooling Stage CLG1-C CLG1-EC 1 BO Stg Command Stage 1 Stage 1 Cmd Command Binary Cooling Cooling CLG2-EC Eff Cooling Effective Stage 2 Cooling Stage CLG2-C Stage Stg Stage Command Stage 2 2 BO 2 Cmd Binary Command Cooling CLG3-EC Eff Cooling Cooling Effective Stage 3 Cooling Stage CLG3-C Stage 3 BO Stg Command Stage 3 Stage 3 Cmd Binary Command 4 Stage Eff Cooling Effective Cooling CLG4-EC Cooling Stage CLG4-C Cooling Stage Command Stage 4 4 Stg Stage 4 BO Command Binary Cmd Effective Stage Cooling Cooling CLG5-C Stage CLG5-EC Eff Cooling Cooling 5 Stage Command Stage 5 Stage Stg 5 BO 5 Cmd Command Binary Stage CLG6-C CLG6-EC Eff Cooling Stage Cooling 6 Cooling Stage Effective Cooling Stg Stage Command Stage 6 6 BO 6 Cmd Command Binary Cooling CLG7-EC Eff Cooling Cooling Effective Stage 7 Cooling Stage CLG7-C Stage 7 BO Stg Command Stage 7 Stage 7 Cmd Command Binary Effective Stage Cooling Cooling CLG8-C Stage CLG8-EC Eff Cooling Cooling 8 Stage Command Stage 8 Stage Stg 8 BO 8 Cmd Command Binary Cooling Cooling CLG-EC Eff Cooling Effective Command Cooling Valve CLG-C Valve Vlv Valve BO Valve Binary Command Command Cmd N/A Output Current 1 CURRENT1-O Current Out 1 AO N/A Output Current 2 CURRENT2-O Current Out 2 AO Output Current 3 CURRENT3-O Current Out 3 N/A AO N/A Output Current 4 CURRENT4-O Current Out 4 AO Current Output Current 5 CURRENT5-O N/A Out 5 AO 187 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

188 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Standard Application Name Standard Application Function Function Name Name Output 6 CURRENT6-O Current Out 6 N/A Current AO Domestic DHWV-% Eff Domestic Effective Output Domestic HW DHWV-O Domestic HW Command HW Valve Valve Valve AO HW Valve Cmd N/A Command Economizer ECON-C Economizer Enable BO Enable Output Effective EAD-% Eff Exhaust Exhaust Air Exhaust Air EAD-O Exhaust Air Damper Damper Air Damper Command Damper AO Cmd N/A Exhaust Air Command EAD-C Exhaust Air Damper Damper BO Air Exhaust Air Exhaust EAD-% Eff Exhaust EAD-O Air Effective AO Exhaust Output_P Damper Air Damper Damper Command Damper PAO Cmd N/A MinPulse Exhaust Air Air PARAM-EAD-MINP Exhaust Damper Damper PAO - Minimum Width Pulse StrokeT ime Exhaust Air PARAM-EAD-ST Exhaust N/A PAO Damper Damper Time Stroke Air Command EAD2-C Exhaust Air Exhaust Damper2 BO Damper2 Command Exhaust Fan EF-C Exhaust Fan N/A BO N/A Exhaust Fan EF-C Exhaust Fan Run/Stop BO Exhaust Fan EF-% Eff Exhaust Effective Output Exhaust Fan EF-O Exhaust Fan Speed AO Fan Speed Command Speed Cmd N/A Drive Exhaust Fan EF-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Bypass BV Drive Reset Drive VSD Reset Exhaust N/A EF-RESET Fan Fault Drive Fault BV N/A Exhaust Fan2 EF2-C Exhaust Fan2 Command BO N/A Run/Stop Exhaust Fan2 EF2-C Exhaust Fan2 BO 188 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

189 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Application Standard Name Name Exhaust Effective Fan2 EF2-% Eff Exhaust Exhaust EF2-O Fan2 Output Exhaust Speed Fan2 Speed Speed AO Command Fan2 Cmd FBP Damper FBP Damper FBD-% Eff FBP FBD-O Output Effective Face & Bypass Cmd Damper Command AO Damper Face FBP Damper Eff FBP Effective FBP Damper Output_P AO FBD-% & Bypass FBD-O Damper Cmd PAO Damper Command Command Fan SF-C N/A Fan BO N/A LO Fan SFL-C Fan Speed 1 Command BO Command Fan SFM-C Fan Speed 2 N/A MED BO N/A Command HI Fan SFH-C Fan Speed 3 BO N/A Fan SF-O Fan Speed Output AO N/A GEF GEF-C GEF BO Command Heat Heat HR-O Heat Recovery HR-% Eff Heat Effective Output Recovery Command Recovery Recovery Valve Cmd Valve AO Valve Command Heat Recovery HR-C Heat N/A Recovery Valve BO Effective Heat Heat HR-O Heat Recovery HR-% Eff Heat AO Output_P Recovery Recovery Command Recovery Valve Cmd Valve PAO Valve Output HREAFBD-O Heat N/A Heat Recovery Recovery EA FBD AO FBD Exhaust AO N/A Command Heat Recovery HREAFBD-C Heat EA FBD BO Recovery Exhaust FBD BO Output Heat Recovery HROAFBD-O Heat N/A OA FBD AO Recovery OA FBD AO N/A Command Heat Recovery Heat HROAFBD-C OA FBD BO Recovery OA FBD BO 189 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

190 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Standard Function Application Name Standard Application Function Name Name Command HRP-C Heat Heat Recovery N/A Pump Recovery BO Pump Heat Effective Heat HR-% Eff Heat HRW-O Heat Recovery Output Recovery Wheel Recovery Recovery Command Cmd Wheel AO Wheel Wheel Heat Recovery HRW-C Heat N/A Command Wheel Recovery Wheel BO Command N/A Tape 1 HTAPE1-C Heat Tape 1 Heat Command BO Command Heat HTAPE2-C Heat Tape 2 N/A Tape 2 BO Command Heat Tape 3 HTAPE3-C Command Tape 3 N/A Heat BO Command Command Heat Tape 4 HTAPE4-C N/A Tape 4 Heat Command BO Command Tape 5 HTAPE5-C Heat Tape 5 N/A Heat BO Command N/A Heat Tape 6 HTAPE6-C Heat Tape 6 Command Command BO Effective Stage Heating Heating HTG1-C Heating HTG1-EC Eff Heating 1 Stage Stage Command 1 Stage Stg 1 BO 1 Binary Command Cmd Stage HTG2-EC Eff Heating Effective Heating 2 Heating HTG2-C Heating Stage Stg Stage Command Stage 2 2 2 BO Cmd Binary Command Stage Heating Heating HTG3-C Effective HTG3-EC Eff Heating Heating 3 Stage 3 3 Command Stage Stage Stg 3 BO Cmd Command Binary Heating HTG-% Eff Heating Output Heating HTG-O Heating Valve Effective AO Valve Cmd Valve Command Command Effective Valve HTG-EC Eff Heating Heating HTG-C Heating Heating Valve Binary Valve BO Vlv Cmd Command Eff Heating Heating Valve HTG-% Effective Heating Output_P AO Heating HTG-O Valve Cmd PAO Command Valve Valve Reheat HTG1-% Effective Output Heating 1 HTG1-O Reheat Eff Reheat Command Valve 1 Valve 1 Cmd 1 AO 2 Effective Reheat Valve HTG2-% Eff Reheat Reheat Output Heating HTG2-O Command Valve 2 Cmd Valve 2 2 AO 190 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

191 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name Stage Reheat Effective HTG1-C HTG1-EC Eff Reheat Stage Heating 1 Stage Reheat Command 1 Stage 1 Stage 1 BO Stg Cmd Command Binary Stage Eff Reheat Effective Stage HTG2-EC Reheat HTG2-C Stage Heating 2 Reheat Command 2 Stage Stg 2 2 BO Stage Cmd Binary Command Stage Reheat Reheat HTG3-C Stage HTG3-EC Eff Reheat Heating Stage 3 Effective Command 3 Stage 3 Stage Stg 3 BO Cmd Command Binary 4 Stage Eff Reheat Effective Reheat HTG4-EC Heating Stage HTG4-C Reheat Stage Stage Command Stage 4 4 4 BO Stg Cmd Binary Command Stage Reheat Reheat HTG5-C Stage HTG5-EC Eff Reheat Heating 5 Stage Effective Command Stage 5 Stage Stg 5 BO 5 Binary Command Cmd Stage HTG6-EC Effective Eff Reheat Stage Reheat 6 Heating Stage HTG6-C Reheat Stg Stage Command Stage 6 6 BO 6 Command Binary Cmd Effective Stage Reheat Reheat HTG7-C Stage HTG7-EC Eff Reheat Heating 7 Stage 7 Stage 7 Stage Stg 7 BO Command Command Binary Cmd Stage Eff Reheat Effective Stage HTG8-EC Reheat HTG8-C Stage Heating 8 Reheat Command 8 Stage Stg 8 8 BO Stage Cmd Binary Command Eff Heating Valve Heating Heating HTG-EC Effective HTG-C Valve Command Heating Valve Command BO Vlv Valve Binary Cmd Command 2 Pipe 2 Pipe Valve HC-% Eff 2 Pipe Valve Output Heating/Cooling HC-O Effective Command Valve Cmd AO HC-EC Eff 2 Pipe 2 Pipe Valve Effective Command Heating/Cooling HC-C 2 Pipe Valve BO Vlv Valve Binary Command Cmd Effective HC-% Eff 2 Pipe Output_P AO Heating/Cooling HC-O 2 Pipe Valve 2 Pipe Valve Valve Cmd PAO Command Heating/Cooling Effective HCFBD-% Eff 2 Pipe Output 2 Pipe HCFBD-O 2 Pipe Damper Face & Bypass AO Cmd Command Damper Damper Damper Effective 2 Pipe 2 Pipe HCFBD-O HCFBD-% Eff 2 Pipe Heating/Cooling AO Output_P Cmd Face & Bypass Damper Command Damper PAO Damper Damper N/A Command Heating/Cooling 2 Pipe HCP-C Pump Circulation Pump BO 191 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

192 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Output Configuration Standard Function Application Name Standard Function Application Name Name Name 2 Pipe Valve HC-EC Eff 2 Pipe Effective Valve Command Heating/Cooling 2 Pipe HC-C Valve Command BO Vlv Valve Binary Cmd Command ime Hot Deck N/A PARAM-HD-ST HD PAO StrokeT Time Damper Stroke Hot Deck Hot Deck HD-% Eff Hot Deck Effective HD-O Output Hot Deck Command Damper Damper Damper AO Cmd Damper Hot Deck Effective HD-% Eff Hot Deck Output_P AO Hot Deck HD-O Hot Deck Cmd Damper Command Damper Damper PAO Damper Effective Hot Deck Hot Deck HD-% Eff Hot Deck HD-O Hot Deck Output_P AO Damper Damper Damper Damper PAO Cmd Command _Integrated MinPulse Hot Deck Hot Deck PARAM-HD-MINP N/A PAO - Minimum Damper Width Pulse Command Hot Gas N/A Hot Gas HGBPV-C Valve Bypass Valve Bypass BO N/A HP Iso Valve ISOVL V-C Iso Valve BO Command Effective Humidification Humidification HUM-% Eff HUM-O Humidifier Output Humidification AO Command Cmd Command HUM-C Humidifier Humidifier N/A Enable Enable BO Humidification HUM1-C Humidification Effective Humidifier HUM1-EC Eff 1 Stage Stage 1 BO Humidification Command 1 Stage Stg Stage Command 1 Stage Cmd Binary Humidifier HUM2-EC Eff Humidification Effective HUM2-C Stage 2 Humidification Stage Stg 2 BO 2 Humidification Command Stage Stage 2 Stage Command Cmd Binary Effective Humidification HUM3-C Humidification Humidifier 3 HUM3-EC Eff Stage Stage 3 BO Humidification 3 Command Stage Stage Stg Command Stage 3 Binary Cmd Effective Humidification HUM4-C Humidification Humidifier 4 HUM4-EC Eff Stage Stage Humidification 4 Command Stage Stage Stg 4 BO Command 4 Stage Binary Cmd Effective HW Mixing MIX-% Eff HW Output HX Mixing HXMV-O HW Mixing Valve AO Valve Command Valve Mixing Valve Cmd 192 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

193 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Standard Function Application Name Standard Application Function Name Name HX1 Iso Valve HX1ISOV-C HX1 Iso Valve N/A Command BO HX1 Valve 1 HX1V1-% Effective HX1 AO1 Output Eff HX1 HX1V1-O HX1 Valve 1 Valve 1 Cmd Command HX1 Valve 2 HX1V2-O Eff HX1 HX1V2-% Output HX1 Valve 2 Effective HX1 AO2 Valve 2 Cmd Command Command HX2 Iso Valve HX2ISOV-C HX2 Iso Valve N/A BO HX2V1-% HX2 Valve 1 Effective Eff HX2 HX2 AO1 Output HX2 Valve 1 HX2V1-O Valve 1 Cmd Command HX2 Valve 2 Eff HX2 Output HX2 Valve 2 HX2V2-O HX2 AO2 HX2V2-% Effective Command Valve 2 Cmd Lighting LIGHT-C Lighting BO Command N/A OA Minimum OA Minimum MOAD-% Effective MOAD-O Min Outdoor Output Eff Minimum OA Damper Damper Command Damper AO Air Damper Cmd N/A Min Outdoor MOAD-C Minimum OA Command Air Damper Damper BO Effective OA Minimum OA Minimum MOAF-% Eff Minimum MOAF-O Output Min Outdoor Air Fan OA Fan Cmd Command Fan AO Fan Command Min Outdoor MOAF-C Minimum OA N/A Air Fan Fan BO N/A Run/Stop MOAF-C Minimum OA Min Outdoor Air Fan Fan BO Bypass Drive N/A VSD Bypass MOAF-BYP ASS Min Outdoor Air Fan BV Drive MOAF-RESET Reset VSD Reset N/A Drive Min Outdoor Air Fan Fault Drive Fault BV N/A Command Misc 1 MISC1-C Misc 1 Command BO Command MISC2-C Misc 2 N/A Misc 2 Command BO N/A Misc 3 MISC3-C Misc 3 Command Command BO N/A Command Misc 4 MISC4-C Misc 4 Command BO N/A Command Misc 5 MISC5-C Misc 5 Command BO N/A Command Misc 6 MISC6-C Misc 6 Command BO 193 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

194 Table 63: Effective Command Configuration Information Configuration Input Output Miscellaneous Configuration Standard Function Application Name Standard Name Function Application Name Name Miscellaneous MISC-O Cooling Valve Output_P N/A AO PAO Mixed Air Effective MAD-% Eff Mixed Air Air Mixed Output Miscellaneous MISC-O Cmd Damper Damper AO Command Damper Reheat Effective Eff Reheat Miscellaneous Stage Stage 1 MISC1-EC Miscellaneous MISC1-C Stg 1 1 BO Stage Command Binary Cmd Command 2 Effective MISC2-EC Eff Reheat Stage Reheat Stage Miscellaneous MISC2-C Miscellaneous Command 2 Stage 2 BO Stg Command Binary Cmd Stage MISC3-EC Eff Reheat Effective Stage 3 Miscellaneous MISC3-C Reheat Miscellaneous Command Stg 3 BO Stage 3 Command Cmd Binary Miscellaneous MISC4-EC Eff Reheat Effective Stage Stage 4 Miscellaneous MISC4-C Reheat 4 Command 4 BO Stg Stage Cmd Command Binary MISC5-C Miscellaneous MISC5-EC Effective Stage Reheat Stage 5 Miscellaneous Eff Reheat Stage 5 Command 5 BO Stg Cmd Binary Command Miscellaneous Eff Reheat Effective Stage 6 MISC6-EC Miscellaneous MISC6-C Reheat Stage Command Stage 6 Stg 6 BO Cmd Binary Command Effective Miscellaneous MISC7-EC Eff Reheat Stage Reheat MISC7-C Miscellaneous Stage 7 Command 7 Stage 7 BO Stg Cmd Binary Command Effective Stage Miscellaneous MISC8-EC Eff Reheat Reheat MISC8-C Miscellaneous 8 Stage Stg 8 Stage 8 BO Command Cmd Command Binary Miscellaneous MISC-C Supply Fan N/A Command BO Output Mixed Effective MAD-% Eff Mixed Air Air Mixed Air MAD-O Mixed Air Damper Damper Cmd Damper Command Damper AO Effective Valve MIX-% Eff Mixing Output Mixing Valve MIX-O HW Mixing Mixing Command Valve Cmd Valve AO N/A Command Motor 1 MOTOR1-C Motor 1 Command BO N/A Command Motor 2 MOTOR2-C Motor 2 Command BO Command Motor 3 N/A Motor 3 MOTOR3-C Command BO N/A Command Motor 4 MOTOR4-C Motor 4 Command BO 194 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

195 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Function Application Name Standard Standard Application Name Name 5 MOTOR5-C Motor Command 5 N/A Motor BO Command Motor 6 N/A Motor 6 Command MOTOR6-C BO Command Air OA Damper Eff OA OA Damper OAD-O Effective Outdoor OAD-% Output Damper Cmd Damper AO Command Command Outdoor Air OA Damper OAD-C N/A BO Damper Command N/A OA Damper2 OA Damper2 OAD2-C BO Command N/A Supply SF-C Fan BO Parallel Fan 1 AO PCHWP 1 PCHWP1-% Eff PCHWP Effective Output PCHWP1 PCHWP1-O PCHWP 1 Cmd Command Command PCHWP1 PCHWP1-C PCHWP1 BO N/A PCHWP 2 PCHWP2-% Eff PCHWP Effective Output PCHWP2 PCHWP2-O PCHWP 2 AO Command 2 Cmd N/A Command PCHWP2 PCHWP2-C PCHWP2 BO Effective 3 AO PCHWP 3 PCHWP3-% Eff PCHWP PCHWP Output PCHWP3 PCHWP3-O 3 Cmd Command Command PCHWP3 PCHWP3 BO N/A PCHWP3-C 4 AO PCHWP PCHWP4-% Eff PCHWP Effective Output 4 PCHWP4-O PCHWP PCHWP4 Command 4 Cmd N/A Command PCHWP4 PCHWP4-C PCHWP4 BO 5 AO PCHWP 5 Effective Eff PCHWP PCHWP Output PCHWP5 PCHWP5-O PCHWP5-% 5 Cmd Command Command PCHWP5-C PCHWP5 BO N/A PCHWP5 6 AO PCHWP 6 Effective Eff PCHWP PCHWP Output PCHWP6 PCHWP6-O PCHWP6-% 6 Cmd Command N/A Command PCHWP6 PCHWP6-C PCHWP6 BO PCHWP Effective 7 PCHWP7-% Eff PCHWP 7 AO Output PCHWP7 PCHWP7-O PCHWP 7 Cmd Command N/A Command PCHWP7 PCHWP7-C PCHWP7 BO Effective 8 AO PCHWP 8 PCHWP8-% Eff PCHWP PCHWP Output PCHWP8 PCHWP8-O 8 Cmd Command N/A Command PCHWP8 PCHWP8-C PCHWP8 BO Effective AO PHWP1 PHWP1-% Eff PHWP1 PHWP1 Output PHWP1 PHWP1-O Cmd Command N/A Command PHWP1 PHWP1-C PHWP1 BO 195 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

196 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Function Application Name Standard Standard Application Name Name PHWP2 Eff PHWP2 PHWP2-% Output PHWP2 PHWP2-O PHWP2 AO Effective Cmd Command PHWP2 N/A PHWP2 BO Command PHWP2-C AO PHWP3-% Eff PHWP3 Effective Output PHWP3 PHWP3-O PHWP3 PHWP3 Cmd Command N/A Command PHWP3 PHWP3-C PHWP3 BO PHWP4-O PHWP4 PHWP4-% Eff PHWP4 PHWP4 Output PHWP4 Effective AO Cmd Command Command PHWP4 PHWP4 BO N/A PHWP4-C AO PHWP5 Eff PHWP5 Effective Output PHWP5-% PHWP5-O PHWP5 PHWP5 Command Cmd N/A Command PHWP5 PHWP5-C PHWP5 BO AO PHWP6 PHWP6-% Eff PHWP6 Output Effective PHWP6 PHWP6-O PHWP6 Command Cmd Command PHWP6-C PHWP6 BO N/A PHWP6 AO PHWP7 PHWP7-% Eff PHWP7 Output Effective PHWP7 PHWP7-O PHWP7 Command Cmd N/A Command PHWP7 PHWP7-C PHWP7 BO Effective AO PHWP8 PHWP8-% Eff PHWP8 PHWP8 Output PHWP8 PHWP8-O Cmd Command Command PHWP8 PHWP8 BO N/A PHWP8-C Preheat Preheat PH-% Effective Valve Output Preheat PH-O Eff Preheat Valve Valve Cmd AO Command Valve Preheat Preheat PH-C PH-EC Effective Preheat Command Eff Preheat Valve Vlv BO Valve Binary Command Cmd AO PH-% Valve Effective Eff Preheat Preheat Output_P Preheat Preheat PH-O Valve Cmd Valve PAO Command Effective Valve Preheat Preheat PH1-% Eff Preheat PH1-O Output Preheat 1 Valve 1 Cmd Valve 1 Command 1 AO 2 Preheat PH2-% Eff Preheat Effective Valve Preheat Preheat PH2-O Output Valve 2 Command 2 AO Valve 2 Cmd Command Preheat N/A PH-EN Preheat Enable Enable BO Preheat PHFBD-% Eff Preheat Effective Output Preheat Face PHFBD-O Preheat Damper Damper & Bypass AO Cmd Command Damper Damper Preheat Preheat Preheat PHFBD-O PHFBD-% Eff Preheat Face Effective Output_P AO Damper Cmd & Bypass PAO Damper Command Damper Damper 196 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

197 Table 63: Effective Configuration Command Information Configuration Output Miscellaneous Input Configuration Standard Function Application Name Standard Name Function Application Name Name Pump PHP-C Preheat Preheat N/A Command Circulation Pump BO Preheat Command N/A Preheat PHP1-C Circulation Circulation 1 Pump 1 BO Pump Preheat N/A Command Preheat PHP2-C Circulation Circulation 2 Pump 2 BO Pump 1 Stage Preheat Preheat PH1-C PH1-EC Eff Preheat Stage Preheat Effective Stage 1 Stage 1 Stage 1 BO Stg Command Cmd Command Binary Effective Preheat Stage Preheat PH2-EC Eff Preheat PH2-C Stage Preheat 2 Stage Stg 2 Stage 2 Stage 2 BO Command Cmd Binary Command Stage Effective PH3-EC Eff Preheat Stage Preheat 3 Preheat Stage PH3-C Preheat Stg Stage Command Stage 3 3 BO 3 Cmd Command Binary PH4-C Preheat PH4-EC Eff Preheat Effective Preheat Stage 4 Preheat Stage Stage 4 4 BO Stg Command Stage 4 Stage Cmd Command Binary 5 Stage Stage PH5-EC Eff Preheat Preheat PH5-C Effective Preheat Stage Preheat Command Stage 5 Stage 5 5 BO Stg Binary Command Cmd Preheat Stage Preheat Preheat PH6-C PH6-EC Eff Preheat Stage Effective 6 Stage Command 6 Stage 6 Stage 6 BO Stg Cmd Command Binary Stage Stage Preheat Preheat PH7-C PH7-EC Eff Preheat Stage Preheat 7 Effective Stg Command 7 Stage 7 Stage 7 BO Command Cmd Binary Preheat Effective PH8-EC Eff Preheat Stage Preheat Stage 8 Preheat Stage PH8-C 8 8 BO Stg Command Stage 8 Stage Cmd Binary Command Output RH-% Eff Reheat Effective Reheat Reheat RH-O Reheat Valve Command Valve AO Valve Cmd Effective Valve Reheat Reheat RH-% Eff Reheat RH-O Output_P AO Reheat Valve Cmd Valve PAO Command Command Reheat N/A RF-EN Reheat Enable Enable BO N/A Command Reheat Pump RHP-C Reheat Circulation Pump BO 197 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

198 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Standard Function Application Name Standard Function Application Name Name Reheat Command N/A RHP1-C Reheat Circulation Circulation Pump 1 BO 1 Pump Reheat N/A Command Reheat RHP2-C Circulation Circulation 2 2 BO Pump Pump Relief Fan BO RLF-C Relief Command N/A Fan Run/Stop Fan RLF-C Relief Fan BO N/A Relief Fan Effective Fan Relief RLF-% Eff Relief RLF-O Fan Output Relief Relief Speed Command Speed AO Fan Speed Cmd Bypass Relief Fan RLF-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive N/A Drive BV Reset Drive RLF-RESET Relief Fan N/A VSD Reset Drive Fault Fault BV N/A Relief Fan2 RLF2-C Relief Fan2 Command BO Run/Stop Relief Fan2 RLF2-C Relief Fan2 N/A BO Effective Fan2 Relief Fan2 Relief RLF2-% Eff Relief RLF2-O Fan2 Relief Output Speed Command Speed AO Fan2 Speed Cmd Air Return Effective RAD-% Eff Return Air Return Output Return Air RAD-O Damper Command Damper AO Damper Air Damper Cmd Command Return Fan RF-C Return Fan N/A BO Run/Stop Fan RF-C Return Fan N/A Return BO Output Effective RF-% Eff Return Return Fan Return Fan RF-O Return Fan AO Fan Speed Command Speed Speed Cmd N/A Bypass Return Fan RF-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive BV Drive Reset Drive VSD Reset Return N/A RF-RESET Fan Fault Drive Fault BV N/A Return Fan2 RF2-C Return Fan2 Command BO N/A Run/Stop Return Fan2 RF2-C Return Fan2 BO 198 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

199 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name Return Fan2 Fan2 RF2-% Eff Return Effective RF2-O Fan2 Output Return Return Fan2 Speed Speed AO Command Speed Cmd Output Reversing N/A REV1-C Binary Reversing Valve 1 BO Valve 1 N/A Binary Reversing REV2-C Reversing Output Valve 2 Valve 2 BO Command Sand Filter SANDFIL N/A Sand Filter T-C Command BO Command N/A HDV-C Drain Valve Scrubber Drain BO N/A Scrubber Fill HFV-C Fill Valve BO Command AO SCHWP1 SCHWP1-% Eff SCHWP1 SCHWP1-O Output Sec CHW Effective SCHWP1 Pump1 Command Cmd SCHWP1-C Sec CHW SCHWP1 SCHWP1-EC Eff SCHWP1 BO SCHWP1 Command Effective Pump1 Stg Cmd Binary Command N/A Bypass Sec CHW SCHWP1-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive Drive Pump1 BV N/A Reset Drive Sec CHW VSD Reset SCHWP1-RESET Pump1 Drive Fault Fault BV Sec CHW SCHWP2-% Eff SCHWP2 Effective Output SCHWP2 SCHWP2-O SCHWP2 AO Command Pump2 Cmd SCHWP2-EC BO SCHWP2 Effective Eff SCHWP2 SCHWP2 SCHWP2-C Command Sec CHW Pump2 Stg Binary Cmd Command SCHWP2-BYP Drive N/A VSD Bypass Bypass ASS Sec CHW Pump2 Drive BV N/A Reset Drive VSD Reset Sec CHW SCHWP2-RESET Pump2 Fault Fault Drive BV Output SCHWP3 SCHWP3-% Effective AO SCHWP3 Sec CHW SCHWP3-O Eff SCHWP3 Pump3 Command Cmd Effective BO SCHWP3 SCHWP3 SCHWP3-EC Eff SCHWP3 SCHWP3-C Sec CHW Command Cmd Pump3 Binary Stg Command SCHWP3-BYP Drive N/A VSD Bypass Bypass ASS Sec CHW Pump3 Drive BV N/A Reset Drive VSD Reset Sec CHW SCHWP3-RESET Pump3 Fault Drive Fault BV 199 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

200 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Standard Function Application Name Standard Function Application Name Name Eff SCHWP4 Output Sec CHW SCHWP4-% SCHWP4-O SCHWP4 AO Effective SCHWP4 Command Cmd Pump4 BO Effective SCHWP4-EC Eff SCHWP4 SCHWP4 SCHWP4-C Command Sec CHW SCHWP4 Pump4 Binary Stg Cmd Command ASS Sec CHW N/A SCHWP4-BYP Drive VSD Bypass Bypass BV Drive Pump4 Reset N/A VSD Reset Sec CHW SCHWP4-RESET Drive Pump4 Drive Fault Fault BV Sec CHW SCHWP5-% Eff SCHWP5 Effective Output SCHWP5 AO SCHWP5-O SCHWP5 Pump5 Cmd Command BO SCHWP5 SCHWP5 SCHWP5-EC Eff SCHWP5 SCHWP5-C Sec CHW Command Effective Pump5 Cmd Binary Stg Command N/A Drive Sec CHW Bypass SCHWP5-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Pump5 BV Drive N/A Reset Drive Sec CHW SCHWP5-RESET VSD Reset Fault Fault Drive Pump5 BV Effective SCHWP6 SCHWP6-% Eff SCHWP6 AO Output Sec CHW SCHWP6 SCHWP6-O Pump6 Cmd Command SCHWP6 BO SCHWP6 SCHWP6-EC Eff SCHWP6 Effective SCHWP6-C Command Sec CHW Pump6 Binary Stg Cmd Command Bypass Drive Sec CHW N/A SCHWP6-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive BV Pump6 SCHWP6-RESET Reset VSD Reset Sec CHW N/A Drive Fault Drive Fault Pump6 BV Effective AO SCHWP7 SCHWP7-% Eff SCHWP7 SCHWP7 Output Sec CHW SCHWP7-O Pump7 Cmd Command BO SCHWP7-C SCHWP7 SCHWP7-EC Eff SCHWP7 SCHWP7 Effective Command Sec CHW Pump7 Stg Binary Cmd Command SCHWP7-BYP Drive N/A VSD Bypass Bypass ASS Sec CHW Pump7 Drive BV N/A Reset Drive VSD Reset Sec CHW SCHWP7-RESET Pump7 Fault Drive Fault BV SCHWP8 SCHWP8-% AO Effective Output Sec CHW SCHWP8-O SCHWP8 Eff SCHWP8 Cmd Command Pump8 200 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

201 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name BO SCHWP8 SCHWP8-EC Eff SCHWP8 Effective SCHWP8-C Command Sec CHW SCHWP8 Pump8 Binary Stg Cmd Command Bypass Sec CHW VSD Bypass SCHWP8-BYP ASS N/A Drive Drive Pump8 BV N/A Reset Drive Sec CHW SCHWP8-RESET VSD Reset Drive Pump8 Fault Fault BV Effective SHWP1 SHWP1-% Eff SHWP1 AO Output Sec HW SHWP1 SHWP1-O Pump1 Cmd Command SHWP1 BO SHWP1 SHWP1-EC Eff SHWP1 Effective SHWP1-C Command Sec HW Pump1 Binary Stg Cmd Command Bypass Drive Sec HW N/A SHWP1-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive BV Pump1 SHWP1-RESET Reset VSD Reset Sec HW N/A Drive Fault Drive Fault Pump1 BV Effective AO SHWP2 SHWP2-% Eff SHWP2 SHWP2 Output Sec HW SHWP2-O Pump2 Cmd Command SHWP2 SHWP2-EC Eff SHWP2 Command Sec HW SHWP2-C SHWP2 BO Effective Cmd Stg Binary Pump2 Command Bypass Drive Sec HW SHWP2-BYP ASS VSD Bypass N/A Drive Pump2 BV Reset N/A Drive Sec HW VSD Reset SHWP2-RESET Pump2 Fault Fault Drive BV Eff SHWP3 SHWP3 SHWP3-% Effective AO Output Sec HW SHWP3 SHWP3-O Pump3 Cmd Command Effective BO SHWP3 SHWP3 SHWP3-EC Eff SHWP3 SHWP3-C Sec HW Command Cmd Pump3 Binary Stg Command SHWP3-BYP Drive N/A VSD Bypass Bypass ASS Sec HW Pump3 Drive BV N/A Reset Drive VSD Reset Sec HW SHWP3-RESET Pump3 Fault Drive Fault BV SHWP4 SHWP4-% AO Effective Output Sec HW SHWP4-O SHWP4 Eff SHWP4 Cmd Command Pump4 201 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

202 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name BO SHWP4 SHWP4-EC Eff SHWP4 Effective SHWP4-C Command Sec HW SHWP4 Pump4 Binary Stg Cmd Command Bypass Sec HW VSD Bypass SHWP4-BYP ASS N/A Drive Drive Pump4 BV N/A Reset Drive Sec HW SHWP4-RESET VSD Reset Drive Pump4 Fault Fault BV Effective SHWP5 SHWP5-% Eff SHWP5 AO Output Sec HW SHWP5 SHWP5-O Pump5 Cmd Command SHWP5 BO SHWP5 SHWP5-EC Eff SHWP5 Effective SHWP5-C Command Sec HW Pump5 Binary Stg Cmd Command Bypass Drive Sec HW N/A SHWP5-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive BV Pump5 SHWP5-RESET Reset VSD Reset Sec HW N/A Drive Fault Drive Fault Pump5 BV Effective AO SHWP6 SHWP6-% Eff SHWP6 SHWP6 Output Sec HW SHWP6-O Pump6 Cmd Command SHWP6 SHWP6-EC Eff SHWP6 Command Sec HW SHWP6-C SHWP6 BO Effective Cmd Stg Binary Pump6 Command Bypass Drive Sec HW SHWP6-BYP ASS VSD Bypass N/A Drive Pump6 BV Reset N/A Drive Sec HW VSD Reset SHWP6-RESET Pump6 Fault Fault Drive BV Eff SHWP7 SHWP7 SHWP7-% Effective AO Output Sec HW SHWP7 SHWP7-O Pump7 Cmd Command Effective BO SHWP7 SHWP7 SHWP7-EC Eff SHWP7 SHWP7-C Sec HW Command Cmd Pump7 Binary Stg Command SHWP7-BYP Drive N/A VSD Bypass Bypass ASS Sec HW Pump7 Drive BV N/A Reset Drive VSD Reset Sec HW SHWP7-RESET Pump7 Fault Drive Fault BV SHWP8 SHWP8-% AO Effective Output Sec HW SHWP8-O SHWP8 Eff SHWP8 Cmd Command Pump8 202 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

203 Table 63: Effective Configuration Command Information Configuration Input Output Miscellaneous Configuration Standard Name Application Name Standard Application Function Function Name Name Effective SHWP8 SHWP8-EC Eff SHWP8 BO SHWP8 Command Sec HW SHWP8-C Pump8 Binary Stg Cmd Command Drive Sec HW N/A SHWP8-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Bypass BV Drive Pump8 Drive Reset Sec HW N/A SHWP8-RESET VSD Reset Pump8 Fault Fault Drive BV N/A Output Sequenced HC-O Sequenced AO Valves - Valves Heating Cooling Series Supply N/A SF-C Fan BO Command Fan Output Supply SF-O Fan Speed N/A Series Fan AO Sideloop Sideloop Eff Sideloop Effective Output AO SL-O Sideloop SL-% Command Cmd SL-EC BO Sideloop Effective Eff Sideloop Sideloop SL-C Command Sideloop Cmd Vlv Binary Command SL-O Sideloop SL-% Eff Sideloop PAO Output_P AO Sideloop Effective Sideloop Cmd Command Sideloop SL1-C SL1-EC Effective Sideloop Stage 1 Sideloop Eff Sideloop 1 Stage Stg 1 1 BO Command Stage Stage Cmd Command Binary Sideloop Sideloop Sideloop SL2-C SL2-EC Eff Sideloop Effective 2 Stage 2 Command Stage 2 Stage Stage 2 BO Stg Command Cmd Binary Sideloop SL3-EC Eff Sideloop Effective Stage 3 Sideloop SL3-C Sideloop 3 BO Stage 3 Stage Command Stg Stage 3 Command Cmd Binary SL4-EC Eff Sideloop Sideloop Effective Stage 4 Sideloop SL4-C Sideloop Stg 4 BO Command Stage Stage 4 Stage 4 Cmd Binary Command Effective Sideloop SL5-EC Eff Sideloop Stage 5 Sideloop SL5-C Sideloop Stg Stage 5 5 BO Command Stage Stage 5 Command Cmd Binary Sideloop SL6-EC Eff Sideloop Effective Stage 6 Sideloop SL6-C Sideloop 6 6 BO Command Stg Stage 6 Stage Stage Cmd Command Binary 203 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

204 Table 63: Effective Command Configuration Information Configuration Input Output Miscellaneous Configuration Standard Name Application Name Standard Application Function Function Name Name Effective Sideloop SL7-C Sideloop SL7-EC Eff Sideloop 7 Stage Sideloop 7 Stage Command 7 Stage Stage 7 BO Stg Command Binary Cmd SL8-EC Eff Sideloop Effective Stage 8 Sideloop Sideloop SL8-C Sideloop Command Stage Stage Stg 8 8 8 BO Stage Cmd Binary Command N/A Command Steam STMISO-C Steam Valve Isolation Isolation Valve BO Heating Effective SUPHTG1-EC Eff Supp Supp Supp SUPHTG1-C Stage 1 Supplemental Heating Stg Heating Stage Command 1 BO Heating Command 1 Stage 1 Stage Binary Cmd SUPHTG-% Supplemental Heating Effective Eff Supp Supp SUPHTG-O Output Supplemental Heating Heating Heating Valve AO Command Valve Cmd Heating Supp Supp SUPHTG-C Supplemental SUPHTG-EC Eff Supp Command Effective Heating Heating Heating Vlv Valve BO Valve Binary Valve Command Cmd Effective SUPHTG-% Eff Supp Supplemental Output_P AO Supplemental SUPHTG-O Supp Heating Heating Heating Heating Command Valve PAO Valve Cmd Supplemental N/A Supplemental SUPHTG-EN Command Heating Heating Enable Enable BO Command Supplemental N/A Supplemental SUPHTGP-C Pump Heating Pump Heating BO Supply Damper DPR-% Eff Damper Effective Output Supply Air DPR-O Damper Command Damper AO Cmd Effective Supply Damper DPR-% Eff Damper DPR-O Output_P AO Supply Air Damper Cmd Damper PAO Command Supply Output_P DPR-% Eff Damper Supply Effective AO DPR-O Damper Air Damper Cmd Damper PAO Command _Integrated N/A MinPulse Supply Air Supply PARAM-DPR-MINP Damper PAO Damper - Minimum Pulse Width Supply ime Supply Air N/A PARAM-DPR-ST StrokeT Damper Damper PAO Stroke Time 204 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

205 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Application Name Standard Application Standard Function Name Name Supply Fan SF-C N/A Fan Command Supply BO N/A Run/Stop Supply Fan SF-C Supply Fan BO Fan Supply Fan Supply SF-% Eff Supply Supply Fan Output Effective SF-O Speed Command Speed AO Fan Speed Cmd Bypass Supply Fan SF-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive N/A Drive BV Reset Drive SF-RESET Supply Fan N/A VSD Reset Drive Fault Fault BV N/A Supply Fan2 SF2-C Supply Fan2 Command BO Run/Stop Supply Fan2 SF2-C Supply Fan2 N/A BO Effective Fan2 Supply Fan2 Supply SF2-% Eff Supply SF2-O Fan2 Supply Output Speed Speed Command Speed AO Fan2 Cmd Command TEF TEF BO N/A TEF-C Tower Basin Command CTBH-EN Tower Basin N/A Heater BO Heater Command Tower Basin N/A CTMUV-C Tower Basin MU Valve BO MUV Output Bypass CTV-O Twr Bypass N/A Tower Valve AO Valve N/A Tower1 Basin CT1BH-EN Twr1 Basin Command Heater Heater BO N/A Command Tower1 Basin Twr1 Basin CT1MUV-C MU Valve MU BO Command Iso CT1ISOV-C Twr1 Iso N/A Tower1 Valve Valve BO N/A Tower2 Basin Twr2 Basin CT2BH-EN Command Heater Heater BO N/A Command Tower2 Basin Twr2 Basin CT2MUV-C MU Valve MU BO N/A Command Tower2 Iso CT2ISOV-C Twr2 Iso Valve Valve BO N/A Command Tower3 Basin Twr3 Basin CT3BH-EN Heater Heater BO 205 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

206 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Standard Function Application Name Standard Function Application Name Name Tower3 Basin CT3MUV-C Twr3 Basin N/A Command MU Valve MU BO Tower3 Command N/A CT3ISOV-C Twr3 Iso Iso Valve BO Valve CT4BH-EN Basin N/A Command Twr4 Basin Tower4 Heater BO Heater Command Tower4 Basin Twr4 Basin CT4MUV-C N/A MU BO MU Valve Command Tower4 N/A CT4ISOV-C Twr4 Iso Iso Valve BO Valve CT5BH-EN Basin N/A Command Twr5 Basin Tower5 Heater BO Heater Command Tower5 Basin CT5MUV-C N/A Twr5 Basin MU BO MU Valve Command Iso CT5ISOV-C Twr5 Iso N/A Tower5 Valve Valve BO N/A Tower6 Basin Twr6 Basin CT6BH-EN Command Heater Heater BO N/A Command Tower6 Basin Twr6 Basin CT6MUV-C MU Valve MU BO Command Tower6 N/A CT6ISOV-C Twr6 Iso Iso Valve BO Valve CT7BH-EN Basin N/A Command Twr7 Basin Tower7 Heater BO Heater Command Tower7 Basin CT7MUV-C N/A Twr7 Basin MU BO MU Valve Command Iso CT7ISOV-C Twr7 Iso N/A Tower7 Valve Valve BO N/A Tower8 Basin Twr8 Basin CT8BH-EN Command Heater Heater BO N/A Command Tower8 Basin Twr8 Basin CT8MUV-C MU Valve MU BO N/A Command Tower8 Iso CT8ISOV-C Twr8 Iso Valve Valve BO Effective AO TwrFan1 CT1-% Eff TwrFan1 TwrFan1 Output TowerFan1 CT1-O Cmd Command BO TwrFan1 CT1-EC Effective TwrFan1 Command TowerFan1 CT1-C Eff TwrFan1 Binary Cmd Stg Command 206 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

207 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name Effective TwrFan1 CT1L-C TowerFan1 CT1L-EC Eff TwrFan1 LO Command TwrFan1 1 Speed 1 Speed Speed 1 BO Stg Command Binary Cmd Command CT1M-EC TwrFan1 CT1M-C Eff TwrFan1 TowerFan1 TwrFan1 Effective 2 Speed MED Speed Stg 2 Speed 2 BO Binary Command Cmd TwrFan1 TwrFan1 Effective CT1H-C TowerFan1 CT1H-EC Eff TwrFan1 HI Command Stg 3 Speed 3 Speed Speed 3 BO Binary Command Cmd Bypass TowerFan1 CT1-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive N/A Drive BV Reset Drive VSD Reset TowerFan1 CT1-RESET N/A Drive Fault Fault BV Command TowerFan1 Iso N/A CT1ISOV-C TwrFan1 IsoVlv Valve BO AO TwrFan2 CT2-% Eff TwrFan2 Effective Output TowerFan2 CT2-O TwrFan2 Command Cmd Effective BO TwrFan2 TwrFan2 CT2-EC Eff TwrFan2 CT2-C TowerFan2 Command Cmd Binary Stg Command Effective TwrFan2 CT2L-EC Eff TwrFan2 Command LO TowerFan2 CT2L-C TwrFan2 Speed Speed 2 Stg 1 BO Speed 2 Cmd Command Binary TwrFan2 CT2M-C TwrFan2 TowerFan2 Command CT2M-EC Eff TwrFan2 Effective Speed Speed 2 BO 2 MED Speed Stg 2 Command Binary Cmd Effective TwrFan2 CT2H-C TwrFan2 TowerFan2 HI CT2H-EC Eff TwrFan2 Command 3 3 Speed Stg Speed 3 BO Speed Binary Command Cmd Drive TowerFan2 CT2-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Bypass N/A BV Drive Reset TowerFan2 CT2-RESET VSD Reset Drive N/A Fault Drive Fault BV Command TowerFan2 Iso N/A CT2ISOV-C TwrFan2 Valve IsoVlv BO Output Effective CT3-% Eff TwrFan3 AO TwrFan3 TowerFan3 CT3-O TwrFan3 Cmd Command Effective BO TwrFan3 TwrFan3 CT3-EC Eff TwrFan3 CT3-C TowerFan3 Command Cmd Binary Stg Command 207 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

208 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name Effective TwrFan3 CT3L-C TowerFan3 CT3M-EC Eff TwrFan3 LO Command TwrFan3 3 Speed 3 Speed Speed 1 BO Stg Command Binary Cmd Command CT3L-EC TwrFan3 CT3M-C Eff TwrFan3 TowerFan3 TwrFan3 Effective 2 Speed MED Speed Stg 2 Speed 2 BO Binary Command Cmd TwrFan3 TwrFan3 Effective CT3H-C TowerFan3 CT3H-EC Eff TwrFan3 HI Command Stg 3 Speed 3 Speed Speed 3 BO Binary Command Cmd Bypass TowerFan3 CT3-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive N/A Drive BV Reset Drive VSD Reset TowerFan3 CT3-RESET N/A Drive Fault Fault BV Command TowerFan3 Iso N/A CT3ISOV-C TwrFan3 IsoVlv Valve BO AO TwrFan4 CT4-% Eff TwrFan4 Effective Output TowerFan4 CT4-O TwrFan4 Command Cmd Effective BO TwrFan4 TwrFan4 CT4-EC Eff TwrFan4 CT4-C TowerFan4 Command Cmd Binary Stg Command Effective TwrFan4 CT4H-EC Eff TwrFan4 Command LO TowerFan4 CT4L-C TwrFan4 Speed Speed 4 Stg 1 BO Speed 4 Cmd Command Binary TwrFan4 CT4M-C TwrFan4 TowerFan4 Command CT4L-EC Eff TwrFan4 Effective Speed Speed 2 BO 2 MED Speed Stg 2 Command Binary Cmd Effective TwrFan4 CT4H-C TwrFan4 TowerFan4 HI CT4M-EC Eff TwrFan4 Command 3 3 Speed Stg Speed 3 BO Speed Binary Command Cmd Drive TowerFan4 CT4-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Bypass N/A BV Drive Reset TowerFan4 CT4-RESET VSD Reset Drive N/A Fault Drive Fault BV Command TowerFan4 Iso N/A CT4ISOV-C TwrFan4 Valve IsoVlv BO Output Effective CT5-% Eff TwrFan5 AO TwrFan5 TowerFan5 CT5-O TwrFan5 Cmd Command Effective BO TwrFan5 TwrFan5 CT5-EC Eff TwrFan5 CT5-C TowerFan5 Command Cmd Binary Stg Command 208 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

209 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name Effective TwrFan5 CT5L-C TowerFan5 CT5H-EC Eff TwrFan5 LO Command TwrFan5 5 Speed 5 Speed Speed 1 BO Stg Command Binary Cmd Command CT5L-EC TwrFan5 CT5M-C Eff TwrFan5 TowerFan5 TwrFan5 Effective 2 Speed MED Speed Stg 2 Speed 2 BO Binary Command Cmd TwrFan5 TwrFan5 Effective CT5H-C TowerFan5 CT5M-EC Eff TwrFan5 HI Command Stg 3 Speed 3 Speed Speed 3 BO Binary Command Cmd Bypass TowerFan5 CT5-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive N/A Drive BV Reset Drive VSD Reset TowerFan5 CT5-RESET N/A Drive Fault Fault BV Command TowerFan5 Iso N/A CT5ISOV-C TwrFan5 IsoVlv Valve BO AO TwrFan6 CT6-% Eff TwrFan6 Effective Output TowerFan6 CT6-O TwrFan6 Command Cmd Effective BO TwrFan6 TwrFan6 CT6-EC Eff TwrFan6 CT6-C TowerFan6 Command Cmd Binary Stg Command Effective TwrFan6 CT6H-EC Eff TwrFan6 Command LO TowerFan6 CT6L-C TwrFan6 Speed Speed 6 Stg 1 BO Speed 6 Cmd Command Binary TwrFan6 CT6M-C TwrFan6 TowerFan6 Command CT6L-EC Eff TwrFan6 Effective Speed Speed 2 BO 2 MED Speed Stg 2 Command Binary Cmd Effective TwrFan6 CT6H-C TwrFan6 TowerFan6 HI CT6M-EC Eff TwrFan6 Command 3 3 Speed Stg Speed 3 BO Speed Binary Command Cmd Drive TowerFan6 CT6-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Bypass N/A BV Drive Reset TowerFan6 CT6-RESET VSD Reset Drive N/A Fault Drive Fault BV Command TowerFan6 Iso N/A CT6ISOV-C TwrFan6 Valve IsoVlv BO Output Effective CT7-% Eff TwrFan7 AO TwrFan7 TowerFan7 CT7-O TwrFan7 Cmd Command Effective BO TwrFan7 TwrFan7 CT7-EC Eff TwrFan7 CT7-C TowerFan7 Command Cmd Binary Stg Command 209 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

210 Table 63: Effective Configuration Command Information Configuration Input Output Miscellaneous Configuration Standard Name Application Name Standard Application Function Function Name Name TwrFan7 TwrFan7 CT7L-C TowerFan7 CT7H-EC Eff TwrFan7 Effective Command LO Speed 7 Speed Speed 1 BO Stg 7 Binary Cmd Command Command CT7L-EC TwrFan7 CT7M-C Eff TwrFan7 TowerFan7 TwrFan7 Effective 2 Speed MED Speed Stg 2 Speed 2 BO Binary Command Cmd CT7M-EC TwrFan7 TwrFan7 CT7H-C TowerFan7 Effective Eff TwrFan7 HI Command Stg Speed 3 Speed Speed 3 BO 3 Command Cmd Binary Drive VSD Bypass CT7-BYP ASS Bypass N/A TowerFan7 BV Drive VSD Reset N/A TowerFan7 CT7-RESET Reset Drive Drive Fault Fault BV Command TowerFan7 Iso N/A CT7ISOV-C TwrFan7 IsoVlv Valve BO TwrFan8 TwrFan8 CT8-% Eff TwrFan8 AO Output TowerFan8 CT8-O Effective Cmd Command TwrFan8 BO TwrFan8 Effective Eff TwrFan8 Command TowerFan8 CT8-C CT8-EC Binary Cmd Stg Command Effective TwrFan8 TwrFan8 CT8L-C TowerFan8 CT8H-EC Eff TwrFan8 LO Command 8 Speed 8 Speed Speed 1 BO Stg Binary Command Cmd TwrFan8 CT8M-C TwrFan8 TowerFan8 Effective CT8L-EC Eff TwrFan8 Command Speed 2 2 BO Speed MED Speed Stg 2 Command Binary Cmd Effective TwrFan8 CT8H-C TwrFan8 TowerFan8 HI CT8M-EC Eff TwrFan8 Command 3 Speed 3 Speed Stg Speed 3 BO Command Binary Cmd Bypass ASS TowerFan8 CT8-BYP N/A VSD Bypass Drive BV Drive Reset Drive VSD Reset TowerFan8 N/A CT8-RESET Fault Drive Fault BV N/A Command TowerFan8 Iso TwrFan8 CT8ISOV-C Valve IsoVlv BO Output Voltage N/A VOLT1-O Voltage Out 1 1 AO N/A Output Voltage 2 VOLT2-O Voltage Out 2 AO 210 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

211 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Application Name Standard Application Function Standard Name Name Voltage 3 VOLT3-O Voltage Out 3 N/A Output AO N/A 4 VOLT4-O Voltage Out 4 Output Voltage AO N/A Voltage 5 VOLT5-O Voltage Out 5 Output AO Output Voltage 6 VOLT6-O Voltage N/A Out 6 AO Run/Stop N/A Supply Fan VSD1 VSD1-C BO Output Effective Eff Supply Supply Fan VSD1 VSD1-O Supply Fan SF-% Fan Speed Speed Speed Command AO Cmd Bypass VSD1 VSD1-BYP ASS VSD Bypass N/A Drive Drive BV N/A Drive VSD Reset VSD1 VSD1-RESET Reset Fault Drive Fault BV N/A Run/Stop VSD2 VSD2-C Supply Fan BO Effective Fan Supply SF-% Eff Supply Fan Supply Output VSD2 VSD2-O Speed Speed AO Command Fan Speed Cmd Drive Bypass VSD2-BYP ASS VSD Bypass N/A VSD2 Drive BV Reset Drive N/A VSD2 VSD2-RESET VSD Reset Drive Fault Fault BV Run/Stop VSD3 Supply Fan N/A VSD3-C BO Fan Supply Fan SF-% Eff Supply Output VSD3 VSD3-O Supply Effective Speed Fan Speed AO Command Speed Cmd Bypass Drive VSD3 VSD3-BYP ASS VSD Bypass N/A Drive BV N/A Reset Drive VSD Reset VSD3 VSD3-RESET Fault Fault Drive BV N/A Run/Stop VSD4 VSD4-C Supply Fan BO 211 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

212 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Application Standard Name Name Supply Fan Fan SF-% Eff Supply Effective Supply Output VSD4 VSD4-O Fan Speed Speed AO Command Speed Cmd Drive Bypass VSD4-BYP ASS VSD Bypass N/A VSD4 Drive BV Reset Drive VSD4 N/A VSD4-RESET VSD Reset Fault Fault Drive BV N/A VSD5 VSD5-C Supply Fan Run/Stop BO Supply Supply Fan Fan SF-% Eff Supply Effective VSD5-O Output VSD5 Speed Speed Command AO Fan Speed Cmd Bypass VSD5 VSD5-BYP ASS VSD Bypass N/A Drive BV Drive N/A Drive VSD5 VSD5-RESET VSD Reset Reset Fault Drive Fault BV N/A Run/Stop VSD6-C Supply Fan VSD6 BO Effective Fan SF-% Eff Supply Supply VSD6 VSD6-O Supply Fan Output Fan Speed Command AO Speed Speed Cmd N/A Drive VSD6 VSD6-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Bypass BV Drive Reset Drive VSD Reset VSD6 N/A VSD6-RESET Fault Drive Fault BV N/A Run/Stop VSD7 VSD7-C Supply Fan BO Effective Supply Fan Fan SF-% Eff Supply Supply VSD7-O Output VSD7 Command Fan Speed Speed Speed AO Cmd N/A Bypass Drive VSD7 VSD7-BYP ASS VSD Bypass Drive BV Reset Drive N/A VSD7-RESET VSD Reset VSD7 Fault Drive Fault BV Fan N/A VSD8 VSD8-C Supply Run/Stop BO 212 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

213 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Application Standard Name Name Supply Fan Fan SF-% Eff Supply Effective Supply Output VSD8 VSD8-O Fan Speed Speed AO Command Speed Cmd Drive Bypass VSD8-BYP ASS VSD Bypass N/A VSD8 Drive BV Reset Drive VSD8-RESET VSD8 N/A VSD Reset Fault Drive Fault BV N/A VSD9 VSD9-C Supply Fan Run/Stop BO Fan Supply Fan Effective SF-% Eff Supply Supply VSD9-O Output VSD9 Speed Speed Command AO Fan Speed Cmd Bypass VSD9 VSD9-BYP ASS VSD Bypass N/A Drive BV Drive N/A Drive VSD9 VSD9-RESET VSD Reset Reset Fault Drive Fault BV N/A Fan Speed Fan Speed Zone ZNF-% Status Status MSV Display Occ Status Zone OCC-MODE Occupancy N/A Status Display MSV Command Zone Loop Zone N/A ZHLP1-C 1 Heating Heating Pump Pump BO 1 ZHLP2-C Command Loop N/A 2 Zone Zone Pump Heating Pump Heating 2 BO N/A Command Zone Loop 3 Zone ZHLP3-C Heating Pump Pump Heating 3 BO Command Zone Loop Zone 4 N/A ZHLP4-C Heating Pump Pump Heating 4 BO 5 Zone Loop N/A ZHLP5-C Zone Command Heating Pump Pump Heating 5 BO N/A Command Zone Loop 6 Zone ZHLP6-C Pump Heating Heating Pump 6 BO 213 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

214 Table 63: Effective Configuration Command Information Configuration Input Output Miscellaneous Configuration Standard Name Application Name Standard Application Function Function Name Name Zone Loop 7 N/A Command ZHLP7-C Zone Pump Pump Heating Heating 7 BO Zone 8 N/A Loop Command ZHLP8-C Zone Pump Pump Heating Heating 8 BO Zone1 Occ Status Occupancy N/A OCC-MODE1 Status Display MSV ZN1D-O Zone 1 1 ZN1D-% Eff Zone 1 Zone Effective Output Zone1 Damper Cmd Damper Damper AO Command Damper AO Zone Effective ZN1D-% Eff Zone 1 1 Zone Output_P 1 Zone1 Damper ZN1D-O Cmd Command Damper PAO Damper Damper ZN1HTG1-EC 1 Zone 1 Zone ZN1HTG1-C Heating Effective Eff Zone 1 Zone1 1 Stage Heating Stg Stage Command Heating Heating Stage 1 Command 1 Stage 1 BO Cmd Binary Zone 1 2 1 ZN1HTG2-EC Eff Zone 1 Zone ZN1HTG2-C Heating Zone1 Stage Effective Stg Heating Stage Heating Heating Command Stage 2 Stage Command 2 BO 2 Cmd Binary 1 Heating 1 1 ZN1HTG3-EC Eff Zone Zone Zone ZN1HTG3-C Effective Zone1 Stage 3 Stg Heating Heating Stage Command Heating 3 Stage 3 Command Stage 3 BO Cmd Binary Output ZN1HTG-% 1 1 Zone Effective Eff Zone 1 ZN1HTG-O Heating Zone Zone1 Heating Heating Heating Valve Command Valve Cmd Valve AO Effective 1 Zone Zone 1 ZN1HTG-C Heating ZN1HTG-EC Eff Zone 1 Zone1 Command Heating Vlv Heating Valve Heating Valve Command BO Valve Binary Cmd Zone Zone 1 1 Effective ZN1HTG-% Eff Zone 1 ZN1HTG-O Heating Output_P AO Zone1 Command Heating Heating Valve Heating PAO Valve Cmd Valve Zone2 OCC-MODE2 Occupancy N/A Occ Status Status MSV Display Output Effective 2 ZN2D-% Eff Zone 2 Zone Zone2 Damper ZN2D-O Zone 2 Damper Cmd Damper Command Damper AO AO Effective Zone 2 2 ZN2D-% Eff Zone 2 Zone ZN2D-O Output_P Damper Zone2 Command Cmd Damper Damper Damper PAO 214 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

215 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Output Configuration Miscellaneous Configuration Standard Name Application Name Standard Application Function Function Name Name Effective Zone 2 2 Zone ZN2HTG1-C ZN2HTG1-EC Eff Zone 2 Heating Zone2 1 Stage Heating Stg Stage Heating Command Heating Stage 2 Stage 1 BO 2 Command Binary Cmd Effective ZN2HTG2-EC Eff Zone 2 Zone 2 Stage 2 Zone2 Heating ZN2HTG2-C Zone 2 Heating Stage Command Stg Heating Heating Command 2 BO Stage 2 Stage 2 Cmd Binary Effective Zone 2 ZN2HTG3-EC Eff Zone Zone2 2 Zone ZN2HTG3-C Heating Stage 3 2 Heating Stage Heating Heating Command Stg 3 Stage 3 Stage 3 BO Command Cmd Binary Eff Zone Zone 2 2 Zone ZN2HTG-% Effective 2 ZN2HTG-O Heating Output Zone2 Valve Heating Heating Command Heating Valve Cmd AO Valve 2 Eff Zone 2 ZN2HTG-EC Effective 2 Zone Command Zone2 Heating ZN2HTG-C Zone Heating Valve Heating Heating Vlv Command Valve Binary Valve BO Cmd Effective 2 Zone 2 Zone ZN2HTG-O ZN2HTG-% Eff Zone 2 Heating Zone2 Output_P AO Command Heating Valve Heating Heating Valve Cmd Valve PAO Zone3 Occupancy N/A Occ Status OCC-MODE3 Status Display MSV Zone Effective 3 ZN3D-% Eff Zone 3 Zone ZN3D-O Output Zone3 Damper 3 Cmd Damper Damper Damper AO Command 3 Zone Effective 3 ZN3D-% Eff Zone 3 Zone ZN3D-O Output_P AO Zone3 Damper Cmd Damper Damper PAO Damper Command 3 Zone 3 Zone ZN3HTG2-EC Eff Zone 3 ZN3HTG1-C Effective Heating Stage 1 Zone3 Command Stage Heating Heating Stg Heating 3 Command 1 BO Stage 3 Stage Cmd Binary Heating 3 Zone 3 Zone ZN3HTG2-C Effective ZN3HTG3-EC Eff Zone 3 Zone3 2 Stage Heating Stg Stage Command Heating Heating Stage 2 Command 2 Stage 2 BO Cmd Binary Zone 3 3 ZN3HTG3-EC Eff Zone 3 3 Zone ZN3HTG3-C Heating Zone3 Stage Effective Heating Stg Heating Heating Stage Command 3 Stage 3 Stage Command 3 BO Cmd Binary Effective 3 Zone 3 Zone ZN3HTG-O ZN3HTG-% Eff Zone 3 Heating Zone3 Output Valve Heating Command Heating Heating Valve Cmd Valve AO 215 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

216 Table 63: Effective Command Configuration Information Configuration Output Input Miscellaneous Configuration Standard Function Application Name Standard Function Application Name Name Name Zone 3 3 3 ZN3HTG-EC Eff Zone Effective Zone ZN3HTG-C Heating Command Zone3 Heating Heating Heating Valve Vlv Valve Binary BO Command Valve Cmd Effective 3 Zone 3 ZN3HTG-% Eff Zone 3 Zone ZN3HTG-O Output_P AO Zone3 Heating Heating Heating Valve Command Heating PAO Valve Cmd Valve Zone4 Occupancy Occ Status N/A OCC-MODE4 Status Display MSV 4 Effective Zone Eff Zone 4 Output Zone4 Damper ZN4D-O Zone 4 ZN4D-% Cmd Damper Command Damper AO Damper Damper Effective Eff Zone 4 Output_P AO Zone4 ZN4D-% ZN4D-O Zone 4 4 Zone PAO Damper Damper Cmd Damper Command 4 Zone ZN4HTG3-EC Eff Zone 4 Effective 4 Zone ZN4HTG1-C Heating Stage 1 Zone4 Heating Heating Stage Heating Command Stg 4 Stage 4 Stage 1 BO Command Cmd Binary 2 Zone Effective 4 ZN4HTG4-EC Eff Zone 4 Zone ZN4HTG2-C Heating Zone4 Stage 4 Stage Heating Heating Heating Stg Command Stage 2 Stage Command 2 BO 2 Cmd Binary 4 Stage Eff Zone 4 Effective Zone ZN4HTG2-EC 3 Zone4 Heating ZN4HTG3-C Zone 4 Heating Heating Command Stg Heating Stage Command Stage 3 Stage 3 3 BO Binary Cmd 4 Zone 4 4 Zone ZN4HTG-% Eff Zone Effective ZN4HTG-O Heating Output Zone4 Heating Command Heating Valve Heating Valve Cmd AO Valve 4 Eff Zone 4 ZN4HTG-EC Effective 4 Zone Command Zone4 Heating ZN4HTG-C Zone Heating Valve Heating Heating Vlv Command Valve Binary Valve BO Cmd Effective 4 Zone 4 Zone ZN4HTG-O ZN4HTG-% Eff Zone 4 Heating Zone4 Output_P AO Heating Heating Command Heating Valve Valve Cmd PAO Valve Output Eff Zone 5 5 ZN5D-% Effective 5 Zone ZN5D-O Zone Zone5 Damper Cmd Damper Damper Damper AO Command Effective 5 Zone 5 Zone ZN5D-% Eff Zone 5 ZN5D-O Damper Output_P AO Zone5 Cmd Command Damper PAO Damper Damper 5 Zone 5 Zone ZN5HTG3-EC Eff Zone 5 ZN5HTG1-C Effective Heating Stage 1 Zone5 Command Stage Heating Heating Stg Heating 5 1 BO Stage Stage 5 Command Cmd Binary 216 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

217 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name Effective Zone 5 5 Zone ZN5HTG2-C ZN5HTG5-EC Eff Zone 5 Heating Zone5 2 Stage Heating Stg Command Stage Heating Heating 2 2 Command Stage 2 BO Stage Cmd Binary Stage ZN5HTG2-EC 5 Zone Eff Zone 5 ZN5HTG3-C Effective Zone 5 3 Heating Zone5 Command Heating Stg Heating Heating Stage Command Stage 3 Stage 3 3 BO Binary Cmd 5 Zone 5 Zone Eff Zone ZN5HTG-% Effective 5 ZN5HTG-O Heating Output Zone5 Heating Command Heating Valve Heating Valve Cmd AO Valve Zone 5 Effective ZN5HTG-EC Eff Zone 5 5 Command Zone5 Heating ZN5HTG-C Zone Heating Valve Vlv Heating Heating BO Valve Valve Binary Command Cmd 5 5 ZN5HTG-% Eff Zone Effective Zone Output_P AO Zone5 Heating ZN5HTG-O Zone 5 Valve Heating Heating Command Heating Valve Cmd Valve PAO Zone Output ZN6D-% Eff Zone 6 Effective 6 Zone6 Damper ZN6D-O Zone 6 Command Damper Cmd Damper AO Damper Effective 6 Zone 6 Zone ZN6D-% Eff Zone 6 ZN6D-O Damper Output_P AO Zone6 Cmd Damper Command Damper PAO Damper 6 Zone6 6 Effective ZN6HTG3-EC Eff Zone 6 Zone Zone ZN6HTG1-C Heating Stage 1 Stg Heating Heating Stage Command Heating 6 Stage 6 Stage 1 BO Command Cmd Binary 6 6 Zone 6 Zone ZN6HTG2-C Heating ZN6HTG6-EC Eff Zone Effective Zone6 2 Stage Stg Command Heating Heating Heating Stage 2 2 BO Stage Command Stage 2 Cmd Binary Effective 6 Zone Zone 6 ZN6HTG3-C Heating Zone6 ZN6HTG2-EC Eff Zone 6 3 Stage Heating Command Heating Stg Heating Stage Command Stage 3 Stage 3 3 BO Binary Cmd Zone6 Zone 6 6 Zone ZN6HTG-% Eff Zone 6 ZN6HTG-O Heating Output Effective Command Heating Heating Valve Heating Valve Cmd AO Valve Zone 6 Effective ZN6HTG-EC Eff Zone 6 6 Command Zone6 Heating ZN6HTG-C Zone Heating Heating Vlv Heating Valve Valve Command Valve Binary BO Cmd AO 6 Zone 6 Zone ZN6HTG-O ZN6HTG-% Eff Zone 6 Heating Zone6 Output_P Effective Valve Heating Command Heating Heating Valve Cmd Valve PAO 217 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

218 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Miscellaneous Configuration Configuration Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name Zone 7 Effective ZN7D-% Eff Zone 7 Zone ZN7D-O Output Zone7 Damper 7 Cmd Damper Damper AO Command Damper AO Zone Effective ZN7D-% Eff Zone 7 7 Zone Output_P 7 Zone7 Damper ZN7D-O Cmd Command Damper PAO Damper Damper 7 Effective Zone 7 Zone ZN7HTG1-C Heating ZN7HTG3-EC Eff Zone 7 Zone7 1 Stage Stage Command Heating Heating Heating Stg 7 1 BO Command Stage 7 Stage Binary Cmd 7 Stage Eff Zone 7 Effective Zone ZN7HTG7-EC 2 Zone7 Heating ZN7HTG2-C Zone 7 Heating Heating Command Stg Heating Stage Command Stage 2 Stage 2 2 BO Binary Cmd 7 Zone Zone 7 ZN7HTG3-C Heating Zone7 ZN7HTG2-EC Eff Zone 7 Effective 3 Stage Heating Heating Stage Command Heating Stg 3 Command Stage 3 Stage 3 BO Binary Cmd Zone Output Effective ZN7HTG-% Eff Zone 7 7 Zone7 Heating ZN7HTG-O Zone 7 Heating Heating Valve Command Heating Valve Cmd Valve AO Effective 7 Zone Zone 7 ZN7HTG-C Heating ZN7HTG-EC Eff Zone 7 Zone7 Command Heating Vlv Heating Valve Heating Valve Binary Valve Command BO Cmd AO 7 ZN7HTG-% Eff Zone 7 Effective Output_P Zone Zone7 Heating ZN7HTG-O Zone 7 Heating Command Heating Heating Valve PAO Valve Cmd Valve 8 8 ZN8D-% Eff Zone Effective Zone Output Zone8 Damper ZN8D-O Zone 8 Command Damper Damper Damper AO Cmd Effective Zone 8 8 ZN8D-% Eff Zone 8 Zone ZN8D-O Damper AO Zone8 Output_P Command Cmd Damper Damper Damper PAO Effective 8 Zone Zone 8 ZN8HTG1-C Heating Zone8 ZN8HTG3-EC Eff Zone 8 1 Stage Heating Heating Command Stg Heating Stage Stage 1 BO Command 8 Stage 8 Cmd Binary Effective 8 Zone Zone 8 ZN8HTG2-C Heating Zone8 ZN8HTG8-EC Eff Zone 8 2 Stage Heating Heating Command Stg Heating Stage Stage 2 BO Command 2 Stage 2 Cmd Binary Effective 8 Zone Zone 8 ZN8HTG3-C Heating Zone8 ZN8HTG2-EC Eff Zone 8 3 Stage Heating Command Heating Stage Stg Heating Command Stage Stage 3 3 BO 3 Binary Cmd 218 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

219 Table 63: Effective Command Information Configuration Input Configuration Configuration Miscellaneous Output Name Function Application Name Standard Function Standard Application Name Name Zone 8 Effective 8 ZN8HTG-% Eff Zone 8 Zone ZN8HTG-O Output Zone8 Heating Valve Heating Heating Command Heating AO Valve Cmd Valve Command 8 8 Effective 8 ZN8HTG-EC Eff Zone Zone ZN8HTG-C Heating Zone8 Zone Heating Vlv Heating Valve Heating Valve Binary Valve BO Command Cmd 8 Zone 8 Zone ZN8HTG-O ZN8HTG-% Eff Zone 8 Heating Effective Output_P AO Zone8 Heating Heating Command Heating Valve Valve Cmd PAO Valve State Selection Tables Customizing Selection and Modifying Selection Tables section and See the State (State Tables Tab) screen section Viewing State details on working with the state selection tables before changing a table label or adding for general or column a table to the State tables. Then, see the following procedures: Selection • Changing Table Label a State • a Table to the State Selection Tables Adding • a Column to the State Selection Tables Adding Changing a State Table Label 1. Click the State Tables tab. The State Tables tab appears with the system’ s state selection data populated within tables in the right pane, in the left pane of the tab. The panes allow you to scroll both vertically and the states Tab) , keeping See the State Selection (State Tables visible. screen section. and horizontally the first column Edit . 2. Click the module name and select Change Table Label (a yellow table heading indicates a connected 3. Right-click whereas an orange table heading is a module that is not connected). The Rename/Name dialog box module, appears. 4. Type a name field. in the Name We recommend leaving the label field empty so that dynamic Note: may be used. naming 5. Click OK . 6. Click Apply . Changing a Column Label within 1. Click Tables tab. The State Tables tab appears with the system’ s state selection data populated State the tables in the right pane, and the states in the left pane of the tab. The panes allow you to scroll both vertically and horizontally , keeping the first column visible. See the State Selection (State Tables Tab) screen section. 2. Click Edit . Label the column and select Change 3. Right-click header . The Rename/Name dialog box appears. Column Note: We recommend leaving the label field empty so that dynamic naming may be used. 4. Type a name in the Name field. 219 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

220 5. Click OK . Apply . 6. Click Selection a Table to the State Tables Adding Tables within Tables tab appears with the system’ s state selection data populated 1. Click the tab. The State State in the left pane of the tab. The panes allow you to scroll both vertically and the states tables in the right pane, the first column and horizontally See the State Selection (State Tables Tab) screen section. , keeping visible. Edit 2. Click . or orange name heading: the module = connected (table = not connected) and select Create 3. Right-click yellow Selection Table . The Create State Selection State dialog box appears. Table 4. Type a name field. in the Name We recommend leaving so that dynamic naming may be used. Note: this field empty for the table. a priority 5. Select 0 places the table at the top of the list, thus giving it the highest priority in the list. Note: Selecting (Enumeration or Boolean). the type of data for the table 6. Select 7. Click OK . Apply 8. Click . Adding to the State Selection Tables a Column within the Tables tab. The State Tables tab appears with the system’ 1. Click selection data populated State s state tables in the right pane, and the states in the left pane of the tab. The panes allow you to scroll both vertically and horizontally , keeping the first column visible. See the State Selection (State Tables Tab) screen section. 2. Click Edit . the module name heading: yellow = connected or orange = not connected) and select Create 3. Right-click (table dialog Column Create State Selection Column Selection box appears. State . The in the Name field. 4. Type a name We recommend leaving this field empty so that dynamic naming Note: may be used. 5. Select you want the column to appear in the table using the Column Index drop-down menu. where Selecting the column Note: in the leftmost column position. 1 places the type of data for the column 6. Select or Boolean). (Enumeration 7. Click OK . 8. Click Apply . Adding the Hybrid Activity to the State Tables 1. Add a table to the State according to the instructions in the Adding a Table to the State Selection Tables Tables In the dialog State Selection Table section. box, be sure to create the State Selection Table with an Create set that matches the States Text attribute of the State output of the Hybrid Activity you are connecting. enumeration 2. In the Control View, right-click the Hybrid Activity and select View Connections . . Note: appear in the Connections table, expose ports for connection. See Exposing Ports If no items the State 3. Connect and outputs as desired, including the inputs output. 220 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

221 Creating a Sideloop on the specific Sideloop Control modules, see Sideloop in the Output Control Modules section. For information Output create Note: the desired sideloop modules to the system, see the Adding an a Sideloop To manually by adding the sideloop, section. Module using the System Selection Wizard to create If you are skip Output Control not to Step 5. a sideloop: To create Sideloop button. The System Selection 1. Click appears with the Sideloop Selection screen active. the Wizard The Previous are disabled. Note: and Next buttons options section and click Finish . See the System Selection Tree the sideloop for information for your system 2. Select using the check boxes, radio buttons, and the + and - next to a node in and use (for example, on tree behavior and hide selections). For information on the selection options the tree to show Selection screen, in the Sideloop see the Applications section. The Sideloop dialog box prompts you to name the sideloop. Sideloop As you make selections Selection Wizard, you can press F1 to view the Help screen. The Note: in the System the module of the item you are viewing and changes as you select displays Help section Help screen in the wizard. Click different to view module information. items the links on the Help screen Finish . The Sideloop dialog box appears. 3. Click to identify the sideloop being created. 4. Type a name OK modules 5. Click are added to the system with the name entered in Step 3 as their prefix. . The sideloop the sideloop details according to the steps in the Viewing and Modifying Details 6. View and modify modules’ Make sure you note the enumeration set selected for the mode section. of this module. input Note: sure you set the Process ID and Make Units attributes according to the needs of your system. Process If the Process ID selected is Airflow , Airflow Diff, or Other , you must set the Process Range as necessary . The Process Range be greater than zero. If the Process ID is Other , you should configure the Time must and Process Time attributes from the details view of the PID Pre-Processor logic block Constant Dead of the s logic view. See the description in the Control topic the module’ Logic inside PID Pre-Processor for details. section , expose and make connections between the modules according to the instructions in the Viewing 7. If necessary Connections and Modifying section. module column in the State Tables and modify the states as necessary . Keep in mind the 8. View the Sideloop set selected Viewing input of this module in Step 5. See the enumeration and Modifying State for the mode Tables Selection section. If you did use the System Selection Note: to add a column to the State Selection tables, then you must Wizard fully configure at least one of the tables in that column (for example, select a mode for each row in one of the tables). If you use the System Selection Wizard to create the sideloop, you must add the did not Output the states module as a column in the State Tables and modify sideloop as necessary . Control Customizing State Selection Tables section. See the the connections 9. View and modify the State Selection Table and the State Generators and Sideloop between Output Controllers as necessary . See the Viewing and Modifying Connections section. Tips: System Selection Wizard as many times as desired. • You can run the Sideloop • Once a sideloop is created, you cannot re-run the sideloop selection process on one of the sideloops. created, • If you re-run Selection for the main application after sideloops have been System the sideloops are deleted. 221 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

222 Setting Up Peer-to-Peer Communication on peer-to-peer communication guidelines, see the Peer-to-Peer Communication For information and configuration configure peer-to-peer in the Configuration mode. section. You must communication references until the controller mode, the communication works peer-to-peer Note: If you change in Commissioning . When resets, the peer-to-peer reference changes are lost. To resolve this problem, power loses the controller peer-to-peer communication changes in the Configuration mode, then transfer the make the necessary . to the controller application communication: To set up peer-to-peer Instance Number (BACnet ID) of the device the you want to communicate. You 1. Identify and record to which on the Network Settings can locate of the Hardware Definition Wizard. this attribute screen You also can locate Number of devices using the Instance Site Management Portal UI. This Note: the Metasys allows you to look up multiple device instance numbers at once. method If you used the Johnson Point Schedule to transfer to the controllers, check the instance number on Controls Field Device s Point Schedule. the MSTP tab of the project’ a value. the Identifier of the object and record you want to read/write Object You can locate 2. Identify in which in the Details dialog box. this attribute The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the object’ s Instance Number separated by Note: For example, Identifier a colon. of AV:10026 has a BACnet Class ID of AV and an Instance an Object of 10026. Number Network Input or Network of the desired 3. View the details Output. Edit . 4. Click table for the Peer Reference attribute, 5. In the configuration the elements as follows: modify • Number (BACnet ID) : Enter Instance s Instance Number in the field as recorded in Step 1. the device’ • Object Identifier : Select the BACnet Class ID from the drop-down menu and enter the object’ s Instance Number in the field as recorded in Step 2. Class ID should have the same Data Type as the object for which the peer-to-peer The BACnet typically configured AV, an AI, or an an AV Network Input should reference another is being attribute (for example, values in peer-to-peer If multistate references, the Enumeration sets should be the are used AO object). you must determine if the values in the sets are compatible. If the sets do not match, same. Apply and then click Close . 6. Click Check Note: Error Status attribute to diagnose communication problems. This attribute displays the status the that occurred or output reference. of the last communication with an input Common errors include: Surrogate Object is Not Bound : The referenced device • Device ID ) has never responded because a device ( with the entered Device ID either does not exist or is offline. • Remote Device is Offline : The referenced device did respond at one time but is no longer responding. • Unknown : The referenced device exists and is online, but the Object ID that was entered does not Object exist on that device. • : The referenced object exists but the data type of the referenced attribute/property is invalid. Type Mismatch Controls generally not appear for inputs on Johnson This error or third-party devices. For outputs on does third-party devices, the Object Type of the output needs to match the type of output object making the peer reference. • Property : This error generally does Unknown if you leave the Peer Reference Attribute field as not appear Present Value . If you change this setting, the Unknown Property error means the referenced object exists but the referenced attribute does not exist. 222 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

223 Disabling Peer-to-Peer Communication communication: peer-to-peer To disable or Network Output. of the Network Input 1. View the details Edit . 2. Click Reference section, select the Peer to Peer Disabled option in the Object Identifier drop-down 3. In the Peer menu. Apply Close . 4. Click , and then click Explorer the FSM Viewing Explorer , either: To view the FSM that has built-in logic, • Right-click View FSM Explorer , and then click on the module name; or, a module click the BACnet Exposed widget, ensure that the Show All check box is selected, and enter FSM in the Filter • Click on the FSM box. Right-click to view FSM Explorer for that module. and follow the prompts Screens Preferences Setting New System See Selecting a System (Creating a New System) . Dialog Box Table 64: New System Field Description all field devices that are compatible with the release mode displayed in the Shows Mode Field Device Intended Release list. drop-down with a release mode it will be grayed out. A status displays Note: If a field device is incompatible modes are no available if there release for the selected field device. modes that are compatible with the field device selected in the Intended Field Mode Release Shows all release field. Device the Release Mode drop-down of a device, to the earliest Upon Note: selection list defaults that is applicable to that device. A release mode does not appear switchable release mode with a field device. in the list if it is incompatible to download customized CAF files along with a sequence of operation, Use this option Online Library flow list. and points diagram, is available to Technician licensed users only. Note: This feature Use this option for your new system. System Name to enter a name System Type to create. (see include the type of system Applications ): Use this option Options to select • Air Handling Units • Fan Coil • Unit Ventilators • Heat Pumps • VAV Heating • Central • Central Plants Cooling • Simple Central Plant • Custom Applications Control Only • Monitoring Supervisory 223 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

224 Table 64: New System Dialog Box Description Field to select a configuration type for your new system. Options include (see Configuration System Use this option ): Applications Units Air Handling Duct • Mixed Air Single Duct • 100% Outdoor Air Single • Mixed Air Dual Duct Outdoor Air Dual Duct • 100% Unit • Rooftop Air Dual Duct) (Mixed • Multizone Fan Coil all configuration options. • Blank: This system type covers Unit Ventilators type covers options. This system • Blank: all configuration Pumps Heat all configuration options. This system • Blank: type covers VAV Duct • Single • Dual Duct • Slave Duct Single Dual Duct • Slave Central Heating This system options. • Blank: all configuration type covers Cooling Central Plants • Central Cooling with Optimization • Central Cooling Plant Simple Central configuration options. • Blank: common This system type includes Custom Applications type includes options. common This system configuration • Blank: Only Monitoring/Supervisory Control common configuration options. • Blank: This system type includes to select the units to use in your new system (Imperial or Metric). Use this option of Units System setting the units and closing the tool, the tool remembers the last units setting. See Note: After Setting section. in the Unit Preferences Preferences Applies the selections and closes the dialog box. The System Selection Wizard appears. OK Closes box without applying the changes. Cancel the dialog Opens the Help system. 224 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

225 System Selection Wizard Selecting a System a New System) and Viewing and Modifying System Selections . See (Creating Wizard Selection Table 65: System 1 Description Field to use in your system by browsing Mechanical the folders Select the mechanical components Selection System through buttons. For information of the selection tree and selecting Screen the check boxes and radio on available, User the types of systems you can create see the on the selections and details Applications and Interface sections. the control logic to use in your system by browsing through Select of the selection Screen Selection Logic Control the folders buttons. on the types of systems For information tree and selecting the check boxes and radio User Interface and you can create see the available, on the selections and details Applications sections. to the previous screen of the wizard. Previous Moves to the next screen of the wizard. Next Moves Finish Applies the wizard. The system appears in the Control View in and closes the selections mode. Configuration the wizard without Closes the selections. Cancel applying Opens the Help system. Opens the module Help. As you make selections in the System Selection Wizard, you can Help Module Selection System the module Help section for the (F1) press F1 to view the Help screen. The Help screen displays Click the links item you are viewing and changes in the wizard. items different as you select information. on the Help screen to view module is only one Selection screen called Sideloop 1 For Sideloops, The Previous button is enabled but does not there Selection. The Next button is disabled. For information on creating sideloops, see the Creating work. section. a Sideloop Online Wizard Operations Viewing connection Information section. The Online Operations Wizard contains the same device See the Controller pending information Wizard, with the addition of the Activate Device files , Enable logic , as the Commissioning and Disable logic features. Use these features to: (a) control when transferred files are activated on the controller , and (b) modify the runtime in a device. logic of applications ( about information while it is being commissioned a controller's Commissioning mode only), For information viewing Commissioning a System section. see the Operations Table 66: Online Wizard Field Description of the controller . Name Name issued to the controller . Command Command Status of the controller . Status Description of the controller Description . number Model . Model of the controller Firmware of the controller . Maincode Version version Bootcode version of the controller . Bootcode Version System name of the controller . System Name 225 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

226 Table 66: Online Operations Wizard Description Field Instance value in the Peer Reference ID number BACnet . This value used Number (BACnet ID) is the same View. attribute in the Details . CPU Usage% CPU usage of the controller . Object Memory Usage% of the controller usage Memory 1 device. Firmware version of the wireless Version Firmware Radio 1 device. address IEEE of the wireless Radio Address IEEE of the device. Unbound References Unbound references 1 device. Pan ID of the wireless Pan Id of the controller . Device Address Device address 1 of the rotary switches or DIP switches on the device. Combined value Number Controller of an application configured in Transfer to Device (Download) . Enabled Logic Logic status indicates that the logic of an application a status A status of True is enabled; that the logic of an application To modify the indicates False of is disabled. select the Enable logic or Disable logic options in the Logic Enabled status, list. an action Select Note: do not take effect on the controller until the application The logic options is activated. of an application Background using the Transfer to Device (Download) Status Status Transfer transferred Idle indicates that the application is activated in the controller; option. A status of are Staged indicates that the application has yet to be activated. a status of Files files Select transferred an action in the list to activate pending Activate Select files. 2 Network hostname of the device. Computer Name 2 Displays whether DHCP is enabled or not for devices. DHCP Enabled IP fields are editable. When the DHCP is disabled, the static 2 for the device. IP Address IP Address 2 for the IP address. mask Subnet used IP Mask 2 of the router for the device. IP address IP Router Address the Enabled status of the Broadcast Management (BBMD) object. Displays Enabled BBMD status in the Advanced tab. For further information, You can configure BBMD Management (BBMD) . Broadcast see Object Screen the Help system. Opens data only when wirelessly connected. 1 This field contains 2 Appears only for IP devices. only on compatible models. 3 Appears Table 67: Actions Description Field devices, activates files that you transfer using files Wait for manual activation On supported Activate pending the see Transferring to a Device . option. For further information, is provided Opens log for a selected controller . Diagnostic information error for the device Show diagnostic log with your field support representative. troubleshooting advanced issues 226 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

227 Table 67: Actions Description Field devices, enables logic of applications in a device. Enable logic On supported the runtime disables logic in a device. Disable On supported the runtime devices, logic of applications device commissioning of the logic value the status You can view and modify Note: during link in the status bar. See by clicking for more on the System Info Table 25 information. SA Bus Status of all SA Bus devices. See Transfer this option Wizard Click to view the status to Device information. for more the action specified in the adjoining dropdown-list. Perform Action Performs the device's Copies for pasting into another program. Copy to Clipboard data to the clipboard the result allowing user to re-query controller status. Refresh Refreshes screen Control View Control Tab Screen description in the User Interface section. See the Selection New Module Selection screen appears in multiple instances, such as when you add a new item within the Control The New Module Table 69 View, or when Wizard. Table 68 and the Launch provide information on the differences between you open adding new module selections and input/output selections. See Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules) and Using the Launch Wizard . table applies Selection dialog box for the following options: The following to the New Module • Launch Wizard • Network Inputs Selection Module • Setpoint/Miscellaneous Generation Module Selection • State Control Module Selection • Output • Network Outputs Selection and Network Inputs/Outputs Table 68: New Module for Modules Description Field the content of the table. Type one or more Filters appearing in the data you want Filter letters to view. Specifies the number of modules to add to the system. Count Lists the default name of the module. This name appears in the UI if you do not specify a Name Name. User click the appropriate link in this field. Note: To open the web help for a module, or category that the module is part of. Palette Specifies the folder a Johnson Controls standard name for the module. Standard Name Displays a name for the module. Specify User Name the value in the Name column is used. Note: If this field is blank, Disabled View additions. Previous for Classic Disabled for Classic View additions. Next Applies changes and closes the dialog box. Finish 227 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

228 Table 68: New Module Selection and Network Inputs/Outputs for Modules Field Description and closes the dialog box. Cancel Discards changes Opens the Help system. to the New Module Selection dialog box for the following options: table applies The following • Inputs Inputs • Miscellaneous • Outputs • Miscellaneous Outputs for Inputs and Outputs Table 69: New Module Selection Description Field of the table. Type one or more letters appearing in the data you want Filters the content Filter to view. Specifies the number of points to add to the system. Count types available Lists the application Application for the points. Lists the functions for the points. Function available available for the points. Type Lists the data types Data for the points. available Signal Lists the signals for the module. User Specify a name Name for Classic View additions. Previous Disabled for Classic Disabled Next View additions. Applies and closes the dialog box. Finish changes changes the dialog Discards box. Cancel and closes the Help system. Opens State Selection (State Tables Tab) The State Tables tab appears in the Features panel. See Features Panel and Features Panel Screen in the User Interface section. Generator table that occurs when its corresponding State the behavior module is in a particular state Each shows Generator Module in State X yields the behavior of the Output Controller). The State Tables tab displays (the State s state the system’ data populated within tables in the right pane, and the states in the left pane of the tab. selection the first column The panes both vertically and horizontally , keeping you to scroll visible. See the Viewing and allow Modifying State Selection Tables and Customizing State Selection Tables sections for more information. Table 70: State Selection Tables Tab) (State Field Description Enters and allows you to modify the State Tables. Edit Edit mode Applies the changes and exits the Edit mode. Apply Exits without applying the changes. Cancel the Edit mode Opens Details dialog box for State Selection. View Details 228 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

229 Table 70: State Selection Tab) (State Tables Description Field in which the state table is associated. The module or and Port (Yellow Name Module Name of the State Generator Orange module name is followed by the connected Table Captions) port in the following format: Module ATE). DA-T.STARTSTOP-ST Stop Sequencing Start (for example, Name.Port Note: A yellow table header indicates a connected module and orange indicates is not connected. that the module Lists the states Generator priority to lowest priority . from highest module State Column (Shaded Column of the State This is the fixed column Note: in the left pane Headers) of the tab. that appears the name of the Output Controller module state in which the column is Indicates (Turquoise Columns Controller Output associated. Column Headers) These Note: in the right pane columns of the tab. appear value/behavior rows the Output Controller state table with Text or Shaded White (White Table Rows with text indicate Shaded table rows with asterisks or Xs with Asterisks or Xs) associated with the State Generator state. state, the State indicate that when Generator module is in a particular no behavior for the next State checks Generator module Controller and the Output occurs, change certain listed. An X also indicates that the field should not be modified state unless are required. control specifications Moves a state table up or down in the order. The tables appear in order generation Arrows Up and Down table has the highest . the top most where of priority priority the Help system. Opens Opens Help. State Selection Module Help (F1) the module State Selection Table Create Customizing State Selection Tables . See State Table Table 71: Create Selection Description Field for the module/table. We recommend Use to type a name this field empty so Name leaving naming may be used. that dynamic Indicates the order in which the table appears in the State Tables dialog box. Table Priority Use to select an Enumeration to use a Boolean data type. Table Data Type (Port Type) set to use, or indicates the table OK the dialog box. Creates and closes the dialog applying Closes the change. Cancel box without the Help system. Opens Create State Selection Column See Customizing State Selection Tables . Table 72: Create Column Selection State Description Field Name We recommend leaving this field empty Use to type a name for the module/column. naming may be used. so that dynamic Column Indicates in which the column appears in the table. the order Index 229 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

230 Table 72: Create State Column Selection Field Description set to use, or indicates to use a Boolean data type. Column Data Type (Port Type) Use to select an Enumeration and closes box. OK the column Creates the dialog box without applying the change. Cancel Closes the dialog Opens the Help system. Modify or Output) Signal (Input an Input Modifying Signal . See or Output Table 73: Select Signal Type Window Field Description Current signal Current Signal type of the point. search for sorting applicable Signal Definitions. Signal Options Filter Use to enter criteria a different signal for the input or output. Signal Definition Use to select whether or not the hardware in your CAF supports the signal type. Device Support Indicates the whether in your CAF has available ports to support Indicates Available Ports or not the hardware type. signal Indicates whether the signal type is a standard recommendation for the input or output. Standard Recommended Applies the change the dialog box. Update and closes 1 device To an existing Device Assignment Sensor that exists the input with a Network Assigns point or output in your CAF. To a new device or output point and then assigns Creates a new device based on the input the point input/output is ZN-T the tool with the new device. For example, if your standard point to bind your point to. Sensor a Network will create device Displays available devices in the CAF you can bind points to. Device List Closes the dialog applying the change. Cancel box without Opens the Help system. 1 Appears only for SA bus devices. Logic View See the Logic Tab Screen description in the User Interface section. Command (Enum Output or Boolean Output) Hierarchy See Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block . 230 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

231 Table 74: Command Hierarchy Output or Boolean Output) (Enum Field Description Use to edit the table Edit data. IO Modifications that define the columns Enables or reorder you to add, remove, inputs in the table in the left pane. a name for the block. Name Use to enter BACnet ID and instance number . Object Identifier Indicates object and an Outputs Input for the selected and Outputs Table Displays both an Inputs table data: the following include tables These module/block. Name : Name of the input • or output. Controls standard name used • Standard Name : Johnson for the input or output. values of the inputs and outputs. Default : Default • Value used : Units and Units • for the inputs and outputs of measurement or outputs. Text for enum the States displays inputs Precision value used for the inputs and • Display Precision : Display outputs (for example, 10ths). whether the input or output parameter Exposed BACnet : Indicates • systems. for BACnet is exposed Indicates the name of the input (Boolean Input or Enumeration Output) Headers) Column or Orange (Yellow Columns Input is associated. in which the column indicates module table header A yellow Note: and orange a connected is not connected. that the module indicates Use to drag inputs to reorder the input list. states of the commands in its rows. State Column (Turquoise Column Headers) Lists the output or True/False table with text indicate the enumeration state rows White with with Text or Shaded (White Table Rows Asterisks) state that is associated with the input column. Hierarchy that the Command indicates table rows with asterisks Shaded accepts any value for the input. the row up or down. Arrows Moves Up and Down Applies the changes. Apply the changes. Cancel Discards Closes Close the screen. Opens the Help system. Translation (Enum to Boolean or Boolean to Enum) See Configuring the Translation Blocks . Table 75: Translation to Boolean or Boolean to Enum) (Enum Description Field Use to edit the table data. Edit Enables you to add, remove, or reorder inputs that define the columns in the IO Modifications in the left pane. table 231 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

232 Table 75: Translation (Enum or Boolean to Enum) to Boolean Field Description Name a name Use to enter for the block. ID and instance BACnet . Object Identifier object Indicates number and an Outputs table for the selected module/block. and Outputs Table Input Displays both an Inputs data: These tables include the following • : Name of the input or output. Name Controls standard used for the input or name : Johnson Name Standard • output. values of the inputs and outputs. • Default Value : Default used • and outputs and displays Units : Units of measurement for the inputs inputs Text for enum the States or outputs. value used for the inputs Precision • : Display Precision Display and outputs 10ths). (for example, whether the input or output • is exposed BACnet Exposed : Indicates parameter systems. for BACnet the name of the input in which Indicates is associated. Input (Orange Column Headers) the column Use to drag inputs to reorder the input list. Lists the output states in its rows. State Column (Turquoise Column Headers) of the commands Table Rows table the enumeration state or True/False state that with with Text or Shaded (White rows with text indicate White Asterisks) column. with the input is associated rows accepts with asterisks module Shaded indicate that the Translation table for the input. any value the row up or down. Up and Down Arrows Moves the changes. Applies Apply the changes. Cancel Discards the screen. Close Closes Opens the Help system. Rename/Name State This dialog changes to the labels in the State Tables. See Customizing to make Selection Tables . box is used Table 76: Rename/Name Dialog Description Field Use to type a name for the input. We recommend leaving this field empty so that dynamic Name may be used. naming Applies the changes and closes the dialog box. OK Closes the dialog box without applying the changes. Cancel Opens the Help system. Line Segment See Configuring the Line Segment Block . 232 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

233 Table 77: Line Segment Field Description Edit Use to edit the table data. a name for the block. Name Use to enter Indicates ID and instance number . Object Identifier object BACnet both an Inputs and an Outputs table for the selected module/block. These tables Input Table and Outputs Displays include the following data: Name of the input or output. • : Name Controls standard name used for the input or output. • Standard Name : Johnson values and outputs. : Default • Default of the inputs Value used for the inputs and outputs. • Units : Units of measurement (for example, Precision used for the inputs and outputs value • : Display Display Precision 10ths). : Indicates whether the input or output parameter is exposed for BACnet • BACnet Exposed systems. Lists the values of the Line Segment input in ascending order. Input Points expected that the Line Segment Output to from the Input Points column. Lists the values Points maps the changes. Applies Apply the changes. Cancel Discards Closes Close the screen. Opens the Help system. MUX See Configuring the MUX Block . Table 78: MUX Description Field data. Use to edit the table Edit you to add or remove inputs and outputs Enables the modes buttons in the left IO Modifications that define pane. Use to enter a name for the block. Name Object Indicates BACnet ID and instance number . object Identifier 233 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

234 Table 78: MUX Description Field and an Outputs table for the selected module/block. These tables and Outputs Table Input both an Inputs Displays include the following data: : Name or output. Name • of the input standard name used for the input or output. • Standard Name : Johnson Controls to the Present Value if the Mode value is not • Default Value : Input that is passed to an input. assigned text for and outputs and the States : Units Units • of measurement for the inputs used inputs and outputs. the enum Display Precision used for the inputs and outputs (for • value Precision : Display example, 10ths). the input or output parameter is exposed for whether : Indicates BACnet • Exposed systems. BACnet the modes that are configured for this input. If the mode value equals one of the Defines 1 - Mode(s) Input Selection the value is passed. See Mode on the input . configurations, mode input 1 the modes that are configured for this input. If the mode value equals one of the Defines Input 2 - Mode(s) mode is passed. See Mode Selection . configurations, on the input input the value the changes. Apply Applies Cancel Discards the changes. Closes Close the screen. Opens the Help system. of Input X - Mode(s) fields is determined by the number selected in the Input 1 The number field. Mode Selection Configuring Block . See the MUX Table 79: Mode Selection Field Description a value to use for the input mode of a MUX block. Mode Use to select Applies the changes and closes the dialog box. OK Closes the dialog applying the changes. Cancel box without the Help system. Opens Element Selection Default Setting the Default Element See . of a Module Table 80: Default Element Selection Description Field Lists the elements you can select as the default element for the module. List of Elements Applies and closes the dialog box. The default element appears with a the changes OK background and white text. black 234 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

235 Table 80: Default Element Selection Field Description applying the changes. Cancel the dialog Closes box without Opens the Help system. Edge Label Hidden Edge Label of a Connection See the Changing the Hidden section. Label Edge Table 81: Hidden Description Field to use to indicate Use to type a label hidden connection line. Label name the associated and closes box. the changes OK Applies the dialog the dialog applying the changes. Cancel Closes box without Details Details Dialog Box description in the User Interface section. See Viewing and Modifying Details . See the Finder Enum Dialog Box section. working Finder , see the about Finder in the Enum For information Enum Finder Dialog Box Table 82: Enum Screen Area Description enum criteria. Search Criteria set search Use to enter the prioritized search Results for cross-column searching of Set Name, Enum ID, and Displays results Value based on search criteria. Enum Opens the Help system. the selected enum attribute in the Details view dialog box. Ok Applies set to the selected the Enum without applying changes. Cancel Closes Finder Expose Ports for Connection items in the lists may appear disabled Some they are automatically exposed for connection and cannot be because changed, connected. See Exposing Ports for Connection and or if they are already Ports . Exposing Table 83: Port Exposure (For Connection) Description Field Provides text box to search the selection tree based on the node name. The search results Filter the matching node include and its ancestors. ports you to select for connections and allows Lists the input ports you can hide or expose Port List Input boxes. check using Lists the output ports you can hide or expose for connections and allows you to select ports Port List Output boxes. using check Selects all input/output ports in the Input Port List and Output Port List. Select All 235 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

236 Table 83: Port Exposure (For Connection) Field Description of all input/output ports in the Input Port List and Output Port List. Deselect All Removes the selection and closes box. OK the changes Applies the dialog box without applying the changes. Cancel Closes the dialog the Help system. Opens Clone Dialog Ports Only ports dialog you to duplicate Ports of a block. allows that are exposed and not connected can The Clone ports you cannot duplicate ports be duplicated; and connected. See the Cloning a Port section. that are both exposed Table 84: Clone Dialog Ports Field Description you can duplicate. Input Port List Lists the input ports you can duplicate. Output Port List Lists the output ports the check boxes of all input/output ports Selects All Select in the Input Port List. Port List and Output Port the check of all input/output ports Clears boxes All Deselect in the Input Port List. List and Output Applies the changes and closes the dialog box. OK Closes the dialog applying the changes. Cancel box without the Help system. Opens Dialog Select Reference a Connection a Connection Changing Making . and See Reference Table 85: Select Description Field text box to search the selection Provides on the node name. The search Filter tree based include node and its ancestors. results the matching Shows modules within the system tree. Left Pane available Lists the input/output ports to which you can connect. Right Pane Applies the changes the dialog box. OK and closes the dialog box without Closes the changes. Cancel applying Opens the Help system. Confirm (Delete) The Confirm dialog box appears after selecting to delete a module or block. Click Yes to delete it or No to cancel , and the deletion. Deleting a Module , Deleting a Block See Deleting a Connection . 236 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

237 Rename (Module/Block) box to make changes in the block's name. See Renaming a Module and Renaming a Use this dialog to the labels . Block Table 86: Rename (Module/Block) Description Field for the module/block. a name User Name Specify Note: the Standard Name is used. If this field is blank, a Johnson Controls standard name for the module/block. Displays Name Standard Applies change and closes the dialog box. The name change appears in the the name OK View. Control View or Logic the dialog box without applying the change. Cancel Closes the Help system. Opens Job Information Entering or Viewing See . Job Information Table 87: Job Information Description Field Enter or view the name of the operator responsible for the open CAF. Operator Name Enter or view the name with the open CAF. Job Name of the job associated or view the contract associated with the job and CAF. Contract Number Enter number or view notes indicating the history of the job and CAF. History Enter Applies the changes the dialog box. OK and closes the dialog Closes applying the changes. Cancel box without Opens the Help system. FSM Details Screen Table 88: FSM (Configuration Mode) Screen Description Field Current state. Current State Possible next states for the current state. Possible Next States State State Name name. Conditions which must be true in order to transition to the next state. Guard Condition 237 Controller Tool Help: Configuring a System

238 Configuring Advanced Features Controller features for field equipment include schedules, calendars, alarms, and trends. In Configuration Advanced controllers advanced you can use the Advanced features. When you configure these or Commissioning mode, tab to configure you can do the following: features, such as controller name, time zones, and notify other devices when the controller • Set up controller information, Device . See restarts. Information • to add exception to a schedule. See Calendars . Set up calendars days • if you want the controller to generate Set up Intrinsic or event messages. See Setting up Intrinsic Alarming alarms . Alarms • to record events in event logs. See Viewing Event Set up the controller . Logs • to send alarm notifications to other devices. See Setting up Device Notification . Set up the controller or event • with schedules. Schedules Working . See • See with Trends Set up and view trends. . Working • Manage See SA Bus Diagnostics . SA bus performance. Schedules, The Calendars, and Alarms and Notification features can be used during a stand-alone Trends, commissioning of the advanced field controller , or these features can be integrated into supervisory system session ® as BACnet objects. features are integrated into a supervisory system, If these attributes in both a local commissioning you can edit feature session or from the supervisory system user interface. Configuring Advanced Controller Features Concepts Calendars The Calendars allows you to add exception days to a schedule. Exception days can be holidays or days with feature hours (for example, hours). modified summer Calendar Global (either If necessary calendar , you can reference on a different device or on the same your calendar to an existing Any changes made to the referenced master calendar automatically update all the calendars that reference device). the master calendar . Alarming Intrinsic alarming allows you to configure the detection of alarm conditions and the generation of event messages Intrinsic limits on the attributes of an object, such as the High/Low alarm (properties) of analog objects, the alarm state based of binary objects, or both. The Notification Class object routes the event message to other BACnet devices. By default, objects intrinsic alarming. However , you can add intrinsic alarming to an object by setting its do not have Alarming to True. attribute Intrinsic Defined Log Event Log displays detailed information about The Event and events on the device. You can view Event Log alarms information in Commissioning mode. Notifications The Notifications allows you to configure the distribution of alarm feature notifications to multiple devices. or event Schedules The Schedules feature allows you to automate operations based on a schedule. 238 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

239 Weekly schedules times that you can schedule activities (such as building occupancy and the start let you specify of devices) for each Weekly schedules also allow you to select the times you want and stop times day of the week. 7-day day in a normal for each week. override the normal schedule. For example, an exception schedule may be a holiday schedule Exception schedules with modified hours (for example, a summer hour schedule). or a range of days Trends feature The Trends you to set up data sampling for points in the controller . The Trends feature also provides allows to view these data samples. You can set up a Trend in Configuration mode and view live trend you with ways and data (samples) in Commissioning mode. attributes SA Bus Diagnostics The SA Bus Performance is located on the Device Information Screen , indicates the current attribute, which Rates of the bus, such Values of COV Receive or high. and Average Token Loop performance as low, medium, are indicators times See the following table. of SA bus performance. Table 89: SA Bus Performance Levels SA Bus Description Performance COV Receive Rate greater than 600, Average Average Token Loop greater than 2,000 ms. LOW OR Average COV Receive Rate greater than 300 and less than or equal to 600, OR Average Token Loop greater MEDIUM ms and less than or equal to 2,000 than 1,000 ms. Loop COV less than or equal to 300, AND Average Token Rate less than or equal to 1,000 Average HIGH Receive ms. unsupported data type, such as Ethernet. NOT Indicates APPLICABLE Maximum networks is mostly due to noisy analog signals. In the event you are experiencing low traffic over control bus performance, try increasing the update interval time of the AI points on your Point Expansion Modules. or medium AI points on SA Bus devices periodically send COV messages back to the controller regardless of a change in value. This guarantees closed control, but also increases periodic traffic on the bus. loop application Information Device Information feature allows you to set up controller information The Device other devices when the controller and notify restarts. Broadcast Management (BBMD) Object The Broadcast object allows you to configure IP controllers that support BACnet Broadcast Management Management Device (BBMD) functionality . 239 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

240 Configuring Advanced Features Steps Controller Calendars When in the Advanced tab, follow these procedures: you set up and work with calendars • a Basic Calendar Adding . • with a Date . a Calendar Range Adding • a Calendar Deleting . Calendar a Basic Adding in conjunction with schedules by allowing you to specify Calendars when you want an exception work the days to be active. use of calendars is to indicate holiday days when an alternative One common schedule occupancy is in effect. schedule 1. Start the tool and open the controller application. the Advanced tab. 2. Click Object tree, right-click Calendars and click Add Calendar . A new calendar is added to the 3. In the Advanced Object tree. Advanced located tree. Calendars in the Advanced Object 4. Click below the calendar . The fields you can edit appear in white. Edit 5. Click basic information for the calendar . See Calendar Details Screen . 6. Enter List field, 7. Next to the Date Add . The Calendar View window appears. click about the days to add to the calendar . See Calendar 8. Select for more information you want the buttons in View the calendar . 9. Click Save . 10. Click Apply . Referencing a Global Calendar , you can reference a calendar device or another calendar on the same device. If necessary on a different the controller the tool and open 1. Start application. Advanced tab. 2. Click the Object Calendars and click Add Calendar . A new calendar is added to the 3. In the Advanced tree, right-click Object Advanced tree. 4. Click located below Calendars in the Advanced Object tree. the calendar Edit you can edit appear in white. 5. Click . The fields basic information for the calendar 6. Enter . 7. Next to the Date List field, click Add . The Calendar View window appears. 8. Select Global . 9. In the Device field, the BACnet global identifier of the device. enter field, global the BACnet 10. In the Calendar identifier of the calendar . enter Apply . 11. Click Adding a Calendar with a Date Range You can add a calendar with a date range of exception days. For example, you may want to add an entire month closes (for example, or a calendar that includes only Fridays (building hours) early). summer 1. Start the tool and open the controller application. 2. Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced Object tree and information screen appear . 240 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

241 3. In the Advanced Object Calendars and click Add Calendar . A new calendar is added to the tree, right-click Object tree. Advanced located tree. Calendars in the Advanced Object 4. Click below the calendar . The fields you can edit appear in white. Edit 5. Click basic information for the calendar . See Calendar Details Screen 6. Enter . 7. Next to the Date click Add . The Calendar View window appears. List field, See Entry . The Calendar 8. Click Detail screen appears. Detail Calendar Entry Detail Screen . Entry 9. Click New . In the Calendar Entry Detail screen, you can select one day, define a date range, or select an entire week. 10. To select click Date Range , and then select your parameters in the To and From fields. a date range, , and an entire (for example, the last week 11. To select in every year), click Week and Day week of December then select your parameters in the Month and Date fields. 12. Click OK . 13. Click Save . 14. Click Apply . a Calendar Deleting 1. Start the tool and open application. the controller 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. In the Advanced Object tree, right-click the calendar you want to delete, and then click Delete . 241 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

242 Setting up Alarms alarming allows the detection of alarm conditions and the generation of event messages Intrinsic you to configure (properties) such as the high and low alarm limits of analog objects, the alarm on the attributes based of an object, objects, or both. The Notification Class object routes the event message to other BACnet devices. state of binary do not have intrinsic alarming. However , you can add intrinsic alarming to an object by setting By default, objects Defined to True. Alarming its Intrinsic attribute Alarms Setting up Intrinsic the tool and open application. 1. Start the controller 2. Click the Advanced tab. Object tree, click Intrinsic Alarming . Three tabs appear in the Intrinsic Alarming dialog 3. In the Advanced box: • The Network tab. See Network Inputs and Outputs Tab . Inputs/Outputs tab. See Inputs Tab . • The Inputs/Outputs and Outputs for Setpoint/Miscellaneous, See Generation, and Output Control objects). tab (used • The Parameters State Tab Parameters . Note: Click the columns to sort the information in these tabs. the tab you want and click Edit . The fields that you can edit appear 4. Click in white. 5. To turn on intrinsic for a point, click True in the Intrinsic Alarming field for the point you want. When alarming s Intrinsic allows field to True, the system you set a point’ you to edit the alarm attributes for the point. Alarming alarm 6. Edit the remaining for the point and click Apply . attributes Viewing Event Logs You can perform this task only in Commissioning mode. 1. Start the tool and open application. the controller the Advanced 2. Click tab. tree under Events Alarming, click Event Log and then click the Object tab. A list of Intrinsic 3. In the Advanced . appear events Note: Click the columns to sort the list of events. details from the event into another program, select the row and click Copy to Clipboard . To copy To refresh the screen, button on top left of the Events tab. click the lightning up Event Setting Log Parameters 1. Start the tool and open the controller application. the Advanced tab. The Advanced Object tree and information screen 2. Click . appear 3. In the Advanced tree under Intrinsic Alarming, click Object Log and then click the Details tab. Event 4. Click Edit . The fields you can edit appear in white. 5. Edit the parameters of the notification. Event Log . See up Device Setting Notification is used only for controllers that are not Metasys ® or This feature Explorer ® supervisory controllers. Facility 1. Start the tool and open the controller application. 2. Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced Object tree and information screen appear . window 3. In the Notifications Intrinsic Alarming, click Notification . The Notification under appears. folder 4. Click Edit . The fields you can edit appear in white. 5. Edit the parameters of the notification. See Notification Recipient Screen . 6. To define recipients of the notification, do the following: device Features Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller 242

243 a. Click the button next to Recipient List. The Recipients screen appears. Add Add . The Notification screen appears. See Notification Recipient Screen . b. Click Recipient you want to add by specifying options: c. Select the type of recipient the following device a specific Number or BACnet ID). : Notify ID ID (Instance a specific IP address for the device. IP Address : Notify : Broadcast the alarm Broadcast or event. : Notify controller . Address another MS/TP for the device d. Enter See Notification Recipient Screen . the parameters you selected. the Sunday through Saturday check boxes, select the days e. Using the notification to be active. you want f. Using the time that you want the notification to be active. Typically , you select all days. the time bar, adjust the type of events and alarms notifications: Off Normal, Fault, or Normal. g. Select that generate whether Notification messages to be confirmed. This field determines whether the h. Indicate you want BACnet device acknowledges receiving the event. destination keep this setting as Confirmed. In general, However selected Broadcast as the recipient type, click Unconfirmed. , if you have OK i. Click . j. Click Save . 7. Click Apply . Schedules When you set up and work with schedules in the Advanced tab, follow these procedures: • Adding Schedule a Weekly • Adding an Exception Schedule • a Scheduled Adding Item to a Schedule • Deleting a Schedule Adding a Weekly Schedule allow Weekly the time frame for the days in your schedule. schedules you to select the tool and open the controller application. 1. Start the Advanced 2. Click tab. 3. In the Advanced tree, right-click Schedules and then click Add Schedule . A new schedule is added to Object Object the Advanced tree. the schedule located below Schedules in the Advanced 4. Click tree. Object 5. Click Edit . The fields you can edit appear in white. 6. Enter the basic parameters. See Schedule Details Screen . 7. In the Display Mode Weekly Schedule . list, click the New Events button. The Define 8. Click screen appears. + You may need to resize the screen for a better view of the Advanced tab information. Note: 9. Define the parameters of the weekly schedule. See Define New Events Screen . 10. Click . OK 11. Click Apply . Adding an Exception Schedule You can add exception days to your schedule. Exception days can be holidays or a range of days with modified hours (for example, summer hours). 243 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

244 1. Start the tool and open application. the controller the Advanced 2. Click tab. tree, right-click Schedules Add Schedule . A new schedule is added to the and click 3. In the Advanced Object tree. Object Advanced located below Schedules in the Advanced Object tree. 4. Click the schedule . The fields Edit in white. 5. Click you can edit appear parameters. Calendar Adding a Basic the basic . 6. Enter See list, click Exception Schedule . 7. In the Display Mode the + button. The Exception Detail screen appears. See Exception Detail Screen 8. Click . 9. Define of the exception schedule. the parameters OK . 10. Click . 11. Click Apply a Scheduled Item to a Schedule Adding item refers to a point You can add an item to a schedule. and assign to a schedule. A scheduled that you can select the tool and open the controller application. 1. Start the Advanced tab. The Advanced tab tree and information 2. Click appears. screen 3. Right-click and click Add Schedule . A new schedule is added to the Advanced Object tree. Schedules tree. the schedule below Schedules in the Advanced Object 4. Click located 5. Click Edit . The fields you can edit appear in white. 6. Enter the basic parameters. See Schedule Details Screen . 7. In the Display Mode Scheduled Items . list, click the + The Select Reference screen appears. 8. Click button. To search click and select application, you want to assign to the schedule. On Box 9. To add an open the point type part or all of the point name in the Filter box. for points, on a remote device, 10. To add a point Off Box and enter the remote point information. To search for points, click type part or all of the point in the Filter box. name OK 11. Click . Apply . 12. Click Deleting a Schedule 1. Start the tool and open the controller application. 2. Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced Object tree and information screen appear . 3. Right-click the schedule to delete, and then click Delete . you want with Trends Working you set up and work with trends in the Advanced tab, follow these procedures: When • Adding a Trend • Viewing a Trend • Changing Trend Views Adding a Trend A trended item is a data point in the controller that is periodically sampled and logged. You can view trend logs in table or chart format. To view trend samples, you need to be in Commissioning mode. 244 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

245 1. Start the tool and open application. the controller the Advanced 2. Click tab. tree, right-click 3. In the Advanced Add Trend . A new trend is added to the Advanced Trends Object and then click tree. Object 4. Select and then click Edit . The fields you can edit appear in white. the trend for the trend. 5. Enter Trend Details Screen . information See Apply 6. Click . a Trend Viewing To view live trend sample data, be in Commissioning mode. you must Changing Trend Views the views in the Trend Viewer, click the Chart or To change view buttons. Table Device Information device information, these procedures: To configure follow • Device Viewing Information • Device Editing Information Viewing Device Information Information, complete the following To view Device steps: 1. Start the controller application. the tool and open the tab. 2. Click Advanced the Device Information 3. Under , select the controller you want to view. Information about the controller folder (such as the controller name and the time zone) appears in the right section of the screen. Editing Device Information Information, complete steps: To edit Device the following the controller the tool and open application. 1. Start Advanced tab. The Device 2. Click folder and information screen appear . the Information the Device Information 3. Under , select the controller you want to view. Information about the controller folder appears of the screen. in the right section Edit that you can edit appear in white. 4. Click . The fields of the device. 5. Edit the parameters Device Information Screen . See 6. Click Apply . Working with a Broadcast (BBMD) Object Management with a Broadcast procedures: Object in the Advanced tab, follow these To work Management • BBMD Object Information Viewing • Editing BBMD Object Information • Adding Object a BBMD Viewing a Broadcast Management (BBMD) Object To view a Broadcast Management object, complete the following steps: 1. Start the tool and open the controller application. 245 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

246 2. Click the tab. Advanced the Device folder , click BBMD . Information about the object appears in the right section of 3. Under Information the screen. View BM Addresses screen. This screen provides 4. Click UDP Port and UDP Broadcast the IP Address, to view the of a BM Address. Mask details. BM Addresses screen to view individual BM Address Details 5. Click in the a Broadcast Management (BBMD) Object Editing Management object, complete the following To edit a Broadcast steps: 1. Start the controller application. the tool and open the Advanced 2. Click tab. about Device folder , click the . Information Information the object appears in the right section of 3. Under BBMD the screen. 4. Click Edit that you can edit appear in white. . The fields Modify BM Addresses . 5. Click to edit BM Addresses screen, 6. In the symbols to change the BM address sequence. To add or remove use the arrow BM addresses, click the Add or Remove buttons respectively . Click the Details button to view individual BM Address details. Save to save 7. Click your changes. Management Object a Broadcast (BBMD) Adding not have a Broadcast If you open object defined, you can add an object using a CAF file that does Management one of the following methods: • Click Device Information folder and press Insert . on the • Right-click Device Information folder and select Add BBMD Configuration . the • Click Select in the Field Device section in Define Hardware . If the selected field device supports BBMD functionality , it appears Advanced tab. in the BBMD Transfer screen, • In the an option in the Summary Enabled list and then select Modify open select application with New Information column . The Broadcast Management object appears when the transfer process is complete. 246 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

247 Configuring Advanced Features Screens Controller Screens Calendar Screen Calendar Details a Basic See Adding a Calendar with a Date Range . or Calendar Adding Screen Table 90: Calendar Field Description of the calendar . Indicates - Name the name Object the description . Description Indicates of the calendar whether is enabled (True) or disabled (False). Enabled Indicates the calendar the read-only ID for the calendar . Indicates Identifier Object Indicates date is in the date list. if the current Value - Present BACnet of True. a status Value will show date is in the date list, the Present If the current date is not in the date list, the Present If the current Value will show a status of False. the dates in the calendar . BACnet Shows List - Date Indicates is being used from another device. This field appears that the calendar Update Calendar Global only. mode in Commissioning Calendar View See Adding Calendar or Referencing a Global Calendar . a Basic View Table 91: Calendar Button Description Selects the local calendar option. Local the global calendar option and opens the calendar location entry: Global Selects The BACnet Device: identifier of the device. • global The BACnet global Calendar: of the calendar . • identifier Go to the previous year. Go to the next year. Go to the previous month. Go to the next month. Go to today . details date ranges (for example, summer Use to view calendar and define hours month). For more information about how to set up a date for an entire range, see Adding a Calendar with a Date Range . Saves to the information in the screen. Save changes Exits the screen without saving changes. Cancel Opens the help system. 247 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

248 Calendar Entry Detail Screen a Calendar See . with a Date Adding Range Detail Entry Table 92: Calendar Screen Description Field dates assigned to the calendar . Entries Displays a list of exception Calendar . to the calendar Use to add new dates . Date date to the calendar Use to add a custom . Range to the calendar Date Use to add a date range of exception days to the calendar Use to add a specific Week and Day week . week to the calendar . New Use to add an entire a date from the calendar . Delete Use to remove the days, Use to select for exception days in the calendar . Month, Day, Year, Day of Week months, and years Screens Intrinsic Alarming and Outputs Tab Network Inputs up Intrinsic Alarms . See Setting Inputs and Outputs Tab Table 93: Network Field Description the name of the point. Name Indicates whether Intrinsic Alarming is enabled Intrinsic Options are: Alarming Defined Indicates for this point. for this point Alarming Intrinsic • True: Enable Alarming for this point • False: Disable Intrinsic fields Defined Alarming If you set the Intrinsic are to True, additional fields enabled for editing. of time in seconds that an alarm Time Delay must persist Indicates the amount condition is generated. You can edit this field only if Intrinsic Alarming the event before The values, options, and range include: Defined is enabled. 0–65,535 (seconds) Units to all point objects and the Accumulator Applies the BACnet Notification identifier of the notification class within the Specifies Class object Controller that is used to route the event notification. Advanced Application Defined Alarming You can edit this field only if Intrinsic is enabled. Indicates whether this is an Alarm or an Event. You can edit this field only Type Notify Defined Applies to all point objects and the Alarming if Intrinsic is enabled. Accumulator . Changes the event to To Off Normal, To Fault, or To Normal. You can edit Enable Event Defined is enabled. Alarming this field if Intrinsic 248 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

249 Table 93: Network Inputs and Outputs Tab Description Field Enables in fault and normal Message Texts Config Event the configuration to be displayed of messages, is Defined Alarming You can edit this field if Intrinsic notifications. event enabled. Applies to all point objects and the Accumulator . Maximum 256 characters. for the configuration of three event Newer release Note: allow modes while messages (To Off Normal, To Fault, and To Normal), older message of one event for the configuration allow releases (To Off Normal). whether you want Low Limit or High Limit enabled. You can edit Indicates Enable Limit is enabled. this field if Intrinsic Applies to AI, AO, AV, Defined Alarming and Accumulator objects. High Indicates Limit the high limit for the point. You can edit this field if Intrinsic to AI, AO, AV, and Accumulator Applies is enabled. Defined Alarming objects. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Alarming Indicates Low Limit the low limit for the point. Applies to AI, AO, AV, and Accumulator objects. Defined is enabled. the value BACnet the Present Value must change below the High Deadband by which Defines before the object generates a To-Normal the Low Limit Limit or above Alarming Defined is enabled. Applies event. You can edit this field if Intrinsic objects. to AI, AO, AV, and Accumulator Value(s) values to the alarm. You can edit this field if that you can assign Indicates Alarm States identifies the value set for this Text attribute Intrinsic Alarming attribute. Applies to BI, BV, MI, and MV objects. For MI and MV objects, you can select values multiple from a list, unlike to one value. objects the other that are limited the fault value. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Alarming States Values Indicates Fault set for this attribute. identifies Text attribute the value the value The States set for this attribute. Text attribute identifies values. The list of numbers to MI and comes from a list of alarm Applies MV objects. Inputs and Outputs Tab See Alarms . up Intrinsic Setting Table 94: Inputs and Outputs Tab Description Field the name of the point. Name Indicates Options whether Alarming is enabled for this point. Intrinsic are: Indicates Defined Alarming Intrinsic for this point • True: Enable Intrinsic Alarming Alarming • False: Disable Intrinsic for this point to True, additional If you set the Intrinsic are fields Defined Alarming fields for editing. enabled 249 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

250 Table 94: Inputs and Outputs Tab Field Description before the alarm or event is issued. Time Delay Indicates the time delay that you want is enabled. Defined Alarming You can edit this field only if Intrinsic The values, options, and range include: 0–65,535 (seconds) Units and the Accumulator objects to all point Applies Object Identifier of the Notification Notification Object used Indicates the BACnet Class Class objects for routing. . You can edit Applies to all point and the Accumulator Defined Alarming this field only if Intrinsic is enabled. Notify whether or an Event. You can edit this field only Type this is an Alarm Indicates is enabled. to all point objects and the Defined Alarming if Intrinsic Applies . Accumulator the event to To Off Normal, To Fault, or To Normal. You can edit Enable Changes Event is enabled. Defined this field if Intrinsic Alarming Enables the configuration of messages, to be displayed in fault and normal Texts Config Message Event Alarming Defined is event notifications. You can edit this field if Intrinsic and the Accumulator . Maximum enabled. Applies to all point objects 256 characters. allow of three event modes for the configuration Note: Newer release older messages (To Off Normal, To Fault, and To Normal), while (To Off message of one event for the configuration releases allow Normal). whether you want Low Limit or High Limit Indicates You can edit Enable Limit enabled. Defined Applies to AI, AO, AV, and is enabled. this field if Intrinsic Alarming objects. Accumulator the high limit for the point. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Alarming Indicates High Limit Applies to AI, AO, AV, and Accumulator is enabled. Defined objects. the low limit for the point. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Indicates Low Limit Alarming Defined is enabled. Applies to AI, AO, AV, and Accumulator objects. Defines the value by which the Present Value must change below the High Deadband BACnet the object generates a To-Normal Limit or above the Low Limit before event. Applies is enabled. Defined Alarming You can edit this field if Intrinsic to AI, AO, AV, and Accumulator objects. values that you can assign to the alarm. You can edit this field if Value(s) Alarm Indicates Text attribute Intrinsic the value set for this Alarming States identifies attribute. to BI, BV, MI, and MV objects. Applies For MI and MV objects, multiple values from a list, unlike the you can select that are limited to one value. other objects Indicates Fault Alarming States Values the fault value. You can edit this field if Intrinsic set for this attribute. the value identifies Text attribute Text attribute identifies the value set for this attribute. The States from a list of the alarm values. Applies to MI and The list of numbers come MV objects. 250 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

251 Table 94: Inputs Tab and Outputs Description Field the feedback value. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Alarming Feedback Value Indicates is enabled. Text attribute identifies the value set for this attribute. The States from a list of alarm values. The list of numbers comes to MI and MV objects. Applies Indicates the feedback reference. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Alarming Feedback Reference to BO and MO objects. is enabled. Applies 251 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

252 Parameters Tab . Setting See up Intrinsic Alarms Tab Table 95: Parameters Field Description the name of the point. Name Indicates Intrinsic is enabled for this point. Options are: Alarming Defined Indicates whether Intrinsic Alarming for this point. Alarming Intrinsic • True: Enable • False: Disable Intrinsic Alarming for this point. fields to True, additional fields Defined are If you set the Intrinsic Alarming enabled for editing. that you want before Time Delay or event is issued. Indicates the time delay the alarm Defined is enabled. The Alarming You can edit this field only if Intrinsic and range include: values, options, 0 - 65,535 (seconds) Units and the Accumulator to all point objects Applies Identifier of the Notification Class Indicates used Notification the BACnet Object Class Object and the Accumulator . You can edit Applies for routing. objects to all point is enabled. Defined Alarming this field only if Intrinsic whether this is an Alarm or an Event. You can edit this field only Indicates Type Notify is enabled. to all point objects and the Defined Alarming Applies if Intrinsic Accumulator . the event to To Off Normal, To Fault, or To Normal. You can edit Enable Event Changes Defined is enabled. this field if Intrinsic Alarming Enables Event in fault and normal Message Texts Config the configuration of messages, to be displayed is Defined event notifications. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Alarming . Maximum 256 Applies to all point objects enabled. and the Accumulator characters. allow for the configuration of three event modes Newer Note: release while older messages (To Off Normal, To Fault, and To Normal), message of one event for the configuration allow (To Off releases Normal). whether you want Low Limit or High Limit Enable You can edit Limit Indicates enabled. Defined is enabled. Applies to AI, AO, AV, Alarming this field if Intrinsic and Accumulator objects. Indicates the high limit for the point. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Limit High Applies is enabled. Defined Alarming to AI, AO, AV, and Accumulator objects. the low limit for the point. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Indicates Low Limit Alarming is enabled. Applies to AI, AO, AV, and Accumulator objects. Defined Defines the value by which the Present Value must change below the High Deadband BACnet the Low Limit the object generates a To-Normal before Limit or above Alarming Defined is enabled. Applies event. You can edit this field if Intrinsic objects. to AI, AO, AV, and Accumulator 252 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

253 Table 95: Parameters Tab Description Field Indicates to the alarm. You can edit this field if Value(s) values that you can assign Alarm identifies Intrinsic the value Alarming States Text attribute set for this attribute. Applies to BI, BV, MI, and MV objects. multiple you can select from a list, unlike values For MI and MV objects, that are limited objects the other to one value. You can edit this field if Intrinsic Alarming States Indicates the fault value. Values Fault Text attribute identifies the value set for this attribute. set for this attribute. The States identifies the value Text attribute values. to MI and from a list of alarm comes The list of numbers Applies MV objects. Event Log Log - Details tab to set up the behavior of the Event Log - Events tab information. Use the Event Log Use the Event tab to view events. - Events you are in Commissioning mode. See Viewing You can only view the Events tab when . Logs Event Log - Details Tab Table 96: Event Description Field Object the name log. Name of the event Indicates of the event log. Description Indicates the description if the event log is enabled (True) or disabled (False). Enabled Indicates the read-only object identifier for the event object. Object Identifier BACnet Indicates BACnet Buffer number of records the event buffer can hold. This value is the total Specifies Size the maximum that appear in the Event View during commissioning. The default value is number of events of records). number 100 (maximum You can only edit the buffer size in Configuration mode. if the Event Log is reliable. Indicates Reliability Log status: In Alarm, Event Overridden, OutOfService. Status Flags Indicates Fault, the time and date to enable logging when the Enabled attribute is set to True. Start Time Specifies Specifies the time and date to disable Stop Time logging. whether ceases ceases when the buffer is full. When set to True, logging Specifies Full When logging Stop set to False, logging continues. in the buffer. When samples and all accumulated remain Indicates the total number of events in the log. You can view this value in the Details panel Count Total Record mode. Commissioning during Intrinsic BACnet Alarming (True) or disables (False) BACnet intrinsic alarming for this object. Intrinsic Enables Defined Alarming Indicates if the Event Log has acknowledgment transitions pending. Acked Transitions Determines whether notifications are enabled for To Off Normal, To Fault, or To Normal events. Event Enable State Indicates state of the event log. Event the current 253 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

254 Table 96: Event Log - Details Tab Field Description number associated recently collected record whose the sequence with the most Indicates Last Notify Record a notification. collection triggered class used for handling and generating event notifications for this Notification Specifies the notification Class object. notification occurs based on the value of the Records Since Notification attribute. Notify when Indicates Threshold if the notifications generated by the object are Events or Alarms. Notify Type Indicates if the notifications generated by the object are Events or Alarms. This attribute is Notify Since Records Indicates reporting. intrinsic if the object required supports Log - Events Tab (Commissioning Only) Table 97: Event Mode Field Description Indicates occurrence. Time the time of the event that event is associated with. Object Indicates the object state: Normal, Off Normal, High Limit, or Fault. To State the type of event Indicates the importance of the event message Indicates when the event message appears. Priority and determines messages priority number are of a higher importance or are more critical than event Event with a lower with a higher priority . messages number Indicates of the last event transition. Event Time the time of occurrence Indicates the value of the event or alarm. For example, On or Off, or 80 degrees. Value Indicates the unit of measurement value. Unit for the event or alarm of the alarm message. Message the body Indicates or event Notification Screen up Device Notification . See Setting Screen Table 98: Notification Description Field of the notification. Object the name Indicates Name Indicates the description of the notification. Description if the notification is enabled (True) or disabled (False). Enabled Indicates the read-only object identifier for the notification. Object Identifier BACnet Indicates To Off Normal, To Fault, and To Normal events, respectively . BACnet - Ack Required Indicates the priority to be used for event notifications for To Off Normal, To Indicates Priority and To Normal events, respectively . A lower number indicates a higher Fault, . priority the list of one or more which notifications are sent. For Indicates devices Recipient List Notification Recipient Screen . information, more see Indicates if you want to send the notification to a supervisory controller . Send Notification to Supervisor Indicates the process controller that receives the event ID ID of the supervisory Supervisory Device Process notification messages. Recipients Screen See Device Information . Editing Features Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller 254

255 Table 99: Recipients Screen Field Description List of recipients. Recipients Add Notification . Use to add a recipient. Recipient See Screen Remove from the list. Removes the recipient up in the list of recipients. the selected Moves recipient down in the list of recipients. recipient Moves the selected Recipient dialog Opens displays details of the recipient. the Notification Details box, which Recipient . Notification See Screen to the information Save changes Saves in the screen. the screen saving changes Cancel Exits without the help system. Opens Recipient Notification Screen Setting up Device . See Notification Screen Recipient Table 100: Notification Field Description you want to send Indicates to. ID the ID of the device ID a notification selected. field when the IP address for the device you want to send Indicates IP Address notification fields selected: to. Following when : The device Address IP Address. • Number : The network number of the device. • Network Port : The UDP port number of the device. UDP • Indicates if you want to broadcast the notification. Displays the Broadcast fields when following selected: Type type: Local, Remote, or Global. Broadcast : The broadcast • Number : For a remote broadcast, • the network Network enter . number • UDP Port : The UDP port number of the device. Indicates if you want to send a notification to another controller . Address MSTP when selected: Following fields address of the controller • Address : The MS/TP . : The network of the device. Number Network • number the process ID of the device Indicates the event ID Process that receives messages. notification Indicates the days you want the system to send notifications. Day Selection Indicates the time frame you want the system to send notifications. Time Selection Indicates to send notification: Off Normal, Fault, Notify on these Transitions the type of events and Normal. Indicates if notifications need to be confirmed by a user. Notification Messages Should Be 255 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

256 Schedule Screens Screen Schedule Details Screen Table 101: Schedule Field Description the name of the schedule. Object - Name Indicates Indicates the description of the schedule. Description is enabled (True) or disabled (False). Enabled if the schedule Indicates ID of the schedule. Object Indicates the read-only Identifier the priority The lower the number , the Indicates of the schedule. for Writing BACnet - Priority higher . the priority that the schedule is in effect. Click the the time frame Operation and Display - Effective Period Indicates button to define this information. browse the output Binary , Analog, and Schedule Output Type Indicates type of the schedules: Multistate. the default text that appears when you create the schedule: Default Command Schedule Indicates Off, or On. Release (Binary , Analog, Multistate), is set to Release, the Note: If the Default Schedule Command over the scheduled items scheduling feature’ s control ends. Schedule only be used should Release for the Default support the Release Command if the scheduled items command. Indicates text options used when you view and create the the state States Text schedule. Indicates schedule display modes: Weekly Schedule, the available Mode Display Items. Schedule, Exception and Exception Define New Events Screen Adding a Weekly Schedule . See New Events Table 102: Define Screen Field Description Use to select of the week for a schedule. Monday - Sunday the days Use to select Monday through Friday for a schedule. Mon-Fri Use to select All of the week. all days Indicates the time of the day you want to schedule. Hour, Minutes the default Value that appears (for example, on or occupied ) for the time Indicates value you select. For example, yellow can indicate On, and blue can indicate Off. frame Saves to the information in the screen. OK changes Exits the screen without saving changes Cancel Opens the Help system. 256 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

257 Exception Detail Screen Adding See Schedule an Exception . Screen Table 103: Exception Detail Description Field Date Use to add a custom date to the calendar . Date Range . Use to add a date range to the calendar to the other elements inclusion list If Week and Day Use to add an e Annotation element ype("Article") ype("Annotation") docType.hasElementT And docType.hasElementT Then "Article" "Annotation", End If End If End If End Function docType.addElementT oInclusions = docType.name ' Application.Alert rootElem If rootElem doaddElements() m rootElem rootElem Then ' add Annotation element ype("Annotation") And Not docType.hasElementT = "Article" "Annotation" , True , False ' check if element is added docType.addElement "Annotation", (it won't If docType.hasElementT Then ' add attribute UserName ype("Annotation") for schemas) "UserName", "", 0, 0 docType.addAttribute "Annotation", Screens Trend Trend Details Screen a Trend . See Adding Screen Details Table 104: Trend Description Field the name of the trend. Object - Name Indicates Indicates the description Description of the trend. if the trend (True) or disabled (False). Enabled Indicates is enabled the read-only ID for the trend. Object Indicates Identifier Indicates the attribute of the object being sampled. BACnet - Input Reference Specifies the maximum number of records the buffer may hold. Buffer Size Specifies the increment to determine that a change of value occurred used Increment COV Client data by COV). this trend object (when collects of seconds between COV COV (when this Specifies the number Increment Resubsc resubscriptions The Subscribe COV requests trend object collects data by COV). specify for the actual The first subscription is twice during this interval subscription. object operation or when enabled. the trend when issued begins Specifies the periodic time in seconds for which the referenced property is Interval Sample is zero, using COV reporting. If this attribute logged. are recorded samples the time and date to enable logging when Start attribute is Time Specifies the Enable values, the conditions to enable wildcard set to True. If the Start Time contains on time are ignored. When the Trend object is inactive because logging based of the Start the current time is outside Time or Stop Time, the Status attribute it is the highest (assuming status). If you define a this state reflects priority Time, the Trend object is disabled. Stop Time that is before the Start 257 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

258 Table 104: Trend Details Screen Description Field the time and date to disable logging. If the Stop Time contains Stop Time Specifies to disable wildcard on time are ignored. logging values, the conditions based if the Stop Time is prior to the Start Time. When is disabled Logging the Trend of the Start Time or Stop is inactive object the current because time is outside it is the highest priority (assuming reflects attribute Time, the Status this state because the Start Time/Stop status). A change in the active/inactive state If the Trend object on the Enable Time value has no impact attribute. was to send attempts the trend disabled because the Stop Time, the Trend object the Start samples to the server . If you define a Stop Time that is before Time, is disabled. the Trend object whether logging ceases when the buffer is full. When set to True, Specifies Full When Stop remain and all accumulated ceases samples logging in the buffer. (False) intrinsic alarming for this object. When Intrinsic Alarming BACnet - Intrinsic Alarming Enables (True) or disables a returns Defined attributes alarming writing disabled, to any of the intrinsic error. When disabled, reading the intrinsic alarming Write_Access_Denied attribute. value the default returns of each attributes whether Event are enabled for To Fault and To Normal Determines Enable notifications transition occurs when the value of the Records Since events. A To-Normal is equal to or greater Threshold than the value Notify attribute of the Notify when COV subscription occurs an attempted attribute. A To Fault transition and set by default. The Read fails. The To Normal transition must be enabled cannot be set to False. that this value ensure methods and write the notification class used for handling and generating event Specifies Class Notification for this object. notifications when a notification occurs based on the value of the Records Since Notify Threshold Indicates attribute. Notification Indicates if the notifications generated by the object are Events or Alarms. Notify Type if the object supports intrinsic reporting. This attribute is required Opens the Help system. Views Trend are three views in the Trend Viewer: Chart View, Table View, and Definition View. There Views (Commissioning Table 105: Trend Only) Mode Description View Button Use to view trend data in a chart format. Chart View Use to view trend data in a table format. Table View Trend Chart View Viewer The Chart view allows you to view data samples in chart format. You can zoom in, zoom out, and pan within the chart. 258 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

259 Table 106: Chart View (Commissioning Only) Mode View Button Description recent the most trends. Update data samples Retrieves for the displayed for the chart zoom behavior mode and between Zoom the mouse Toggles mode. normal in zoom While mode: to zoom • drag the mouse over an area of the chart in out one level to zoom • left-click • click Zoom to exit zoom and restore the mouse to normal mode mode mode, the chart remains at the current zoom When you exit zoom button Use the Restore out. level. to fully zoom Notes: pan while mode. the mouse • You cannot is in zoom by using mode in and out in normal • You can also zoom the Shift key and the mouse. To zoom, hold the Shift key while dragging the chart. To zoom out one level, left-click the mouse across the while the Shift key down. mouse holding to a zoomed the mouse back Use to return out view and switches Restore to normal the chart's zoom mode is active. mode when Data using lines and point markers. This is the default behavior . Points Line Data using Area an area chart. using Bar a bar chart. Data the number Note: of data samples Use the bar chart only when as bars. If too many can reasonably be expected to display the display you click this option, exist when data samples becomes update the screen. unstable and fails to properly , select display option. To recover any other using Data with no lines. Points markers Data using lines with no markers. Line Displays each trend on a separate Y axis. This option is not available Y Axis Stacked a single trend. when viewing each with the same Y axis. This option is not available Displays trend Single Y Axis trend. viewing when a single Trend Viewer Table View The Table view allows you to view data for the selected trends in table format. You can copy the trend data to the Excel. clipboard into other applications such as Microsoft for pasting 259 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

260 Table 107: Trend Viewer Only) Table View (Commissioning Mode Button Description View the data samples with new trend data immediately . Update Updates trend data to the system clipboard for pasting Copy Copies to Clipboard selected You can also Excel. such as Microsoft applications into other data to the clipboard. use Ctrl + C to copy Screen Device Information Screen Mode) Information Table 108: Device (Configuration Description Field Object the name Indicates Name . of the controller a basic of the controller . Description Provides description the BACnet object ID of the controller . Indicates Identifier Object Hardware If necessary screen. , you can change this ID in the Define If you be unique. if you are , then this ID must Also, controller a BACnet are using using be unique. peer-to-peer functionality , then this number must Time the time zone of the device. The default time zone is Central Time Specifies Time Zone Default as appropriate. the time zone Update Zone. only for stand-alone Advanced Application Controllers. This field is important JCI Exception Delete 31 days to prompt the system to delete the exception Select Schedule Auto after the schedule passes. schedule 31 days Delete 7 days the system to delete the exception to prompt Select Auto passes. 7 days after the schedule schedule Status of time a BO is held in the OFF state at the priority set OFF State Auto Release Startup Time Indicates the amount startup. at field controller setting Command OFF State by the Startup Priority only applies to BO objects that have This instance OFF State their Startup Enable set to TRUE. parameter is 0 is 0. A value of 0 disables value The default this parameter . The range to 3600 seconds. Indicates the priority at which a BO is held in the OFF state for the Startup Priority Command OFF State Startup YThis instance OFF State Auto Release Time at field controller startup. only Enable OFF State parameter their Startup that have to BO objects applies set to TRUE. is 1 to 16. value is 9. Priority 6 is not a valid selection. The default The range BACnet Specifies the password used by third-party BACnet configuration tools to Password Communications BACnet reinstall Not used Metasys controllers. device. the BACnet by 260 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

261 Table 108: Device Information (Configuration Mode) Screen Field Description encoding of character strings. The types include: ISO, Indicates the binary Type Encoding BACnet (Japanese Code DBCS and Microsoft X3.4 (US - ASCII), Shift JIS). ANSI that you use ISO for BACnet devices. We recommend for all points on the controller to update Indicates the minimum COV Time Min Send time frame use min cov to their associated supervisory system. Only points with their send The default set to True use this setting. time attribute time is 15 seconds. of the BACnet device the location Third Floor Location Indicates (for example, Equipment Room). a list of BACnet destinations Indicates notified when the device restarts. Recipient Notification Restart being not use this feature. the Advanced By default, Metasys software does on its field bus or local network. all devices Controller Application notifies Supervisor of the supervisory on which address exists. device MAC Address MAC the object Communication for the device. IP Address IP Address mask for the IP address. Subnet IP Mask used of the router IP Router Address IP address for the device. whether DHCP is enabled or not for devices. Displays Enabled DHCP the IP fields above are editable. is disabled, the DHCP When Specifies the UDP port number used to communicate with other BACnet IP Port BACnet This value allows BACnet networks on multiple devices over the IP network. communication between BACnet a single and prevents IP network the multiple networks. name Domain Name Domain for the device. 1 Combined or DIP switches on the device. value of the rotary switches Number Controller hostname of the device. Computer Name Network whether Indicates is set to automatically obtain the DNS address the device Obtain DNS address automatically (True), or not (False). IP addresses servers. DNS server IP addresses for the DNS Table 109: Device Screen (Commissioning Mode) Information Description Field Object Indicates the name of the controller . Name Provides of the controller . Description a basic description the BACnet object ID for the controller . Identifier Indicates , you can change this ID in the Define screen. If you If necessary Hardware a BACnet , then this ID must be unique. Also, if you are are using controller peer-to-peer functionality , then this number must be unique. using Time Time Zone of the device. The default time zone is Central Time the time zone Default Specifies as appropriate. the time zone Update Zone. Advanced Application Controllers. This field is important only for stand-alone 261 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

262 Table 109: Device (Commissioning Information Screen Mode) Description Field The local time is created from the originally the time on the device. Local Time Indicates to a supervisory used to transfer to the device. If the device computer is added the time is then synced by that supervisory device. system, originally from the The local date is created the date on the device. Indicates Date Local If the device is added to a supervisory computer used to transfer to the device. device. system, the date is then synced by that supervisory of minutes offset between local standard time and UTC. UTC Offset Indicates the number are positive and to the west of the zero degree The Time Zones meridian those to the east are negative. Subtract the value of the UTC Offset from the service requests to calculate UTC received in the UTC Time Synchronization time. local standard the correct saving time is in effect (True) or not (False) at the whether DST Status Indicates daylight s location. device’ time of the BACnet device. Last BACnet Time Sync Received Indicates the last synchronized Delete 31 days to prompt the system to delete the exception Auto Select Schedule JCI Exception passes. schedule 31 days after the schedule 7 days Select to delete the exception to prompt Auto the system Delete passes. 7 days schedule after the schedule Status the amount of time a BO is held in the OFF state at the priority set Indicates Time Release Auto OFF State Startup startup. This by the Startup OFF State Command Priority at field controller OFF State Enable instance only applies to BO objects that have their Startup parameter set to TRUE. value of 0 disables is 0. A value is 0 The default this parameter . The range to 3600 seconds. at which a BO is held in the OFF state for the Startup Indicates Startup Priority Command OFF State the priority OFF State Auto Release Time at field controller startup. This instance only OFF State parameter applies to BO objects that have their Startup Enable set to TRUE. The range is 1 to 16. is 9. Priority value The default 6 in not a valid selection. Specifies a running average of CPU usage over the last 50 minutes. The Usage CPU every 30 seconds. value is updated the current of the system. JCI System Status Reflects status the percent of the object database that is currently in use. Each Specifies Usage Memory Object within the object database. memory consumes created object Indicates if the MS/TP controller is online. Supervisory Device Online Communication the general performance of the field bus: Low, Medium, or High. Indicates SA Bus Performance See SA Bus Diagnostics for details. If you have a low performing trunk, do not use trunk utilities for main Note: upgrades due to the risk of transfer failure. and Boot Code 262 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

263 Table 109: Device Screen Information (Commissioning Mode) Description Field of time in milliseconds it takes for the token to be Token SA Bus Average Time Loop Indicates average amount of passed to every device on a field bus, implemented by a rolling average 80% of the old value Token loop times indicate plus 20% of the new value. bus performance. For example: 2,000 Low performance • Greater than ms: performance Medium ms: to 2,000 1,000 • • Less than 1,000 ms: High performance for details. See SA Bus Diagnostics of COV messages the SA bus trunk received from other Rcv Per Minute SA Bus COV number Indicates message one object COV reporting a devices per minute. Each represents per trunk based on the COV Receive This value change. value is derived Receive rates indicate bus performance. For example: (Rcv) rate value. COV 600 messages/min: Low performance • Greater than 300 to 600 messages/min: Medium • performance Less High performance than • 300 messages/min: SA Bus Diagnostics See for details. number of writes sent on the SA bus. This parameter is Indicates average Per Minute SA Bus Writes to SA bus devices. sending writes to the field controller relative BACnet number APDU the device can retransmit a data Indicates the maximum Retries of times not perform retries, it has a value of 0. If this value frame. If the device does appears is greater attribute. than 0, a non-zero value in the APDU Timeout changing value from the default value recommend not We do this attribute without a strong reason. the amount of time in milliseconds between retransmissions of a Indicates Timeout Segment APDU acknowledgment for which no acknowledgment data frame segment requiring is not 0 if the device supports segmentation has been received. This value data frames. recommend of transmitted this attribute We do not changing a strong without value from the default value reason. the amount between retransmissions of a Indicates Timeout APDU of time in milliseconds acknowledgment for which no acknowledgment complete data frame requiring applies This attribute data messages where has been received. to smaller a single on the MS/TP bus. We do not fits within frame the entire message value recommend value without a changing this attribute from the default reason. strong Identifies the version of the application software installed in the device. The SW Version Appl is locally defined stamp, a programmer ’s (date-and-time content of this string , and so on). number name, a host file version assets BACnet numbers. Asset Versions Indicates and version the number of seconds that the device being backed up or restored Fail Timeout Indicates Backup ending before or restore procedure. This attribute waits unilaterally the backup performing or the operator , configures The device is writable. the backup, this with an appropriate timeout. Specifies the password used by third-party BACnet configuration tools to Password Communications BACnet Not used controllers. device. the BACnet reinstall Metasys by the binary encoding BACnet strings. The types include: ISO, Indicates Type Encoding of character DBCS Code (Japanese Shift JIS). ANSI X3.4 (US - ASCII), and Microsoft devices. use ISO for BACnet As a best practice, 263 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

264 Table 109: Device Information (Commissioning Mode) Screen Field Description the device that determine what device image can Identifies the files within Files Configuration of this attribute to be valid be backed up. The contents are only required supports the BACnet procedure. If the device backup the backup and during is supported. this attribute procedure, restore for all points on the controller to update Indicates COV Time time frame Min Send the minimum use min cov to their associated supervisory system. Only points with their set to True use this setting. The default time attribute send time is 15 seconds. revision for the device’ s database. Database a logical number Specifies Revision Database is created Revision an object name is incremented when an object or deleted, is performed. or a restore changes, a number assigned by the vendor to represent the level of firmware Version Contains Firmware installed in the device. the reasons for the last device Last Restart Reason Indicates restart. Time the device’ was last restored. If the device supports Specifies s image Last Restore when procedures, this attribute and restore backup the BACnet is supported. of the BACnet device the location Third Floor Location Indicates (for example, Equipment Room). the maximum number of octets contained in a single, Specifies Length Max APDU indivisible protocol data link technology constrains unit. Underlying application layer of this attribute. the value the maximum number of information frames the node may send Specifies Max Info Frames the token. This attribute is present before is a node it passes if the device network. If Max Info Frames is not writable or otherwise user on an MS/TP configurable, its value is one. Specifies the highest possible address for master nodes and is less than or Max Master to 127. This attribute is present node on an if the device is a master equal is not writable services, its value If Max Master network. with BACnet MS/TP is 127. number of segments of an APDU accepted by the Indicates Max Segments Accpt the maximum device. a name assigned by the vendor to represent the model of the device. Model Name Contains a name assigned by the vendor to represent the product code of Contains Pcode the device. Indicates for the devices. Object List the objects the minor revision level of the BACnet standard. This starts at 1 Revision Protocol Indicates release. subsequent Version attribute and increases for each If the Protocol reverts This attribute is required for all devices this number changes, to zero. Version 1, Protocol Revision 1 and above. If this with BACnet Protocol the device is Protocol 1, Protocol Revision Version is not present, attribute 0. Indicates standardized protocol services the device’ s protocol which Ser Support Protocol reflects implementation set of services, supports. This attribute the minimum supports additional standardized services. often but implementation Represents the BACnet protocol the device supports. Initial releases are Version Protocol releases by one. 1; subsequent Version the number increase a list of BACnet destinations Restart notified when the device restarts. Indicates Recipients Notification being not use this feature. By default, the Advanced Metasys software does all devices notifies Controller Application on its field bus or local network. Features Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller 264

265 Table 109: Device Information (Commissioning Mode) Screen Field Description of the supervisory on which the object exists. Supervisor MAC Address address device MAC physical and logical Reflects of the device. System Status the current state the time at which the device was restarted. Time of Device Restart Indicates proprietary extensions to the protocol using a unique vendor ID Vendor Distinguishes by ASHRAE. Vendor Controls assigned ID The Johnson code identification is 5. Identifies Vendor Name the manufacturer of the device. devices. only for compatible 1 Appears Management (BBMD) Object Screen Broadcast on how to view, edit, and add a Broadcast Management object, see Working For information with a Broadcast Management Object . (BBMD) Management (BBMD) Screen Table 110: Broadcast Object Field Description Object the name of the Broadcast Management object. Name Indicates Provides a basic description of the Broadcast Management object. Description Indicates ID for the Broadcast Management object. Object Identifier the BACnet object True or False to disable or enable BBMD functionality . This selection Enabled Select Transfer screen. in the See Transfer to Device can be configured Summary . (Download) Note: as a BBMD on a given subnet. If you do not Enable only one device a BBMD, do not enable BBMD in your how to configure know or device. For further information, refer to the Metasys application for BACnet/IP Guide Technical IP Networks Configuration Controllers Bulletin (LIT-12012468) . Network to configure the endpoints that communicate with the BBMD. Use this attribute List BM Address a Broadcast Management (BBMD) Object To view or edit this list see Viewing a Broadcast (BBMD) Object . Editing and Management Indicates the broadcast status. Broadcast Disabled 265 Controller Tool Help: Configuring Advanced Controller Features

266 Configuring the Display content displayed Local Controller Display or the Mobile Access Portal (MAP) The tool configures for the DIS1710 the display after you select in the Hardware Definition Wizard ( Defining the hardware Gateway . You can configure ). Hardware the Display Concepts Configuring Display Configuration information Gateway in the MAP what UI or on the DIS1710 controller display . You can customize displays , the Display widget allows you to: For MAP Gateway which and points appear on the home page • define folders the order and groupings of folders and points on the home page • define user names • edit point using the Mass Edit feature and descriptions you configure the display the application to the controller , and then click Rediscover Devices in the After , transfer List page. The MAP Gateway is alerted and reads the new display information. MAP Device the Display widget allows you to: For DIS1710, which folders and points appear on the display panel (Idle, Inputs and Outputs, Parameters, and one User • define pages ) Defined that you see in the display and points the order of display • define folders and groupings panel • auto populate folders for DIS1710 configuration • define which points are read-only (cannot be commanded using the display) • edit point user names using the Mass Edit feature and descriptions attributes including and backlight intensity • set display contrast settings timeout • select authorization including password definition • select you configure the display , transfer the application to the controller . The changes then become After effective. Configuring Steps the Display Up DIS1710 Setting the tool and open the controller application. 1. Start the Display 2. Select widget. 3. Click Edit . 4. Locate the Display Pages panel. 5. In the DIS1710 area, click Auto Populate ( ). Pre-configured DIS1710 display data appears in the Display Pages Tree. Notes: DIS1710 over the tool tip ( ) to see more information about you can hover display • In the DIS1710 area, standards. configuration • Auto Populate for MAP. In this case, you can rename any folder and add any amount of may also be used User Defined Pages to the display . 6. Copy points from the Display Pages tree, and then paste to the Idle page to manage the Idle Page points. Points may also be moved folders by dragging and dropping them. between Note: See Defining Display Page and Idle Page Order to manage the order of Idle Page points in the Display . 266 Controller Tool Help: Configuring the Display

267 7. Select points display . See Selecting Points for Read-Only Display . for read-only Apply . The display is saved. This change becomes effective after you transfer the application 8. Click configuration Transferring the Application Device . to the controller . See of the Display Page Creating a New Display 1. Start the controller the tool and open application. widget. Display 2. Select the . 3. Click Edit Pages panel. 4. Locate the Display click Page ( ). The Create Page dialog box appears. area, Create 5. In the Customize 6. Enter name. The new page appears as the last folder in the Display Pages tree. a customized page The DIS1710 Setup allows one customized page. Additional Note: pages are not recognized by customized the device accurately in the controller display . and do not appear Apply . The display is saved. This change becomes effective after you transfer the application 7. Click configuration Transferring the Application of the Display Device . to the controller . See to Appear on Display Pages or Idle Page Selecting Points the tool and open the controller 1. Start application. 2. Select Display widget. the Edit 3. Click . any point from the System Tree and drag it to the desired location on the Display Pages tree. 4. Select Select multiple points by holding down Ctrl while selecting items. Note: 5. Drop the selected points in the Display Pages Tree. Note: You can drop points or on a folder member . The new items appear at the end of the existing on a folder items or after the target member . folder folder . The display configuration Apply This change becomes effective after you transfer the application 6. Click is saved. . See Transferring the Application of the Display Device . to the controller User Names and Descriptions of Points Specifying you modify for the Display , the changes also apply to and appear in the Tool. When user names the tool and open the controller 1. Start application. 2. Select the Display widget. 3. Click Mass Edit in the System Tree Panel. 4. Find the points to edit by selecting a value from Settings, entering text into the Filter field, or scrolling down the list of points. 5. Edit the User and Description of any points. Name When edited. cell, the cell turns green to indicate that it has been Note: you click off of the edited OK 6. Click box appears to confirm that you want to save the edited values . . A dialog 7. Click Yes . The display configuration is saved. This change becomes effective after you transfer the application to the controller Transferring the Application of the Display Device . . See Note: The changes you made to the User Name appear in the user interface after you click Yes. The changes to the device appear Controller Display after you transfer the application in the Local . 267 Controller Tool Help: Configuring the Display

268 Renaming Folders in the Display the tool and open the controller 1. Start application. Display 2. Select panel. The Display widget appears. widget the in the Features . 3. Click Edit , you may select tree, and then select Rename . Alternatively any folder a folder , in the Display 4. Right-click Pages F2. and then press dialog box appears. The Page Name Name 5. Type a name box. in the Page dialog . The new folder shows in the Display Pages Tree. OK name 6. Click the first three Note: Pages folder names are standard and cannot be changed for the For DIS1710, Display . If you rename the Idle, Inputs/Outputs, or Parameters pages, the name change display not display . does 7. Click . The display configuration is saved. This change becomes effective after you transfer the application Apply . See Transferring of the Display Device . the Application to the controller for Read-Only Display Points Selecting check boxes indicate that the point is read-only . Read-only items can be viewed but not commanded on Selected . The read-only can only be edited the display from the Display Pages tree. option the tool and open application. 1. Start the controller the Display widget. 2. Select Edit . 3. Click Pages tree, select 4. In the Display box next to any point you desire to be read-only . the check 5. Click Apply . The display configuration is saved. This change becomes effective after you transfer the application to the controller . See the Application of the Display Device . Transferring with Points on the Display Tree Working Pages on the members and rearranged on the Display Pages and folder points may be moved Folders Tree. Manage Pages tree through the following functions: Display and drop: Drag and drop multiple by using • Drag Ctrl or Shift. points folders members by dragging and dropping points within the tree. • Arrange and folder Delete: • Select a point the Delete key. and press the point and select Delete . • Right-click Cut: Select a point and press Ctrl+X . Alternatively , right click a point and select Cut . Copy: Select and press Ctrl+C . Alternatively , right click a point and select Copy . a point Paste Select Paste: Ctrl+V . Alternatively , right click a point and select a point . and press Defining Display Page and Idle Page Order 1. Start the tool and open the controller application. 2. Select the widget. Display Edit . 3. Click any folder or point from the Display Pages tree. 4. Select Note: Select multiple folders or points by holding down Ctrl while selecting items. 268 Controller Tool Help: Configuring the Display

269 5. Drag your items location in the Display Pages tree, and then drop the selected items. to the desired You can drop points on a folder member . The new items appear at the end of the existing Note: or on a folder or after the target folder . folder items member order, click is saved. . The display configuration with the display This change becomes Apply 6. When satisfied to the controller . the application after you transfer effective the location of the first three Display Note: folders are standard and should not be moved For DIS1710, Pages the Idle, Inputs/Outputs, pages, the folder order in the display in the tree. If you move or Parameters the original to reflect populated order. continues automatically Specifying DIS1710 Display Settings the tool and open the controller application. 1. Start the 2. Select widget. Display Edit . 3. Click Setup 4. Locate the DIS1710 panel. click the drop-down box to select a Contrast level value. 5. In the Display area, click the drop-down box to select a Backlight Intensity setting value. 6. In the Display area, Apply . The display configuration is saved. This change becomes 7. Click after you transfer the application effective to the controller Transferring the Application of the Display Device . . See DIS1710 Timeout Settings Specifying Display the tool and open the controller application. 1. Start the Display widget. 2. Select 3. Click Edit . 4. Locate the DIS1710 Setup panel. 5. In the Timeout Settings click the drop-down box to select an Idle Page Timeout value. area, Settings area, box to select a Backlight Timeout value. 6. In the Timeout click the drop-down . The display Apply is saved. This change becomes effective after you transfer the application 7. Click configuration . See Transferring the Application of the Display Device . to the controller DIS1710 Authorization Defining Display the tool and open application. 1. Start the controller the Display widget in the Features panel. The Display widget appears. 2. Select 3. Click Edit . the DIS1710 Setup panel. 4. Locate area, configure access to the display as follows: 5. In the Authorization • Select Disabled to disable password access to the display . The Password fields are disabled. • Select Local password access. Enter a password in the Password field, and then enter it again in to enable the Re-enter Password field. Valid characters are uppercase letters Note: Z and numbers 0 to 9. The password can range A through from 1 to 32 characters in length. 6. Click Apply . The display configuration is saved. This change becomes effective after you transfer the application to the controller Transferring the Application of the Display Device . . See Importing and Exporting Display Configuration Files 1. Start the tool and open the controller application. 269 Controller Tool Help: Configuring the Display

270 2. Select the widget. Display Edit . 3. Click Pages the Display panel. 4. Locate button ) in the Import/Export area. 5. Select ( the Export a location for your file. a. Create a name and select is saved for future use. . Your configuration Save b. Select Import button ( 6. Select area.. the ) in the Import/Export to your file location a file. a. Browse and select . The Display tree updates based on the configuration in the file. Open Pages b. Select Note: if the selected file is invalid or contains points that are not present in the You will see an error message application. current Transferring to the Controller the Application of the Display Transferring Device the Display you must transfer the application to the controller with the display for the you configure widget, After effective. changes Wizard to perform the transfer . See the Transfer Operations section to become Use the Transfer for details. the Main Code of the Display Transferring Device When Local Controller Display code becomes available, you can use the Transfer Wizard to perform a main updated for details. code . See the Transfer Operations section to the device transfer Configuring the Display Screens Display Widget The Display tab is split into three panels: System Tree Panel , Display Pages Panel , and DIS1710 Setup Panel . The System Tree panel you to view all system points. The Display Pages panel allows you to configure the defined allows Pages Inputs/Outputs Page, and User Defined Parameters you wish to show in the display . The Idle Page, Page, Setup panel allows you to configure the display , timeout, and authorization settings for the DIS1710. DIS1710 Tree Panel System Tree panel you to view, in a tree format, the parameters exposed for BACnet systems. The System allows you are not in Edit mode, When Tree panel functions like the BACnet Exposed widget; you can view the System system folders and points, and use Mass Edit without leaving the Display Widget. The names of the points, objects, and the structure of the tree update are made to the application. if changes you are in Edit mode, When Tree functionality is limited, and you may not Mass Edit System Tree points. the System In Edit mode, the controller display may be configured by moving the System Tree folders and points to the Display Pages panel. Table 111: System Tree Panel Description Field Applies the changes and exits the Edit mode. Apply Exits Edit mode without applying the changes. Cancel 270 Controller Tool Help: Configuring the Display

271 Table 111: System Tree Panel Description Field all points. All: Show Settings Displays that are BACnet the points Displays Exposed. Show Bacoids: of the points that appear in the tree. Show Description: Displays descriptions on the tree to match the entered text. Filter and points all folders Filters Count: Number of BACnet Exposed BACnet Exposed Tools points. Box: show all points, show only BACnet Exposed points, Mass Edit Dialog Use to filter on a name, (control and miscellaneous sensors, points points), show duplicate show points, only hardware Mass Edit Dialog Box . See points, and edit values. the level of details that appear within the tree (1 to 5). Expansion Level Indicates Pages Display Panel Defined panel the Idle, Inputs and Outputs, Parameters, and User you to configure pages allows The Display Pages . that you see in the display Panel Table 112: Display Pages Description Field and exits the Edit mode. Apply Applies the changes Edit mode applying the changes. Cancel Exits without Populate: Automatically fills in the display configuration for compatibility with the DIS1710. DIS1710 Auto Auto Populate for the MAP Gateway . In this case, you can rename any Note: may also be used of User pages and add any amount to the display . folder Defined Displays expectations for DIS1710 compatibility , including: Tool Tip: folder Idle Page: Defines the points that are shown while the device is in Idle mode. The display is in • when Idle mode . The Idle Page cycles through the selected no one is logged in to the display the points are arranged. idle points by dragging and dropping points items Re-order in the order is only enabled for items in the Idle Page. option within the tree. The Idle mode Page: Shows which inputs (sensors) and outputs (control points) are defined • Inputs/Outputs in the display . • Shows the BACnet exposed elements for all modules within the application. Parameters Page: inputs defined any network in the display . This list also includes or outputs Defined User This page is optional for DIS1710 setup. You can manually add one User • Page: Page through the Create Page command. Additional folders are not recognized by the Defined After adding a User you may add any folders or points from the System Defined DIS1710. Page, folders and points as desired. and group Tree in the folder or arrange a new folder at the bottom of the tree. Create Page Creates you can customize the configuration completely by adding new folders setup, For any non-DIS1710 Tree points to the Display Configuration tree. and copying System Import: an XML or CAF file from any folder . Imports Import/Export Export: Exports an XML file to any folder . You must click Apply to save your configuration before exporting a file. Note: 271 Controller Tool Help: Configuring the Display

272 DIS1710 Setup Panel Panel Setup Table 113: DIS1710 Field Description the changes Apply and exits the Edit mode. Applies Exits the changes. Cancel the Edit mode without applying percentage and backlight intensity value for the display using drop-down menus: Defines the contrast Settings Display 50%, • or 90% Contrast: 10%, 25%, 75%, or Bright Off, Dim, Medium, Intensity: Backlight • Display Refer . to Specifying DIS1710 Settings timeout and backlight timeout values used by the display using drop-down menus: Sets the idle page Settings Timeout Timeout: 1 minute, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour • Idle Page 5 minutes, 1 minute, • 5 minutes, Backlight Timeout: 1 hour, or 8 hours Display DIS1710 Settings . Specifying to Refer Timeout or disables Authorization access to the display . The choices are Disabled or Local. Enables password Disabled , the password fields in this window are disabled, and a password is not If you select to use the Local Controller Display . required Local , the password are enabled, and the specified password is required to access If you select fields Display characters (*) are shown to hide a password as it is entered. Controller the Local . Asterisk are uppercase letters A to Z and numbers 0 to 9. Lowercase letters convert Acceptable characters when typed. The maximum password length is 40 characters. to uppercase characters Refer Defining Display Authorization . to DIS1710 Page Name Dialog Boxes Table 114: Page Name Dialog Boxes Description Field Page Dialog Box: Use to specify the New Page name Name Create Page folder to the Display Pages tree. a customized when adding Dialog Box: Use to rename any folder in the Rename Page tree. Display Pages Closes the dialog box and saves your changes. OK Closes the dialog box without saving your changes. Cancel Opens the help system. 272 Controller Tool Help: Configuring the Display

273 Simulating a System mode allows When you enter Simulation mode, the Simulation dialog box that Simulation you to test your logic. you to set startup values session. Simulation mode allows you to see your system appears allows for the simulation mode. it were as though in Commissioning Simulating a System Concepts Simulation Overview your system, you are in the Test Mode. You can set the simulation speed (1–10) and the default When you simulate Inputs, for Miscellaneous Inputs, and Inputs. Simulation speed allows processes like time delays values Network delay (BO) Times on Actuators to run 10 times as fast. For example, a 60-second Outputs timer on Binary or Stroke if the simulation time is set to 5. runs in 12 seconds values to modify the defaulted starting points for all the Miscellaneous Use the startup Network Inputs, and Inputs, Inputs. values display the values that the Miscellaneous Inputs, Network Inputs, and Inputs use in the The startup the because hardware. Once simulation is running, you can command to physical system they are not connected to see how the system behaves. values Notes: hardware before attempting to simulate your system. If you do not define the hardware, the system uses • Define controller may not be accurate. ’s capacity the smallest , and the controller simulation when you transition into Edit mode or open a Command dialog box. Simulation • System is paused resumes when immediately . you exit the window When a simulation, changing values running in color. Colored highlighting is determined by the are highlighted frequency the value is changing. As poll cycles return consistent values, the highlight fades away. This feature brings attention to changes the application's data system to expose potential relationships between values and throughout and assist This feature can be toggled on or off through the Simulation Control Bar. modules in troubleshooting. Notes: the third stage (red) has been reached, all subsequent consecutive changes continue to display red. For • After information . color, see Table 9 more on status change bar. highlighting feature can be turned on or off from the Simulation mode's control • The parameter color Bar Control simulation, a control bar appears at the bottom During for easy control and break condition access. of the window The Simulation Control Bar spans the full horizontal length of your window by default but can be minimized to a single icon display the Minimize ( ) icon. To expand the Simulation Control Bar, click the Maximize ( ) by clicking icon. Figure Mode - Control Bar 47: Simulation to the features listed below , the Simulation Control In addition the simulation speed multiplier and the Bar displays simulation's time elapsed. In the Simulation Control Bar, do one of the following: • Click the Pause ( ) icon to manually pause the simulation. • ) to resume the simulation after it has paused . A simulation pauses if you manually pause Click Go or Play ( the simulation (clicking Icon) or if a break condition occurs. sequence • Click Single Step button to command the control the to execute one time. 273 Controller Tool Help: Simulating a System

274 • Click the 1 Second button to command the control sequence to advance 1 second. Advance or disable the Highlight color-highlighting feature for parameter changes by clicking the On or • Enable Changes Off button. dialog when you transition into Edit mode or open a Command simulation box, so the Note: is paused System Bar time is also paused. Control Simulation Debugging in simulation allows you to validate your logic. Debugging functionality session, you start a simulation Control Bar appears. The Control Bar is a convenient way to When the Simulation Conditions and view details conditions. Click View Break break in the control bar to define break to control about update break conditions, and delete conditions, conditions. break Break Conditions conditions are conditions the simulation to automatically pause (break) if the system Break that you set up to prompt the simulation condition. up break conditions allows you to pause the break session based on your reaches Setting break conditions and view the status of your logic when the break condition is reached. preset up break By setting conditions, problems as they occur and troubleshoot programs as you write them. For you can look at possible you can set up a discharge the simulation to pause example, if the temperature exceeds 80 degrees. air temperature You can then view the point or issue commands. state Simulating a System Steps Starting Simulation 1. Click Simulate . The Simulation dialog box appears. 2. In the Startup Value section, the simulation parameters or attributes. select x Realtime section, the speed of the simulation. You can select between 1 (real time) and 3. In the Speed select real time). 10 (ten times 4. Click . OK simulating a VAV box, verify When is set to zero. Once Autocalibration is complete, the SA-VP Note: SA-VP to simulate airflow . can be increased the Simulation and Commissioning Refresh Rates Adjusting lockups in the UI, you may wish to increase the simulation or commissioning refresh If you experience or delays Increasing the refresh rate allows more time between data requests rates. from any mode. and can be adjusted 1. Go to > Adjust Refresh Rate Settings Refresh Rate dialog box appears. . The Adjust 2. Use the sliders in the Adjust Refresh Rate dialog box to adjust the simulation and commissioning refresh rates to any length of time from 1 to 60 seconds. The saved OK or Cancel to discard your changes. your changes refresh rate persists in future 3. Click to save sessions. and Modifying Viewing Parameters parameters or attributes You can view and modify mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning in the Configuration mode. See Viewing and Modifying Parameters in the Configuring a System section for more information. box. Simulation Note: simulation is paused when you transition into Edit mode or open a Command dialog System immediately resumes when you exit the window . 274 Controller Tool Help: Simulating a System

275 Viewing the State Table a commissioning or simulation the state table displays the active State Generation Module and During session, a simulation state column of the Output Controllers. While associated session is running, the active shows in each to the State Generators can be overridden, and the results of the overrides to the Output Controllers Network Inputs table view. can be seen in the state view, click the State tab. If you are using a Perspective, add or view the State the Classic Tables If you are using Tables widget. Viewing Connections mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. In Simulation in the Configuration You can view connections the values are shown in real time rather than defaults. See Viewing and Modifying Connections in the mode, a System Configuring for more information. section and Modifying Details Viewing in the Configuration Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See You can view and modify mode, Details Viewing in the Configuring a System section for more information. and Modifying Details System simulation is paused when you transition into Edit mode or open a Command dialog Note: box. Simulation immediately when you exit the window . resumes and Hiding Showing Involvement and hide involvement in the Simulation mode, Commissioning mode, and Configuration mode. See You can show section and Hiding in the Commissioning a System Involvement for more information. Showing Commanding Items Note: For steps on commanding Network Inputs or Network Outputs, see Commanding Network Inputs and Network Outputs . System simulation when you transition into Edit mode or open a Command dialog box. Simulation Note: is paused when . resumes you exit the window immediately and modified and select Commands . The right-click 1. Right-click appears. an item that can be viewed menu the Attribute from the Attribute drop-down menu. 2. Select 3. Click button next to Attribute Command to open the parameter or attribute’ s specific command dialog the browse box. 4. Do one of the following: Select , enter a test value for the command, and click OK . a. Test Restore to restore the value to the default and click OK . b. Select c. Click Cancel to cancel the command. The Command details in the Details area of the dialog box. appear box without Send the command and close the dialog box. Or, click 5. Click to close the dialog to issue Cancel issuing a command. Commanding Network Inputs and Network Outputs Note: System simulation is paused when you transition into Edit mode or open a Command dialog box. Simulation immediately when you exit the window . resumes 1. Right-click a Network Input or Network Output and select Commands . the value 2. Enter or select Restore to restore the Test value to the default. 275 Controller Tool Help: Simulating a System

276 3. Click OK details dialog box appears with the Test value in the Details area. . The Commands Enable or . 4. Select Disable to send 5. Click the dialog box, or click Cancel to close the dialog box without sending the command Send and close the command. Logic Viewing If you are viewing a perspective, view, click the Logic To view logic in the Classic tab from the user interface. add View widget. or view the Logic View widget is already in the perspective, Note: a module containing logic that If the Logic you can also right-click and modified. menu appears. Select View Logic. The Logic View appears and can be viewed The right-click for that module. displays the logic diagram You can pan and zoom in the logic view in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. Panning and Zooming in the Configuring a System section See information. for more You can print in these as well. See Printing the Logic Diagram in the Configuring a System section for more modes information. Viewing and Modifying Details in the Configuration mode, details mode, and Commissioning mode. See You can view and modify Simulation and Modifying Parameters in the Configuring a System section for more information. Viewing System when is paused Note: you transition into Edit mode or open a Command dialog box. Simulation simulation resumes . you exit the window immediately when Break Simulation Conditions Conditions dialog box to troubleshoot Use the Break validate your logic, and set up break conditions. your system, Once you have defined a break condition, you can view this dialog box by clicking the Settings menu and selecting Simulation Break or by clicking on the View Break Conditions button in the simulation control bar. Conditions with Break Conditions Working are conditions the simulation to automatically pause (break) if the system Break that you set up to prompt conditions condition that you specify . reaches the break a Break Condition Adding control bar, click Add Break Condition . The Break Condition 1. In the Simulation dialog box appears. Detail 2. To enable condition, select the Enable check box. To disable the break condition, clear the Enable the break to pause box. If you do not disable condition, the system continues a break (break) when the condition is check reached and prevents the application from executing. Note: When condition is reached during a simulation, the user has the option to click Disable in the a break box that appears. check Disable, then the Enable dialog box is cleared. If the user clicks condition do the following: 3. To add a break point, the ellipsis a. Click The Select Reference screen appears. (...) to browse. b. In the Filter box, type part or all of the object name to filter the results. c. Select the object that you want. and attribute OK d. Click . the Criteria and Value for your Variable e. Enter and click Add Break Condition . object Note: The default setting shows only BACnet exposed points . To show all points, click Show All . 276 Controller Tool Help: Simulating a System

277 4. Fill in the remaining fields the break condition. The fields may vary (for example, numeric or enumeration) to define on the object you select. depending Condition Add Break . 5. Click Removing a Break Condition to remove ) icon next to the break In the Break you want Condition . The dialog box, click the Trash ( condition is removed. condition break Viewing Condition Details and Modifying Break a break select the break condition text condition, to a hyperlink) in the Break Condition dialog 1. To modify (similar box. the break condition, select the Enable 2. To enable box. To disable the break condition, clear the Enable check check box. the break condition or attribute, do the following: 3. To change object The Select ellipsis and select the condition Variable. (...) to browse Reference screen appears. a. Click the break box, type part or all of the object b. In the Filter to filter the results. name c. Select that you want. the object OK d. Click . the Criteria and Value for your Variable object e. Enter Update Break Condition . and click Notes: • The default setting shows only BACnet exposed points . To show all points, click Show All . • Break conditions and modified by clicking the View Break Conditions button from the can also be viewed Control Bar while mode. Simulation in Simulation Simulation Stopping 1. Click . The Simulation Exit - Confirmation dialog box appears. Configure Yes to confirm that you want to stop simulation. 2. Click changes during the Simulation session, a second Confirm dialog box appears. 3. If you made session Yes the changes you made during the simulation 4. Click or No to discard the changes. if you want to apply Note: At any time, you can close the tool from any mode. If you close from Simulation mode, the tool guides you through these before closing. prompts a System Simulating Screens describes screens specific This section mode. For information on screens that appear in both the to the Simulation Simulation mode and the Configuration mode, see the Configuring a System section for more information. Simulation Screen See the Starting Simulation section. Table 115: Simulation Parameters Description Field Startup values for the inputs of the application. Startup Value Name of the item. Item Item’s starting value. Value 277 Controller Tool Help: Simulating a System

278 Table 115: Simulation Parameters Description Field units. Item’s starting Units The speed times is 1–10 of the simulation. real range Speed x Realtime the speed Use to indicate time. of entering Simulation mode. Starting Simulation Engine Indicates Bar the progress Status simulation the dialog box. OK Starts and closes without Cancel the changes. the screen Closes applying the Help system. Opens Refresh Rate Dialog Box Adjust Adjusting the Simulation and Commissioning Refresh Rates section. See the Refresh Rate Box Table 116: Adjust Dialog Field Description Refresh Use to adjust of time from 1 to 60 seconds. Simulation the simulation Rate Slider Bar refresh rate to any length the commissioning refresh rate to any length of time from 1 to 60 Refresh Commissioning Use to adjust Rate Slider Bar seconds. Use to adjust duration rate for changing parameter values displayed Duration Slider Bar the highlight Highlight refresh rates range duration modes. and Commissioning in the Simulation Highlight to 10 logic cycles in length. from 1 logic cycle can be turned on or off from the Simulation Note: The highlighting change feature bars. control and Commissioning mode's mode's the dialog OK and closes box. Saves Closes applying the changes. Cancel the dialog box without the Help system. Opens Command Dialog Box Outputs Commanding and Commanding Network Inputs See the Items sections. and Network Table 117: Command Dialog Box Description Field Use to enter a value to send a test or restore the value. Attribute Command Use to choose the attribute from the drop-down list box. Attribute to command the value Details for the test command. Shows entered for the command. Use to test a value Test Use to enter the value for the test. Value Restores the value to the default. Restore Opens screen with more command choices based on your selections. OK a second Closes the screen without applying the changes. Cancel Opens the Help system. 278 Controller Tool Help: Simulating a System

279 Break Conditions Dialog Box Detail Working See the with Break Conditions section. Dialog Details Box Condition Table 118: Break Description Field object or attribute. Variable the break Indicates condition the Value is measured. Criteria The standard by which condition value. Value threshold the break Indicates condition is enabled. Indicates Enabled if the break a break condition appears during a simulation, the user has the option Note: When to click Disable box that appears. Disable, then the Enable check box is cleared. in the dialog If the user clicks and closes Condition Details window . Add Break Condition Saves the Break the updated break condition and closes the Break Condition Saves window . Update Break Details Condition Closes the window without applying the changes. Cancel Opens the Help system. Note: The Active icon ( ) is only visible in the Break Condition Detail dialog box when the break condition has been reached simulation. through system Dialog Condition Box Break Break Conditions section. See the Simulation Dialog Box Debugging Table 119: Simulation Description Field the Help system. Opens condition the Break Conditions dialog box. Add and opens Use to add a break Conditions Table Break existing break conditions. Rule Displays Active icon ( ) is only visible when the break condition has been reached through system The Active simulation. Displays conditions that are applied to the current simulation testing. Enabled break the Trash icon deletes the break condition. Clicking Exit - Confirmation Dialog Simulation Box See the Stopping Simulation section. The Simulation Exit - Confirmation dialog box appears when attempting to exit the Simulation mode. A second if any were Confirm box appears prompting you to save your changes, dialog made. 279 Controller Tool Help: Simulating a System

280 Defining Hardware hardware by using Hardware dialog box. You can complete the following tasks: You can define the Define map points, • define settings for the system. and define the hardware, network that are installed packages in the tool. the device • review • define system type. the default devices for each modify , and view application point mapping • create, N2 Slave object in a controller . remove, for a Serial Hardware Defining Concepts Tabs Definition Hardware dialog box includes six tabs that can be viewed The Define in any order. Hardware and edited Selection Controller selection tab is where you select The controller for your defined application. field and SA bus devices Note: message appears after selecting a field device, see Troubleshooting . If a warning Assignment Point tab is where you assign the applications' input and output points assignment hardware locations The point to specific on the field and SA bus devices. Network Settings Settings tab is where you create hardware device addresses The Network for the field and SA bus devices. Packages After contain for each hardware device, which can be assigned to applications Packages the firmware you create. installing or upgrading the tool, the tool adds all available packages that are included with the media and then manages the package files during your initial session in the tool. The tool automates the installation and upgrade process for package the need for manual management. files to eliminate tab is available when launches and is used to deliver updated or new package files The Packages the application hardware function. capability allows you to update the available the import family without the through This import to re-release the entire tool. need Controllers Default packages been established in your tool environment, use the Default Controller tab to select which Once have are applied controllers to a system type. Like the Packages tab, this function is available when the by default application is first launched. If no packages are added to your tool environment, an Artificial I/O Device or Artificial Field Device default package is automatically assigned Type so that you can still create and simulate an application. to a System N2 Mapping The N2 Mapping to create, remove, modify , and view application point mapping for an N2 compatible tab is used . See the N2 Compatibility Options chapter for more information. controller Hardware Considerations When you define your hardware, keep the following points in mind about the following SAB devices: and Network Network (Network Duct Sensors, Network Zone Sensors, Sensors CO Sensors) 2 280 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

281 During the System process, the Temperature Sensor functions can be defaulted to use Network Sensors Selection on naming and signal settings. The points do not count towards the Hardware Slot Summary based preference Sensor shows in the Network Settings tab of the Hardware Definition calculation. The Network up as an SA Bus device you can set the address). sensor begins with address 199 and increments up as box (where dialog The wireless (for example 199, 200, 201, and so on). Each address listed for a NetSensor device you add new wireless sensors the DIP Switch match for the installed sensor . Refer to the device documentation for further details. must setting Sensors Wireless SA Bus devices Network Zone Sensor Wireless in the tool. A Wireless Sensor uses the are considered Sensors address and configuration options as the Network Zone Sensor (NetZoneSensor). same Refrigerator/Freezer Transmitter Wireless and Probe Assemblies Temperature Refrigerator/Freezer Temperature and Probe Assemblies are considered Network Zone The Wireless Transmitter in the tool. The transmitter and configuration assembly uses the same address SA Bus devices Sensor and probe of up to four Zone as the Network however , you can monitor the temperature Sensor options (NetZoneSensor); four freezers, or a combination of both. coolers, VSDs Network During the System process, the key points for variable speed fans or pumps (also referred to as Variable Selection Drives [VFDs]) or Variable Frequency Drives Speed can be defaulted to use Network VSDs based on naming [VSDs] preference settings. The points do not count towards the Hardware Slot Summary calculation. The Network and signal VSD shows up as an SA Bus device in Network Settings tab of the Hardware Definition dialog box (where you can set the address). Note: the signal type of the VSD points after system selection. Then the VSD is automatically You also can change to the hardware. added for Integrated Flow and Integrated Actuators VAV Box Controller Hardware sets Integrated hardware Velocity Pressure and the Supply Damper Actuator . The The VAV Box Controller Digital show up in the System Requires column of the Hardware Slot Summary table (located on the Controller points tab). During Assignment Selection setup, these points are automatically assigned to the correct slots in the Point . the VAV Box Controller Hardware Steps Defining Hardware Defining Assigning includes a Device This section Selection Tab) , Selecting Points (Point Assignment Tab) , (Controller Defining Network Settings (Network Settings Tab) , Importing Package Files , and Reviewing Available Packages . For information on N2 Mapping, N2 Compatibility Options chapter . see the a Device Selection Tab) Selecting (Controller have an application (CAF file) open to select a device. You must Define Hardware . The Define Hardware dialog box opens with the Controller Selection tab active. 1. Click Note: The Define Hardware button is disabled if the open CAF file requires an upgrade and hardware is undefined. Select next to the Field Device row. The Field Device dialog box appears. 2. Click Note: If the device is unlicensed, it will not appear in the selection. dialog 3. Select field device and click OK . The Add Device the desired box appears. 281 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

282 Note: If the application objects that the selected controller does not support, a dialog box you are in contains to warn you that the object This dialog box appears in one of the two following appears will be deleted. is when objects from the application (like trends and schedules). scenarios. One scenario will be deleted of the Control exist outside The other scenario is when objects that the tool will objects These Sequence. These objects exist inside the Control Sequence and affect the behavior not delete exist in the application. of the application. 4. Enter and click OK . The device name appears in the Field Device field. a device name meet the requirements of the selected system in the Hardware Slot Summary . you selected 5. Verify that the devices to add an I/O Module to support the System Selection. are red, then you need If any of the fields Add Device next to the SA Bus Devices section. The SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box 6. Click If the appears. device it will not appear in the selection. is unlicensed, steps apply devices. Follow the steps listed here for the specific device type to add. Different to the different device: For an I/O Module . The Add Devices device and click OK a. Select screen appears. I/O Module the Display: For a Local Display is always defined for the system and cannot be removed. You cannot A Local more than one Local have Controller in the system. Display Sensor Sensor Duct Sensor , Network Zone (Network , and Network CO For a Network Sensor): device 2 OK the Sensor device and click Network . The Define Sensor dialog box appears. a. Select b. Select the Sensor Type from the drop-down list. The Input and Output point check box options load automatically based The standard points associated with your Sensor Type are selected on your selection. and highlighted. c. Select next to the points you want to associate with your Network Sensor device. the check boxes Network to your SA Bus in one continuous To add multiple workflow , select the Add Another Sensors Note: clicking the Add Sensor button. box before check Add Sensor and the Define Senor dialog d. Click box closes. For a Wireless Temperature Transmitter and Probe Assembly device (Network Zone Refrigerator/Freezer Sensor): Note: Refrigerator/Freezer Temperature Transmitter and Probe Assemblies are considered Network Wireless Sensors. You can monitor the temperature of up to four coolers or four freezers or a combination Zone of both. a. Select the Network Zone Sensor device and click OK . The Add Devices dialog box appears. b. Select the check next to the Cooler X or Freezer X (where X is 1-4) applications you want and click boxes . The Controller device tab within the Hardware Definition screen appears with the selected OK in Selection text box. the SA Bus Devices Sensor device (Network Zone Sensor): For a Wireless Wireless Sensors are considered Network Zone Sensors. Note: a. Select the Network Zone Sensor device and click OK . The Add Devices dialog box appears. b. Select boxes next to the applications you want and click OK . The Controller Selection tab within the check the Hardware Definition screen appears with the selected device in the SA Bus Devices text box. For a Network VSD/VFD device: 282 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

283 a. Select the VSD device and click OK . The Add Devices dialog box appears. Network the check boxes you want and click OK . The Controller Selection tab within b. Select next to the applications screen appears device in the SA Bus Devices text box. the Hardware Definition with the selected device: I/O Module For a Romutec OK device and click the . The Add Devices dialog box appears. a. Select I/O Module Romutec changes to the following fields: b. Optionally , make Name field, a new device name. • In the Device enter the slider of devices. (If you want to add more than five devices, , adjust bar for the number • For Quantity the Set Maximum click Dialog Box and adjust the slider bar to set the maximum to open Quantity .) quantity Index field, enter a new value for the I/O modules you are adding • In the Starting to the system. c. Click . The Controller Selection tab within the Hardware Definition screen appears with the selected device OK text box. in the SA Bus Devices completing all of the steps in the Hardware Definition screen, update the signal for the Romutec After Note: I/O To change the signal, right-click the input in the Control View or Inputs list of your Perspective, Module. Modify Signal. Choose the proper signal that begins with RT (for example, and select or RT RT 0-10VDC 0-20mA). , modify on the SA Bus Device. See Modifying Points on an SA Bus Device . 7. If necessary points Close to close the screen. 8. Click Points Modifying on an SA Bus Device to an SA Bus device if the device You can only add points Sensor (Network Duct Sensor , Network is a Network Zone Sensor , or Network CO Assembly Sensor), Wireless Refrigerator/Freezer Temperature Transmitter and Probe 2 (Network Sensor), Wireless Sensor (Network Zone Sensor), or a Network VSD. Cooler/Freezer to an SA bus device: To add points of the Controller Selection tab, select the device you want to add points to. section 1. In the SA Bus Devices Device . The Define Sensor dialog box appears. Modify 2. Click the check boxes next to the points you want and click OK . The tool adds the points to the device. 3. Select Note: Highlighted in the software indicate standard points that are coupled with the selected device type. points point and are not required are guidelines The standard to be present on a device. selections an SA Bus Device Deleting section of the Controller Selection tab, select the device you want to delete. 1. In the SA Bus Devices 2. Click Delete . A confirmation screen appears. 3. Click Yes . Points Assignment Tab) Assigning (Point Assignment screen appears when you select the Point The Point tab in the Define Hardware dialog Assignment box. See Selecting a Device (Controller Selection Tab) . The tool automatically assigns the points based on the selections made in the Controller Selection tab. Points that to assign it could in the Unassigned Points list. You need appear the points in the Unassigned Points list. not assign Note: SA Bus devices are not part of the point assignment process. See Modifying Points on an SA Bus Device . to assign You must an application (CAF file) open have points. 283 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

284 Note: You may also need points after you change hardware. If you change hardware, verify that your to reassign assignments have point not changed. Settings Defining Tab) (Network Network Settings tab in the appears you select screen Network Settings when Define Hardware dialog Settings The Network the Points (Point Assignment Tab) . box. See Assigning an application You must file) open to define network settings. have (CAF Hardware the box, select Define Network Settings tab. dialog 1. In the the settings, as needed. and modify 2. Review Notes: Display (Local Controller Display) • The Local is always set to 3 and cannot be modified. Address • You cannot duplicate device addresses in the SAB Device Settings table. An alert message appears enter assigned to another if you type an address device. to select the BACnet Advanced Type and Baud Rate parameters. • Click Encoding Close to close the dialog box. 3. Click Available Reviewing Packages Define Hardware dialog box, click the Packages tab to review all available package files. In the start-up checks firmware package files at system for new or updated in the Packages Directory: The tool automatically C:\ProgramData\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\Field Controller Packages . Note: To import field controller packages, perform one of the following actions: • Click Import Define Hardware > Packages . See Importing Package Files . in the package file or use the Importer , located in the Start menu. Restart the tool Package • Double-click package file. imported to view the newly Importing Package Files feature to import packages. Use the Import Define . 1. Click Hardware Packages tab, click Import , and then navigate to the package file that you want. 2. On the tab. If a field controller Field controller show Note: Licensed or Unlicensed in the Packages packages the status package is unlicensed, the CAF can be opened as pseudo-artificial. 3. Click OK . Package Check at Startup The tool automatically checks firmware package files at system start-up. These files are stored for new or updated Directory: in the Packages C:\ProgramData\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\Field Controller Packages. the newest version of a package file for a given release. The tool uses For example, a Release 6.1 package for an Advanced Application Controller and place a patched Release if you have 6.1.1 file in the Packages Directory , then the tool automatically installs the 6.1.1 patch package files at system startup, your 6.1 file. and replaces Note: Do not place new package files in the Packages Directory . Instead, follow the steps outlined in Reviewing Available Packages . 284 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

285 Defining the Default (Default Controller Tab) Controller select Controller the default Use the Default when users tab to select a specific system type in the System device Selection Wizard. 1. Click Define Hardware . The Define Hardware dialog box appears. 2. Click Default Controller tab. the 3. For each application in the System Type column, select the default controller in the Default Controlle r column. 285 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

286 Hardware Definition Tabs dialog Definition tabs: box contains The Hardware the following • Tab Selection Controller • Point Assignment Tab • Network Settings Tab • Tab Packages • Default Controller Tab • (found in the N2 Compatibility Options section) N2 Mapping Tab Selection Controller Tab Hardware Defining See the section. Selection Tab Table 120: Hardware Definition—Controller Description Field Name of the device. Field Device Select Field Device Selection Dialog Box to select the device. Opens the assigned Lists all the SA Bus Devices SA Bus Devices to the Field Device. Selection Add Device Box to select your SA Bus device. the SA Bus Device Opens Dialog device from the SA Bus Devices field. Delete Deletes the selected the Modify Points dialog box to add points to your SA Bus device. Modify Device Opens if the device You can only add points Sensor (Network Note: to an SA Bus device is a Network Sensor Sensor), CO Duct Sensor Zone Wireless , Network , or Network 2 Transmitter and Probe Assemblies (Network Refrigerator/Freezer Temperature Wireless Sensor (Network Zone Sensor), or a Network VSD. Cooler/Freezer Sensors), Requirements Hardware The Hardware Slot Summary displays the hardware Slot Summary of the system you select. capacity of the selected (Selected of the system requirements in the CAF, the hardware devices and available (Unused/A vailable Space). space, unused Hardware), space of the selected hardware, the field turns red to indicate an When the CAF exceeds the capacity is needed device System Selections. additional hardware to support Selected points. and Unused and Available Requirements, Category: System Hardware, of points prior to mapping all points. Slot Summary The Hardware is the summary includes the following types: The Hardware Slot Summary 2 1 , • Inputs UI: Universal Inputs • AI: Analog Inputs • BI: Binary 3 • Outputs UO/CO: Outputs/Configurable Universal 3 • AO: Analog Outputs 3 • Outputs BO: Binary 3 , 4 • Outputs RO: Relay Preferences types by these points, see Object Naming and Signal used . on signal For information 286 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

287 Table 120: Hardware Definition—Controller Tab Selection Field Description box. Close Closes the dialog the Help system. Opens 1 The UI is scanned There may be a delay of up to one second in reading a contact status change. per second. once does not support 2 The UI on VAV Box Controllers the 4-20 mA signal. use two binary hardware outputs and closing an actuator . 3 Incremental slots for opening Outputs to drive incremental/floating 3-wire actuators; however , we recommend using triac outputs 4 You can use Relay instead of Relay for the following control loop types: VAV Flow Control, Airflow , Airflow %, Airflow Diff, Bldg Static, and Duct Outputs Static. Field Device Dialog Box Selection Defining Hardware section. See the If a warning after selecting appears Note: a field device, see Troubleshooting . message Device Selection Dialog Box Table 121: Field Description Field Includes information for the following: Selections Displays • Name: selections. the names of the available of the available selections. • Description: Description • Device . Type: Type of controller • Region: Displays of the controller . the region Number of universal inputs. • Universal Inputs: Number Inputs: inputs. • Analog of analog Number of binary Inputs: • Binary inputs. • Universal Outputs: Number of universal outputs. Outputs: Number of analog outputs. • Analog • Binary Outputs: outputs. of binary Number Outputs: of relay outputs. • Relay Number Applies and closes the dialog box. OK the changes Closes the dialog box without applying the changes. Cancel Opens the Help system. SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box See the Defining Hardware section. 287 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

288 Table 122: SA Bus Device Selection Box Dialog Field Description for the following: Includes Selections information of the available selections. Displays • Name: the names • Description: selections. of the available Description • Device . Type: Type of controller . Displays the region • Region: of the controller of universal inputs. • Universal Inputs: Number of analog Number • Analog Inputs: inputs. of binary Number inputs. • Binary Inputs: of universal outputs. • Universal Outputs: Number of analog outputs. Number Outputs: • Analog • Binary of binary outputs. Outputs: Number Outputs: of relay outputs. • Relay Number the changes and closes box. OK Applies the dialog box without the changes. the dialog Cancel Closes applying Opens the Help system. Add Devices Dialog Box (For I/O Modules) Defining Hardware See the section. The Add Devices box appears after you select an I/O Module device to add in the SA Bus Device Selection dialog dialog box to name your device. box. Use this dialog Table 123: Add Devices Dialog Box (For I/O Modules) Description Field Device name. Device Name Quantity Use to select (see Set Maximum Quantity Dialog Box ). the number of I/O modules the starting index you are adding to your system. Starting Index Use to enter for the I/O Modules and closes the dialog box. OK Applies the changes the dialog box without applying the changes. Cancel Closes Opens the Help system. the Quantity Dialog Box . Opens Set Maximum Sensor Dialog Define , NetSensorDuct, NetSensorCO2, and NetVSD) Box (For NetSensor See the Defining Hardware section. The Define Sensor dialog box appears after you select a Network Sensor (NetDuctSensor , NetZoneSensor , or NetCO2Sensor), Network Sensor (NetZoneSensor), Wireless Sensor (NetZoneSensor), or Network Cooler/Freezer device to add in the SA Bus Device Selection dialog box. Use this dialog box to select the Sensor VSD (NetVSD) Type and to add points to the Network Sensor device. are Note: Sensors and Wireless Refrigerator/Freezer Temperature Transmitter and Probe Assemblies Wireless considered Network Zone Sensor SA Bus devices. 288 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

289 Table 124: Define Sensor Box (For NetSensor , NetSensorDuct, NetSensorCO2, and NetVSD) Dialog Field Description Sensor type from a drop down list. Sensor Type Use to select the Network point for the Sensor Type. all the potential selections Displays and Outputs Inputs you want Select with your the point check boxes associated . Sensor Network the check box before clicking Add Sensor allows you box Add Another check Selecting in a series. Network to add multiple Sensors the changes and closes box. Add Sensor Applies the dialog box without the dialog the changes. Cancel Closes applying Opens the Help system. Device Dialog Box Modify Modifying See the on an SA Bus Device section. Points Points Box Table 125: Modify Dialog Field Description whether or not to add the point to the device. Add Use to select Point type. Type Point function. Function data type. Type Point Data Applies the changes and closes the dialog box. OK the dialog box without applying the changes. Cancel Closes Opens the Help system. Quantity Box Set Maximum Dialog Defining Hardware section. See the Quantity Dialog Box Table 126: Set Maximum Description Field Use to set the maximum quantity of devices that appear in the quantity slider bar of the Add Devices dialog Bar (1 to 5) Slider box. Applies and closes the dialog box. OK the changes the dialog applying Closes the changes. Cancel box without the Help system. Opens Point Assignment Tab See the Defining Hardware section. Points Note: are not part of the point assignment process. See Modifying SA Bus devices on an SA Bus Device . 289 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

290 Table 127: Hardware Assignment Tab Definition - Point Description Field all the unassigned points. The object names appear alphabetically . Unassigned Points Displays name. • Name: Displays the point Expanded • Description: ID for the point. Displays information. the signal • Signal: Type: Data type. • Data the type information. • Type: Displays all the assigned points. The object names appear Assigned , including the Object Points Displays alphabetically ID, Signal, Type, and Type. Name, Expanded Data information. Controller • Controller Label: name. • Name: Displays the point ID for the point. Expanded • Description: the signal information. • Signals: Displays a point and use drag-and-drop to move a point up or down on the Note: Select functionality to move the point to an invalid location and list. An alert message if you attempt appears location. in its original the point remains Moves the selected point (or points) from the Unassigned Points table to the Assigned Points table. Moves point (or points) from the Assigned the selected table to the Unassigned Points Points table. Closes the dialog box. Close Opens the Help system. Network Settings Tab See the Defining Hardware section. 290 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

291 Table 128: Hardware - Network Tab Definition Settings Field Description Information field device. & Bus Device Field for the selected Settings model. the device Displays • Model: box. Name: Name in the New Device dialog • Device you entered 1 • Network Name: Computer hostname of the device. 2 • Device of the field device. Address Address: 2 • on the device. Controller Number: Combined value of the rotary switches or DIP switches 1 • the dynamic When the DHCP Check IP address. box: Enables Check Enabled DHCP or disables box is disabled or not checked the static IP fields are editable. 1 - Displays IP Address: the IP address of the field device. 1 - used Displays IP Mask: for the IP address. mask the Subnet 1 - of the router IP address Address: IP Router for the field device. ID number . This value is the same value • Instance in the Peer Number (BACnet ID): BACnet ® used View. in the Details attribute Reference box to edit the BACnet Localization Button: Rate • Advanced Opens the Advanced dialog and Baud Box for details. parameters. See Advanced Dialog Information SA Bus Device for the SA Bus devices. Settings the device Displays name. • Name: • Address: of the SA Bus device. the address Displays must device The Address match the listed here for the Cooler/Freezer/Zone Note: NetSensor installed device. Refer to the device documentation DIP switch setting of the actual for further details. connected to the SA Bus. I/O Modules, Network Sensors • Type: Displays component the hardware Network Sensors, or Network CO Sensors), Wireless Duct Sensors, (Network Zone 2 Transmitter and Probe Assemblies (Network Cooler/Freezer Refrigerator/Freezer Temperature Sensors (Network Sensors), and Network VSDs are the available types. Sensors), Wireless Zone and Wireless Refrigerator/Freezer Temperature Transmitter and Probe Note: Sensors Wireless Zone Sensors. Network Assemblies are considered Closes the dialog box and applies the changes. Close Opens the Help system. 1 Appears only for IP devices. 2 Appears only for compatible devices. Advanced Dialog Box See the Defining Network Settings (Network Settings Tab) section. 291 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

292 Table 129: Advanced Dialog Box Field Description BACnet Encoding Type the file type: Use to select • Unicode: (UCS-2) ISO 10646 (UTF-8) ISO 10646 • Unicode: • ASCII: X3.4 (US-ASCII) ANSI 932 (Japanese Shift JIS) code: Microsoft DBCS code • Japanese page is required when controllers are BACnet By default, is set to Unicode. Unicode Localization is required when the controllers are integrated into ASCII network. into a Metasys integrated . Japanese code is required for Japanese locales. a Facility Explorer Supervisory Controller Rate the Baud 1200, 9600, 19200, 38400, or 76800. This field is set to Rate Baud of Auto, Use to select Auto by default. Closes the dialog box and applies the changes. Close Packages Tab Definition - Packages Tab Table 130: Hardware Field Description Information Table Packages of the device associated with the package file. Name Name the package file was released for or the category of the package Region Description file. Build of the hardware file. Build Number package status of the package Unlicensed , the CAF can License file. If the file is License Status as pseudo-artificial. be opened new packages into your machine's package environment. Import Use to import the dialog box. Closes Close Opens the Help system. Controller Default Tab Definition - Default Controller Tab Table 131: Hardware Field Description Specifies the system type. System Type Indicates the default device used when users select the system Controller Default wizard. Selection type in the System on your instance If you do not have Note: any field controllers select Artificial Field Device of the Tool, then you must appears as the default controller . Artificial or IO Device Device allows you to work with an The Artificial Field the required if you do not have application hardware packages. Closes the dialog box. Close Opens the Help system. 292 Controller Tool Help: Defining Hardware

293 Transfer Operations Wizard allows a CAF to a device (download) and transfer a CAF to a computer (upload). The Transfer you to transfer and transfer to computer have changed since previous releases. For example, for workflows The transfer to device be connected to a field device via its SA bus. Be sure to observe the workflow you must applications, N2 supported of the Transferring to a Computer and Transferring to a Device sections. changes at the beginning Concepts Operations Transfer Wizard Transfer you to transfer a CAF to a device (download) and transfer allows (upload) . The Transfer Wizard a CAF to a computer The Transfer the network connection method by the Connections : NxE Passthru , Bluetooth ® , Wizard determines 4.2+/BACnet Router , ZigBee ® , Bluetooth MAP , or Direct Ethernet network connection methods. ® Transfer (Upload) to Computer to a computer using Wizard. You are able to discover available devices or manually You can transfer the Transfer address. a device specify to use the Transfer to Computer feature on an unlicensed device, While CAF will be set it is possible the uploaded Artificial Field Device . to to Device (Download) Transfer You can transfer your open and update the firmware of that device or attached SA Bus devices by CAF to a device the Transfer (Download) command. using to Device the Transfer to Device (Download) when your CAF has a fully bound You can only initiate (hardware-assigned) system. To upgrade the firmware of a ZFR device, see Upgrade Single ZFR Coordinator . The Transfer to Device (Download) feature is disabled for unlicensed devices. Connections The connection mode allows you to select a Metasys ® Network Automation Engine (NAE) through NxE Passthru to connect to perform which the operation. to launch the tool through You do not need device configuration tool or user interface, or Note: the supervisory the supervisory device configuration tool installed to use the NxE Passthru connection. When the tool have from the supervisory is launched configuration tool, the supervisory device connection information is device populated in the tool. not automatically connection, enter the device To use an NxE Passthru or IP address, your user credentials, and host name click Login. The Bluetooth connection mode allows you to select a local Bluetooth card or a Bluetooth Wireless Commissioning Converter to connect to perform the operation. through a MAP MAP connection mode allows you to select Router 4.2+ / BACnet Router to connect The 4.2+ / BACnet to perform through the operation. The connection mode allows you to select ZigBee dongle to connect through to perform the operation. a local ZigBee The Direct Ethernet connection mode allows you to easily connect directly to an IP device. Code File Types Boot Code is the startup code The The Boot Code acts like a mini-operating system in the device for the device. and supports the communications necessary to transfer the Main Code to the device . 293 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

294 The Main acts like an onboard library and gives the device information on the modules. If the module used Code Code is changed, to update the Main Code. Together , the Boot Code and Main Code in the Application you need up the firmware. make Note: Code into an Point Expansion Module over the SA Bus with a Bluetooth connection is 1 Transferring Main faster than doing so over an FC Bus connection. The typical transfer to device time is (30%) to 2 minutes to four minutes for an SA Bus transfer and nearly five minutes for an FC Bus connection. three By default, the Code transfer option is available for Wireless Field Bus Routers and repeaters. This option Radio up the process to the Wireless the code in Wireless Field Bus Routers. Refer speeds Field Bus Routers of upgrading documentation on transferring product to wireless devices. for guidelines Code and Main If the Radio are both selected for transfer , they will be sent together . The Radio Code transfer Code option is required to upgrade a Wireless Field Bus Router that is used as a repeater , and when the Wireless Field Bus Router version version from the boot and Main Code versions of a controller . is at a different switch protocols mode option switches communication The in an MS/TP or N2 controller compatibility communication with the FC bus. The SA Bus Firmware Code option sends a file to update devices on the SA Bus of the device. With this feature, you can update multiple Point Expansion Modules at a time. The tool sends the required data to the device so that the device can update defined in the Application. SA Bus devices and priorities Application tells the device The code/sequence Code of the control strategy created in the the actual tool (for example, definitions of the Inputs, Outputs, Control Logic, and Network variables). Switch Mode Workflow Communication The following workflow provides an overview of N2 communication switching scenarios. 294 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

295 Figure 48: N2 Communication Workflow Switching Operations Steps Transfer Transferring to a Computer Transfer To Computer 1. Click . The Transfer to Device Wizard appears. > Transfer (Upload) Type section, select the connection type: 2. In the Connection Bluetooth, MAP 4.2+ / BACnet Router , NxE Passthru, ZigBee, Ethernet connection. For more information or Direct connection types, see Connections . about 3. In the Connection Parameters section, enter the connection parameters as follows: • For NxE Passthr u connections, a host name or IP address from the list, or enter the device host name select the correct Enter and then click Login . Select or IP address. supervisory device and your user credentials, the trunk. • For Bluetooth connections, enter the baud rate and COM port information. We recommend you keep the Baud default of 38400. Rate • For MAP 4.2+ / BACnet Router connections, specify the following: 295 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

296 - IP address and UDP . port of the router number of the MS/TP (1-65,534). - Network trunk for the MS/TP Note: . The MS/TP Network Number 1001 is reserved Network Do not use 1001 Number connections. IP network for Johnson Controls interface adapter to use. Ethernet network - An available Ethernet network interface, all IP traffic intended for the MAP 4.2+/ If you select Note: an available travels through this interface. BACnet Router the wizard, When connection parameters for connecting to a MAP Gateway at you first open the default displayed. are stored parameters are modified, the values 4.2 are automatically in version If the connection MAP use. To restore parameters to the default values, click the for future 4.2 the wizard the connection button. Default For further information about the MAP and common troubleshooting Note: refer to the Mobile Access issues, Portal User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). Gateway connections, enter • For ZigBee the PAN offset. connections, the UDP port of the device and an available Ethernet network interface Ethernet enter • For Direct verify you are on the same subnet as your IP controllers) adapter (if selected, to use. section, the type of discovery process you want enter (Auto), MAC Address, 4. In the Discovery to use: automatic or Instance Number IP Device, MAC Address , enter the device address. If you select Instance . If you select Number the device BACnet instance number . , enter Notes: if you select is only available if you select • The Instance IP trunk. IP Device is only available Number a BACnet Bluetooth. MAC Address is only available if you select an MS/TP trunk. • The Instance Number of 1 is reserved for the tool and should not be assigned to controllers. 5. Click Next . If you select the MAC IP Device, or Instance Number discovery type, the tool skips the Device Note: Address, and the Transfer the Auto discovery Screen appears. Go to Step 9. If you select Screen Selection Summary go to Step 7. type, if the wizard 6. When appears, click Discovery the Device does not automatically begin the Selection Screen process. discovery Once Note: device appears in the list, click Stop. the desired a device Next . The Transfer Summary Screen appears. 7. Select from the list and click You cannot connect to a device that has a duplicate Instance Note: . If more than one device has the Number same Instance Number , the numbers display red in the device list. If you select a device with a duplicate Instance Number , the Next button is disabled until you select a device with a unique Instance Number . 8. Click Finish to computer status appears. . The transfer not When to computer completes, the Finish button changes to Note: . This change does the transfer Done happen the Close wizard after if you select transfer check box on the Transfer Summary successful screen. Instead, the wizard closes. 9. Click Done . Notes: • If the selected Controller Application an upgrade, the System Upgrade dialog box appears. File requires • If the selected device is unlicensed, the CAF is set to Artificial Field Device . the files to a computer See the section if you are experiencing trouble transferring Troubleshooting . 296 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

297 Transferring to a Device to the workflow and general tips are as follows: Changes transfer feature is disabled devices. • The Transfer to Device for unlicensed to a device, the versions of the Boot, Main, and Radio an application the tool detects • If you attempt to transfer running in the field controller . If the Boot or Main Code version in the controller does Code versions currently not version, version for the same release is available or a newer the Boot or the software match in your packages, check box is selected. Main Code to N2 supported code you must be connected to a field device via the SA • If you are transferring applications, over MS/TP Wizard, initially transfers to device Code (Wired Field with the Transfer the Main Bus. In addition, to N2 (N2 Slave Field Bus) when you select the Bus), Communication Mode check box but switches Switch Transfer screen. This step is not necessary if the device Summary background transfer , because on the supports of N2 applications to such the transfer does not require explicit communication switching. devices • Supported are capable of updating boot and main code of Point Expansion Modules attached field controllers Bus using the SA Bus Provisioning The SA Bus Provisioning feature allows on the Sensor/Actuator feature. of devices on the Sensor/Actuator Bus without requiring you to manually connect firmware attached updating one. The feature automatically and update the necessary data to the controllers, which are capable each sends updates of SA Bus devices independently . of performing you upgrade field controllers with Point Expansion Modules on the SA Bus, you may need • When to upgrade certain to the latest release before you transfer the application to a device . If this workflow is required, devices that indicates devices require an upgrade. an alert appears which you transfer application code to a field controller that has a Point Expansion • When without points, the Module Point Expansion Module LED fault light may be on steady . This is expected behavior and does not affect the functionality of the controller . The Point Expansion Module LED fault light remains on until you reconfigure the device with input/output For immediate workaround solutions, see Troubleshooting . points. to devices over the SA Bus, first transfer to the individual device to which • If you are transferring the application transfer devices. Then, to the remaining you are connected. Code into a Point Expansion Module over the SA Bus with a Bluetooth connection is 1 to 2 • Transferring Main faster than doing so over an FC bus connection. It typically takes three to three-and-a-half minutes (30%) minutes to an SA Bus device and nearly five minutes for an FC Bus connection . to transfer Bluetooth and ZigBee connection types are not supported on controllers that use background transfer . Important: informs is not supported for the controller . Refer to controller A tooltip you that the operation documentation for more information. The Transfer to Device process does Important: if you have a single Advanced Application or General not work Purpose Controller connected to the MAP 4.2+ / BACnet Router over the FC bus. In this case, use the Bluetooth ® wireless commissioning converter to transfer to the controller . To transfer to a device: Transfer > Transfer (Download) . The Transfer to Device Wizard appears. 1. Click to Device The Transfer feature is disabled for unlicensed devices. If you opt to transfer an application to Note: to Device an unlicensed a dialog box informs you that the tool is not licensed to transfer CAFs to the device. device, 2. In the Connection select the connection type: NxE Passthru Type section, MAP 4.2+ / BACnet Router , , Bluetooth, ZigBee, or Direct Ethernet connection. For more information about connection types, see Connections . 3. In the Connection Parameters enter the connection parameters as follows: section, • For NxE Passthru enter the device host name or IP address, your user credentials, and click connections, Login . Select the correct supervisory device and the trunk. the • For Bluetooth enter the baud rate and COM port information. We recommend you keep connections, Baud Rate default of 38400. 297 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

298 • For MAP 4.2+ / BACnet connections, specify the following: Router and UDP port of the router - IP address . of the MS/TP - Network trunk number (1-65,534). Network Do not use 1001 Network Number 1001 is reserved Note: . The MS/TP Number for the MS/TP connections. IP network for Johnson Controls - An available adapter to use. Ethernet network interface an available Ethernet network interface, all IP traffic intended for the MAP 4.2+/ If you select Note: travels BACnet this interface. Router through you first open the default connection parameters for connecting to a MAP Gateway at When the wizard, displayed. are stored parameters are modified, the values 4.2 are automatically in version If the connection MAP use. To restore parameters to the default values, click the for future 4.2 the wizard the connection button. Default For further information about the MAP and common troubleshooting issues, refer to the Mobile Access Note: Gateway User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). Portal connections, enter • For ZigBee the PAN offset. connections, the UDP port of the device and an available Ethernet network interface Ethernet enter • For Direct an available Ethernet network interface, verify you are on the same subnet adapter to use. If you select as your IP controllers. for the MS/TP Network Number . The number 1001 Do not use 1001 for Johnson Controls Note: is reserved IP network connections. BACnet Next . The Device Selection Screen 4. Click appears. Note: option is not available on the MS/TP trunk during the transfer process. The Discover the device to transfer to and click Next . The Transfer Summary Screen appears. 5. Select you want When to activate options to control when a. Use the files are activated on the controller . If you the transferred select Transfer , the application is activated After process completes. If you select Wait after the transfer for manual activation , the application is not activated when the transfer process completes. To manually activate the transferred Activate pending files action in Tools > Online Operations . See the files, use the Operations Wizard information. Online for more activated activated the behavior of transferred files when to modify on the controller . When options b. Use the Select logic or Disable logic options to enable or disable the logic of activated files on supported the Enable If you opt to disable the logic of an application, you can enable it later by selecting the Enable logic devices. action in Operations . See the Online Operations Wizard for more information. Tools > Online If you select and Wait for manual activation option, the Enable logic Note: Disable logic options do the files until you activate using the Activate pending the application not take effect on the controller feature in the Online Operations Wizard. c. The appropriate code required to load your application is automatically determined. To view or modify code transfer options, Advanced Transfer Options . For information about code options, see Codes . click Notes: • The tool automatically Switch Communication Mode if it is available. If the mode is required but selects a message and you can not proceed. not possible, appears modes of the controller and the application are not compatible, • If the communication select you must Switch Communication Mode to transfer the application to the device. d. Select Modify open application with New Information column to update the open application to reflect the values going into the device. When you select Note: the Controller Number is also updated. this option, 6. Click Finish . The selected device code transfers to the device . and other Note: bar displays information on the transfer progress The Status status indicators. 298 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

299 When the transfer the Finish button changes to Done . This change does not happen if you select completes, Close wizard successful transfer check box on the Transfer Summary screen. Instead, the wizard the after closes. Done 7. Click . transferring an application to a device, see Troubleshooting . If you experience difficulty Name and Instance Number During a Transfer to Device Computer Updating have the ability to change a controller's Computer Name and Instance Number when performing a transfer Users to an IP device. Note: an Instance Number of 1 to a controller because it is reserved for the tool. Do not assign a Computer During a Transfer to Device To Update Name Files window , click the Computer Name combo box in the New Information column. 1. In the Transfer a new computer name or click the down arrow icon for name suggestions from the CAF. 2. Enter the changes 3. Specify for Transfer Operations. See Step 5 in Transferring to a Device for further information. required 4. Click Finish . When the Transfer to Device completes, your Computer Name is updated. Note: There in the Computer Name updating due to system DNS caching. To work around the may be a delay line to immediately DNS ipconfig / flushdns in a command run flush the DNS and delayed caching, the Computer Name. update an Instance a Transfer During To Update to Device Number the box in the Number combo 1. Click New Information column. Instance a new computer name or click the down arrow icon for suggestions from the CAF or Device. 2. Enter Note: Do not assign an Instance Number of 1 to a controller because it is reserved for the tool. 3. Specify the changes for Transfer Operations. See Step 5 in Transferring to a Device for further information. required Number Finish the Transfer to Device completes, your Instance 4. Click is updated. . When Transfer Operations Screens Transfer to Device Wizard Table 132: Transfer Wizard to Device Description Field Connection Screen Connection to use: Type Select the type of connection • NxE Passthru • Bluetooth Router • MAP 4.2+ / BACnet • ZigBee Ethernet • Direct 299 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

300 Table 132: Transfer to Device Wizard Description Field NxE Passthru: Specify the following: Parameters Connection • Address: The device or IP Address. Host - Name/IP host name to log into the site. Name: User - Credentials Password: Credentials to log into the site. - Supervisory The supervisory device to use for the NxE Passthru Device: - connection. connection. to use for the NxE Passthru Trunk: - The trunk to launch the tool through Note: To use the NxE Passthru connection, you do not need or have the supervisory device configuration tool or user interface, the When the tool from tool installed. you launch configuration device supervisory device connection device configuration the supervisory tool, the supervisory in the tool. information is not automatically populated the COM Specify rate to use. • Bluetooth: port and baud Router: MAP • Use to specify 4.2+ / BACnet the following: . port of the router and UDP - IP address - Network of the MS/TP trunk (1-65,534). number Number . The MS/TP Network Do not use 1001 for the MS/TP Note: Network for Johnson Controls Number connections. 1001 is reserved IP network network adapter to use. - An available Ethernet interface Ethernet all IP traffic intended interface, an available Note: If you select network BACnet travels through this interface. 4.2+/ for the MAP Router the wizard, the default connection parameters for connecting to a When you first open at version MAP If the connection parameters Gateway 4.2 are automatically displayed. in the wizard the values the connection are modified, for future are stored use. To restore MAP button. click the 4.2 Default values, to the default parameters Note: and common troubleshooting issues, For further information about the MAP Portal Gateway User's Guide refer to the 1999). Mobile Access (LIT-1201 Specify area network (PAN) Offset. • ZigBee: the personal Specify interface. and an available network Ethernet: • Direct the UDP port of the device that is connected to the same subnet as the IP controllers a network Select interface to connect. to which you want Discovery Indicates to use: the type of discovery process • Auto Address • MAC Number • Instance • IP Device (when Bluetooth is selected) Selection Screen Device to perform a device Discovery over the network to find a device. The Use this feature Discover option only returns field devices and I/O Modules that are on the Field Bus. Discovery After completes and you click Discover again, the list clears from the a Discovery Note: Selection table. Device Stops the Discovery process. Stop 300 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

301 Table 132: Transfer to Device Wizard Field Description including: Devices Table available devices, Displays Name Name: • Device of the device. Name: • System of the system. Name You can sort on this column. of the device. Address • Address: • Type: Type of device. • Status: Status of the device. ID number is the same value used in the . This value The BACnet Number: • Instance in the Details View. Peer Reference attribute 3 • : Combined Number switches or DIP switches on the Controller value of the rotary device. 2 • Name Computer : Network hostname of the device. 2 • IP Address of the device. : IP Address Note: (no header indicates the number of devices discovered. The first column name) Transfer Summary Screen 301 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

302 Table 132: Transfer to Device Wizard Description Field the following device information: Information Device Displays 2 • of the device. Computer : Network Name hostname . This value BACnet used in the Peer Number: • Instance is the same ID number value Reference View. attribute in the Details check or disables the dynamic IP address. • DHCP-Enabled box: Enables IP fields are editable. check box is disabled or not checked, If the DHCP the static 2 • : IP address of the field device. IP Address 2 • for the IP address. IP Mask mask : Subnet used 2 • of the router IP address for the field device. Address: IP Router Enabled • BBMD of the Broadcast Management (BBMD) Enabled: Configures the attribute Advanced tab. To configure object choose from one of the located in the this attribute, following options: Enabled attribute of the Broadcast Management object - Sets the False-Manual: all configured False BM Address List . to addresses and removes from the Information: True or False , depending on what is configured Device Current - Status BM Address List attributes to the values defined in the device. This option sets the in the device. from Status True or False , depending on what is configured in the CAF: - Defaults Management object. This option sets the BM of the Broadcast attribute Enabled attributes to the values defined in the application. Address List only one device Enable subnet. If you do not know Notes: as a BBMD on a given BBMD in your application For a BBMD, how to configure do not enable or device. IP Networks Controllers Metasys for BACnet/IP further information, refer to the (LIT-12012468) . For information Configuration Guide Technical Bulletin on how in CCT, see Broadcast Management object Management to add a Broadcast . (BBMD) Object Screen 3 • value of the rotary switches or DIP switches on the Number Controller : Combined device. name. Device • Name: name is the same as the System Name. The Device Name Note: The default device Object. tab of the Device from the Advanced can be changed • Description: Description of the device. number of the device. • Model: Model Boot Code Version: • Boot Code version. Main version. • Main Code Code Version: • System Name: System name. Device’ s status. • Status: 1 • : Firmware version of the wireless devices. Version Radio Firmware 1 • of the wireless : IEEE address Radio devices. IEEE Address 1 • Pan ID : Pan ID of the wireless devices. 2 • Address : Address of the device. Device On compatible devices, indicates the following field bus • FC Communication Mode: Wired, Wireless, and Ethernet. N2 Slave, communication: 302 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

303 Table 132: Transfer to Device Wizard Field Description to view the status of all SA Bus devices. Click SA Bus Status this option lists the status device detected by the controller on Screen The SA Bus Status of each it shows the status of files (such as Boot and Main), the SA Bus. For each device detected, the controller and the version that device. the device version, has for provisioning mode), (Comissioning to Device, and Commission Device Operations In the Online Transfer wizards, this feature (Current the status of defined SA Bus devices in Application) displays devices in the application, but not reported by the a CAF and identifies that are defined can be used that the controller has connected to the . This information to verify controller correct equipment for the application. of this feature depends on the firmware Note: and some The availability of the device, types Refer to controller product may not be reported. for device documentation information. more Displays the following Transfer Operation options: Operations transfer After after the Transferred (Download) process completes. Transfer files are activated to Device activation Wait for manual files are not activated Transferred the transfer process completes. You must manually when activate the Activate pending files action in Tools > Online the transferred file using . See the Online Operations Wizard for more information. Operations Enable logic devices, enables the runtime logic of activated files. On supported logic Disable disables logic of activated files. devices, the runtime On supported If you choose you can enable it later by selecting the to disable the logic of an application, logic action in Tools > Online Operations . See the Online Operations Wizard for Enable information. more 303 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

304 Table 132: Transfer to Device Wizard Field Description the following transfer code types: Transfer Options Click Advanced to display • Boot • Main 4 • Radio Code 5 • Switch Mode Communication 6 • SA Bus Firmware • Application Following advanced transfer options: Modify open application with New Information column column in the Transfer . Updates the CAF with the changed values New Information upon Number also updates. Note: If you select this feature the Controller successful after wizard Close transfer after successfully completing the operation. the Transfer Closes wizard to Device successful Commission device after transfer completing mode in Commissioning the operation. View the device after successfully Modify with New application Note: This option requires open you to select the if it is available. column Information option Override Maximum System Capacity CAFs only appears the controller's This operation if you are working with large that exceed when to proceed this operation with the supported it appears size. You must check . application transfer Transfer status. Status Moves to the previous of the wizard. Previous screen to the next screen of the wizard. Moves Next if a device is selected. Instance Number Note: is disabled with a duplicate This option to start the transfer . Finish Finish/Done Click to close the wizard. Click Done the wizard Closes performing the transfer . Cancel without the Help system. Opens only when wirelessly connected. 1 Appears 2 Appears only for IP devices. 3 Appears only for compatible devices. 4 This option only appears when the device is in wireless mode. See the Radio Code description in the Code File Types section. 5 This feature is only available that support SA Bus Provisioning. to devices to ensure Communication option appears when you must switch controller 6 The Switch protocols Mode communication application compatibility . If you do not switch communication modes, you cannot transfer the application. For information about N2 communication switching see the Switch Communication Mode Workflow section. This step is not necessary if the not require device background transfer , as the transfer of N2 applications to such devices does supports explicit communication switching. 304 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

305 Transfer Wizard to Computer Wizard Table 133: Transfer to Computer Field Description Connection Screen Select the type of connection Connection Type to use: • NxE Passthru • Bluetooth Router 4.2+ / BACnet • MAP • ZigBee • Direct Ethernet NxE Passthru: Specify the following: Parameters Connection • Address: The device or IP Address. Host - Name/IP host name to log into the site. Credentials - User Name: Password: Credentials to log into the site. - device - Supervisory Device: The supervisory to use for the NxE Passthru connection. The trunk to use for the NxE Passthru connection. Trunk: - you do not need to launch the tool through Note: To use the NxE Passthru connection, tool or user interface, the configuration the supervisory device or have tool installed. When you launch the tool from supervisory device configuration tool, the supervisory device the supervisory device configuration connection in the tool. populated is not automatically information Bluetooth: the COM port and baud rate to use. Specify Router: Use to specify the following: • MAP 4.2+ / BACnet . - IP address and UDP port of the router trunk - Network (1-65,534). of the MS/TP number Network Note: . The MS/TP Network Do not use 1001 for the MS/TP Number is reserved for Johnson Controls IP network connections. Number 1001 network Ethernet to use. - An available interface adapter Ethernet network all IP traffic intended If you select Note: an available interface, Router through this interface. BACnet 4.2+/ for the MAP travels the default connection parameters for connecting to a When you first open the wizard, 4.2 are automatically at version If the connection parameters MAP Gateway displayed. in the wizard the connection use. To restore are stored are modified, the values for future values, MAP 4.2 Default button. to the default parameters click the information about the MAP and common troubleshooting issues, Note: For further Access refer to the User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). Mobile Portal Gateway the PAN Offset. Specify • ZigBee: Specify the UDP port of the device and an available network interface. • Direct Ethernet: that is connected to the same subnet as the IP controllers interface a network Select to connect. to which you want Indicates process to use: the type of discovery Discovery • Auto • MAC Address • Instance Number (when Bluetooth is selected) • IP Device Device Selection Screen 305 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

306 Table 133: Transfer to Computer Wizard Description Field Use this feature a device Discovery over the network to find a device. The to perform Discovery field devices and I/O Modules that are on the Field Discovery option only returns Bus. a Discovery , when you click Discover again, the list clears from the Device After Note: Selection table. the Discovery Stop Stops process. available devices, including: Table Devices Displays of the device. • Device Name Name: of the system. • System Name: Name You can sort on this column. of the device. • Address: Address • Type: Type of device. of the device. • Status: Status TheBACnet ID number is the same value used in the Number: • Instance . This value in the Details attribute View. Peer Reference 2 • value Number switches or DIP switches on the Controller : Combined of the rotary device. 3 • Name of the device. Computer : Network hostname 3 • : IP Address of the device. IP Address (no header name) indicates the number of devices discovered. Note: The first column Transfer Summary Screen 306 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

307 Table 133: Transfer to Computer Wizard Description Field the following device information: Information Device Displays 3 • of the device. Computer : Network Name hostname . This value BACnet used in the Peer Number: • Instance is the same ID number value View. in the Details attribute Reference • DHCP-Enabled box: Enables or disables the dynamic IP address. Check or not checked, the static IP fields are editable. When the DHCP Check box is disabled 3 • IP Address of the field device. : IP address 3 • mask for the IP address. used : Subnet IP Mask 3 • Address: IP address IP Router for the field device. of the router the Enabled attribute of the Broadcast Management (BBMD) • BBMD Enabled: Configures Advanced tab. For further information, see Broadcast Management object located in the . Object (BBMD) Screen 2 • of the rotary on the or DIP switches Controller Number : Combined switches value device. name. • Name: Device name is the same as the System Name. The Device Name Note: The default device Object. can be changed from the Advanced tab of the Device • Description: Description of the device. of the device. number • Model: Model Version: Boot Code version. • Boot Code Main Code version. • Main Code Version: name. System Name: • System • CPU Usage: CPU usage. Usage: Memory used by the objects in the device. • Object Memory s status. Device’ • Status: 1 • version of the wireless devices. Firmware Version Radio : Firmware 1 • address of the wireless devices. Address Radio IEEE : IEEE 1 • devices. : Pan ID of the wireless Pan ID 3 • Device Address : Address of the device. references of the device. • Unbound References: Unbound devices, • FC Communication the following field bus Mode: On compatible indicates Wireless, Wired, and Ethernet. communication: N2 Slave, of an application configured in Transfer to Device • Logic Enabled: The logic status True indicates that the logic of an application is enabled; a of . A status (Download) False indicates that the logic of an application is disabled. To modify the Logic status of see status, . Enabled Online Operations until the application do not take effect on the controller is Note: The logic options activated. The status of an application transferred using the Transfer • Background Transfer Status: A status of Idle indicates that the application is activated option. (Download) toDevice of Files are Staged indicates that the application has yet to in the controller; a status pending be activated. Operations . To activate files, see Online • Click to view the status of all SA Bus devices. See Transfer SA Bus Status: this option for more information. to Device Wizard The Code type and Status of the transfer . Operations 307 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

308 Table 133: Transfer to Computer Wizard Field Description status. Status The transfer Moves to the previous screen of the wizard. Previous to the next screen Moves Next of the wizard. This option is disabled if a device with a duplicate Instance Number is selected. Note: Click Finish to start the transfer . Finish/Done Done to close Click the wizard. the wizard without Closes the transfer . Cancel performing Opens the Help system. 1 Appears only when wirelessly connected. 2 Appears only for compatible devices. 3 Appears only for IP devices. 308 Controller Tool Help: Transfer Operations

309 Working with the Trunk Utilities allow you to perform to a computer or device and upgrade multiple devices on the same The Trunk Utilities a transfer as well as mass trunk devices on the same trunk using attribute templates. edit attributes at once, of multiple section. or transfer see the Transfer Operations device, For information on to the computer To transfer to a single the Bulk CAF Upgrade Utility , see the Upgrading System Files section. upgrading a CAF or using Concepts Working with the Trunk Utilities with Trunk Getting Utilities Started Trunk Utilities guidelines and tips: connection types are not supported on controllers that use background • Bluetooth . Please and ZigBee transfer documentation for more information. This restriction affects the transfer of CAFs to controllers refer to controller specifically , the Transfer CAF and Attributes to a Controller , in Trunk Utilities, CAFs to Multiple Controllers , Transfer and Radio Firmware options. Upgrade feature is disabled • The Trunk Utilities for IP controllers. to controllers is disabled for unlicensed devices. This restriction affects of CAFs in Trunk Utilities • The transfer the to a Controller and Transfer CAFs to Multiple Controllers options. Transfer CAF and Attributes a template for the trunk you are working on before you perform multiple transfers to devices or upgrades. • Create with wireless • Do not use Trunk Utilities when you perform Main and Boot Code upgrades. devices you perform transfers to devices, we recommend that you use an FC Bus connection point and • When multiple the MS/TP trunk from the supervisory disconnect . controller • When you have access to a supervisory device, we recommend that you first disable all devices on the trunk. Note: We strongly advise against using an NxE Passthru connection to transfer CAFs to multiple controllers due to potential communication the process. loss during with an application version to the current tool release mode are upgraded. • All controllers prior to or equal version tool release mode are not upgraded, and a Version with an application Controllers later than the current appears. Mismatch message according the general performing multiple transfers to devices of the field bus before to the • Check performance guidelines: following Low performance has a COV - than 500 messages per minute or a token loop time greater than rate greater 3,000 ms. If you have trunk, do not use trunk utilities for Main Code and Boot Code upgrades Note: a low performing the transfer may fail. If you experience because failure, see Recovering a Trunk from a a transfer Multiple Upgrade or Transfer to Device Failure . - Medium performance has a COV rate greater than 400 messages per minute and less than or equal to 500 messages per minute, loop time greater than 2,000 ms and less than or equal to 3,000 ms. or a token High loop time has a COV rate less than or equal to 400 messages per minute and a token - performance to 2,000 of less than or equal ms. information on SA bus performance, see For more . SA Bus Diagnostics Updates to the Trunk Utilities Workflow Some scenarios require that you upgrade devices or transfer code to the device for the workflow to proceed. These scenarios include the following: to upgrade Point Expansion • You are required on the SA Bus to the latest release before you can upgrade Modules the field controller . Figure 49 shows the message that appears notifying you of the mandatory upgrade. 309 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

310 Figure 49: SA Bus Notification scenarios, to transfer the Boot Code to the controller first, regardless of the code • In certain you are required you have chosen. The workflow does not proceed unless options to transfer the Boot Code to the you choose device. Figure 50 shows the notification message of the required transfer to device. Figure 50: Boot Code Notification • For any controllers an updated main code, the Main Code is automatically transferred to the device, requiring regardless of whether you have chosen the option to transfer Main Code. No message appears to notify you of the transfer to the controller . 310 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

311 Transfer CAF and Attributes to Controller CAF and Attributes to Controller through Trunk Utilities allows you to transfer an open CAF file The Transfer option on the same to multiple edit attributes using attribute templates and read/write functionality . trunk devices and mass by selecting Trunk Utilities > Transfer CAF & Attributes to Controller . This Access from the Tools menu this utility when a CAF is open. is only available menu option to Controller option through With the Transfer the application files are transferred CAF and Attributes Trunk Utilities, which efficient than the serial application file transfer in the Transfer CAFs to Multiple Controllers in parallel, is more option. code and working with the attribute template, the utility transfers After to the devices in the selecting the devices order: following Boot Code Transfer: Transfers Boot Code to all selected devices and updates 1. status. the transfer 2. Code Transfer: Transfers Main Code to all selected devices and updates the transfer status. Main Application Code Transfer: Transfers application code and attributes to all selected devices 3. and Attribute status. and updates the transfer During the transfer process, you can use the View Log and View Status options to see the transfer progress. The Force Main Transfer and Force Boot Transfer check boxes allow you to force a Main Note: or Boot Code Code to all selected devices. transfer Transferring to Devices steps and Trunk Utilities - Transfer CAF and Attributes to See the a CAF and Attributes Wizard screens Controller for information on the Transfer CAF and Attributes to Controller and how to sections use it. Transfer CAFs to Multiple Controllers The Transfer CAFs to Multiple Controllers option allows you to transfer multiple CAF files to multiple devices on the same trunk edit attributes using attribute templates and read/write functionality . Access this utility from and mass by selecting Trunk Utilities CAFs to Multiple Controllers. This menu option is only available the Tools menu > Transfer not open. when a CAF is in series, which files are transferred longer than the Transfer CAF and The application can take up to five times to Controller utility option which transfers Attributes files in parallel. application After the devices and specifying the CAF and attribute template to load, the utility transfers code to the selecting in the following order: devices to all selected Boot Transfer: Transfers 1. Code devices and updates the transfer status. Boot Code 2. Main Code Transfer: Transfers Main Code to all selected devices and updates the transfer status. 3. Application and Attribute Transfer: Transfers application code and attributes to all selected devices Code the transfer and updates status. The Force Main Transfer and Force Boot Transfer check boxes Note: you to force a Main Code or Boot allow Code transfer to all selected devices. In some scenarios, you may be required to transfer the Boot Code to the device before proceeding with the workflow . During the transfer to device process, you can use the View Log and View Status options to see the transfer progress. See the Transferring CAFs to Multiple Controllers steps and Trunk Utilities - Transfer CAFs to Multiple Controllers to multiple Wizard sections for information on transferring CAFs screens controllers. 311 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

312 Upgrade Radio Firmware Radio Firmware allows you to upgrade and transfer code for multiple wireless devices on the The Upgrade option Access this utility by selecting Trunk Utilities > Upgrade Radio Firmware. same trunk. from the Tools menu the utility transfers code to the devices in series. selecting After the devices, process, you can use the View Log and View Status to see the progress. If the radio code in a During the transfer or is newer than what is available in your currently installed packages, a message appears in the device matches indicating is not required. to device column Status that a transfer code Transfer Radio you to force a radio check transfer to all selected devices. The Force box allows Upgrading Radio Firmware steps and Trunk Utilities - Upgrade Radio See the Wizard sections for information Firmware on the Upgrade Firmware utility and how to use it. Radio rite Attributes Online Read/W Utility Online attribute allows you to mass edit attributes of online controllers using rite Attributes templates utility The Read/W . Access this utility from the Tools menu by selecting Trunk Utilities > Read/W rite Attributes functionality and read/write If you select this option when a CAF is not open, you cannot add additional attributes. Online. has the same This utility and Device Selection screens as the Transfer to Device wizard. See the Transfer Connection section and parameters, on connection types Operations and device selection details. for information the utility selecting and working with the attribute template, After allows you to open an existing attribute the devices template, edit the attributes, and save the file as a new template. You can then write the attributes back to a single device or multiple all at once. devices Reading and Writing Online steps and Trunk Utilities - Read/Write Attributes Wizard screens See the Attributes on the Read/W rite Attributes Online utility and how to use it. sections for information Manage Attribute Templates Attribute Template utility allows you to edit the attribute template offline. Attribute Templates allows The Manage edit the attributes you to mass devices at once. Access this utility from the Tools menu by selecting Trunk of multiple > Manage Templates. Utilities Attribute Managing Attribute Templates steps and Trunk Utilities - Manage See the Template Tool screens sections Attribute for information on the Attribute Template utility and how to use it. Transfer Controller CAFs to Computer Trunk Utility The Transfer Controller to Computer Trunk Utility allows you to transfer CAFs from multiple devices on the CAFs trunk Trunk Utilities . Access this utility from the Tools menu by selecting same > Transfer Controller to your computer to Computer CAFs . you select the devices and the directory in which After the CAFs, the utility transfers the CAFs from the to save devices to the computer directory . During to computer process, you can use the View Log and View Status options to see the transfer the transfer progress. See the Transfer Controller CAFs to Computer steps and Trunk Utilities - Transfer Controller CAFs to Computer to Computer Wizard sections for information on the Transfer Controller CAFs screens Trunk Utility and how to use it. 312 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

313 Upgrade Controller Trunk Utility Software Multiple Controllers allows you to upgrade CAFs from multiple devices on the same trunk. The Upgrade Trunk Utility from the Tools menu Access > Upgrade Multiple Controllers. This menu option by selecting this utility Trunk Utilities not a CAF is open. when is only available version prior to or equal Note: tool release mode are upgraded. All controllers with an application to the current version later than the current tool release mode Controllers and a with an application are not upgraded, Mismatch appears. Version message the devices the following in which to save the CAFs, the utility performs you select tasks: After and the directory the CAFs from the selected devices to your computer and updates the status. 1. Transfers Upgrades the CAFs to the current 2. of the software and updates the status. version Note: to upgrade Point Expansion Modules on the SA Bus to the latest release before you You are required the field controller . can upgrade the CAFs the status. Boot Code and Main Code, if needed) to the devices and updates 3. (including Transfers upgrading one device first before upgrading an entire trunk. We recommend Note: the process, you can use the View Log and View Status options to see the progress. During See the Upgrading Controllers and Trunk Utilities - Upgrade Controller Software Wizard screens sections Multiple on the Upgrade Controllers for information Trunk Utility and how to use it. Multiple with the Trunk Utilities Steps Working a CAF and Attributes to Devices Transferring 1. Open the CAF you want to transfer to devices. 2. From the Tools menu, select Trunk Utilities > Transfer CAF and Attributes to Controller . The Trunk Utilities - Transfer CAF and Attributes wizard appears with the Connection screen active. to Controller the desired connection and click Next . The Attribute Template appears. 3. Select type and parameters controllers advise using We strongly connection to transfer to multiple against due to Note: an NxE Passthru communication loss during the process. potential Discover to begin the discovery process and locate devices. When devices 4. Click they appear in are located, the main of the Transfer screen. section To stop the Discover click Stop . Note: process, 5. Select the desired devices from the list. If more than one device Note: Instance Number , the numbers display red in the device list. has the same 6. Perform the following optional tasks: • To browse for an existing attribute template file, click the Browse button. Navigate to the location of the template and click . Open file name, click to the correct directory , enter the desired . Navigate and click Save. • To save a template, Save click the Add button (+). • To add a new device, a currently • To remove device, click the Remove button (-). selected • To change the device name, click in the field that contains the existing device name and enter a new name. • To add a new attribute, click the Click To Define New Attribute column heading. A tree representation of the application Select an object from the tree and an attribute from the list and click OK . The appears. parameters are added to the template and appear as a column on the screen. Remove • To remove attribute, right-click the heading and select an existing Attribute . 313 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

314 • To select the attributes with the attribute template, select the check boxes in the attribute heading. to save the devices to save template, select the check boxes in the Selected column. • To select with the attribute state of an attribute only affects the Read and Write Attributes actions. These Note: The selection or device . to controller do not affect the CAF transfer selections Address or Instance • To manually for discovered devices only, edit the text box change the Device Number value. Notes: the device - To auto assign device in the Instance Number column, right-click the Instance of every address and click . Assign heading Number Auto number number instance based on the device values , trunk number , and device - To assign to devices right-click the Instance Number heading and click Assign Calculated Instance. address, transfer to the controller , skip to Step 12. - If this is the initial values from the selected click Read Attributes . 7. To pull current devices, to the values to select use the drop-down menu changes the desired value or edit the field found, 8. To make value. Write Attributes . The updated attributes are sent back to the devices. 9. Click Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the data from the template to another word-processing program, 10. Click as Microsoft such Notepad. dialog Save you made to the attribute template. The Save any changes box appears. 11. Click to retain Save . 12. Click Next . The Transfer 13. Click appears. screen 14. Select the Force Main Transfer and Force or clear check boxes depending on whether you want Boot Transfer to force a Main Code or Boot Code transfer to device. 15. Select or clear boxes next to the devices you want to transfer to. the check Notes: • You are required Expansion Modules on the SA Bus to the latest release before you can to upgrade Point . the field controller upgrade address of every device • To auto assign Number column, right-click the Instance the device in the Instance heading and click Auto Assign . Number instance number values to devices based on the device number , trunk number , and device • To assign right-click Calculated Number heading and click Assign address, Instance. the Instance Yes appears 16. If a message the Boot Code to the device, click requiring and follow instructions you to transfer to transfer the code to the device. 17. Click Finish . The Boot Code, Main Code, and Application (including the CAFs and attribute templates) transfers to the devices. 18. Check of the operation as follows: the progress column. • View the text in the Status View Status . The Status dialog box appears showing current status of the operation. Click Refresh • Click the text to another periodically Click Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the status. to update word-processing program, such as Microsoft Notepad. • Click View Log . The Log dialog box appears showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically word-processing to update To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another Copy program, the log. Click such as Microsoft Notepad. • Click Clear Log if needed. This action clears the contents of the log file. Done 19. When to device completes, click the transfer . 314 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

315 Transferring CAFs Controllers to Multiple Do not use non-configurable (read-only) in an attribute template when transferring multiple Important: attributes so may cause the application to device to fail. CAFs. Doing transfer to controllers against an NxE Passthru connection advise multiple CAFs using Important: We strongly to transfer loss during the process. communication due to potential the guidelines found in Getting Started with Trunk Utilities before proceeding with the following steps. Note: Review no CAF is open in the tool. 1. Make sure Controllers select > Transfer CAFs to Multiple Utilities . The Trunk Utilities - the Tools menu, Trunk 2. From to Multiple Controllers wizard appears Transfer screen active. CAFs with the Connection the desired type and parameters and click Next . The Transfer connection screen appears. 3. Select Template 4. Do one of the following: Discover to begin the discovery process and locate devices. • Click devices are located, they appear When in the main of the Transfer to Device screen. section To stop the Discover process, Stop . Note: click box appears. to select file, if desired. The Open dialog template Browse to and Browse a transfer • Click template, select Open . the transfer and click or clear the check boxes next to the devices you want to transfer to. 5. Select You are required to upgrade Point Expansion Modules on the SA Bus to the latest release Note: you before can upgrade . the field controller right-click the device device in the Instance Number column, of every the Instance To auto assign address heading and click Auto Assign. Number instance number values To assign based on the device number , trunk number , and device to devices address, right-click the Instance Number heading and click Assign Calculated Instance. 6. If you imported a device from a transfer template, select the device and click Get Device Info . The Get Device Info button only works that were imported from a transfer template. This is because the transfer for devices does not store model or Boot and Main Code versions. template the device tasks: the following 7. Perform to open an existing transfer template file, if desired. The Open dialog • Click Browse Browse box appears. the transfer template, and click Open . to and select To choose an application or attribute template file different than the template, Note: do so after selecting the transfer template. file name, click to the correct directory , enter the desired . Navigate and click Save . • To save a template, Save the device name, click in the field that contains • To change device name and enter a new name. the existing • To manually the Device Address or Instance change for discovered devices only, edit the field Number value. • Click the Browse button in the Application column for a device. The Open dialog box appears. Browse to and select a CAF to transfer and click Open . to the device, for a device. the in the Attribute Template column button The Open dialog box appears. • Click Browse to and select an attribute template to transfer to the device, and click Browse . Open 8. Select the Force Main Transfer and Force or clear Transfer check boxes depending on whether you Boot want to force a Main Code or Boot Code transfer to the device. transfer Note: you must select a Boot Code scenarios, to device or the transfer does not progress. In some This forced transfer to the device ensures proper operation of the application. dialog 9. Click to retain any changes you made to the transfer template. The Save Save box appears. 10. Click Save . 315 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

316 11. Click Finish Main Code, and Application (including the CAF and attribute templates) transfers . The Boot Code, to the devices. 12. Check as follows: the progress of the transfers • View the text in the Status column. dialog box appears showing current status of the operation. Click Refresh View Status • Click . The Status the status. Click To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another periodically Copy to update as Microsoft Notepad. such word-processing program, . The Log dialog • Click showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically View Log box appears the log. Click To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another word-processing program, to update Copy as Microsoft Notepad. such Log if needed. • Click clears the contents of the log file. Clear This action the transfer is complete, click Done . 13. When Note: If you experience to device failure, see Recovering a Trunk from a Multiple Upgrade or Transfer a transfer Failure . to Device Firmware Upgrading Radio select Trunk Utilities > Upgrade Radio Firmware . The Trunk Utilities 1. From Radio the Tools menu, - Upgrade wizard appears with the Connection screen active. Firmware the connection type and parameters and click Next . The Transfer to Device 2. Select appears. screen Note: advise against using an NxE Passthru connection to transfer to multiple controllers due to We strongly communication the process. potential loss during When Discover the discovery process 3. Click devices. to begin devices are located, they appear in and locate the main section of the Transfer to Device screen. Note: To end the Discover click Stop . process, the desired devices 4. Select from the list. than one device Instance Number , the numbers display red in the device list. If more has the same Note: the Force 5. Select Transfer check box depending on whether you want to force a radio code transfer or clear Radio to device. or clear check boxes next to the devices you want 6. Select to. to transfer 7. If you imported from a transfer template, select the device and click Get Device Info . The Get Device a device only works from a transfer that were imported Info button template. This is because the transfer for devices template not store the device model or boot, main, and radio code versions. does 8. Click Finish . The radio code transfers to the devices. 9. Check the progress as follows: of the operation column. • View the text in the Status View Status . The Status dialog box appears showing current status of the operation. Click Refresh • Click the text to another periodically Click Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the status. to update word-processing program, such as Microsoft Notepad. • Click View Log . The Log dialog box appears showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically word-processing to update To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another Copy program, the log. Click such as Microsoft Notepad. • Click Clear Log if needed. This action clears the contents of the log file. Done 10. When to device completes, click the transfer . 316 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

317 Reading and Writing Online Attributes allows you to mass of online controllers at once. This procedure edit attributes select 1. From > Read/W rite Attributes Online . The Trunk Utilities - Read/W rite Trunk the Tools menu, Utilities with the Connection active. appears Attributes wizard screen type and parameters and click connection . The Attribute Template screen appears. the desired 2. Select Next advise against using an NxE Passthru Note: to transfer to multiple controllers due to We strongly connection communication the process. potential loss during to begin they appear process and locate devices. When devices are located, Discover in the discovery 3. Click of the Attribute Template screen. section the main Note: To stop the Discover process, click Stop. the devices from the list. 4. Select If more Note: has the same Instance Number , the numbers display red in the device list. than one device the following tasks: 5. Perform of the attribute file, click the Browse button. • To browse to the location template for an existing Navigate and click Open . template a template, click the Save button. Navigate to the correct directory , enter a file name, and click • To save . Save click the Add button (+). • To add a new device, a currently device, click the Remove button (-). • To remove selected the device name within the template, click in the field that contains the existing template • To change name and enter a new name. during The device and instance number Note: name a transfer to device process. These are only written values cannot be written during a read/write operation. • To add a new attribute, click the To Define New Attribute column heading. A tree representation of Click appears. Choose element, and attribute from the tree and click OK . The the application the module, to the template on the screen. as a column are added parameters and appear you must To add a new attribute, a CAF open before you select Read/W rite Attributes. Note: have an existing attribute, right-click the heading and select Remove Attribute . • To remove The Discovered Note: indicates whether the device is added due to device discovery . column change for discovered Address or Instance Number • To manually devices only, edit the field the Device value. Notes: the device address of every device - To auto assign Number column, right-click the Instance in the Instance Number heading and click Auto Assign. - To assign instance values to devices based on the device number , trunk number , and device number right-click Number address, heading and click Assign Calculated Instance. the Instance 6. To pull current from the selected devices, click Read Attributes . values 7. To make changes to the values found, use the drop-down menu to select the desired value or edit the field value. 8. Click . The updated attributes are sent back to the devices. Write Attributes Copy 9. Click to copy and paste the data from the template to another word-processing program, To Clipboard such as Microsoft Notepad. The Save 10. Click to retain any changes you made to the attribute template. Save dialog box appears. 317 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

318 11. Click Save . modifications are complete, Finish . The wizard closes. 12. When click Templates Managing Attribute Trunk Utilities > Manage Attribute Templates. The Attribute Template Utility appears. the Tools menu, 1. From select to open an existing attribute template file. or browse view as necessary 2. Edit the current a CAF is not loaded, you cannot add attributes. You may only remove attributes or add, delete, or Note: When modify the devices. 3. Perform as desired: the following tasks attribute file, click the Browse button. Navigate to the location of the for an existing • To browse template Open . template and click , enter click the button. Navigate to the correct directory Save a file name, and click Save . • To save a template, click the Add button (+). • To add a new device, • To remove a currently device, click the Remove button (-). selected the device name, the existing device name and enter a new name. • To change click in the field that contains selected is opened, of the row when the template the default click the Selected option. • To indicate state click the To Define New Attribute column heading. A tree representation of • To add a new attribute, Click appears. Select an object from the tree and an attribute from the list and click OK the application . The parameters to the template and appear as a column on the screen. are added of all the possible appears in a tree format. The default view of this tree shows A tree representation points set up to BACnet exposed, which is indicated by the green dot next to each only points At the top of point. the Select view, a Show All check box is available. Attribute you select the check box, every possible Once point in the application is available for use. Once you select a point, the list of point attributes appears in the right hand panel Note that at Release 6.0, you can select the present value of hardware points. for selection. Make sure that the attribute is not written to by a higher priority point (such as the Note: you are selecting or the output module). Input While this attribute is changed, it has no effect of a calculation Network of the higher priority command. because on the application an existing attribute, right-click the heading and select Remove Attribute . • To remove change the Device Address or Instance Number for discovered devices only, edit the text box • To manually value. Notes: the device address of every device in the Instance Number column, right-click the Instance - To auto assign heading and click Auto Assign. Number on the device instance values to devices - To assign number number , trunk number , and device based address, right-click the Instance Number heading and click Assign Calculated Instance. 4. Click Save any changes you made to the attribute template. The Save dialog box appears. to retain Save 5. Click . Changing an attribute with the Attribute Template changes the value Note: only, not the controller . in the template To change the value on the controller , use the Read/W rite Attributes wizard. 6. When modifications are complete, click Close . The wizard closes. Transfer Controller to Computer CAFs a folder 1. Create where you would like to save the CAFs. on your local computer 2. From the Tools menu, select Trunk Utilities > Transfer Controller CAFs to Computer . The Trunk Utilities - with the Connection Transfer CAFs to Computer wizard appears Controller screen active. 318 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

319 3. Select the desired type and parameters and click Next . The Controller Transfer screen appears. connection 4. Do one of the following: Click the discovery process and locate devices. When devices are located, they appear Discover to begin • screen. of the Transfer section in the main To stop the Discover process, click Stop . Note: to select a template file, if desired. The Open dialog box appears. Browse to and select the • Click Browse and click . template, transfer Open from the list. 5. Select the devices than one device red in the device Instance Number , the numbers display If more list. Note: has the same or clear boxes next to the devices you want to transfer CAFs from to the computer . 6. Select check the Browse button next to the Directory to Save Files to Computer 7. Click The Select Directory dialog box field. appears. to and select the desired in which to transfer the device CAFs from to the computer , and click 8. Browse directory . Open 9. If you imported template, select the device and click Get Device Info . The Get Device a device from a transfer for devices that were imported from a transfer template. This is because the transfer only works Info button template not store the device model or Boot and Main Code versions. does 10. Click . The CAF transfer process to computer begins. Finish the progress to computer as follows: 11. Check of the transfer column. • View the text in the Status current View Status • Click box appears showing . The Status status of the operation. Click Refresh dialog periodically to update the status. Click Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another word-processing program, as Microsoft Notepad. such View Log . The Log dialog showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically • Click box appears Copy word-processing to copy and paste the text to another the log. Click program, to update To Clipboard Notepad. as Microsoft such Log if needed. • Click clears the contents of the log file. Clear This action the transfer to computer completes, 12. When Done . click Upgrading Controllers Multiple to upgrade We strongly using an NxE Passthru connection against multiple controllers due to Important: advise communication loss during potential the process. Note: the guidelines found in Getting Review with Trunk Utilities before proceeding with the following steps. Started Note: All controllers with an application version prior to or equal to the current controller tool release version are upgraded. Controllers version later than the current controller tool release version are not with an application and a Version message appears. upgraded, Mismatch sure no CAF is open in the tool. 1. Make 2. From select Trunk Utilities > Upgrade Multiple Controllers . The Trunk Utilities - Upgrade the Tools menu, Multiple Controllers wizard appears with the Connection screen active. . The Controller 3. Select type and parameters and click Next connection Upgrade screen appears. the desired 4. Do one of the following: • Click Discover to begin the discovery process and locate devices. When devices are located, they appear in the main section of the Upgrade screen. 319 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

320 Note: To stop the Discover click Stop. process, Browse to select file, if desired. The Open dialog box appears. Browse to and select the • Click a template Open template, . and click 5. Select the devices from the list. Note: Instance Number , the numbers display red in the device list. If more than one device has the same boxes next to the devices you want to upgrade. check or clear 6. Select to upgrade Point Expansion Modules on the SA Bus to the latest release before Note: You are required you the field controller can upgrade . Browse box next to the Directory to Save Files to Computer field. The Select Directory dialog the 7. Click button appears. CAFs, directory in which to save the device the desired and click Open . to and select 8. Browse a device from a transfer template, 9. If you imported the device and click Get Device Info . The Get Device select Info button for devices that were imported from a transfer template. This is because the transfer only works does not store model or Boot and Main Code versions. template the device . The upgrade begins. Finish process 10. Click the CAFs from the selected 11. The utility to the computer , then upgrades the CAFs to the first transfers devices version of the software, and lastly transfers the CAF (including Boot Code and Main Code) current to the back devices. the progress as follows: 12. Check of the upgrade • View the text in the Status column. View Status . The Status dialog box appears showing the current status • Click Click Refresh of the operation. periodically to update the status. Click Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another word-processing program, such as Microsoft Notepad. • Click View Log box appears showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically . The Log dialog the log. Click Copy to copy and paste the text to another word-processing program, to update To Clipboard Notepad. as Microsoft such Log if needed. This action clears the contents • Click Clear of the log file. the upgrades complete, click Done . 13. When If you experience problems with the upgrade, see Recovering Note: Upgrade or Transfer a Trunk from a Multiple to Device . Failure a Trunk a Multiple Upgrade or Transfer to Device Failure Recovering from sure no CAF is open in the tool. 1. Make to Multiple the Tools menu, Trunk Utilities > Transfer CAFs select Controller s . The Trunk Utilities - 2. From Transfer CAFs to Multiple Controllers wizard appears with the Connection screen active. 3. Select the desired type and parameters and click Next . The Transfer Template screen appears. connection Browse Open a transfer template file and click 4. Click . to select in the directory If you were Note: and did not save a template, you can find a template performing an upgrade of CAFs that you transferred to the computer . 5. Select the devices and click Get Device Info . The Get Device Info button only works for devices that were the device imported This is because the transfer template does not store template. model or from a transfer Boot and Main Code versions. 6. From the Tools menu, select Trunk Utilities > Transfer CAFs to Multiple Controllers . The Trunk Utilities - with the Connection Transfer to Multiple Controllers wizard appears CAFs screen active. 320 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

321 • To change the device click in the field that contains the existing device name and enter a new name. name, change the Device or Instance Number for discovered devices only, edit the text box • To manually Address value. the in the Application column for a device. The Open dialog box appears. Browse to button Browse • Click to the device, and click Open . CAF to transfer the desired and select Browse button in the Attribute Template column for a device. The Open dialog box appears. • Click the to and select the desired template to transfer to the device, and click Open . Browse attribute connection screen and click Next . The Transfer Template the desired appears. 7. Select type and parameters or the transfer scenarios, select a Boot Code transfer to device In some to device does not Note: you must This forced transfer to device ensures proper operation of the application. progress. Browse a transfer 8. Click template file and click Open . to select If you were performing and did not save a template, you can find a template in the directory Note: an upgrade to the computer that you transferred . of CAFs and click Get Device Info . The Get Device Info button only works for devices that were 9. Select the devices not store template. the transfer template does This is because the device model or from a transfer imported Code versions. Boot and Main the following 10. Perform tasks: the device name, click in the field that contains the existing device name and enter a new name. • To change change Address or Instance Number for discovered devices only, edit the field • To manually the Device value. Browse the button in the Application • Click for a device. The Open dialog box appears. Browse to column and select the desired CAF to transfer to the device, and click Open . • Click the Browse button in the Attribute Template column for a device. The Open dialog box appears. Browse to and select attribute template to transfer to the device, and click Open . the desired on whether or clear Main Transfer and Force Boot Transfer check boxes depending Force you 11. Select the to force a Main Code or Boot Code transfer to device. want In some scenarios, you must select a Boot Code transfer to device or the transfer to device does not Note: This forced progress. to device ensures proper operation of the application. transfer Save box appears. any changes you made to the transfer template. The Save dialog 12. Click to retain Save 13. Click . Finish . The Boot Code, Main Code, 14. Click (including the CAFs and attribute templates) transfer and Application to the devices. Note: If you experience problems transferring Main Code to a large number of devices, consider breaking the number of devices to into smaller groups. you are transferring the progress to device as follows: 15. Check of the transfer • View the text in the Status column. View Status . The Status dialog box appears showing current status of the operation. Click • Click Refresh periodically the status. Click Copy To Clipboard to copy to update the text to another and paste word-processing program, such as Microsoft Notepad. • Click View Log . The Log dialog box appears showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically word-processing to update To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another Copy program, the log. Click such as Microsoft Notepad. • Click Clear Log if needed. This action clears the contents of the log file. 16. When the transfer completes, click Done . 321 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

322 Working with the Trunk Utilities Screens Utilities Trunk to Controller Wizard - Transfer CAF and Attributes to Controller through Trunk Utilities, the application files are CAF and Attributes option If you use the Transfer in parallel. This is more efficient than the serial application file transfer to controllers in the transferred to controllers to Multiple Transfer option. CAFs Controllers - Transfer CAF and Attributes Utilities Wizard Table 134: Trunk to Controller Description Field Connection Screen the type of connection to use: Connection Type Select • NxE Passthru advise an NxE Passthru connection to transfer to against Note: We strongly using communication loss during multiple controllers due to potential the process. • Bluetooth 4.2+/BACnet • MAP Router • ZigBee : Specify the following: Parameters Connection NxE Passthru host name or IP Address. Address: • Host name/IP The device to log in to the site. • Username and password The user name and Password: you to connect Note: to a site by entering in the The NxE Passthru fields allows directly site's user name and password. a list of discovered devices. Displays Device: • Supervisor supervisory for the selected supervisory device. • Trunk: Displays a list of trunks : Specify radio port and baud rate to use. Product Type Bluetooth buttons allows the COM a communication between you to choose Metasys or Facility Explorer based parameter products. controller MAP 4.2+ / BACnet Router : Use to specify the following: • IP address and UDP port of the router . • Network number trunk (1-65,534). of the MS/TP Do not use 1001 for the MS/TP Number . The MS/TP Network Number Note: Network for Johnson IP network is reserved connections. 1001 Controls Ethernet interface adapter to use. • An available network If you select an available Ethernet network interface, all IP traffic intended for Note: the MAP 4.2+/ Router travels through this interface. BACnet you first open the default connection parameters for connecting to a MAP When the wizard, at version 4.2 are automatically displayed. Gateway parameters are If the connection modified, the values are stored in the wizard for future use. To restore the connection parameters to the default values, click the MAP 4.2 Default button. Note: For further about the MAP and common troubleshooting issues, refer information Mobile Guide Portal Gateway User's to the (LIT-1201 1999). Access ZigBee the Personal Area Network (PAN) Offset. Product Type radio buttons : Specify allows you to choose a communication parameter between Metasys or Facility Explorer based products. controller Connected - Attribute Template Screen Select the directory and file name of the attribute template file. Browse Button file. Browse and type a file name to save the attribute template for a directory Save Button 322 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

323 Table 134: Trunk to Controller Wizard Utilities - Transfer CAF and Attributes Description Field including: Table Devices Available devices, new device to the list. (+) Add Device • : Adds selected from list. • device Remove Device (-) : Removes if the device is added due to device • Discovered Check Box : Indicates discovery box). (empty manually box) or added (selected name of the device. • Device Name : Editable device : MS/TP • Device Address address. ID) the BACnet ID of the device. (BACnet • : Displays Instance Number Instance Number , the numbers display Note: If more than one device has the same list. red in the device is selected (selected box) or not selected if the device box). Selected • : Indicates (empty New Attribute : Opens a tree representation of the application allowing • Click To Define file. you to select to add to the template parameters values Reads Read Attributes Button from the selected current devices. to the devices. Write Attributes Button attributes Writes updated back the text to another word-processing program, Copies Notepad. Copy to Clipboard Button and pastes such as Microsoft the Discovery for locating devices. Discovery Button process Starts process. Stop Button the Discovery Stops Screen Transfer the directory Select template file. Browse Button and file name of the transfer for a directory to save the transfer template file. Save Button Browse and type a file name a Main Code Box to controller . If this check box is not selected, the Main Code Check Transfer Main Force Force transfer box is selected, the If the check is different. only if the code to the device is transferred Main Code is always transferred to the device. Select a Boot Code to the device. If this check box is not selected, the to force Box Check Boot Transfer Force transfer the Boot Code If this check to the device. transferred is never Boot Code box is selected, is always transferred to the device. devices, including: Table Devices Available if the device (selected box) or not selected (empty box). : Indicates • Selected is selected if the devices were discovered. • Discovered : Indicates name Name • of the device. : Editable • of the device. the model : Indicates Model number Version : Indicates the Main Code version in the device. • Main Code Version • the Boot Code version in the device. Boot Code : Indicates : MS/TP device address. Device • Address Number (BACnet ID) : BACnet ID of the device. • Instance than one device Number , the numbers display Instance If more Note: has the same red in the device list. the status of the transfer operation after the Finish button is selected. • Status : Indicates of the operation. the dialog box showing the current status Status Click Refresh Opens Button View Status the status. Click Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to periodically to update program, Notepad. word-processing another as Microsoft such the Log View Log Button box showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically Opens dialog the log. Click Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another program, to update as Microsoft Notepad. such 323 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

324 Table 134: Trunk Utilities CAF and Attributes to Controller Wizard - Transfer Field Description of the log file. Clear Log Button all contents Clears from a transfer template (the transfer template does not store the Get Device Info Button Use for devices imported versions). The Get Device Info button retrieves Code or the boot and Main model device from the actual device the boot and Main to the device can be Code values so a transfer done. properly the Discovery for locating devices. Discovery Button Starts process the Discovery process. Stop Button Stops Navigation Buttons to the previous screen of the wizard. Moves Previous Moves to the next screen of the wizard. Next Click Finish to start the transfer . Finish/Done Done to close Click the wizard. the wizard performing the transfer . Cancel Closes without Opens the Help system. Utilities - Transfer CAFs to Multiple Trunk Wizard Controllers Table 135: Trunk - Transfer CAFs to Multiple Controllers Utilities Wizard Description Field Connection Screen Use to specify the connection type to use: Type Connection • NxE Passthru We strongly against using an Ethernet Passthrough connection to advise Note: controllers due to potential communication loss during the transfer to multiple process. • Bluetooth • MAP 4.2+/BACnet Router • ZigBee 324 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

325 Table 135: Trunk CAFs to Multiple Controllers Wizard Utilities - Transfer Description Field Use to specify the following: Parameters Connection NxE Passthru: the device host name Address: • Host name/IP Indicates or IP Address. and password Indicates and Password: to log in to the site • Username the user name directly to a site by entering Note: you to connect allows fields The Ethernet in the site's user name and password. supervisory devices. • Supervisor Device: Displays a list of discovered supervisory Displays • Trunk: a list of trunks for the selected device. rate to use. port and baud the COM : Use to specify Bluetooth MAP Router : Use to specify the following: 4.2+ / BACnet . • IP address and UDP port of the router of the MS/TP trunk • Network number (1-65,534). Network Do not use 1001 Network Number Note: Number for the MS/TP . The MS/TP IP network Controls connections. for Johnson is reserved 1001 • An available to use. Ethernet network interface adapter Ethernet Note: interface, all IP traffic intended for If you select an available network BACnet travels through this interface. the MAP 4.2+/ Router the wizard, connection parameters for connecting to a MAP you first open When the default 4.2 are automatically displayed. If the connection parameters are Gateway at version are stored the values the connection modified, in the wizard for future use. To restore MAP button. click the 4.2 Default values, to the default parameters the MAP Note: troubleshooting issues, refer For further information about and common Portal Gateway User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). to the Mobile Access Area (PAN) Offset. the Personal : Use to specify Network ZigBee Transfer Screen the directory and file name of the transfer template file. Browse Button Use to select you to browse for a directory and type a file name to save the transfer attribute Prompts Save Button template file. Use to force a Main transfer to the device. If this check box is not selected, the Main Box Check Transfer Main Force Code is different. box is selected, Code is transferred to the device only if the code If the check the Main to the device. transferred is always Code Use to force a Boot Code transfer to the device. If this check box is not selected, the Boot Box Check Transfer Boot Force to the device. box is selected, is Code is never transferred If this check the Boot Code to the device. transferred always 325 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

326 Table 135: Trunk Utilities CAFs to Multiple Controllers Wizard - Transfer Field Description including: Table Available Devices devices, is selected (selected (empty : Determines Selected • if the device box) or not selected box). is added if the device discovery (selected box) or : Indicates Discovered • due to device added from a template (empty box). of the device. name • Name : Editable number • of the device. the model : Indicates Model : Indicates • Code version in the device. Main Code Version the Main Version : Indicates the Boot Code version in the device. • Boot Code : MS/TP • address. Device Address device (BACnet Instance ID of the device. ID) • Number : BACnet Instance has the same , the numbers display than one device If more Note: Number red in the device list. to and select the desired CAF to transfer to the device. • Application : Use to browse : Use to browse Attribute the desired attribute template to • Template to and select transfer to the device. after the Finish of the transfer to device operation • button Status the status : Indicates is selected. Opens the Status dialog box showing the current status of the operation. Click Refresh Button View Status the status. Click to copy and paste the text to Copy To Clipboard periodically to update as Microsoft such program, word-processing Notepad. another box showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh Opens View Log Button the Log dialog periodically Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another the log. Click to update such as Microsoft Notepad. word-processing program, all contents Clear Log Button of the log file. Clears imported from a transfer template (the transfer template does not store Get Device Info Button Use for devices the or the Boot and Main Code versions). The Get Device Info button retrieves model device values from the actual device so a transfer to device can be properly the boot and Main Code done. Starts process for locating devices. Discovery Button the Discovery the Discovery Stop Button Stops process. Buttons Navigation to the previous Moves of the wizard. Previous screen Moves to the next screen of the wizard. Next Finish starts the transfer to the device. Finish/Done appears to the device completes. Click Done to close the wizard. Done after the transfer Closes the wizard without performing the transfer . Cancel Opens the Help system. 326 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

327 Trunk - Upgrade Firmware Wizard Utilities Radio - Upgrade Wizard Firmware Utilities Radio Table 136: Trunk Description Field Connection Screen Type Use to specify Connection type to use: the connection • NxE Passthru using Note: connection to transfer to multiple controllers We strongly advise against an NxE Passthru the process. loss during communication due to potential • Bluetooth • MAP 4.2+/BACnet Router • ZigBee : Use to specify the following: Connection NxE Passthru Parameters Indicates or IP Address. • Host name/IP the device Address: host name and password to log in to the site Indicates and Password: • Username the user name allows you to connect directly to a site by entering in the site's user name and Note: The Ethernet fields password. Displays devices. • Supervisor a list of discovered Device: supervisory supervisory device. a list of trunks Displays • Trunk: for the selected port and baud rate to use. Bluetooth : Use to specify the COM Use to specify Router: MAP 4.2+ / BACnet the following: • IP address and UDP port of the router . trunk (1-65,534). • Network number of the MS/TP Network Network . The MS/TP for the MS/TP Number 1001 is reserved Note: Do not use 1001 Number IP network Controls for Johnson connections. • An available Ethernet network interface adapter to use. an available Ethernet network interface, all IP traffic intended for the MAP 4.2+/ Note: If you select travels BACnet Router through this interface. the default you first open for connecting to a MAP Gateway at When connection the wizard, parameters parameters are modified, the values are stored in displayed. 4.2 are automatically version If the connection the connection parameters to the default values, click the the wizard 4.2 for future use. To restore MAP Default button. about the MAP and common troubleshooting issues, refer to the Mobile For further Note: information User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). Gateway Portal Access the Personal Area Network (PAN) Offset. ZigBee : Use to specify Transfer Screen the directory of the transfer template file. Browse Button Use to select and file name you to browse Prompts and type a file name to save the transfer template file. Save Button for a directory Use to force a radio code transfer to device. If this check box is not selected, the radio code is transferred Radio Force only if the code is different. box is selected, the radio code is always transferred Check If the check to the device Transfer to the device. Box 327 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

328 Table 136: Trunk Firmware Wizard Utilities - Upgrade Radio Description Field including: Table Devices Available devices, is selected box) or not selected (empty box). if the device • Selected : Determines (selected is added due to device discovery (selected box) or added from a • Discovered : Indicates if the device template (empty box). Name name • of the device. : Editable number the model of the device. : Indicates Model • : Indicates • Code version in the device. Main Code Version the Main Version : Indicates the Boot Code version in the device. • Boot Code Version Firmware code version in the device. Radio • : Indicates the radio device : MS/TP address. Address Device • • : BACnet ID of the device. Instance Number (BACnet ID) has the same Instance Number , the numbers display red in the device Note: If more than one device list. : Indicates of the transfer operation after the Finish button is selected. Status • the status the Status View Status box showing the current status of the operation. Click Refresh periodically to update Opens dialog Click Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another word-processing program, such Button the status. Notepad. as Microsoft to update box showing log file. Click Refresh periodically operation the the Log dialog the detailed Opens View Log Button log. Click and paste the text to another word-processing program, such as Copy To Clipboard to copy Notepad. Microsoft all contents of the log file. Clear Log Button Clears the device imported (the transfer template does not store template model or from a transfer Use for devices Get Device Info code versions). The Get Device Info button retrieves the boot, main, and radio the boot, main, Button and radio device so a transfer to device can be properly done. code values from the actual Starts the Discovery for locating devices. Discovery Button process the Discovery Stop Button Stops process. Buttons Navigation to the previous Moves of the wizard. Previous screen Moves to the next screen of the wizard. Next Finish starts the transfer . Finish/Done appears completes. Click Done to close the wizard. Done after the transfer Closes the wizard without performing the transfer . Cancel Opens the Help system. 328 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

329 Trunk - Read/W Wizard Utilities rite Attributes - Read/W Wizard Utilities rite Attributes Table 137: Trunk Description Field Connection Screen Type Use to specify Connection type to use: the connection • NxE Passthru using an NxE Passthru Note: to transfer to We strongly advise against connection communication the process. multiple controllers due to potential loss during • Bluetooth 4.2+/BACnet • MAP Router • ZigBee : Use to specify the following: Parameters Connection NxE Passthru the device host name Address: • Host name/IP Indicates or IP Address. the user name to log in to the site. Indicates and Password: • Username and password allows you to connect directly to a site by entering in the Note: The NxE Passthru fields user name site's and password. • Supervisor devices. Device: a list of discovered Displays supervisory supervisory device. for the selected Displays • Trunk: a list of trunks port and baud rate to use. Product Type radio buttons Bluetooth : Use to specify the COM parameter Metasys or Facility Explorer a communication allows you to choose between based controller products. : Use to specify Router MAP 4.2+ / BACnet the following: . • IP address and UDP port of the router trunk of the MS/TP (1-65,534). number • Network Network Note: . The MS/TP Network Number Do not use 1001 for the MS/TP Number for Johnson Controls IP network connections. 1001 is reserved network Ethernet to use. • An available interface adapter Ethernet network all IP traffic intended for If you select Note: an available interface, travels through this interface. BACnet 4.2+/ the MAP Router the default connection parameters for connecting to a MAP When you first open the wizard, displayed. 4.2 are automatically parameters are Gateway at version If the connection in the wizard the connection use. To restore are stored modified, the values for future values, MAP 4.2 Default button. to the default parameters click the information about the MAP and common troubleshooting issues, refer Note: For further to the Access Gateway User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). Portal Mobile the Personal Area Network Type radio buttons ZigBee : Use to specify (PAN) Offset. Product parameter or Facility Metasys a communication Explorer allows you to choose between controller based products. Attribute Template Screen Use to select the directory and file name of the attribute template file. Browse Button Prompts for a directory and type a file name to save the attribute template you to browse Save Button file. 329 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

330 Table 137: Trunk Utilities rite Attributes Wizard - Read/W Field Description including: Table Available Devices devices, new device (+) Add Device • to the list. : Adds selected • from list. : Removes (-) Device Remove device : Indicates if the device is added • discovery Discovered Check Box due to device (empty (selected box) or added manually box). : Editable of the device. Name Device • name • device address. Device Address : MS/TP Number ID of the device. • Instance : BACnet has the same Number , the numbers display than one device Instance Note: If more red in the device list. if the device is selected (selected box) or not selected (empty • Selected : Indicates box). To Define : Opens a tree representation of the application allowing New Attribute • Click file. to add to the template parameters you to select Reads current values from the selected devices. Read Attributes Button Writes updated attributes to the devices. Write Attributes Button back and pastes word-processing program, such as Microsoft Notepad. Copy to Clipboard Button Copies the text to another the Discovery process for locating devices. Discovery Button Starts Stops the Discovery Stop Button process. Buttons Navigation to the previous screen. Previous Moves Moves Next to the next screen. Closes the wizard. Finish Closes the wizard without saving. Cancel Opens the Help system. Utilities Attribute Template Tool Trunk - Manage Utilities - Manage Table 138: Trunk Template Tool Attribute Description Field Attribute Template Screen Use to select the directory and file name of the attribute template file. Browse Button Prompts for a directory and type a file name to save the attribute template you to browse Save Button file. 330 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

331 Table 138: Trunk Utilities Attribute Template Tool - Manage Field Description including: Available Table Devices devices, new device (+) Add Device to the list. • : Adds selected • from list. : Removes (-) Device Remove device : Indicates if the device is added due to device discovery • Discovered Check Box box). box) or added (selected manually (empty name • of the device. : Editable Name Device • address. Device Address : MS/TP device : BACnet ID of the device. • Instance Number has the same If more Number , the numbers display Note: than one device Instance list. red in the device if the device is selected (selected box) or not selected (empty box). Selected : Indicates • New Attribute a tree representation of the application allowing To Define Click • : Opens file. you to select parameters to add to the template the wizard. Closes Close the Help system. Opens Attribute Box Select Dialog Attribute dialog This Select by the Transfer CAF and Attributes to Controller , Read/W rite Attributes box is used Online, and Attribute Template utilities. The dialog box displays a representation of all the possible points in a tree format. Table 139: Select Dialog Box Attribute Field Description only BACnet exposed points appear is not selected, Show All If this option Use to view all points. . the selection tree based on the node name. The search results Filter a field to search Provides node include the matching and its ancestors. Saves and closes the dialog box. OK the selections the dialog Cancel saving. Closes box without the Help system. Opens Host Name and IP Address List Dialog Box Manage The Manage Host Name and IP Address List dialog box allows you to enter descriptions for and save multiple host names and IP addresses. entries then appear in the drop-down box next to the Host Name/IP Address These . parameter Host Name/IP Address List Dialog Box Table 140: Manage Description Field Use to enter a description for the host name or IP address. Description Host name and allows you to edit the entry. Host Name/IP Address or IP address Adds or removes host names or IP addresses. + / - Saves the selections and closes the dialog box. OK 331 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

332 Table 140: Manage Name/IP List Dialog Box Host Address Description Field saving. Cancel the dialog Closes box without the Help system. Opens Utilities Trunk Controller CAFs to Computer Wizard - Transfer - Transfer Controller CAFs Table 141: Trunk Wizard Utilities to Computer Field Description Connection Screen Use to specify type to use: the connection Connection Type • NxE Passthru • Bluetooth Router • MAP 4.2+/BACnet • ZigBee : Use to specify the following: Parameters Connection NxE Passthru the device or IP Address. Indicates • Host name/IP Address: host name the user name and password to log in to the site. • Username and Password: Indicates allows you to connect to a site by entering in the The NxE Passthru Note: fields directly and password. user name site's • Supervisor Displays a list of discovered supervisory devices. Device: for the selected supervisory device. • Trunk: Displays a list of trunks port and baud the COM Bluetooth : Use to specify rate to use. : Use to specify the following: MAP 4.2+ / BACnet Router . port of the router • IP address and UDP trunk (1-65,534). number of the MS/TP • Network Network Number . The MS/TP Network Number Do not use 1001 Note: for the MS/TP for Johnson Controls IP network connections. 1001 is reserved network Ethernet to use. • An available interface adapter Ethernet network all IP traffic intended for If you select Note: an available interface, travels through this interface. BACnet 4.2+/ the MAP Router the default connection parameters for connecting to a MAP When you first open the wizard, displayed. 4.2 are automatically parameters are Gateway at version If the connection in the wizard the connection use. To restore are stored modified, the values for future values, MAP 4.2 Default button. to the default parameters click the information about the MAP and common troubleshooting issues, refer Note: For further Access Portal User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). to the Mobile Gateway the Personal Network (PAN) Offset. : Use to specify ZigBee Area Transfer to Computer Screen Use to browse to and select the desired directory in which to transfer the device CAFs to to Files to Save Directory in the field. directory . The selected the computer Computer Text Box and Browse appears Button Use to select the directory and file name of the transfer template file. Browse Button 332 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

333 Table 141: Trunk Utilities Controller CAFs to Computer Wizard - Transfer Field Description and type a file name to save the transfer template for a directory Save Button Prompts you to browse file. including: Table Devices Available devices, is selected box) or not selected (empty box). if the device • Selected : Indicates (selected is added due to device discovery (selected box) or • Discovered : Indicates if the device box). added from a template (empty • of the device. : Name Name number the model of the device. : Indicates Model • : Indicates • Code version in the device. Main Code Version the Main Version : Indicates the Boot Code version • Boot Code in the device. Address device address. • Device : MS/TP (BACnet ID) ID of the device. • Instance Number : BACnet Instance , the numbers display has the same Number than one device If more Note: red in the device list. of the transfer to computer operation after the Finish button Status : Indicates • the status is selected. the Status Opens box showing the current status of the operation. Click Refresh Button View Status dialog Click To Clipboard the status. to copy and paste the text to periodically Copy to update such as Microsoft Notepad. program, another word-processing Opens the Log dialog box showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically View Log Button the log. Click Copy to copy and paste the text to another To Clipboard to update such program, Notepad. as Microsoft word-processing Clears all contents of the log file. Clear Log Button from a transfer template (the transfer template Get Device not store the Info Button Use for devices imported does Code versions). The Get Device Info button retrieves or the boot and Main model device the boot and Main device so an transfer to the controller can Code values from the actual done. be properly the Discovery for locating devices. Discovery Button Starts process the Discovery process. Stop Stops Button Navigation Buttons Previous Clears all contents of the log file. Clear Log Button Use for devices imported from a transfer template (the transfer template does not store the Info Button Get Device or the boot and Main Code The Get Device Info button retrieves device model versions). the boot and Main from the actual so an transfer to the controller values device Code can done. be properly Starts the Discovery process for locating devices. Discovery Button Stops the Discovery process. Stop Button Navigation Buttons Previous Moves to the next screen of the wizard. Next starts the transfer to the computer . Finish/Done Finish appears after the transfer to the computer completes. Click Done to close the wizard. Done 333 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

334 Table 141: Trunk - Transfer CAFs to Computer Wizard Utilities Controller Description Field performing the transfer . without the wizard Closes Cancel the Help system. Opens - Upgrade Controller Trunk Wizard Utilities Software Utilities Multiple Controllers Wizard - Upgrade Table 142: Trunk Field Description Connection Screen the connection type to use: Connection Type Use to specify • NxE Passthru advise an NxE Passthru connection to transfer to against Note: We strongly using communication loss during multiple controllers due to potential the process. • Bluetooth 4.2+/BACnet • MAP Router • ZigBee : Use to specify the following: Parameters Connection NxE Passthru the device host name Address: • Host name/IP Indicates or IP Address. the user name to log in to the site. Indicates and Password: • Username and password allows you to connect directly to a site by entering in the Note: The NxE Passthru fields and password. site's user name • Supervisor supervisory devices. Displays a list of discovered Device: for the selected device. a list of trunks • Trunk: Displays supervisory port and baud rate to use. Bluetooth : Use to specify the COM : Use to specify the following: 4.2+ / BACnet MAP Router • IP address and UDP port of the router . of the MS/TP trunk (1-65,534). • Network number for the MS/TP Do not use 1001 . The MS/TP Network Number Note: Network Number Controls is reserved 1001 IP network for Johnson connections. adapter interface to use. network Ethernet • An available network Note: all IP traffic intended for If you select an available Ethernet interface, Router travels through this interface. the MAP 4.2+/ BACnet the default When parameters for connecting to a MAP you first open the wizard, connection displayed. are parameters 4.2 are automatically Gateway at version If the connection are stored for future use. To restore the connection the values modified, in the wizard values, click the MAP 4.2 Default button. parameters to the default information about and common troubleshooting issues, refer Note: For further the MAP Portal Guide User's Access (LIT-1201 1999). to the Gateway Mobile Area Network (PAN) Offset. the Personal ZigBee : Use to specify Controller Upgrade Screen Use to select and file name of the transfer template file. Browse Button the directory Prompts you to browse for a directory and type a file name to save the transfer template Button Save file. 334 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

335 Table 142: Trunk Utilities Multiple Controllers Wizard - Upgrade Field Description directory in which to transfer to the device CAFs. to and select Use to browse to the desired Directory to Save Files appears Computer Text Box and Browse directory The selected in the field. Button including: Table Devices Available devices, is selected box). box) or not selected (empty if the device • Selected : Indicates (selected were if the devices discovered. • Discovered : Indicates • Name : Name of the device. number of the device. • Model : Indicates the model : Indicates the Main Code version in the device. Version Code Main • Version : Indicates the Boot Code • in the device. Boot Code version Address device address. • Device : MS/TP (BACnet ID) ID of the device. • Instance Number : BACnet Instance has the same , the numbers display than one device If more Note: Number red in the device list. the status of the upgrade operation after the Finish button is selected. • Status : Indicates Opens the Status box showing the current status of the operation. Click Refresh Button View Status dialog Click To Clipboard the status. to copy and paste the text to periodically Copy to update such as Microsoft Notepad. program, another word-processing Opens the Log dialog box showing the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically View Log Button the log. Click Copy to copy and paste the text to another To Clipboard to update such as Microsoft program, word-processing Notepad. of the log file. Log Button all contents Clear Clears from a transfer template (the transfer Use for devices does not store the imported Info Button Get Device template Code versions). The Get Device Info button retrieves device model or the Boot and Main from the actual values so an upgrade can be properly done. Code the boot and Main device the Discovery for locating devices. Discovery Button Starts process the Discovery process. Stop Stops Button Navigation Buttons Previous Clears all contents of the log file. Clear Log Button Use for devices imported from a transfer template (the transfer template does not store the Info Button Get Device or the Boot and Main Code The Get Device Info button retrieves versions). device model from the actual so an upgrade can be properly done. values Code the boot and Main device the Discovery process for locating Starts Discovery Button devices. Stops the Discovery process. Stop Button Navigation Buttons Previous Moves to the next screen of the wizard. Next Finish/Done Finish the transfer to device . starts appears to device completes. Click Done to close the wizard. Done after the transfer Closes the wizard without performing the transfer . Cancel Opens the Help system. 335 Controller Tool Help: Working with the Trunk Utilities

336 Commissioning a System option lets you commission with or without a CAF. In the Commissioning mode, The Tool commissioning your device or Wireless you can make with the Test mode, and balance VAV Box Controllers. connections, NxE Passthru work software, to you. The describes the main tasks available the Commissioning Note: If you are running this section topic User Interface section describes this software version. Software Commissioning-Only in the live data in the Commissioning When changing values are highlighted in various colors. The color of viewing mode, is determined that the value changes. As poll cycles return consistent values, the the highlighting by the frequency away. The intention of this feature is to bring to attention changes across the application's data highlighting fades expose potential relationships between values system, and assist in troubleshooting. and modules, Notes: color highlighting in three color stages (blue, yellow , and red). After the third stage (red), all • Temporary appears changes red. For more to display consecutive information on status color, see Table 9 . subsequent continue color highlighting feature can be turned on or off from the Commissioning mode's control • The parameter change bar. a System Commissioning Concepts Bar Control offers a control bar for easy control and detailed mode The Commissioning Control Bar Commissioning viewing. one of two Commissioning Time Sources based displays preference of the Device Time or Your on the user's Computer to displaying source times, Time. In addition Test Mode by selecting the Start Test Mode you can start check box to enable and disable the Highlight Changes feature. Figure 51: Commission Bar Mode—Control can toggle between horizontal control bar at the bottom of their window or a collapsed version of Users a full-length the Minimize ( ) icon or the Maximize ( ) icon. the control bar by clicking System and Device Connections options are available: NxE Passthru , Bluetooth, MAP 4.2+/BACnet Router , ZigBee, and Direct Five connection See Ethernet. in the Transfer Operations section for details on these options. Connections Feature Balancing view of the Balancer Override module includes an attributes table and task buttons The details VAV to autocalibrate Box Controllers and set flow constants. This feature appears in Commissioning mode only for VAV Box Controllers. The task buttons of the Balancer Override module details view are active only when in the Test mode; however , you do not need to be in Test mode table. to edit the attributes section. Override is described in the Balancer Override topic of the State The Balancer Modules module Generation See the Using the Balancing Feature section for information on balancing tasks. Test Mode The Test mode allows you to see the effects of commanding inputs, modules, and outputs to assist in commissioning your system. Test mode, the controller being commissioned is taken offline from the supervisory system. During Any commands you make update the values within the user interface, but the actual hardware values do not change. Working You must before you exit the Commissioning mode. See the exit Test mode with the Test Mode section. 336 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

337 EWMA Diagnostics blocks collect their inputs, outputs, and internally calculated variables. Inside the PID The PID controller data about Weighted blocks, (EWMA) diagnostic value calculations minimize memory Moving Exponentially Averages traffic, and provide way to analyze collected data. communication an easy reduce requirements, control based Starting selection trees (terminal units only; not AHUs) automatically at Release 5.1, all zone system four values for each Output Controller . The XXX label in the descriptions relates expose the following to the type of (for example, Heating, Zone Cooling, and Flow). control Zone is the absolute (Absolute —The Absolute Error EWMA EWMA) value of the calculated XXX-ABSERROR Error • the present value of the controlled variable setpoint temperature, and flow). These values minus (for example, in the units of the controlled variable. The moving average calculation for this value is performed are calculated period of the PID. For example, the effective period for zone at the effective control is 60 temperature-based seconds, box flow loop is 1 second. If this value increases in reference to the type of and a VAV Box Controller control, the increase a control or mechanical system issue. loop under may indicate is the absolute (Absolute —The Absolute Effort EWMA EWMA) value of the change XXX-ABSEFFORT Effort • from one execution of the PID to the next. These in the present are calculated in units of %. The value values average calculation for this value is performed at the effective period of the PID. For example, the effective moving for zone temperature based control is 60 seconds, and a VAV Box Controller box flow loop is 1 second. period increases If this value than 5% to 10%, the increase may indicate excessive controlled device movement. more XXX-ERROR value EWMA) —The Error EWMA is the controlled variable setpoint minus the present • of (Error variable. values the controlled are calculated in the units of the controlled variable. The moving average These for this value is performed at the effective period of the PID. For example, the effective period for calculation zone temperature-based control is 60 seconds, and a VAV Box Controller box flow loop is 1 second. If this value increases or decreases to the type of loop under control, the value change may indicate a control in reference system issue. above and below its setpoint, the XXX-ERROR value tends to or mechanical If a loop is cycling The XXX-ABSERROR large with respect to the type of control loop under control. to zero. is typically be close (Present Value EWMA) —The Present Value EWMA is the average • of the PID present XXX-EWMA position These are calculated in units of %. The moving average values for this value is performed at value. calculation period of the PID. For example, the effective period for zone the effective based control is 60 seconds, temperature and a VAV Box Controller This value can be used in future diagnostic application box flow loop is 1 second. work. logic stops values, please note that the state-based control these the calculations when the PID is not When using As a best practice, keep in mind the context of the Occupied active. Status (ZNT-ST ATE) value as you use Zone this data. value of this state coincides with a specific The present Controller module’ s PID diagnostic values. Output The values for the Output Controllers that are not active remain at the values from the last time the calculations ran. Additionally , you may want status of the Output Controller to show which PID is active to view the output ATE). (XXX-OUTST devices can be compared to easily identify from several with poor relative performance. Use the EWMAs devices AV Box Error Analysis and Diagnostic—V AV Box Effort Analysis Summary Diagnostic—V in the online Definitions configuration user interface. Explorer FSM Explorer to view the current state and possible Use the FSM of an application. The Current State list next states displays the current state or pseudo-state, while the Possible Next States columns display the possible next states for the current state. mode, use the FSM to toggle between In commissioning view of the current state, or an exploratory view of a fixed all potential states. If you click Realtime Display , the FSM locks to the current state of the running application. If all potential you click Browse , FSM unlocks and thus enables you to explore Manually states of an application. 337 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

338 Additional attributes at Release 10.4 / Firmware 8.0. The attribute Previous State displays the previous are exposed of the FSM. The attribute displays the duration of time in the current state. If any part of a guard state Time in State in green is True, it will be highlighted condition and bold text. behaves differently when in Configuration Mode. For further information see FSM Explorer . The FSM Explorer about a specific see State Generation Modules . For information module, Steps Commissioning a System Making Connections Making an NxE Passthru Connection an NxE Passthru connection from this tool to the Metasys NAE, on the Transfer screen, To make the device enter host name (or select the device host name or IP address from the drop-down menu), enter your user or IP address and click Login credentials, . Notes: to launch the tool or have • You do not need device configuration tool to use the NxE Passthru a supervisory When the tool is launched from the supervisory device configuration tool, the supervisory device connection. information connection populated. is not automatically in the selection selected Application, only the Field Device • If you have in your CAF appears Current list. defined Making a Bluetooth Connection 1. Open the tool. 2. Click Commission . The Commission Device Wizard appears. 3. Select the application type and Bluetooth connection type. transfer your connection parameters, your Product Type, and click Next . 4. Enter choose the device Next . The Commission Device Summary dialog box appears. 5. Select and click If you have selected Current Application, only the Field Device Note: in your CAF appears in the selection defined list. a MAP 4.2+/BACnet Connection Making Router 1. Open the tool. Commission . The Commission Device 2. Click appears. Wizard 3. Select application and connection attributes, then click Next . 4. Select the device and click Next . The Commission Device Summary dialog box appears. Notes: • If you have Current Application, only the Field Device defined in your CAF appears in the selection selected list. • Do not use 1001 Network Number . The MS/TP for the MS/TP Number 1001 is reserved for Johnson Network Controls IP network connections. Making Connection a ZigBee 1. Open the tool. 2. Click the Commission button. The Commission Device Wizard appears. 3. Make your application transfer type and ZigBee connection type selections. 338 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

339 4. Enter your connection choose your Product Type, and click Next . parameters, the device and click . The Commission Device Summary dialog box appears. 5. Select Next selected Note: only the Field Device defined in your CAF appears in the selection Current Application, If you have list. Ethernet Connection a Direct Making 1. Open the tool. . The Commission Device Wizard 2. Click Commission appears. your application attribute selections and click Next . 3. Make and connection the device Next . The Commission Device Summary dialog box appears. 4. Select and click Notes: subnet as your IP controllers to use a Direct Ethernet • Verify you are on the same connection. • If you have Current Application, only the Field Device defined in your CAF appears in the selection selected list. Adjusting the Refresh Rate the Simulation and Commissioning Adjusting Rates section. See the Refresh Commissioning a Device the Commission button. The Commission Device Wizard appears. 1. Click the application transfer type and the connection type information. 2. Choose To commission in Controller that contains an existing application, use the Applications Note: setting a device to make the latest information. sure you commission 3. Enter your connection parameters and click Next 4. From the Device Selection screen, select a device. 5. Click Next . If the application type is Application and no devices appear on the Device Selection screen, Note: in Controller . Discover click . The application appears 6. Click in the Control View. Finish to be commissioned Notes: type is Application in Controller • If the application the application from the selected device , the tool transfers to the computer . dialog than the application when the application version in the controller is older • The Notice box appears loaded in the Tool. You can continue commissioning this application successfully; however , you do version not see any new items added since the last device update . Perform a transfer to the device to see new items. Viewing and Modifying Attributes attributes See mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. You can view and modify in the Configuration Viewing Parameters in the Configuring a System section for more information. and Modifying Note: When modifying in the Commands dialog box, the system stops data polling until the window closes. Viewing Connections in the Configuration mode, Simulation You can view connections and Commissioning mode. See Viewing mode, and Modifying Connections in the Configuring a System section for more information. 339 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

340 Control View Steps Online Operations Viewing for a single information mode. This option is not available in controller You can view controller in Commissioning to access and from the controller to which you are connected Use this procedure the Simulation mode. information information, or select a connection type and discover commissioning. a CAF to view controller You can open information. controller controllers to view multiple To view the details commissioned, click Online Operations on the Tools menu. of the controller being For information controller information from the Configuration mode, see the Configuring a System Note: on viewing section. Commanding Items in the Commissioning mode and Simulation You can command You must be in Test mode to issue items mode. while commissioning. The controller goes offline and the field point appears as well as the value commands sent using option. The commands you perform in Test mode are temporary . The Tool releases these the Commands when you leave in Commissioning mode. The controller goes online, and the point value commands Test mode When you are working in the Commands dialog box, the software does not poll for data or returns to its value. until you exit the window . Polling immediately resumes after closing the Commands dialog box. See updates Commanding Items Simulating a System section. in the Hardware Issuing Commands Hardware Commands on inputs and outputs in the Commissioning mode. Hardware Commands You can issue send commands adjust or override) as if you performed (for example, through the Supervisory Controller or Server them online user interface. Hardware commands are not released when you leave Commissioning mode. The value is retained in the system level commanded. You can view and clear the command from the Supervisory at the priority or Server online or from the Hardware Command option in this tool. Controller user interface output. an input, input, output, or miscellaneous view, right-click The right-click 1. In the Control miscellaneous appears. menu Hardware Commands . The attribute’ s specific command dialog 2. Select box appears. Note: polling stops when you are in the Command dialog box. Data polling immediately resumes when Data dialog the Command box is closed. your selections. 3. Make 4. Click . Send Viewing and Modifying Details You can view and modify information in the Details dialog box in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. Viewing and Modifying Details in the Configuring a System section. See When data polling in the Commands dialog box, the system stops Note: until the window closes. modifying a Module’ s Logic Viewing in the Configuration mode, Simulation You can view logic in modules and Commissioning mode. See Viewing mode, and Modifying a Module’ s Logic in the Configuring a System section for more information. Showing Involvement and Hiding You can view involvement in two ways—within the UI or through a Show Involvement dialog box. If you want to view involvement in a separate dialog box, first click Settings , then select Use Involvement Dialog . 340 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

341 1. Right-click an output Show Involvement . If you selected the Use Involvement Dialog setting, the and select Involvement dialog Show box appears. output. color which modules are affecting the selected indicates See Control background change The magenta and Icons in the User Interface section for more Tab Status Colors information. right-click and select Hide Involvement . If you selected the Use Involvement 2. To hide involvement, an output click Close . Dialog setting, Commissioning Inputs Offsets Modifying an input input 1. Right-click and select View Details . The Details dialog box appears. or miscellaneous Edit . 2. Click closes. in Edit mode stops polling Note: the system System data polling immediately When data until the window when the dialog box is closed. resumes 3. Enter the desired offset value. OK 4. Click . Commissioning Outputs the Change of Value Increment (COV Modifying Inc) You can modify the Change of Value increment to filter change update notices. 1. Right-click an output or miscellaneous output and select View Details . The Details dialog box appears. 2. Click Edit . When in Edit mode stops polling data until the window closes. System data polling immediately the system Note: the dialog box is closed. when resumes 3. Enter the desired COV Inc value. OK 4. Click . Modifying of Position Adjust Outputs (PAOs) the Polarity dialog an output 1. Right-click and select View Details . The Details or miscellaneous box appears. output 2. Click Edit . Note: When in Edit mode, the system stops polling data until the window closes. System data polling immediately resumes when box is closed. the dialog the desired 3. Enter PAO value. 4. Click OK . Logic View Steps and Modifying Details Viewing information in the Details dialog box in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and You can view and modify Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying Details in the Configuring a System section for more information. Showing Connection Lines and Hiding Use the Trace Mode button to show and hide the Connection Lines in the logic diagram. 341 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

342 Panning You can pan in the logic view in the Configuration Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Panning mode, Configuring a System for more information. in the section Zooming in the Configuration mode, and Commissioning mode. See Zooming in the Simulation mode, You can zoom Configuring for more information. section a System Printing mode, You can print the logic diagram mode, and Commissioning mode. See Printing in the Configuration Simulation Diagram Configuring a System section in the information. the Logic for more with the Test Mode Working allows you to command inputs, modules, and outputs to assist in commissioning your system. The Test mode See the section. Test Mode the Test Mode Starting bar, select the Start Test Mode check on the control the ability to issue To start the Test mode, box. You now have commands. Modifying Outputs output attributes in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning You can view and modify mode. See and Modifying Parameters in the Configuring a System section. Viewing the Test Mode Stopping on the control bar, clear the Start To stop the test mode, check box. Test mode Using the Balancing Feature Note: The task buttons of the balancing feature are active only when in the Test mode; however , you do not need to be in Test mode to edit the attributes Override module. of the Balancer steps describe use of the balancing feature: The following a typical the Test mode. Starting the Test Mode . 1. Start See balancing attributes such as Flow Setpoints to the desired values, if necessary 2. Edit the VAV Box Controller . See Editing Attributes . the Balancing the VAV Box Controller Autocalibrating the VAV Box Controller . 3. Autocalibrate . See a Flow 4. Issue command to measure the flow in the space (for example, drive the VAV Box Controller Override to the maximum cfm). See Issuing a Flow Override Command . • If the flow measurement is accurate, the flow as-is. See Restoring Flow . restore is inaccurate, See the K-Factor with the new measurement. • If the flow measurement Calculate calculate Command K-Factors Box . Dialog 5. Exit the Test mode. See Stopping the Test Mode . Editing the Balancing Attributes 1. Right-click Balancer Override SD module and click View Details . the 2. Click Edit . 3. Modify the attributes as desired (for example, change the flow setpoints). 342 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

343 Note: Click to exit Edit mode without applying changes. Cancel Apply . The changes and the system exits Edit mode. 4. Click are made Using Feature section. to the Return the Balancing Autocalibrating the VAV Box Controller Balancer Override SD module and click View Details . 1. Right-click the to autocalibrate Calibrate Command dialog box appears asking if you want . The Auto Calibrate the 2. Click Auto device. 3. Click Send . the Autocal Status attribute in the Status section of the attribute table: 4. Monitor False, • When is in progress and the task buttons are inactive. the autocalibration True, the autocalibration is complete are active. • When and the task buttons time of the actuator takes 60 seconds Autocalibration which is the stroke approximately over Note: to complete, of travel. 90 degrees to the Using Return Feature section. the Balancing Issuing Command a Flow Override . The Flow view of the Balancer SD module, click 1. In the details Override Override Override Command Flow dialog box appears. 2. Select a value from the menu. For example, select Supply Duct Max to drive the VAV Box Controller to the maximum cfm. Send to issue 3. Click the command. Using the Balancing to the section. Return Feature Restoring Flow view of the Balancer Override SD module, click Flow Restore . The Flow Restore 1. In the details dialog Command box appears if you want to send the restore flow command. asking Send 2. Click . to the Using Return Feature section. the Balancing Calculating the K-Factors 1. In the details view of the Balancer Override SD module, click Calculate K-Factors . The Calculate K-Factors Command dialog box appears. the duct from the Duct Selection 2. Select menu. the proper value in the Measured Flow field. 3. Enter Send . The values on the Balancer tab update according to this new value. 4. Click Return to the Using the Balancing Feature section. Exiting Mode Commissioning 1. Click Configure . The Confirm dialog box appears. 2. Click Yes to stop commissioning. 343 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

344 Note: At any time, the tool from any mode. If you close from Commissioning mode, the tool guides you can close this prompt before you through closing. Explorer the FSM Viewing ways to view the FSM Explorer see For information the FSM Explorer . on the various Viewing a System Screens Commissioning describes screens specific to the Commissioning mode. For information on screens This section in both that appear the Configuration and the Commissioning mode, see the Configuring a System section for more information. mode Device Wizard Commissioning the screens , , and Table 145 Table 147 Table 144 in the Commissioning Device Wizard. See the describe Commissioning a Device section. Table 143: Commission Screen Device Wizard—Main Description Field either the current Controller Application File (Current Application) or a Type Transfer Use to select (Application File in the device When you select Controller Application in Controller). , the wizard the file from the device to the computer . In Controller Application transfers a device that contains an existing application, use the Note: To commission setting sure you commission the latest in Controller Applications to make information. Use to select an NxE Passthru , Bluetooth, MAP 4.2+/BACnet Router , Direct Ethernet, Type Connection Ethernet Connection. or Direct ZigBee, 344 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

345 Table 143: Commission Screen Device Wizard—Main Description Field NxE Passthru: Parameters Connection • and user credentials for the device the host name, Use to specify IP address, you to connect. want Notes: configuration to launch device the tool or have - You do not need a supervisory from the tool to use the NxE Passthru connection. the tool is launched When supervisory configuration device tool, the supervisory device connection populated. information is not automatically - To use an NxE Passthru or IP address, connection, enter the device host name You can save by enter your user credentials, and click Login. this information List dialog Manage Address configuring it in the Manage Host Name/IP box. See . List Dialog and IP Address Host Name Box the COM port and baud rate. Product Type radio buttons • Bluetooth: Use to specify parameter a communication Metasys or Facility allows you to choose between products. based Explorer controller Use to specify MAP the following: 4.2+ / BACnet • Router: - IP address and UDP port of the router . (1-65,534). - Network number of the MS/TP trunk Number . The MS/TP Network Network for the MS/TP Do not use 1001 Note: for Johnson Number IP network connections. 1001 is reserved Controls network adapter to use. - An available Ethernet interface Ethernet interface, all IP traffic an available network If you select Note: intended Router travels through this interface. for the MAP 4.2+/ BACnet the wizard, the default connection parameters for connecting When you first open at version Gateway If the connection to a MAP 4.2 are automatically displayed. are stored are modified, use. To parameters in the wizard the values for future values, MAP 4.2 Default to the default click the parameters the connection restore button. the MAP and common troubleshooting issues, For further information Note: about Portal Gateway User's Guide (LIT-1201 refer to the Mobile Access 1999). Use to specify Product Type radio buttons allows you to • ZigBee: the PAN Offset. between Explorer or Facility parameter based choose a communication Metasys products. controller • Ethernet: Use to specify the UDP port of the controller and the available Direct (select a network interface that is connected to the same subnet network interface to connect to) to use. as the IP controllers you want Auto, depending Address, or Instance Numbe r based Discovery Use to perform Discovery MAC on your connection type. Table 144: Commission Device Wizard—Device Selection Screen Description Field Device name after the discovery process finishes. Device Name System name process finishes. System Name after the discovery ’s address after the discovery process finishes. Address Controller Type after the discovery process finishes. Type Status after the discovery process finishes. Status 345 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

346 Table 144: Commission Device Selection Screen Wizard—Device Field Description ® ID. BACnet ID) (BACnet Instance Number Note: , the numbers display If more than one device has the same Instance Number list. red in the device Moves to the previous screen of the wizard. Previous Moves to the next screen Next of the wizard. is disabled if a device This option Instance Number is selected. Note: with a duplicate Closes the wizard without starting Commissioning mode. Cancel Opens the tool Help system. 346 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

347 Table 145: Commission Summary Screen Device Wizard—Commission Description Field information for the following: Information Device Displays 2 • of the device. Computer : Network Name hostname ID. Number Instance • : BACnet 2 • for the device. : Displays DHCP is enabled DHCP whether Enabled 2 • : IP Address IP Address for the device. 2 • IP Mask for the IP address. : Subnet mask used 2 • : IP address Address IP Router for the device. of the router 3 • : Combined switches or DIP switches on of the rotary Controller value Number the device. of the controller . Name • Name: of the controller . • Description: Description number . • Model: Model Version: Boot of the controller . Boot Code • Code version Main . version of the controller Version: • Main Code Code name of the controller . Name: System • System CPU usage of the controller . • CPU Usage: Usage: Object of memory used by the controller . • Memory Amount of the controller Status . • Status: Device address of the controller . • Device Address: Unbound references of the device. References: Unbound • Mode: On compatible devices, indicates the following field • FC Communication Wired, N2 Slave, bus communication: Wireless, and Ethernet. 1 • Version of the wireless device. Radio version Firmware : Firmware 1 • Address of the wireless device. address Radio : IEEE IEEE 1 • device. : Pan ID of the wireless Pan Offset Logic status of an application configured in Transfer to Device • Logic Enabled: True (Download) that the logic of an application is enabled; . A status of indicates indicates is disabled. To modify False that the logic of an application a status of status, see Online the . Logic Enabled Operations do not take effect on the controller until the application The logic options Note: is activated. Transfer Status: Status of an application transferred using the • Background (Download) Transfer of Idle indicates that the to Device option. A status a status Files are Staged indicates in the controller; of application is activated pending files, see Online that the application has yet to be activated. To activate . Operations SA Bus Status : Click this option to view the status of all SA Bus devices. See • Wizard for more information. Transfer to Device Status Commissioning mode after clicking the Finish button. Status of entering Moves to the previous screen of the wizard. Previous Closes the wizard and starts Commissioning mode. Finish 347 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

348 Table 145: Commission Device Summary Screen Wizard—Commission Field Description without starting Commissioning mode. Cancel Closes the wizard Opens the Help system. 1 Appears only when connected. wirelessly only for IP devices. 2 Appears only for compatible devices. 3 Appears Rate Dialog Box Adjust Refresh Rate Dialog Box Table 146: Adjust Refresh Field Description Simulation rate to any length Adjust to 60 seconds. the simulation Refresh Rate Slider Bar refresh of time from 1 second the commissioning refresh rate to any length of time from 1 second to 60 Bar Commissioning Adjust Rate Slider Refresh seconds. the highlight duration parameter values displayed in the Adjust Bar Slider Duration Highlight rate for changing rates range from duration Highlight modes. and Simulation Commissioning refresh 1 to 10 in length. Note: change feature can be turned on or off from the The highlighting Commissioning or Simulation mode's control bars. mode's and closes box. Saves OK the dialog Closes box without applying the changes. Cancel the dialog Opens the Help system. Online Box Operations Dialog See the Viewing Online Operations section. Online Operations from the Configuration mode, see the Configuring a System section. For information on viewing Dialog Box Operations Table 147: Online Description Field 2 of the device. Network hostname Name Computer ID number . Instance Number BACnet 2 DHCP is enabled for the device. Displays whether Enabled DHCP 2 IP Address for the device. IP Address 2 mask used for the IP address. Subnet IP Mask 2 for the field device. of the router IP address IP Router Address the Enabled status Enabled Management (BBMD) BBMD Displays of the Broadcast this in the Advanced tab. For further You can configure object. Broadcast Management (BBMD) Object Screen . information, see 3 Combined of the rotary switches or DIP switches on the device. value Controller Number Name of the controller . Name Description of the controller . Description 348 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

349 Table 147: Online Operations Dialog Box Description Field . Model number Model of the controller . Version of the controller Bootcode Bootcode version . Maincode Version Maincode version of the controller . System Name of the controller name System of the controller . CPU Usage CPU usage of the controller Memory Object Memory Usage usage . . of the controller Status Status 1 Firmware version of the wireless device. Radio Firmware Version 1 of the wireless device. address IEEE Radio IEEE Address address of the controller . Device Address Device references Unbound References of the device. Unbound FC Communication indicates field bus On compatible Mode devices, the following and Ethernet. Wireless, N2 Slave, communication: Wired, 1 Pan ID of the wireless devices. Pan Offset status of an application configured in Transfer to Device Logic Enabled Logic True . A status that the logic of an application (Download) of indicates False that the logic of an application of indicates is enabled; a status Logic Enabled status, see is disabled. To modify the Online . Operations Note: The logic options do not take effect on the controller until the application is activated. Status of an application using the Transfer to Device Status Transfer Background transferred Idle indicates is (Download) option. A status of that the application are Staged that Files activated in the controller; a status indicates of files, see To activate has yet to be activated. the application pending Operations . Online SA Bus Status Click of all SA Bus devices. See Transfer to view the status this option for more Wizard to Device information. the Online Operations Wizard. Refresh Updates Closes Operations Wizard. Close the Online 1 Appears only when wirelessly connected. 2 Appears only for IP devices. 3 Appears only for compatible devices. Table 148: Actions Description Field the device error log for a selected controller . Diagnostic information Opens log diagnostic Show is provided with your field support representative. issues advanced for troubleshooting On supported devices, enables the runtime logic of applications in a device. Enable logic On supported logic the runtime logic of applications in a device. Disable devices, disables of the logic value during device commissioning, To view and modify Note: the status Info link in the status bar. See Table 25 for more information. click on the System 349 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

350 Table 148: Actions Description Field the action specified list. Perform Action Performs in the adjoining screen Refreshes controller status. Refresh allowing the result user to re-query the wizard. Closes Close Show Involvement Dialog Box and hiding For information see Showing and Hiding Involvement . When you view this dialog on showing involvement, highlighting indicates which modules are affecting the selected output. box, the magenta Involvement Dialog Box Table 149: Show Field Description inputs. Network List of network Inputs Inputs List of inputs. List of miscellaneous Miscellaneous Inputs inputs. modules. List of setpoint miscellaneous Setpoint/Miscellaneous generation modules. State Generation List of state control List of output Output Control modules. List of network Network Outputs outputs. Outputs List of outputs. outputs. Miscellaneous Outputs List of miscellaneous Opens the Help system. Closes the dialog box. Close Balancer Override Module Balancing Tasks The Balancer Override is described in the Balancer Override topic of the State Generation Modules section. module Using to perform Feature section for information on tasks See the in the Balancer tab. the Balancing tab: dialog appear The following you perform the various tasks in the Balancer boxes when • Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box • Flow Override Command Dialog Box • Flow Command Dialog Box Restore • Calculate Command Dialog Box K-Factors Command Auto Calibrate Box Dialog Table 150: Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box Description Field Do you want Auto Calibrate Command? to send Begins autocalibration. Send Closes the dialog box without starting the autocalibration Cancel process. 350 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

351 Flow Override Command Box Dialog Override Command Box Table 151: Flow Dialog Description Field You cannot edit this field. Attribute being Attribute commanded. to command (Normal, Supply Duct Min, Supply a list of values Provides Value to the attribute All). Heating Duct Max, Flow, Close the Flow command. Send Issues Override the dialog issuing the command. Cancel Closes box without Command Dialog Box Flow Restore Table 152: Flow Restore Dialog Box Command Field Description Flow Restore Command? Do you want to send Restore command. Send Issues the Flow the dialog box without issuing the command. Cancel Closes K-Factors Calculate Dialog Box Command K-Factors Box Dialog Table 153: Calculate Command Field Description ducts to command. Duct Selection Lists the available Use to enter the value measured during the flow override. Measured Flow Issues the command values. Send and calculates the K-Factor box without the command. Cancel the dialog issuing Closes Screen FSM Details (Commissioning Mode) Screen Table 154: FSM Description Field FSM to the current state of the running application. Realtime Display Locks the user to explore states of an application. Manually Browse all potential Enables state. Current State Current 1 Previous State state. Previous 1 Time in State the length state. Indicates of time in the current next states for the current Possible Possible Next States state. State name. State Name Conditions which must be true in order to transition to the next state. Condition Guard Mode 8.0, if any part of a guard At Release Note: 10.4 / Firmware condition is True, it will be highlighted in green and bold text. 1 This feature is only available in Release Mode 10.4 / Firmware 8.0. 351 Controller Tool Help: Commissioning a System

352 Box Flow Test Overview Test to verify and diagnose of Single Duct, Dual Duct, and Supply Exhaust Use the Box Flow the operation Test module applications. output control, and data-gathering functions for testing the timing, provides The Box Flow application. of a VAV Box Controller performance the flow control Test in the State Generators section for information on the Box Flow Test module. See Box Flow Box Flow Test Concepts Test Box Flow the initial to the controller . The air handling unit's You can only run the Box Flow application Test after you transfer be running supply the Box Flow Test. After completion of the test, the error summary report fan must to implement which devices and applications were not installed or set up correctly shows . The Box Flow of two tabs: Setup/Progress and Results. You can use the Box Flow Test Discover Test consists to discover the test results After you initiate the Box Flow Test, you can disconnect from feature from the device. and return and review the results. the network later to collect Box Flow Test Steps Setting Starting Positions you perform a box flow test, we recommend that you use certain starting positions. If you do not use the When recommended starting a message box appears that states the recommended starting positions, but you positions, with the test. See the following starting for the recommended can still continue positions. table Starting Positions Table 155: Recommended Test with Multiple Flow Loops for a Box Flow Recommendation System Type Set the Exhaust box starting position the same as the Supply box starting position. Single Duct with Exhaust Set the Hot deck starting of the Cold deck starting position. Dual Duct position the opposite the same position. Set the Exhaust position as the Cold deck starting Dual Duct with Exhaust Set the Hot deck starting box starting position the same as the Cold deck starting position. a Box Flow Test Performing you perform a Box Flow Test, you must make a connection. See Making Connections in the Commissioning Before section. a System Box Flow Test . The Connection select of the Box Flow Test wizard appears. 1. On the Tools menu, Type screen the Connection Type you want to use. 2. Select connection, select a host name or IP address from the drop-down box, or enter the For an NxE Passthru a. host name or IP address, your user credentials, and click Login. device b. For a Bluetooth connection, the Bluetooth COM port and baud rate. enter 4.2+ / BACnet the following: connection, specify c. For MAP Router and UDP • IP address . port of the router • Network number of the MS/TP trunk (1-65,534). Note: Do not use 1001 for the MS/TP Network Number . The MS/TP Network Number 1001 is reserved for Johnson IP network connections. Controls • An available Ethernet network interface adapter to use. Note: If you select an available Ethernet network interface, all IP traffic intended for the MAP 4.2+/ BACnet Router travels through this interface. 352 Controller Tool Help: Performing a Box Flow Test

353 When you first open the default connection parameters for connecting to a MAP Gateway at the wizard, 4.2 are automatically displayed. parameters are modified, the values are stored in version If the connection use. To restore the connection to the default values, click the MAP 4.2 the wizard for future parameters button. Default issues, the MAP and common troubleshooting Note: refer to the Mobile Access For further about information User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). Portal Gateway connection, enter d. For a ZigBee the PAN offset. connection, the UDP port of the device and an available Ethernet network interface Ethernet enter e. For a Direct verify you are on the same subnet as your IP controllers) adapter (if selected, to use. Next Selection screen appears. . The Device Test begins to discover devices. 3. Click The Box Flow Click Discovery if the Box Flow Test does not discover devices. Note: 4. After the discovery the screen displays all the devices present on the network. Select the devices is complete, to perform the Box Flow multiple devices, hold down the Ctrl key and select each for which Test. To select the columns to sort the devices. device. Click connect to a device that has a duplicate You cannot Number . If more than one device has the Note: Instance Instance Number , the numbers display red in the device list. If you select a device same with a duplicate Instance , the Next button will be disabled until a device with a unique Instance Number is selected. Number Next Test screen appears. 5. Click . The Perform the check box next to the devices where you want to perform a Box Flow 6. Select Test. Notes: • You can filter the devices by typing your search criteria in the Filter box. Type one or more letters appearing in the device name you want to select. • To select all devices, in the check box column and click Select All . To select no devices, right-click right-click box column and click None . in the check Select changes parameters: necessary to following 7. Make Time: Amount of time, in seconds, • Actuator the actuator to move from the fully closed to fully Stroke it takes position. opened Test: Indicates whether the Box Flow Text is bidirectional or single. Select False if you want the • Bidirectional damper to stroke from the starting point. Select True if you want the damper to make only in one direction part of the test. the return Precision: Defines the decimal rounding and the decimal places to display for each airflow reading. • Display Closed Position select Open or column, by clicking the row you want. We recommend that • In the Starting you have an equal number of boxes closed as there are open. This helps ensure adequate static pressure during the test. It also helps an over-pressure situation. prevent - To set all dampers and then position, right-click the Starting Position column header Note: to the open Position Set Same . To set alternating positions, right-click Starting click and then click Position Set Alternating Position . - We recommend that you use the starting positions found in the Setting Starting Positions section. The status 8. After click Begin Test . The Box Flow Test begins. your selections, of the test appears in you make the State column. Reading Results 1. In the Setup/Progress tab of the Box Flow Test screen, click Read Results . 2. Click the Results tab. 353 Controller Tool Help: Performing a Box Flow Test

354 Notes: • If the test is still in progress, column displays Test in Progress . Wait until the test completes and the State again. read the results time the box flow test was performed. Click Read Results • You can also read the results from the previous the test to view the results before of the last performed performing box flow test. appears appears column and the result summary the error in the Results in the State If there are errors, column. Summary are the possible results: The following dP Offset: Set if the absolute value of the Percent • than or equal to the dP Offset Large dP Offset is greater This indicates was performed when the damper was not fully closed. This Tolerance. that an auto calibration on input of a stuck actuator . This error is evaluated a symptom change while the test is often or reversed is Test in Progress or No Test Data. The error state when a test begins and the absolute value of is reset the current dP Offset input is less than the dP Offset Tolerance. Percent Flow Not Reliable: input Reliability is not reliable. This error is evaluated on input change • Set if the Flow is Test in Progress or No Test Data. The error is reset when a test begins and the Flow while the test state reliable. This error indicates one or more is currently readings is not reliable. of the Flow • Command Not Responding: Set if the Damper Percent Cmd input did not reach the Step Position Damper 1%) for one or more of the test steps. This indicates the application is being controlled by higher (within precedence logic. • Poor Flow Response: Set if (Max Flow - Min Flow) <= (Rated Box Flow * Flow Tolerance / 100). The Min Flow and Max Flow and maximum of the recorded flow values. refer to the minimum Insufficient Flow: Flow) < Rated Box Flow * (100 - Flow Tolerance) / 100. Set if (Max • Flow: Set if (Max Flow) > 1.5 * Rated Box Flow. Excessive • Non-Increasing Flow: Check all steps (other than the starting position) • previous step to verify flow against is moving expected. Considered an error if moving opposite expected direction (by more in direction than half the tolerance) for any of the steps or if the flows at the fully open or closed positions are not within the tolerance of the max or min flows, respectively . • Excessive Evaluated only if Check Hysteresis is True. For all positions that have a pair of flow Hysteresis: differ by more (all steps the end stop opposite values position), set error if flows except than the the starting tolerance. Saving the Results To save the results: 1. In the Box Flow Test screen, click the Results tab. 2. Click Save . Results the location to save 3. Select OK . the .csv file and click Canceling a Box Flow Test To cancel a Box Flow Test, click Cancel Test in the Setup/Progress tab of the Box Flow Test screen. 354 Controller Tool Help: Performing a Box Flow Test

355 Box Flow Test Screens Box Flow Test Screen Test - Connection Table 156: Box Flow Window Description Field NxE Passthru Connection Types an NxE Passthru Indicates connection. Bluetooth Indicates a Bluetooth connection. MAP 4.2+ / BACnet Router Indicates 4.2+/BACnet Router connection. a MAP ZigBee Indicates a ZigBee connection. Direct Ethernet Indicates a Direct Ethernet connection. 355 Controller Tool Help: Performing a Box Flow Test

356 Table 156: Box Flow Test - Connection Window Field Description NxE Passthru Supervisory Device Parameters Connection Supervisory . Appears Selected Controller the NxE Passthru you selected only when connection type. Trunk Number Appears only when you Selected trunk. connection selected the NxE Passthru type. Bluetooth Baud Rate 19200, rate of 9600, a baud Use to select or 76800. Appears only when you 38400, select type. the Bluetooth connection Bluetooth Port COM the COM port for the Bluetooth Indicates Appears only when you select connection. the Bluetooth connection type. 4.2+/BACnet Router Address MAP . of the router the IP address Indicates only when Appears the MAP you select type. Router 4.2+/BACnet connection UDP Port Indicates the UDP port of the router . Appears only when you select the MAP 4.2+/BACnet Router Ethernet or the Direct type. connection Network Number number of the the network Indicates MS/TP (1–65, 534). Appears only trunk you select the MAP 4.2+/BACnet when Router connection type. Interface Network the network interface adapter . Indicates Appears you select the MAP only when 4.2+/BACnet Router or the Direct Ethernet connection type. PAN Offset ZigBee the PAN offset. Appears Use to specify the ZigBee you select only when type. connection the Help system. Opens Table 157: Box Flow Tab Test - Setup/Progress Description Field Use to filter the selection. Filter Indicates the devices to test. Selection (Check Box) Displays that contain a Box Flow Test module. Device Name a list of devices MAC address of the field device. MAC Address 356 Controller Tool Help: Performing a Box Flow Test

357 Table 157: Box Flow Test - Setup/Progress Tab Field Description BACnet instance number . Instance Number Displays the device's s system Name System Loaded name. device’ set by the Box Flow Test at the Starting Position Indicates the damper position position. starting the damper start of the test. You can modify right-click Note: To set all dampers to the open position, the header Starting Position column and then click Set right-click positions, To set alternating Position. Same Position and then click Set Alternating Position. Starting the flow loop being tested: Supply Indicates , Exhaust, Loop Flow Damper A single has only Cold Duct, or Hot Duct. duct VAV application . A supply/exhaust the supply one flow loop: application damper the has two flow loops processed in one controller address: . In dual duct damper supply and the exhaust damper is than one flow loop per controller more applications where tested, hot deck, cold deck, and exhaust possible loops include dampers. (or last) state device. For detailed Current of the test for each State explanations see the Box Flow Test section. on possible states, Starts the Box Flow Test. Begin Test Box Flow Test results Results Summary , and Airflow for State, Results Read tab. readings on the Results Cancels the test. Cancel Test of time, in seconds, it takes Amount to move from Time Stroke Actuator the actuator position. to fully opened the fully closed Indicates whether the Box Flow Text is bidirectional or single. Test Bidirectional Test is false, the test causes the damper When the Bidirectional point. When to stroke only in one direction from the starting the to make the damper Test is true, the test causes Bidirectional part of the test. the return of decimal places Number for each airflow reading. Precision Display to display is hundredths. value The default Opens the Help system. Table 158: Box Flow Test - Results Tab Window Description Field Displays a list of devices a Box Flow Test module. Device Name that contain device MAC address. MAC Address Field Displays the device's BACnet instance number . Instance Number Name Loaded s system name. System device’ 357 Controller Tool Help: Performing a Box Flow Test

358 Table 158: Box Flow Test - Results Tab Window Field Description tested: Supply Damper , Exhaust, Loop Indicates Flow the flow loop being duct VAV application A single or Hot Duct. Cold Duct, has only one flow loop: the supply damper . A supply/exhaust application address: the has two flow loops processed in one controller damper supply damper and the exhaust . In dual duct than one flow loop for each more controller applications where include hot deck, is tested, and possible loops cold deck, dampers. exhaust Maximum rated flow rate (cfm) of the VAV box. This flow rate Max Flow to the flow values read at 100%. is compared when is open to that percentage. Percent Columns (0% to 100%) Airflow the damper (or last) state of the test for each Current For detailed State device. on possible states, see the Box Flow Test section. explanations Indicates the results of the box flow test. Results Summary Opens to save the results as a .csv file. Save Results a dialog Closes the Box Flow Test screen. Done Opens the Help system. 358 Controller Tool Help: Performing a Box Flow Test

359 Wireless ZFR1810 Operations Configuration feature channel configuration changes to the ZFR1810 Coordinator . Use the ZFR Channel to make to upgrade and transfer to multiple ZFR devices on the same MS/TP trunk. Use the Upgrade ZFR Coordinators code Change Update features only apply to the ZFR181x Series Wireless The ZFR Channel Note: and ZFR Coordinator WNC1800/ZFR182x Pro Series Wireless Field Bus System Technical Bulletin (LIT–12012356) System. See the Wireless WNC1800 Coordinator Gateway User's Guide (LIT–12012357) for information on the and Network System. Pro Series WNC1800/ZFR182x on ZFR1800 Series system, refer to the ZFR Checkout For additional . information Tool Help (LIT–12012292) ZFR1810 Operations Concepts Wireless Connections options are available: NxE Passthru , Bluetooth ® , MAP 4.2+/BACnet Router Four connection . See , and ZFR dongle Connections Transfer Operations section for details on these options. in the Configuration ZFR Channel feature allows you to change the range of available wireless channels to be used Configuration The ZFR Channel this utility from the Tools menu by selecting Tools > Wireless > ZFR Channel . Access by the ZFR Coordinator Configuration . After changing the channel, it can take 15 minutes or more for all the wireless devices in the PAN to come Note: online back to an NAE. ZFR1810 Coordinators Upgrade code ZFR1810 allows you to upgrade and transfer feature to multiple ZFR1810 devices The Upgrade Coordinators trunk. Access this utility on the same by selecting Wireless > Upgrade ZFR Coordinators . from the Tools menu This menu option is only available when a CAF is not open. After selecting the devices, the utility upgrades and transfers code to the devices in the following order: 1. Boot Upgrades and transfers the boot code to all selected devices and updates the transfer status. Code: Radio Code: and transfers the radio code to all selected devices and updates the transfer status. 2. Upgrades and transfer to device process, you can use the View Log and View Status options to see During the upgrade the progress. Notes: Coordinator has Main Code version earlier than Release 5.0, it should • If a ZFR1810 be upgraded. • The Force Transfer to Device and Force Boot Transfer to Device check boxes allow you to force a main Main or boot code transfer to all selected devices. code Wireless Upgrade Coordinators See the and ZFR1810 - Upgrade ZFR Coordinators Wizard screens steps sections for information on the Upgrade ZFR Coordinators and how to use it. Upgrade Single Coordinator ZFR1810 and transfer Single feature allows you to upgrade Coordinator code to a ZFR device. Access The Upgrade ZFR1810 from the Tools menu by selecting this utility > Upgrade Single ZFR Coordinator . This menu option is Wireless only available when a CAF is not open. After selecting the devices, the utility upgrades and transfers code to the devices in the following order: 1. Code: Upgrades and transfers the boot code to the selected device. Boot 2. Main Code: Upgrades and transfers the main code to the selected device. than Release Note: Coordinator has Main Code at a version earlier If a ZFR1810 5.0, it should be upgraded. 359 Controller Tool Help: Wireless ZFR1810 Operations

360 Wireless ZFR1810 Steps Operations a ZFR1810 Channel Performing Configuration select 1. From Configuration . The ZFR Channel Configuration Wizard Wireless the Tools menu, > ZFR Channel appears. Selection and click Next . The Device the desired screen appears. 2. Select connection type and parameters connection, we recommend you keep the Baud Rate Note: (38400). For the Bluetooth default the Device Screen appears, click Discover if the wizard does not automatically begin the Selection 3. When process. discovery Note: Once the desired online device appears in the list, click Stop. a device from the list and click Next . The Select ZFR Country Code screen appears with the current 4. Select Wireless Field channel country displayed. Bus device select a different Pro channel from the Country Code drop-down menu. 5. If needed, ZFR/ZFR Finish writes the channel data to the Wireless Field Bus device. 6. Click . The wizard Notes: appears if the selected Wireless Field Bus device does not support this feature. Click OK • An alert message to close the message. This does the operation button changes to Done. the Finish not happen if you selected the • When completes, wizard after successful Close check box. Instead, the wizard closes and you can skip Step configuration 7. 7. Click Done . Upgrade ZFR1810 Coordinators Note: If a ZFR1810 Coordinator has Main Code version earlier than Release 5.0, it should be upgraded. 1. Make sure CAF is open in the tool. no the Tools menu, select > Upgrade ZFR Coordinators . The Upgrade ZFR Coordinators wizard 2. From Wireless screen with the Connection active. appears type and parameters and click 3. Select . The Transfer to Device screen appears. the connection Next We strongly advise against using an NxE Passthru connection to transfer to multiple controllers due to Note: communication potential the process. loss during devices Discover process and locate devices. When the discovery are located, they appear in 4. Click to begin section the main to Device screen. of the Transfer Note: process, click Stop To stop the Discover . 5. Select the desired devices from the list. Note: If more than one device has the same Instance Number , the numbers display red in the device list. depending 6. Select Main Transfer to Device and Force Boot Transfer to Device check boxes the Force or clear on whether you want to force a main code or boot code transfer to device . Note: In some scenarios, you must select a boot code transfer to device or the transfer does not progress. This forced transfer ensures proper operation of the application. to device 7. Select check boxes next to the devices you want to upgrade. or clear 8. Click Finish . The boot code, main code, and radio code upgrades and transfers to the devices. 360 Controller Tool Help: Wireless ZFR1810 Operations

361 9. Check the progress as follows: of the operation column. • View the text in the Status . The Status dialog box appears showing current status of the operation. Click Refresh • Click View Status the status. Click To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to another periodically to update Copy as Microsoft such Notepad. program, word-processing box appears showing • Click operation log file. Click Refresh periodically View Log . The Log dialog the detailed Copy To Clipboard oo copy and paste the text to another word-processing program, to update the log. Click as Microsoft Notepad. such Log This action clears the contents of the log file. • Click if needed. Clear and transfer to device completes, click Done . 10. When the upgrades ZFR Coordinator Upgrade Single Coordinator has Main Code Note: earlier than Release 5.0, it should be upgraded. If a ZFR1810 at a version sure no CAF is open 1. Make in the tool. 2. From select Wireless > Upgrade Single ZFR Coordinator . the Tools menu, Parameters, enter parameters: 3. In the Connection the connection • enter hostname or IP address, your user credential, and click For NxE Passthru the device connections, the correct supervisory and the trunk. . Select Login device enter connections, rate and COM port information. We recommend you keep the • For Bluetooth the baud Rate default (38400). Baud 4.2+ / BACnet Router connections, specify the following: • For MAP and UDP . - IP address port of the router - Network number of the MS/TP trunk (1-65,534). Do not use 1001 for the MS/TP Network Number . The MS/TP Note: Number 1001 is reserved Network for Johnson IP network connections. Controls - An available network interface adapter to use. Ethernet Note: If you select an available Ethernet network interface, all IP traffic intended for the MAP 4.2+/ BACnet Router through this interface. travels you first open the wizard, connection parameters for connecting to a MAP Gateway at When the default displayed. are stored parameters are modified, the values 4.2 are automatically in version If the connection MAP use. To restore parameters to the default values, click the for future 4.2 the wizard the connection button. Default For further information about the MAP and common Note: issues, refer to the Mobile Access troubleshooting Portal User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). Gateway connections, the PAN Offset. • For ZFR dongle enter section, enter the type of discovery process you want to use: automatic (Auto) and MAC Address. 4. In the Discovery MAC If you selected enter the device address. Address, 5. Click . The Device Selection Screen appears. Next Note: If more than one device has the same Instance Number , the numbers display red in the device list. 6. Select the device and click Next . The Summary screen appears. for ZFR upgrade the Boot, or Radio code to upgrade the ZFR1810 Coordinator . 7. Select Main, Finish . The selected device code 8. Click to the ZFR Coordinator . is transferred Note: See the Status column of the Operation table and the Status bar for information on the transfer progress and status indicators. When the upgrade completes, the Finish button changes to Done. This change after does the Close wizard if you selected successful transfer check box on the Transfer not happen Summary screen. Instead the wizard closes. 9. Click Done . 361 Controller Tool Help: Wireless ZFR1810 Operations

362 Wireless ZFR1810 Operations Screens Wizard ZFR Country Code Configuration - Select ZFR Channel Connection and Device Selection screens as the Transfer to Device wizard. This utility Transfer has the same See the section for information on device selection details and connection types and parameters. Operations Configuration Wizard - Select ZFR Country Code Table 159: ZFR Channel Item Description the Wireless Field Bus device is located. where Code Valid channels Country Navigation Buttons to the previous screen of the wizard. Previous Moves to the next screen of the wizard. Next Moves Finish starts the operation. Finish/Done appears in place of Finish after the operation completes and is used to close the Done wizard. Closes performing the operation. Cancel the wizard without the Help system. Opens Help Wireless - Upgrade ZFR Coordinators Wizard ZFR Coordinators Table 160: Upgrade Field Description Connection Screen Use to specify the connection type to use: Type Connection • NxE Passthru advise against using an NxE Passthru connection to transfer to Note: We strongly due to potential loss during the process. communication controllers multiple • Bluetooth • MAP 4.2+/BACnet Router/WNC1800 • ZFR/ZFR Pro 362 Controller Tool Help: Wireless ZFR1810 Operations

363 Table 160: Upgrade ZFR Coordinators Field Description you to specify the following: NxE Passthru Parameters Connection : Allows host name Indicates or IP Address. Address: • Host name/IP the device • Port: (1–65,535). the port number Indicates and Password: Indicates and password to log in to the site. • Username the username you to connect directly to a site by entering in the Note: The NxE Passthru fields allows and password. site's username supervisory devices. Device: a list of discovered • Supervisor Displays supervisory device. a list of trunks Displays • Trunk: for the selected the COM port and baud rate to use. Bluetooth : Use to specify 4.2+ / BACnet Router MAP the following: : Use to specify • IP address port of the router . and UDP number of the MS/TP (1-65,534). • Network trunk for the MS/TP Network Number . The MS/TP Do not use 1001 Number Note: Network for Johnson Controls IP network connections. 1001 is reserved Ethernet network interface adapter to use. • An available If you select Note: Ethernet network interface, all IP traffic intended for an available 4.2+/ travels Router the MAP through this interface. BACnet When the wizard, the default connection parameters for connecting to a MAP you first open Gateway at version 4.2 are automatically displayed. If the connection parameters are modified, the values in the wizard for future use. To restore the connection are stored to the default values, MAP 4.2 Default button. parameters click the information For further the MAP and common troubleshooting issues, refer Note: about Mobile Access Portal Gateway User's to the (LIT-1201 1999). Guide ZigBee the Personal Area Network (PAN) Offset. : Use to specify to Device Transfer Screen the directory and file name Use to select template file. Browse Button of the transfer Prompts you to browse for a directory and type a file name to save the transfer template Button Save file. Force code transfer to device . If this check a main the main Use to force to Device Transfer Main box is not selected, is different. If the check box is selected, Box Check code is transferred to the device only if the code . code the main is always transferred a boot code transfer to Device . If this check box is not selected, the boot code Use to force Force Boot Transfer to device . If this check box is selected, the boot code is always Box Check is never transferred to the device . transferred 363 Controller Tool Help: Wireless ZFR1810 Operations

364 Table 160: Upgrade ZFR Coordinators Description Field including: Table Devices Available devices, is selected : Indicates (empty box). Selected • (selected if the device box) or not selected were if the devices : Indicates Discovered • discovered. • Name : Name of the device. number of the device. • Model : Indicates the model : Indicates • code version in the device. Main Code Version the main : Indicates the boot code version in the device. Code Boot • Version : MS/TP device address. • Device Address (BACnet • ID of the device. Instance Number ID) : BACnet Instance , the numbers display has the same Number than one device If more Note: red in the device list. of the transfer to device operation after the Finish button Status : Indicates • the status is selected. the Status Button box showing the current status of the operation. Click Refresh View Status Opens dialog Click Copy To Clipboard to copy and paste the text to to update periodically the status. program, such as Microsoft Notepad. another word-processing Opens the Log dialog the detailed operation log file. Click Refresh periodically View Log Button box showing Copy the text to another to copy and paste the log. Click to update To Clipboard such program, Notepad. word-processing as Microsoft Clears all contents of the log file. Clear Log Button Use for devices imported from a transfer template (the transfer template does not store the Info Get Device or the boot and main code The Get Device Info button retrieves versions). device model from the actual so a transfer to device can be properly values code the boot and main device done. the Discovery process for locating devices. Starts Discovery Stops process. Stop the Discovery Buttons Navigation to the previous screen of the wizard. Previous Moves Moves to the next screen of the wizard. Next Finish starts to device . Finish/Done the transfer after the transfer appears completes. Click Done to close the wizard. Done to device Closes the wizard without performing the transfer to device . Cancel Opens the Help system. 364 Controller Tool Help: Wireless ZFR1810 Operations

365 Wireless - Upgrade ZFR Coordinator Single - Upgrade Single Table 161: Wireless ZFR Coordinator Description Field Connection Screen Type Connection the connection type to use: Use to specify • NxE Passthru using against to upgrade connection Note: We strongly and NxE Passthru advise the process. communication due to potential controller loss during • Bluetooth 4.2+/BACnet Router • MAP Pro • ZFR/ZFR the following: Use to specify NxE Passthru: Indicates the device hostname • Hostname/IP Address: or IP Address Indicates the port number (1–65,535). • Port: and Password: Indicates the username and password to log in to the site. • Username An NxE Passthru Note: allows you to connect directly to a site by entering connection in the sites credentials. • Supervisory a list of discovered supervisory devices. Device: Displays a list of trunks for the selected supervisory devices. • Trunk: displays Use to specify the COM port and Baud Rate to use. Connection Parameters Bluetooth: MAP 4.2+ / BACnet : Use to specify the following: Router and UDP . • IP address port of the router number of the MS/TP trunk (1-65,534). • Network Do not use 1001 for the MS/TP Network Number . The MS/TP Network Number Note: 1001 is reserved for Johnson Controls IP network connections. • An available Ethernet interface adapter to use. network If you select an available network interface, all IP traffic intended for the Note: Ethernet BACnet Router travels through this interface. MAP 4.2+/ you first open the wizard, the default connection parameters for connecting to a MAP When at version Gateway displayed. If the connection parameters are modified, 4.2 are automatically are stored use. To restore for future the values the connection parameters to in the wizard values, click the MAP 4.2 Default button. the default Note: For further information about the MAP and common troubleshooting issues, refer to the Mobile Portal Gateway User's Guide (LIT-1201 1999). Access ZigBee: the Personal Area Network (PAN) offset. Use to specify Device Selection Screen Performs a device discovery to find a device. The discovery option only returns ZFR devices Discover that are on the field bus. Note: a discovery , when you click Discover again, the list clears from the Device After table. Selection Stops the discovery process. Stop 365 Controller Tool Help: Wireless ZFR1810 Operations

366 Table 161: Wireless - Upgrade Single ZFR Coordinator Description Field Displays Table the available Devices including: devices, of the device. Name Name: • Device • System Name of the system. Name: • Address: Address of the device. You can sort on this column. • Type: Type of device. • Status: of the device. Status indicates the number of devices The first column Note: (no header name) discovered Summary Screen Transfer the following device information: Device Information Displays • Name: Name of the device. of the device. • Description: a description Displays of the device. Model • Model: number Version: version. Boot Code • Boot Code • Main Code Version: Code version. Main name. • System Name: System usage. Usage: • CPU CPU Memory used by the objects • Object Usage: Memory in the device. • Status: Device's status. Version: Firmware version of the wireless device. • Radio Firmware • PAN Offset: PAN Offset of the wireless device. • Device Address: of the device. Address whether has unbound references. Displays the device • Unbound References: devices, indicates • FC Communication field bus Mode: On compatible the following Wired, Wireless, and Ethernet. N2 Slave, communication: Closes the Upgrade Single ZFR Coordinator wizard after successfully completing the transfer after successful wizard Close selected. transfer operation, when Moves to the previous screen of the wizard. Previous to the next screen of the wizard. Next Moves starts the upgrade process. Finish Finish/Done appears in place of Finish after the upgrade completes and is used to close the wizard. Done Closes without performing the transfer . Cancel the wizard Opens the Help system. 366 Controller Tool Help: Wireless ZFR1810 Operations

367 Applications An application of the components that make up the control logic of a system, including modules, logic is a collection custom logic, definition. The Applications section of the Help system describes the applications blocks, and hardware Selection Wizard in the user interface after being selected. as they are presented in the System and as they are seen for details: application See the following sections • Air Handling Unit Applications • Fan Coil Applications • Unit Ventilator Applications • Applications Pump Heat • VAV Applications • Applications Central Plant • and Monitoring Supervisory Control Only Applications Custom The Custom Applications and Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Note: available from the File options > New dialog inputs and outputs in the Control View workspace where you can create box lay down section. applications. Custom Applications in the Configuring a System Creating specialized See • Sideloop Applications (Sideloop button) Upgrading System Files section for a list and description See the and System Selection changes that of the module were since the last release of the tool. made Configuring a System See the for information on how to make selections in the System Selection Wizard. section See the Application Descriptions section for a description of the type of information provided in this Help system for the applications. Application Descriptions sections contain topics: The application the following • Overview Application • Core Logic Modules • Selection Mechanical System • Control Logic Selection The Sideloop application has one Note: Selection screen instead of the Mechanical System Selection Sideloop and Control Selection screens. Logic Overview Application describes the application and provides This section descriptions. links to its detailed Core Logic Modules This section describes the modules that get automatically laid down by the application, regardless of the selections you make in the wizard. Inputs are listed they appear in the Control View (for example, Network where and The modules by type to identify Controllers). Output Mechanical Selection System This section to the mechanical selections available corresponds System Selection screen of the in the Mechanical System Selection Wizard. The Mechanical System Selection section is broken down into groups of selections based dependencies, on how they appear Each group describes the selections available, any selection in the wizard. and the modules that get laid down by the selections. 367 Controller Tool Help: Applications

368 The modules are listed where they appear in the Control View (for example, Network Inputs and by type to identify Controllers). group of modules is listed only if modules of that type are laid down by the particular Output A category otherwise of selections, it is not included. Logic Selection Control corresponds to the control This section available in the Control Logic Selection screen of the System logic selections Selection Wizard. The Control Logic Selection section is broken down into groups of selections based on how they any selection appear group describes the selections available, Each dependencies, and the modules in the wizard. that get laid down by the selections. The modules are listed by type to identify where they appear in the Control View (for example, Network Inputs and by the particular Output A category of modules is listed only if modules of that type are laid down Controllers). group of selections, otherwise it is not included. 368 Controller Tool Help: Applications

369 Air Handling Unit Applications Unit applications selections that are capable of controlling many different air handlers and The Air Handling provide control The selections for the AHU applications have Mechanical System and Control System options strategies. like other systems, but the selections are integrated together into the Mechanical System Selection section. Input or control sensors if required for selected device loaded options. The Control System Selection are automatically section provides optional sensors, equipment, and monitored safeties. 369 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

370 Mixed Air Single Duct Applications Air Single Duct application programming of many common Air Handling Unit configurations through The Mixed allows the following: the Tool. This application supports fans • Supply or relief fans and return exhaust • Interlocked fans • Temperature control strategy OA section options • Economizer and minimum cooling, reheat, coils • Preheat, or dual temperature , or both , dehumidifier • Humidifier for information on this application’ s logic and selections. See the following Upgrading System Files sections See the for a list and description of the module and System Selection changes that were made since the last release section of the tool. Mixed Duct (MASD) Core Logic Air Single (MASD) Modules Duct Applications use the core logic listed as follows: All Mixed Air Single Network Inputs • APP-MODE (Application Mode) TUNING-RESET : This module is used to reset the tuning parameters to the default values • after the initial present transfer . to the device Network Modules section. See the Input State Generation • Application Determination : This module separates out the Water Flush application mode for separate Mode connection to State Selection and passes the remaining application modes to State Selection. • Water System Pass Through ( Pass Through ): This module passes the Water Flush system mode to a Flush the valves State so that when water flush is requested, input always open. separate Selection • Air Single Duct HR Sequencing ( Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR) v51 ) Mixed • PID Tuning : This module forces every output controller to reset the Proportional Band and Integral Reset time of every PID to default values based on current process ID. Output Control • Heating Required Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) LV ( • Cooling LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) Required Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection Mixed Fans (MASD) All unit configurations must include at least one constant speed or variable speed supply fan. If you select a variable speed pressure sensor is included to control the fan. You can also select Two Duct Static Pressure fan, a static Sensors to add an additional sensor and low select between the two to control the fan speed. Two and three speed fans are not supported for Air Handling Units. 370 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

371 Dual Supply (MASD) Fans are three supported of operation for dual fans. There sequences operates both fans as one. Both fans are started together and if either fan fails, that • Run Together and stopped and the system is cleared is reset. until the alarm fan is stopped available for variable speed • operates the lead fan until its output reaches the stage up Lead/Lag (only fans) , default value = 90%). If the lead fan is not able to maintain the static pressure setpoint, setpoint (SFSTG-SP and ramps up to the current speed. You can change the lead fan by adjusting the the lag fan is started control falls below input value = Device 1). If the fan speed (default the stage down of the network SF-LEAD value value = 28%), setpoint and the lead fan is controlled to carry the entire load. If (default the lag fan is stopped fan fails, that fan is stopped until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset. either Run/Standby operates the lead fan, keeping the standby fan in reserve. • fan is If the lead fan fails, the standby started. fan fails, that fan is stopped until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset. If either Fan Status (MASD) Dual to selected input for the supply fans. If Dual fans are selected, two binary inputs Fan status to add a binary defaults any additional selections. The Supply Fan status are added the loss of airflow status for the unit. without determines to restart the unit automatically or manually after the loss of airflow or after the other unit alarm is You may select If you select Manual Restart, a binary cleared. or network input is added to the system. This input must be input commanded the system. to restart (MASD) Fan Array is multiple fans acting as a single fan. The Analog Fan Status option allows for a single analog input Fan Array to calculate for Fan Arrays using series Fan Status and resistors. contacts Alarm Management (MASD) Any selection from this section loads an alarm management module into the application. These modules are named [Device] Alarms, [Device] is replaced by the equipment reference. These modules connect all of the alarm where to a single alarm and manage the alarm reset and reset type for each input. In addition to the four inputs output OR Input, can manage, is an additional input for Cascaded there which is intended to be connected inputs this module [Device] Alarms module if necessary . Only a single alarm reset input is created to another type of manual for each reset Input or Binary Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset per alarm, this (Network custom work. requires programming on the equipment, Lockout This input indicates that service • done Switch: and the equipment does work is being not operate until this input is cleared. • Motor Overload Tripped/Frequency Converter Fault: These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload option is available speed motors, and the Frequency Converter Fault option is available for variable for constant motors. control input denotes an issue with the motor speed device and indicates that current is not flowing Either to the motor . Belt Alarm: This option indicates that there • in the drive belt for the equipment. is a failure Return Fan (MASD) This option adds a BO for the Return Fan start stop. Return fans can be constant speed or variable speed fans. if the Supply Constant additional options. The Variable speed fan option is only available fans do not have speed Fan is configured as Variable Speed. Variable Speed Return Fan (MASD) This option is only available if the Supply Fan is configured as Variable Speed. Variable speed return fans provide three options for control strategy . 371 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

372 Volume Matching: controls the speed of the variable volume return fan to match the speed of the supply This option the supply fan airflow fan airflow . The return fan airflow setpoint is the supply airflow fan by measuring and the return When minus the constant is changed to zero since no fresh air is used. the system a constant. is unoccupied, Flow the airflow for measuring Pressure (Pitot Tube) or , Measurement (Scaled) . are two options There Velocity adds an input for the velocity pressure Velocity the calculation, provided you enter the K Pressure and performs and duct area for your system. Measurement supports direct flow reading flow measurement devices. factor Flow Separate must to match your sensing device. If you select input Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Either be scaled this option allows you to use a different differential setpoint when unoccupied. Setpoints, When Matching a Volume Note: return fan and select either Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or you select Proportional, the outdoor is controlled by the differential flow between the Supply EAD & RAD air volume and the supply Fans, is controlled by modulating the return and exhaust air and Return air temperature dampers. Static Pressure: This option adds an input for building static pressure. The return fan is controlled to Building the building (network pressure setpoint maintain input BLDGP-SP). This scheme maintains slight positive static in the building to the exterior static pressure. pressure compared Fan: This option simply echoes the supply fan command to the return Track Supply that the fan. This requires return and balanced to provide less flow than the supply fan be sized fan. Dual Return Fans (MASD) If Dual Supply Fans has not been selected, there are three supported sequences of operation for dual fans. If Dual Supply Fans selected, the return fans must use the same control strategy . has been operates both fans as one. Both fans are started together , and if either fan fails, that Run Together and stopped is cleared is reset. until the alarm and the system fan is stopped available for variable speed Lead/Lag operates the lead fan until its output reaches the stage up setpoint (only fans) , default value = 90%). If the lead fan is not able to maintain the static pressure setpoint, the lag fan is (RFSTG-SP and ramps up to the current control speed. The lead fan can be changed by adjusting the value of the network started RF-LEAD setpoint value = Device 1). If the fan speed falls below the stage down input (default value = 28%), (default until and the lead fan is controlled the entire load. If either fan fails, that fan is stopped to carry the lag fan is stopped the alarm is cleared and the system is reset. Run/Standby operates the lead fan, keeping the standby fan in reserve. If the lead fan fails, the standby fan is started. If either until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset. fan fails, that fan is stopped Fan Status (MASD) Dual to selected to add a binary input Fan status fans. If Dual fans are selected, two binary inputs defaults for the supply without any additional are added The Supply Fan status determines the loss of airflow status for the unit. selections. You may select to restart the unit automatically or manually after the loss of airflow or after the other unit alarm is cleared. If you select Manual Restart, a binary input or network input is added to the system. This input must be commanded the system. to restart Fan Array (MASD) Fan Array is multiple fans acting as a single fan. The Analog Fan Status option allows for a single analog input to contacts calculate for Fan Arrays using series Fan Status and resistors. 372 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

373 Alarm Management (MASD) from this section loads management module into the application. These modules are named Any selection an alarm where [Device] by the equipment reference. These modules connect all of the alarm [Device] Alarms, is replaced output input. the alarm reset and reset type for each alarm In addition to the four inputs to a single and manage which there input for Cascaded OR Input, is an additional is intended to be connected this module inputs can manage, Alarms module if necessary . Only a single to another reset input is created for each type of manual [Device] alarm (Network or Binary Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset per alarm, this reset Input programming custom work. requires Switch: This input indicates that service work is being • on the equipment, and the equipment does Lockout done until this input is cleared. not operate Motor Overload Tripped/Frequency • Fault: These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload Converter option for constant speed motors, and the Frequency Converter Fault option is available for variable is available motors. Either denotes an issue with the motor control device and indicates that current is not flowing speed input . to the motor This option indicates that there is a failure Belt Alarm: belt for the equipment. • in the drive First (MASD) Fan to Start allows you to specify whether the supply or return fan starts first. This option Speed Fan (Bldg Variable Status Press Control) (MASD) Relief is available Fan is not selected. This option adds a BO for the Relief Fan start stop and an AO This option if Return control. The only control strategy for this fan is to maintain building static for the fan speed The relief fan pressure. is controlled the building static pressure setpoint to maintain input BLDGP-SP). This scheme maintains (the network slight positive pressure in the building compared to the exterior static pressure. Dual Relief (MASD) Fans Fans has not been there are three supported sequences of operation for dual fans. If Dual If Dual Supply selected, has been control the relief fans must use the same Fans strategy . Supply selected, both fans as one. Both fans are started and stopped together , and if either fan fails, that Run Together operates is cleared and the system is reset. fan is stopped until the alarm (only available for variable speed fans) operates the lead fan until its output reaches Lead/Lag up setpoint the stage (RFSTG-SP value = 90%). If the lead fan is not able to maintain the static pressure setpoint, the lag fan is , default and ramps control speed. The lead fan can be changed by adjusting the value of the network started up to the current RF-LEAD (default value = Device 1). If the fan speed falls below input down setpoint (default value = 28%), the stage the lag fan is stopped and the lead fan is controlled to carry the entire load. If either fan fails, that fan is stopped until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset. Run/Standby operates the standby fan in reserve. If the lead fan fails, the standby fan is the lead fan, keeping If either until the alarm is cleared and the system is reset. started. fan fails, that fan is stopped Dual Fan Status (MASD) defaults to selected to add a binary input for the supply Fan status If Dual fans are selected, two binary inputs fans. are added any additional selections. The Supply without determines the loss of airflow status for the unit. Fan status You may select to restart the unit automatically or manually after the loss of airflow or after the other unit alarm is This input cleared. Restart, a binary input or network input is added to the system. Manual must be If you select commanded to restart the system. Fan Array (MASD) Fan Array is multiple fans acting as a single fan. The Analog Fan Status option allows for a single analog input to contacts calculate for Fan Arrays using series Fan Status and resistors. 373 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

374 Alarm Management (MASD) from this section loads management module into the application. These modules are named Any selection an alarm where [Device] by the equipment reference. These modules connect all of the alarm [Device] Alarms, is replaced output input. the alarm reset and reset type for each alarm In addition to the four inputs to a single and manage which there input for Cascaded OR Input, is an additional is intended to be connected this module inputs can manage, Alarms module if necessary . Only a single to another reset input is created for each type of manual [Device] alarm (Network or Binary Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset per alarm, this reset Input programming custom work. requires Switch: This input indicates that service work is being • on the equipment, and the equipment does Lockout done until this input is cleared. not operate Motor Overload Tripped/Frequency Converter • These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload Fault: option for constant speed motors, and the Frequency Converter Fault option is available for variable is available motors. Either denotes an issue with the motor control device and indicates that current is not flowing speed input . to the motor • indicates that there is a failure in the drive belt for the equipment. This option Belt Alarm: Exhaust Fan (MASD) This section is designed to accommodate up to two exhaust fans interlocked with the Air Handling Unit. Fan (MASD) Toilet Exhaust adds control start/stop This option for a toilet exhaust fan associated with the Air Handling Unit. The a BO to provide on when fan is operating in occupied mode. fan is commanded the supply Exhaust Fan Status (MASD) the option for Fan Status adds a binary input Selecting fan. You may select to restart the exhaust for the toilet exhaust fan automatically after the loss alarm is cleared. Selecting or manually Restart adds either a BI or Network Manual Input to the system. This input must be commanded to restart the system. Alarm Management (MASD) from this section loads management module into the application. These modules are named Any selection an alarm where modules is replaced by the equipment reference. These Alarms, connect all of the alarm [Device] [Device] type for each to a single and manage the alarm reset and reset output input. In addition to the four inputs alarm this module can manage, there is an additional input for Cascaded OR Input, which is intended to be connected inputs [Device] to another module if necessary . Only a single alarm reset input is created for each type of manual Alarms (Network per alarm, or Binary Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset reset this Input custom work. requires programming Lockout Switch: This input indicates that service • done on the equipment, and the equipment does work is being not operate until this input is cleared. • Motor Overload Tripped/Frequency Converter Fault: These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload option is available speed motors, and the Frequency Converter Fault option is available for variable for constant motors. device input denotes an issue with the motor control speed and indicates that current is not flowing Either to the motor . in the drive Belt Alarm: indicates that there • This option belt for the equipment. is a failure Blocking Protection (MASD) Blocking protection is used to energize rotational equipment that has not been active for an extended period of time. This is typically to prevent bearings and seals from deteriorating prematurely . The input values Max Time Off done (Default value = 7 Days) and Blocking On Time (Default value = 5 seconds) control the behavior of the output. The output is energized for the Blocking On Time if it has been off longer than the Max Time Off. 374 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

375 General Exhaust Fan (MASD) adds a BO to provide control for a general exhaust fan associated with the Air Handling Unit. This option start/stop the supply The fan is commanded mode. fan is operating on when in occupied (MASD) Fan Status Exhaust for the toilet exhaust a binary input the option fan. You may select to restart the exhaust for Fan Status Selecting adds after the loss alarm is cleared. Selecting Manual Restart fan automatically either a BI or Network or manually adds to the system. must be commanded to restart the system. Input This input (MASD) Management Alarm loads an alarm management Any selection into the application. These modules are named from this section module Alarms, where [Device] is replaced by the equipment reference. These modules [Device] all of the alarm connect inputs alarm output and manage the alarm reset and reset type for each input. In addition to the four to a single OR Input, this module is an additional input for Cascaded there which is intended to be connected inputs can manage, [Device] Alarms module if necessary . Only a single alarm reset input is created for each type of manual to another (Network Input) or Binary reset per application. If your application requires a manual reset per alarm, this Input custom work. requires programming Lockout Switch: This input indicates that service • done on the equipment, and the equipment does work is being not operate until this input is cleared. • Motor Overload Tripped/Frequency Converter Fault: These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload option is available speed motors, and the Frequency Converter Fault option is available for variable for constant motors. Either denotes an issue with the motor control device and indicates that current is not flowing speed input to the motor . • Belt Alarm: This option indicates that there is a failure in the drive belt for the equipment. Protection (MASD) Blocking protection rotational to energize Blocking equipment that has not been active for an extended period of time. is used done prematurely bearings and seals from deteriorating This is typically . The input values Max Time Off to prevent = 5 seconds) (Default and Blocking On Time (Default value = 7 Days) control the behavior of the output. The value output is energized for the Blocking On Time if it has been off longer than the Max Time Off. Economizer Damper(s) (MASD) selections the logic for the Economizer Dampers. If no economizer control (Free Cooling) is required, These provide these should not be selected (use Two Position Min OA Damper instead). options Common Proportional Mixed (MASD) This option adds a single AO (MAD-O) to provide damper control for mechanically linked dampers or several actuators operating the same signal. using Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) (MASD) This option adds three AOs (OAD-O, EAD-O, and RAD-O) to provide damper control for the unit mixing dampers. Air Damper The Return signal is reverse of the Outdoor and Exhaust Air Damper signals. 375 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

376 EAD and RAD (MASD) Proportional is only available if the Return with the Volume Matching control scheme. Select this option This option fan is selected and Return only. In this control scheme, the outdoor damper is completely open the Exhaust to control Air Dampers and return dampers are modulated to control air movement to the mixing box and thus, limit the while the exhaust air. of fresh intake Outputs and RAD-O) for the damper signals. • add two AOs (EAD-O Separate • adds a single AO (MAD-O) to control both dampers. Common Output Two Position OAD optionally adds a single BO to open the outdoor air damper when the unit is occupied • and close it is unoccupied. it when and RAD Proportional OAD available Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Press Control). Note: for Variable This is the only option Select the Outdoor and Return Air Dampers only. In this control scheme, the exhaust damper this option to control open while the outdoor is completely dampers are modulated to control air movement to the mixing box and return and thus, of fresh air. Also, this control scheme is unique in that the command to the damper is twice limit the intake of air requested. For example, if you require 20% fresh air, the outdoor air damper command is 40% to the amount achieve 20% flow while the return damper remains fully opened. This sequence is done in accordance with ASHRAE standards to minimize to airflow and reduce fan energy . the resistance ASHRAE Guideline16-2003 Outdoor , Return, and Relief Dampers for Air-Side Economizer Systems , Per - Selecting Relief & RAD Outputs is required if Variable Speed with Separate Fan (Building Static Press OAD Proportional is selected. Control) & RAD Proportional options can only be selected if Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching is The OAD selected. • Outputs adds two AOs (OAD-O and RAD-O) for the damper signals. Separate Common Output adds a single AO (MAD-O) to control both dampers. • • Two Position EAD optionally adds a single BO to open the exhaust air damper when the unit is occupied and close it when it is unoccupied. Suitability Economizer (MASD) to select the method of determining when free cooling is available. Use this section Network adds a network input to indicate free cooling is available for the unit. The value of this input Command should be calculated elsewhere using the prescribed logic for your project. to be connected Enthalpy adds a binary input designed (BI) to a commercially available enthalpy switch. Switch This type of sensor is typically supplied with package equipment or packaged economizer sections. 376 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

377 Outdoor Air the user to select the desired logic to determine when free cooling is available. allows Any economizer strategy the outdoor air temperature or humidity uses a network input by default Note: that requires If there unless analog inputs for these values. included are analog inputs for values for these the application or humidity , the network inputs are removed, and the module inputs receive data outdoor air temperature from the analog inputs. • enables free cooling when the outdoor air temperature drops below the economizer Dry Bulb Temp Economizer setpoint (ECONSWO-SP). switchover & Enthalpy Economizer uses • temperature and humidity and the return temperature Temperature the outdoor to calculate the enthalpy difference of the two airstreams. It uses free cooling if there is less enthalpy and humidity as long as the dry bulb temperature is below the economizer switchover setpoint in that air stream (ECONSWO-SP). • Return Air compares the dry bulb temperature for the outdoor and return air to determine Outdoor Air versus is available. free cooling when Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Sensor (MASD) and Exhaust Outdoor the minimum position value based on a range of CO Use this option input values. to change 2 CO2 Sensor Use Zone a wall mounted zone sensor . uses CO2 Sensor a duct mounted return sensor . Use Return uses Minimum Position Reset by OA Flow (MASD) Damper the required to adjust position command to meet the minimum minimum outdoor airflow rate as Use this option sensed by an airflow measuring station in the fresh air. There are two options for measuring the airflow , Velocity Pressure (Pitot Measurement (Scaled). Velocity Pressure adds an input for the velocity pressure Tube) or Flow the calculation provided the K factor and duct area for your system. Flow Measurement and performs you enter be scaled flow reading direct Either input must flow measurement to match your sensing device. supports devices. Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper (MASD) Minimum selections the logic for a dedicated These Minimum Outdoor Air Damper and/or a Minimum Outdoor Air Fan provide Fan) with optional . (Injection damper and Damper End Switch are available only for selection if applicable The Fan Status is (that is, if fan or damper selected). Minimum Outdoor Air Damper Selections (MASD) The Two Position Damper option adds a binary output to control a two position minimum outdoor air damper . The Proportional option adds an analog output to control a proportional position minimum outdoor air Damper . This damper conditions. to fully open under normal damper However , if the optional Adjustable Minimum ramps OA Position Position is selected, the damper opens to the Minimum Air Damper as defined by the network Outdoor input (MOADPOS-SP). Minimum Outdoor Air Fan Selections (MASD) to control The Single Fan adds a binary output Injection a single speed fresh air fan. This fan operates Speed under occupied conditions. If the optional Two Position Damper is selected, an additional binary output is added during to control , open during occupied, closed the damper unoccupied. 377 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

378 The Variable Injection Fan adds a binary output and an analog output to control a variable speed fresh air Speed under occupied varying the speed as necessary to maintain the minimum outdoor fan. This fan operates conditions There airflow the airflow , Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) or Flow are two options for measuring at setpoint. Pressure adds an input for the velocity pressure and performs the calculation . Velocity Measurement (Scaled) the K factor and duct area for your system. Flow Measurement supports provided flow reading flow you enter direct devices. input must be scaled to match your sensing device. Additionally , you must select how Either measurement or flow sensor Close Damper - Turn Off Fan input. Open Damper - Fan Maximum to an unreliable the fan reacts are the two choices. If the optional Two Position Damper is selected, an additional binary output is added Speed the damper during during occupied, closed to control unoccupied. , open (MOA) (MASD) Fan Status for Fan Status a binary input for the minimum outdoor air fan. You may select to restart Selecting adds the option air fan automatically or manually after the loss alarm is cleared. Selecting Manual the minimum outdoor Restart either Input to the system. This input must be commanded a BI or Network the system. adds to restart Management (MASD) Alarm from this section loads an alarm management Any selection into the application. These modules are named module [Device] where [Device] is replaced by the equipment reference. These modules connect all of the alarm Alarms, to a single reset output and manage the alarm inputs and reset type for each input. In addition to the four alarm for Cascaded this module there is an additional input can manage, OR Input, which is intended to be connected inputs to another [Device] Alarms module if necessary . Only a single alarm reset input is created for each type of manual reset (Network or Binary Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset per alarm, this Input custom programming requires work. and the equipment Switch: indicates that service work is being Lockout on the equipment, This input does • done until this input is cleared. not operate Motor Overload Tripped/Frequency Converter Fault: These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload • is available motors, speed option and the Frequency Converter Fault option is available for variable for constant motors. device input denotes an issue with the motor control speed and indicates that current is not flowing Either to the motor . in the drive Belt Alarm: indicates that there • This option belt for the equipment. is a failure Damper End Switch (MASD) This option adds a binary input to monitor the actual position of the damper . Reduce Outdoor (MASD) Air on Low Temperature loads the intake of outdoor air when the temperature is low. This reduction is This selection logic that reduces by closing dampers, reducing the volume differential (if Variable Capacity Return accomplished Matching Fan Volume control and turning off or closing two-position fans or dampers. is selected), If a preheat downstream of the mixing plenum (that is, it is in the mixed air), the Preheat Temperature coil is located (downstream of the coil) serves as the process variable for this control strategy . Otherwise, the Mixed Air Temperature serves as the process variable. logic for the low limit strategy is embedded directly The control Control modules and activated simply into the Output by connecting the appropriate setpoint and process variable. The logic takes precedence over all logic other than Emergency Modes. This selection is allowed if any of the Economizer Damper , Minimum Outdoor Air Fan, or Minimum Outdoor Air Damper options is selected. 378 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

379 Temperature Control (MASD) Strategy selections provide Temperature Control Strategy for the application. The Discharge Air These the logic for the basic (fixed setpoint from Outdoor Air Temperature) are designed for providing air to separately Control options and Reset a single or Return options are designed for directly controlling The Zone zone (whether zones. controlled Control or in the return duct). For single zone control, the application can optionally be configured the sensor is in the zone the Discharge Air Temperature reset based on the Zone or Return Air Temperature. to control to a setpoint (MASD) Air Control Discharge the discharge air temperature (DA-T) as the process variable for the heating and cooling loops in This option uses this is selected, the user can, additionally , select Reset From Outdoor Air Temperature or . When the air handler Reset From Outdoor Air Temperature . These two options are essentially Alternate but vary slightly in the same, how the data is defined. From Outdoor Air Temperature changes the discharge air temperature setpoint as Reset air temperature varies. schedule is defined by entering four values, the outdoor air temperature the outdoor This reset and maximum and the discharge air minimum and maximum values. When the outdoor is at the minimum values value or below , the discharge air setpoint is at its maximum value. The Alternate Reset From Outdoor Air minimum accomplishes function, Temperature but can be defined using the outdoor minimum and maximum values, the same air setpoint air span or how much to reset the discharge air while the outdoor and the discharge and a reset changes. temperature or Return Control (MASD) Zone control allows This option or return air temperature the user to configure for the primary temperature control zone loop. Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return (MASD) This option uses or return temperature sensor to reset the discharge air temperature setpoint. The Zone the zone Control of Staged Reset of Heating setting controls the cooling based on zone or return air or Return Cooling, by OA control Selecting the Add Return/Zone Reset of heating. option adds an additional temperature, and discharge loop so that the zone or return setpoint is reset by the outdoor air temperature, while the zone reset air or return temperature to reset the discharge air setpoint. is used Air Temperature be selected. by Zone or Return is selected, Cycle During Occupied cannot If Discharge Reset During Occupied (MASD) Cycle causes the fan to cycle off during This feature mode if there is no call for heating or cooling. This node the occupied is located here because only zone or return temperature control schemes allow this option. Discharge air control schemes require to determine the need for heating or cooling. airflow During Air Temperature or Return is selected, Cycle by Zone Occupied cannot be selected. If Discharge Reset Air Temperature (MASD) Return in the primary Selecting an analog input for the return air temperature and uses this value adds temperature this option control loop. Zone Temperature (MASD) Selecting this option adds an analog input for the zone temperature and uses this value in the primary temperature Setpoint control options allow the user to select a Additional Adjust feature, which can be of either Common loop. Setpoint Adjust or Warm Cool Adjust type, or a Temp Occ Support option to support a request for temporary occupancy from the zone sensor . 379 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

380 Summer and Winter Setpoint Shift (MASD) Compensation this option shifts and cooling setpoints to compensate for extreme outdoor air temperatures. Selecting the heating to zone control by outdoor air temperature, with a large deadband so the setpoints are not This works reset similar air is between 50 and 75 °F. the outdoor modified while Occupancy Control (MASD) how the unit determines occupied status and how it behaves during unoccupied periods. These This section defines provide the logic for Occupancy Determination. selections Mode Occupied causes the unit to operate in occupied mode at all times. Always option The are selected for separate Occupied Note: Setpoints or Temporary Occupancy , the If any options and Unoccupied Occupied option cannot be selected. Always Scheduled Occupancy option adds a network input that causes the unit to cycle The occupied, standby , between and unoccupied as indicated by the OCC-SCHEDULE. Override Support adds a network input modes to allow the user to override operating mode. Occupancy Switch adds a binary input (OCC-OVERRIDE) the current sensor that changes the current operating mode. connected to an occupancy Unoccupied Strategy (MASD) are two choices for how the unit operates during unoccupied periods. Intermittent Night Operation cycles There the fan as required to maintain heating and cooling setpoints. Off during Unoccupied turns the unit the unoccupied off. Note: cooling, or both is not controlled during unoccupied operation. The required coils are operated at Heating, maximum output to drive the temperature to the unoccupied limit as quickly as possible. limited Heat Recovery (MASD) This section defines an optional heat recovery device that exchanges heat between the exhaust air stream and the fresh air stream. devices can be used for heating and cooling depending on the season. These Type (MASD) Enable for when the heat recovery coil is enabled. Dry bulb Compare monitors the temperature of are two options There air. Anytime the difference exceeds the differential, the heat recovery coil is air and the exhaust/return the outdoor Enthalpy monitors humidity in addition to the temperatures to attempt to calculate the total energy in the enabled. in order intelligent a more two air streams decision. The Always On setting is for the air to air heat exchanger . to make Wheel Enthalpy (MASD) coil uses a perforated wheel made of special material that can transmit temperature and This type of heat recovery beneficial between These devices are most the two airstreams. during extreme temperature conditions, humidity since this is when there is the maximum temperature difference between the exhaust and fresh air streams. During very cold conditions, it is possible to the point that ice can form when exposed to the warm to cool the heat wheel exhaust of forming this, the heat wheel changes to LL-T Control mode if there is a chance moist ice. air. To prevent Heat During the heat transfer is limited to allow a minimum mode, Recovery Exhaust Air Temperature LL-T Control of 39 °F. Single Speed Enthalpy Wheel (MASD) Speed This option output to control the heat wheel. Single a binary enthalpy wheels rotate at a constant speed adds when enabled. This configuration can optionally have Modulated Bypass Dampers to control the temperature transfer by bypassing some of the airstream around the wheel. 380 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

381 Variable Speed Wheel (MASD) Enthalpy adds a binary and an analog output to control the heat wheel. Variable Speed enthalpy wheels This option output speed rotate of the incoming air stream. If the minimum speed provides more to control at a varying the temperature the , an optional than is necessary BO can be energized to allow air to bypass Bypass heating or cooling Damper wheel. Status (MASD) Wheel a binary input to monitor the status This option If this option is selected, you need to consider adds of the heat wheel. Loss Strategy . This can be either Automatic Restart , which continually attempts to restart the heat a of Status , which indicates correctly , or Manual Restart it is operating stops the heat wheel until the wheel until the status is reset. The manual restart option offers a choice of using a network input or Unit Reset Switch (BI) to reset alarm the system. Alarm (MASD) Management from this section loads management module into the application. These modules are named Any selection an alarm where modules is replaced by the equipment reference. These Alarms, connect all of the alarm [Device] [Device] type for each to a single and manage the alarm reset and reset output input. In addition to the four inputs alarm this module can manage, there is an additional input for Cascaded OR Input, which inputs to be connected is intended to another Alarms module if necessary . Only a single alarm reset input is created for each type of manual [Device] (Network a manual or Binary Input) per application. If your application requires reset reset per alarm, this Input custom programming work. requires work is being Lockout This input • that service Switch: done on the equipment, and the equipment does indicates not operate until this input is cleared. • Motor Tripped/Frequency Converter Fault: These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload Overload is available for constant motors, and the Frequency Converter Fault option is available for variable option speed Either control denotes an issue with the motor motors. device and indicates that current is not flowing speed input to the motor . • Belt Alarm: This option indicates that there is a failure in the drive belt for the equipment. Protection (MASD) Blocking protection to energize Blocking rotational equipment that has not been active for an extended period of time. is used done bearings and seals from deteriorating prematurely . The input values Max Time Off This is typically to prevent value = 7 Days) and Blocking On Time (Default value (Default control the behavior of the output. The = 5 seconds) output is energized for the Blocking On Time if it has been off longer than the Max Time Off. Glycol Loop (MASD) This type of heat recovery coil uses two coils, a circulation pump, and, optionally , a valve to move heat from the exhaust duct to the fresh These devices are most beneficial during extreme temperature air duct or vice versa. since air there is the maximum temperature difference between the exhaust and fresh conditions, this is when During to cool the glycol it is possible streams. to the point that ice can form on the coil in the very cold conditions, mode air duct. exhaust loop changes to LL-T Control To prevent if there is a chance of forming ice. this, the glycol During LL-T Control mode, the heat transfer is limited to allow a minimum Glycol Temperature of 39 °F. 3 Way Valve (MASD) Select to add the optional three way valve this option the glycol flow. This valve can be controlled using to control either a Proportional Actuator or an Incremental Actuator . Circulation (MASD) Pump All Glycol Loops require a circulation pump. This section contains options for that pump. 381 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

382 Pump Status (MASD) adds a binary to monitor the status of the circulation pump. If you select Pump Status, you must This option input Loss also select . This strategy can be either Automatic Restart , which continually attempts of Status a Strategy , which until the status correctly , or Manual Restart it is operating stops the heat the heat wheel to restart indicates is reset. The manual restart option offers a choice of using a network input wheel Unit Reset until the alarm or (BI) the system. Switch to reset (MASD) Management Alarm loads an alarm management module into the application. These modules are named from this section Any selection These where is replaced by the equipment reference. [Device] modules connect all of the alarm [Device] Alarms, inputs alarm output and manage the alarm reset and reset type for each input. In addition to the four to a single inputs can manage, there is an additional input for Cascaded OR Input, which is intended to be connected this module input [Device] if necessary . Only a single alarm reset module is created for each type of manual to another Alarms (Network Input or Binary Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset per alarm, this reset custom work. requires programming Lockout Switch: This input indicates that service work is being done on the equipment, and the equipment does • not operate until this input is cleared. options Motor Tripped/Frequency Converter • These Overload are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload Fault: option is available for constant speed motors, and the Frequency Converter Fault option is available for variable speed motors. input denotes an issue with the motor control device and indicates that current is not flowing Either . to the motor This option indicates that there is a failure Belt Alarm: belt for the equipment. • in the drive Protection (MASD) Blocking protection is used to energize rotational equipment that has not been active for an extended period of time. Blocking done and seals bearings This is typically from deteriorating prematurely . The input values Max Time Off to prevent value = 5 seconds) and Blocking On Time (Default value (Default control the behavior of the output. The = 7 Days) is energized for the Blocking On Time if it has been off longer than the Max Time Off. output Air to Air Heat Exchanger (MASD) The Air to Air Heat Exchanger is a mechanical heat exchanger that uses counter airflow to moderate incoming air temperature. When Modulated Bypass Dampers, this option adds bypass dampers to prevent freezing you select air. exhaust (MASD) Coils (Preheat) selections provide the logic to control a Preheat coil. A Preheat coil may be located in the Outdoor These Air Duct (ahead of the mixing plenum). If this is the case, a Preheat coil is always set to Control to Preheat Air Temperature. When in the Mixed Air Duct, the coil may either be controlled by a dedicated sensor or sequenced with the other the Preheat devices. if a DA-T or PH-T sensor is available, startup, coil is controlled by the LT-SP (Low Limit During Setpoint). Lockout from Outdoor Air (MASD) air is above This option code to prevent the coil from operating when the outdoor adds the lockout setpoint. 382 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

383 Location (MASD) coil may be located in the outdoor air duct. When the preheat coil is located in the The preheat air duct or the mixed a preheat outdoor is added to provide the process variable for the control loop. The temperature air stream, sensor of 55 °F air to the mixing . When a minimum the preheat coil is located control loop provides box of the air handler the user has the option the coil Sequenced with Main Control Strategy , or air stream, in the mixed of controlling Control to Preheat Air Temperature. When using with the main control strategy , a separate the coil is to be sequenced as the first stage That is to say it is energized first when the process variable falls below setpoint. it is treated of heat. to preheat temperature a preheat the coil is set to control sensor is added, and this becomes When temperature, for the preheat coil control loop. the process variable Staged Heating (MASD) define the type of coil in the air handler . Staged heating may be used The next two sections electric or for staged gas heat. are several options available for staged coils. There Rotation rotates so that the stages get approximately equal runtime. This can be used to Device the first stage off electric heating coils that do not commonly energize all stages. This may not be appropriate the dust burnt keep gas heating coils. staged for some Switch adds a binary input to monitor a temperature switch mounted in the heat exchanger portion of Gas Bonnet coil. This starts the supply fan when there is heat available and keeps the fan running until the heat the gas heating is cooled option is not available unless you have selected the Cycle During Occupied exchanger in off. This option Control Strategy section. the Temperature Control The Gas Bonnet is only supported Note: or Return Switch (not Discharge Air Control) when the for Zone unit has an opportunity to use it for triggering startup. This is the case when the unit is Sequenced with Main Control Strategy During Occupied or Intermittent Night Operation are selected. If these options and Cycle the Gas Bonnet Switch are not selected, may not be selected. energized Lockout prevents No Flow coil from being option when the fan status is not ON. The the staged High Temperature Lockout option adds a binary input to monitor a temperature switch located in the discharge The off the staged the switch the temperature exceeds of the coil and turns setpoint. heat in the event of Stages Number can be set from one to eight. Hot Water or Steam (MASD) is used to define the properties of a hydronic coil. This section may be used for other types of heating The section and steam but some may be required. This section is designed to support water changes coils. coils, Hot Water or Steam Proportional Output (MASD) Select Proportional Output if the coil is controlled by a proportional valve that takes a 0–10 VDC or 4–20 mA signal. Selecting this option additional options to control Two Valves if you have a one third, two thirds valve provides If you do not select air option, you can add a Face and Bypass Damper to allow some arrangement. the two valves the coil in certain temperature When the switchover to bypass falls below the face and bypass damper conditions. switch the valve opens fully and the face and bypass damper modulates to maintain temperature. over setpoint, When the switchover temperature is above the face and bypass damper switchover setpoint, the damper opens fully a Proportional to the coil and the valve damper can be controlled using The face and bypass Actuator modulates. or an Incremental Actuator . The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam valves. This option does not support Pump including and Bypass Damper or Circulation Face controls. 383 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

384 Hot Water or Steam Incremental (MASD) Output Incremental Output by an incremental valve that uses two binary outputs to incrementally Select if the coil is controlled the valve. open Damper to allow some air to bypass the coil in You may also add a Face and close and Bypass When temperature falls below the face and bypass damper switchover setpoint, conditions. certain the switchover fully and the face and bypass damper modulates to maintain temperature. When the valve opens the switchover is above damper switchover setpoint, the damper opens fully to the coil and the temperature the face and bypass The face and bypass can be controlled modulates. using a Proportional Actuator or an Incremental damper valve . Actuator Two Position Output (MASD) Two Position Output Select by a two position valve that uses a binary output to open and if the coil is controlled close Two position preheat coil valves are only available with a Face and Bypass Damper to allow some the valve. the coil in certain conditions. damper can be controlled using a Proportional air to bypass The face and bypass Actuator . Actuator or an Incremental Entering Water Temperature (MASD) Water Temperature can be selected when you need to monitor the coil supply Entering or steam temperature. water This option an analog input for this sensor . adds Water Temperature Leaving (MASD) Water Temperature can be selected when Leaving to monitor the coil return water or condensate you need temperature. This option adds an analog input for this sensor . Coil Pump (MASD) adds a fractional pump to the preheat coil piping. This pump can be utilized either to provide Coil Pump horsepower at the coil or a Low Temperature Circulation pump. Selecting the correct usage causes Pressure/Flow Boost to run at the appropriate time. The Both Pressure/Flow & Low Temp Circulation the pump combines the option existing to start the pump either when the valve command exceeds zero or when the outdoor air two sequences option temperature the setpoint. The Dual Pumps below adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby drops configuration. When you select Rotate to Balance Runtime with Dual Pumps, the application automatically shifts the lead to the pump with the lowest hours. operating Status Pump (MASD) adds a binary input to monitor the status of the circulation pump. If you select Pump Status, This option you must also select Loss of Status Strategy . This strategy a Automatic Restart , which continually attempts can be either to restart the heat wheel until the status indicates it is operating correctly , or Manual Restart , which stops the heat or wheel is reset. The manual restart option offers a choice of using a network input until the alarm Unit Reset Switch (BI) to reset the system. 384 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

385 Alarm Management (MASD) from this section loads management module into the application. These modules are named Any selection an alarm where [Device] by the equipment reference. These modules connect all of the alarm [Device] Alarms, is replaced output input. the alarm reset and reset type for each alarm In addition to the four inputs to a single and manage which there input for Cascaded OR Input, is an additional is intended to be connected this module inputs can manage, Alarms module if necessary . Only a single to another reset input is created for each type of manual [Device] alarm (Network or Binary Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset per alarm, this reset Input programming custom work. requires Switch: This input indicates that service work is being • on the equipment, and the equipment does Lockout done until this input is cleared. not operate Motor Overload Tripped/Frequency • Fault: These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload Converter option for constant speed motors, and the Frequency Converter Fault option is available for variable is available motors. Either denotes an issue with the motor control device and indicates that current is not flowing speed input . to the motor This option indicates that there is a failure Belt Alarm: belt for the equipment. • in the drive Protection (MASD) Blocking protection is used to energize rotational equipment that has not been active for an extended period Blocking of time. This is typically to prevent bearings and seals from deteriorating prematurely . The input values Max Time Off done value control and Blocking On Time (Default value = 5 seconds) (Default the behavior of the output. The = 7 Days) output is energized On Time if it has been off longer than the Max Time Off. for the Blocking Shutdown When Pump is in Alarm (MASD) AHU For applications with Preheat pumps, the Shutdown AHU when pump is in Alarm option prevents the unit from starting if there pump during cold weather . is a fault in the preheat and Bypass Switchover Face (MASD) Switchover are available if you have selected a face and bypass coil. As the switchover and Bypass options Face the switchover setpoint, the application changes from modulating temperature to modulating falls below the valve . You may switch damper control Based your face and bypass Air Temperature, Based on the damper on Outdoor Air Temperature, or Based on Network Input. Mixed The Face and Bypass option is applicable only when either a Proportional or Incremental valve actuator Switchover with Face the valve Damper . This option specifies how to determine when is selected should be in and Bypass (with (with control and when the damper should be in control the Damper the Valve fully open). at full face) Shutdown Strategy (Preheat Coil) (MASD) Shutdown Strategy describes how you want the coil to behave when the unit is shut down. • Off a 0% command to the coil and stops a coil pump (if you have one). sends Remain has the same control loop that controls the coil while the unit is operating during loss of • in Control . airflow a proportional The Remain Shutdown Strategy is available only when you select Note: valve (with in Control either Proportional or Incremental actuator). • Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature opens the valve, as needed, when the outdoor air falls below the low limit setpoint. This strategy the air handler coils during extreme temperatures. can protect Low OA Temperature • Water Control modulates the valve during times of low OA temperature to - Leaving maintain a leaving water temperature of 45 °F. position • Defined Position commands the valve to a pre-defined User while the unit is in shutdown mode. 385 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

386 Loss of Airflow (Preheat Coil) (MASD) Strategy of Airflow Strategy how you want the coil to behave when the unit status changes to false while Loss describes on. commanded • sends a 0% command to the coil and stops a coil pump (if you have one). Off in Control has the same control loop that controls the coil while the unit is operating during loss of • Remain . airflow Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature opens the valve, as needed, when the outdoor Protect • air falls below This strategy can protect the air handler coils during extreme temperatures. the low limit setpoint. Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control modulates the valve during times of low OA temperature to • maintain a leaving temperature of 45 °F. water User Defined commands the valve to a pre-defined position while the unit is in shutdown mode. • Position the Automatic The Loss options are available only when you select Strategy Restart option for the Note: of Airflow Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy . Supply Sensor Unreliable (MASD) Operation the controlling Sensor how you want the coil to behave when describes temperature sensor Unreliable Operation is unreliable. Off • a 0% command to the coil and stops a coil pump (if you have one). sends • Hold maintains the last command to the valve. • Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature opens the valve, as needed, when the outdoor air falls below the low limit setpoint. This strategy the air handler coils during extreme temperatures. protects User Defined commands the valve to a pre-defined position while the controlling temperature sensor • Position is unreliable. Gas Coil (MASD) Analog a modulating fire gas heating coil. The Include Heating Enable This options adds a BO to enable adds BO option coil when needed. as heating (MASD) Coils (Cooling) These selections the logic to control a Cooling coil. provide cannot if Common Heating-Cooling is selected. Cooling be selected of Airflow Strategy options are available only when you select The Loss Restart option for the Supply the Automatic Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy . Condensate Alarm (MASD) This option adds a binary input for a condensate sensor that stops the cooling when activated. The Shutdown on Alarm option the system in shutdown mode when the condensate alarm is active. places from Air (MASD) Lockout Outdoor adds code to prevent the coil from operating This option the outdoor air is above the lockout setpoint. when Staged Cooling (MASD) The next two sections define the type of cooling coil in the air handler . Staged cooling may be used for staged DX cooling Staged DX coils always include the no flow lockout logic. coils. Device Rotation can be selected to rotate the first stage so that the stages get approximately equal runtime. Number of Stages can be set from one to eight. 386 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

387 Chilled Water (MASD) is used to define of a chilled water coil. This type of coil supports proportional, incremental, The section the properties types, as well as several or two position control options. (MASD) Proportional Actuator a 0–10 Proportional valve that takes Actuator VDC or 4–20 can be selected if the coil is controlled by a proportional mA signal. (MASD) Incremental Actuator can be selected by an incremental Actuator valve that uses two binary outputs Incremental if the coil is controlled and close open to incrementally the valve. (MASD) Two Position Actuator can be selected Actuator by a two position valve that uses a binary output to Two Position if the coil is controlled and close the valve. Two position preheat open are only available with a Face and Bypass Damper to coil valves allow air to bypass the coil in certain conditions. The face and bypass damper can be controlled using a some Actuator or an Incremental . Proportional Actuator (MASD) Water Temperature Entering can be selected when you need Entering the coil supply water or steam temperature. Water Temperature to monitor adds an analog input for this sensor This option . Leaving (MASD) Water Temperature Water Temperature or condensate when you need to monitor the coil return water Leaving can be selected temperature. adds an analog input for this sensor . This option Coil Pump (MASD) Coil Pump adds a fractional horsepower pump to the preheat coil piping. This pump can be utilized either to provide Pressure/Flow Boost Low Temperature Circulation pump. Selecting the correct usage causes at the coil or a to run at the appropriate The Both Pressure/Flow & Low Temp Circulation option combines the the pump time. two sequences to start the pump either when the valve command exceeds zero or when the outdoor air existing drops The the setpoint. temperature Dual Pumps option adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby below automatically configuration. Rotate to Balance Runtime with Dual Pumps, the application you select shifts When the lead to the pump with the lowest operating hours. Pump Status (MASD) This option adds input to monitor the status of the circulation pump. If you select Pump Status, you must a binary Automatic also select of Status Strategy . This strategy can be either Loss Restart , which continually attempts a to restart the heat wheel until the status indicates it is operating correctly , or Manual Restart , which stops the heat or wheel is reset. The manual restart option offers a choice of using a network input until the alarm Unit Reset Switch (BI) to reset the system. 387 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

388 Alarm Management (MASD) from this section loads management module into the application. These modules are named Any selection an alarm where [Device] by the equipment reference. These modules connect all of the alarm [Device] Alarms, is replaced input. alarm the alarm reset and reset type for each and manage In addition to the four to a single inputs output can manage, there is an additional input for Cascaded OR Input, which is intended inputs this module to be connected [Device] module if necessary . Only a single alarm reset input is created for each type of manual to another Alarms per alarm, Input Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset (Network this reset or Binary custom programming work. requires • Switch: This input indicates that service work is being done on the equipment, and the equipment does Lockout not operate is cleared. until this input Motor Overload Converter Fault: These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload • Tripped/Frequency Fault for constant motors, and the Frequency Converter speed option is available for variable option is available motors. Either input denotes an issue with the motor speed device and indicates that current is not flowing control to the motor . Belt Alarm: indicates that there is a failure in the drive belt for the equipment. • This option Protection (MASD) Blocking that has not been Blocking to energize rotational equipment is used active for an extended period of time. protection This is typically done to prevent bearings and seals from deteriorating prematurely . The input values Max Time Off (Default value and Blocking On Time (Default value = 5 seconds) control the behavior of the output. The = 7 Days) is energized for the Blocking off longer than the Max Time Off. output On Time if it has been (Cooling (MASD) Strategy Coil) Shutdown describes Shutdown the coil to behave when the unit is shut down. Strategy how you want Off sends a 0% command to the coil and stop a coil pump (if you have one). • Protect opens on Outdoor Air Temperature • the valve, as needed, when the outdoor air falls below Coil Based This strategy temperatures. the air handler coils during extreme the low limit setpoint. can protect while User Position commands • to a pre-defined position Defined the unit is in shutdown mode. the valve Loss of Airflow Strategy (MASD) Loss of Airflow Strategy describes how you want the coil to behave when the unit status changes to false while commanded on. Off a 0% command to the coil and stop a coil pump (if you have one). • sends Remain in Control has the same control loop that controls the coil while the unit is operating control • the coil during . loss of airflow the valve, Protect on Outdoor • opens Coil Based as needed, when the outdoor air falls below Air Temperature the low limit setpoint. This strategy can protect the air handler coils during extreme temperatures. to a pre-defined • Position commands the valve Defined position while the unit is in shutdown mode. User Note: The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when you select the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy . 388 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

389 Unreliable Sensor (MASD) Operation Sensor Operation how you want the coil to behave when the controlling temperature sensor Unreliable describes is unreliable. Off to the coil and stops a coil pump (if you have one). sends • a 0% command the last command maintains to the valve. Hold • on Outdoor Air Temperature opens • as needed, when the outdoor air falls below Protect Coil Based the valve, protects the air handler coils during extreme the low limit setpoint. This strategy temperatures. User Position commands the valve to a pre-defined position while the controlling temperature sensor • Defined is unreliable. (MASD) Coils (Reheat) provide the logic to control a Reheat coil. These selections be selected if Common Heating-Cooling is selected. cannot Reheat Gas Bonnet Switch is only supported for Zone or Return Control (not DA-T Reset) The Reheat the unit has when an opportunity startup. This is the case when Cycle During Occupied or Intermittent Night to use it for triggering is selected. In addition, coil is selected and Sequenced with the Main Control Strategy , the Operation if a Preheat Switch Gas Bonnet is not allowed. Reheat Valves is intended for two sequenced The option valves. This option does not support for Two Proportional steam Face and Bypass Damper or Circulation Pump controls. including in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional valve is selected (with either The Remain or incremental proportional actuator). of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic Restart option The Loss Fan Status for the Supply Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected. Lockout from Outdoor Air (MASD) This option adds code to prevent the coil from operating when the outdoor air is above the lockout setpoint. Staged Heating (MASD) define the type of coil in the air handler heating may be used for staged electric or The next two sections . Staged are several available for staged coils. There options gas heat. rotates the first stage so that the stages get approximately equal Device This can be used to Rotation runtime. the dust burnt off electric heating coils that do not commonly energize all stages. This may not be appropriate keep staged for some coils. gas heating Gas Bonnet adds a binary input to monitor a temperature switch mounted in the heat exchanger portion of Switch coil. This starts is heat available fan when there the gas heating and keeps the fan running until the heat the supply the Cycle is cooled is not available unless you have selected exchanger During Occupied option in off. This option the Temperature Control Strategy section. Note: The Gas Bonnet is only supported for Zone or Return Control (not Discharge Air Control) when the Switch to use it for triggering with Main This is the case when the unit is Sequenced unit has an opportunity startup. are selected. Strategy During Occupied Control Night Operation and Cycle If these options or Intermittent are not selected, the Gas Bonnet Switch may not be selected. The No Flow Lockout option prevents the staged coil from being energized when the fan status is not ON. input The Lockout option adds a binary Temperature to monitor a temperature switch located in the discharge High of the coil and turns off the staged heat in the event the temperature exceeds the switch setpoint. Number of Stages can be set from one to eight. 389 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

390 Hot Water or Steam (MASD) is used to define of a hydronic coil. This section may be used for other types of heating The section the properties changes coils, is designed to support water and steam coils. may be required. but some This section (MASD) Output Proportional Hot Water or Steam if the coil is controlled by a proportional valve Select a 0–10 VDC or 4–20 mA signal. Proportional Output that takes provides additional options to control Two Valves if you have a one third, Selecting valve this option two thirds If you do not select option, you can add a Face and Bypass Damper to allow some air arrangement. the two valves conditions. temperature the switchover the coil in certain falls below the face and bypass damper to bypass When over setpoint, opens fully and the face and bypass damper modulates to maintain temperature. switch the valve the switchover temperature is above the face and bypass damper switchover setpoint, the damper When fully opens to the coil and the valve The face and bypass damper can be controlled using a Proportional Actuator modulates. Actuator . or an Incremental Valves for two sequenced steam valves. This option does not support The option is intended for Two Proportional including Damper or Circulation Pump controls. Face and Bypass Incremental Output (MASD) Hot Water or Steam Incremental Output if the coil is controlled by an incremental valve that uses two binary outputs to incrementally Select and close You may also add a Face open and Bypass Damper to allow some air to bypass the coil in the valve. conditions. the switchover temperature falls below the face and bypass damper switchover setpoint, certain When opens fully and the face and bypass damper modulates the valve temperature. When the switchover to maintain temperature is above the face and bypass damper switchover setpoint, the damper opens fully to the coil and the valve modulates. The face and bypass damper can be controlled using a Proportional Actuator or an Incremental Actuator . Water Temperature (MASD) Entering can be selected Water Temperature to monitor the coil supply water or steam temperature. when Entering you need input for this sensor . adds This option an analog Leaving Water Temperature (MASD) can be selected when you need to monitor the coil return water or condensate Leaving Water Temperature This option adds an analog input for this sensor . temperature. Coil Pump (MASD) adds Coil Pump horsepower pump to the preheat coil piping. This pump can be utilized either to provide a fractional Pressure/Flow at the coil or a Low Temperature Circulation pump. Selecting the correct usage causes Boost to run at the appropriate & Low Temp Circulation The Both Pressure/Flow the pump option combines the time. command existing either when the valve to start the pump exceeds zero or when the outdoor air two sequences temperature drops below the setpoint. The Dual Pumps option adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby configuration. When Rotate to Balance Runtime with Dual Pumps, the application automatically shifts you select with the lowest hours. the lead to the pump operating Status (MASD) Pump pump. adds This option to monitor the status of the circulation a binary If you select Pump Status, you must input also select a Loss of Status Strategy . This strategy can be either Automatic Restart , which continually attempts Manual to restart indicates it is operating correctly , or until the status Restart , which stops the heat the heat wheel wheel until the alarm is reset. The manual restart option offers a choice of using a network input or Unit Reset Switch (BI) to reset the system. 390 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

391 Alarm Management (MASD) from this section loads management module into the application. These modules are named Any selection an alarm where [Device] by the equipment reference. These modules connect all of the alarm [Device] Alarms, is replaced input. alarm the alarm reset and reset type for each and manage In addition to the four to a single inputs output can manage, there is an additional input for Cascaded OR Input, which is intended inputs this module to be connected [Device] module if necessary . Only a single alarm reset input is created for each type of manual to another Alarms per alarm, Input Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset (Network this reset or Binary custom programming work. requires Lockout Switch: This input indicates that service • done on the equipment, and the equipment does work is being not operate is cleared. until this input Motor Overload Converter Fault: These options are mutually exclusive. The Motor Overload • Tripped/Frequency Fault for constant motors, and the Frequency Converter speed option is available for variable option is available motors. Either input denotes an issue with the motor control device and indicates that current is not flowing speed . to the motor belt for the equipment. Belt Alarm: that there is a failure in the drive indicates • This option Protection (MASD) Blocking protection is used to energize rotational equipment Blocking active for an extended period of time. that has not been This is typically to prevent bearings and seals done prematurely . The input values Max Time Off from deteriorating (Default value = 7 Days) and Blocking On Time (Default value = 5 seconds) control the behavior of the output. The output is energized On Time if it has been off longer than the Max Time Off. for the Blocking Strategy (MASD) Shutdown describes Strategy when the unit is shutdown. how you want Shutdown the coil to behave sends to the coil and stop a coil pump (if you have one). Off • a 0% command in Control has the same control loop that controls the coil while the unit is operating control the coil • Remain loss of airflow . during Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature opens the valve, as needed, when the outdoor • air falls below the low limit setpoint. can protect the air handler coils during extreme temperatures. This strategy position User commands the valve to a pre-defined Position while the unit is in shutdown mode. • Defined The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy Note: only when you select a proportional valve (with either is available Proportional or Incremental actuator). Loss of Airflow Strategy (MASD) Loss of Airflow Strategy describes how you want the coil to behave when the unit status changes to false while commanded on. Off a 0% command to the coil and stop a coil pump (if you have one). • sends Remain in Control has the same control loop that controls the coil while the unit is operating control • the coil during . loss of airflow the valve, Protect on Outdoor • opens Coil Based as needed, when the outdoor air falls below Air Temperature the low limit setpoint. This strategy can protect the air handler coils during extreme temperatures. to a pre-defined • Position commands the valve Defined position while the unit is in shutdown mode. User Note: The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when you select the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy . 391 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

392 Unreliable Sensor (MASD) Operation Sensor Operation how you want the coil to behave when the controlling temperature sensor Unreliable describes is unreliable. Off to the coil and stops a coil pump (if you have one). sends a 0% command • the last command to the valve. maintains • Hold Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature opens the valve, as needed, when the outdoor air falls below • Protect protects the low limit setpoint. coils during extreme temperatures. This strategy the air handler the controlling Defined commands the valve User position while Position temperature sensor • to a pre-defined is unreliable. Analog Gas Coil (MASD) adds a modulating fire gas heating coil. The Include This options Enable BO option adds a BO to enable Heating as heating needed. coil when Heating-Cooling) (MASD) Coils (Common provide coil. a Common Heating-Cooling (also known as 2-pipe) These selections the logic to control cannot be selected if either Cooling or Reheat is selected. Common Heating-Cooling in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when The Remain valve is selected (with either a proportional proportional actuator). or incremental Fan Status of Airflow options are available only when the Automatic Restart The Loss for the Supply Strategy option Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected. Condensate Alarm (MASD) This option adds a binary input for a condensate sensor that stops the cooling when activated. The Shutdown on Alarm option the system in shutdown mode when the condensate alarm is active. places Actuator (MASD) Proportional or 4–20 can be selected by a proportional valve that takes Proportional VDC if the coil is controlled Actuator a 0–10 mA signal. Incremental Actuator (MASD) Actuator can be selected if the coil is controlled by an incremental valve Incremental two binary outputs that uses to incrementally and close the valve. open Output Two Position (MASD) Two Position Output if the coil is controlled by a two position Select that uses a binary output to open and valve close the valve. Two position preheat coil valves are only available with a Face and Bypass Damper to allow some air to bypass the coil in certain The face and bypass damper can be controlled using a Proportional conditions. or an Incremental . Actuator Actuator Water Temperature (MASD) Entering Water Temperature Entering when you need to monitor the coil supply water or steam temperature. can be selected This option adds an analog input for this sensor . Leaving (MASD) Water Temperature Leaving Water Temperature can be selected when you need to monitor the coil return water or condensate for this sensor temperature. adds an analog input This option . 392 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

393 Coil Pump (MASD) adds a fractional pump to the preheat coil piping. This pump can be utilized either to provide Coil Pump horsepower at the coil or a Pressure/Flow pump. Selecting the correct usage causes Low Temperature Boost Circulation The combines Pressure/Flow & Low Temp Circulation option time. the the pump to run at the appropriate Both zero or when to start the pump the valve command exceeds when the outdoor air two sequences existing either below the setpoint. The Dual Pumps temperature adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby drops option When Rotate to Balance Runtime with Dual Pumps, the application automatically shifts configuration. you select operating with the lowest the lead to the pump hours. (MASD) Pump Status If you select a binary adds the status of the circulation pump. input Pump Status, you must This option to monitor a also select of Status Strategy . This strategy can be either Automatic Restart , which continually attempts Loss to restart until the status indicates it is operating correctly , or Manual Restart , which stops the heat the heat wheel Unit Reset until the alarm restart option offers a choice of using a network input or The manual wheel is reset. (BI) to reset the system. Switch Alarm Management (MASD) from this section loads an alarm management module into the application. These modules are named Any selection Alarms, [Device] [Device] is replaced by the equipment reference. These modules connect all of the alarm where to a single and reset output and manage the alarm reset inputs type for each input. In addition to the four alarm for Cascaded this module there is an additional input can manage, OR Input, which is intended to be connected inputs to another [Device] Alarms module if necessary . Only a single alarm reset input is created for each type of manual reset (Network or Binary Input) per application. If your application requires a manual reset per alarm, this Input custom programming requires work. on the equipment, Switch: that service work is being done indicates and the equipment does Lockout • This input is cleared. not operate until this input are mutually Overload Converter Fault: These options Tripped/Frequency exclusive. The Motor Overload • Motor is available for constant speed motors, and the Frequency Converter Fault option option for variable is available speed Either input denotes an issue with the motor control device and indicates that current is not flowing motors. . to the motor Belt Alarm: This option indicates that there is a failure in the drive belt for the equipment. • Protection Blocking (MASD) protection is used to energize rotational Blocking that has not been active for an extended period of time. equipment This is typically done to prevent bearings and seals from deteriorating prematurely . The input values Max Time Off (Default value and Blocking On Time (Default value = 5 seconds) control the behavior of the output. The = 7 Days) is energized than the Max Time Off. On Time if it has been off longer output for the Blocking and Winter Strategy (MASD) Summer Switchover Switchover Strategy Summer/Winter how you want the common heating-cooling coil to determine when describes to behave as a heating coil and when to behave as a cooling coil. Local Switch (BI) adds a binary input to the to the entering application connected to a temperature switch mounted is normally water pipe. Network adds which a network input that should change state when the heating cooling plant switches modes. Supply Water Temperature to determine adds input that can be used to monitor the coil entering water temperature an analog if heating or cooling is available. 393 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

394 Shutdown Strategy (MASD) Strategy describes the coil to behave when the unit is shutdown. Shutdown how you want sends a 0% command (if you have one). • Off to the coil and stop a coil pump the coil has the same loop that controls in Control the unit is operating control control • Remain the coil while . loss of airflow during Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature opens the valve, as needed, when the outdoor air falls below • Protect can protect This strategy coils during extreme temperatures. the low limit setpoint. the air handler Defined mode. commands the valve to a pre-defined position while the unit is in shutdown User • Position a proportional The Remain Strategy is available only when you select Shutdown valve (with either Note: in Control Proportional actuator). or Incremental Loss Strategy (MASD) of Airflow of Airflow Strategy how you want the coil to behave when the unit status changes to false while Loss describes commanded on. • Off sends a 0% command to the coil and stop a coil pump (if you have one). Remain in Control has the same control loop that controls the coil while the unit is operating control the coil • loss of airflow . during as needed, Protect Air Temperature opens the valve, on Outdoor when the outdoor air falls below • Coil Based This strategy can protect the air handler the low limit setpoint. extreme temperatures. coils during • Defined Position commands the valve User position while the unit is in shutdown mode. to a pre-defined Note: The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when you select the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Fan Status of Airflow Strategy . Loss Sensor Operation Unreliable (MASD) Operation sensor how you want the coil to behave when the controlling temperature Sensor Unreliable describes is unreliable. Off sends a 0% command to the coil and stops a coil pump (if you have one). • Hold maintains the last command to the valve. • Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature opens the valve, as needed, when the outdoor air falls below • This strategy extreme the air handler coils during the low limit setpoint. temperatures. protects position User • commands the valve to a pre-defined Defined while the controlling temperature sensor Position is unreliable. Humidification (MASD) selections the logic to control a humidifier if present. These provide Unoccupied Mode option is applicable only when Scheduled Occupancy is selected. The During Humidification Staged (MASD) this option if your humidifier operates Select outputs. You can select one through four stages and select as staged an optional Humidifier Status to indicate when the humidifier is operating. Steam Valve (MASD) Proportional Select this option if your humidifier operates using a steam valve to pump steam directly into the airflow . You may when optionally an Isolation Valve to disable the humidifier select the unit is off. 394 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

395 Modulated Packaged Unit (MASD) this option of your humidifier using a proportional signal. You may optionally select Humidifier Status Select operates the humidifier to indicate is operating. when (MASD) Scrubber type. This type is commonly used in Europe is a scrubber of a fill this option if your humidifier Select and consists valve, spray bar, and optional drain valve. If you select the optional Drain Valve, you have additional water tank, pump, Open valve if scrubber is inactive options the tank when not in use, and Open Valve on Network Input to to drain the tank when through a network input. You may optionally select Humidifier Status to indicate to drain commanded is operating. when the humidifier (MASD) Control Sensor requires a humidifier the sensor to be used for the control loop. Adding selecting Zone Humidity is the default sensor . If you use this option, • as needed during you may also add humidity unoccupied. Return Air Humidity option to use for control. • is another to monitor Humidity Control can be used to add an analog input Limit the discharge air humidity Discharge High • signal to prevent condensing and override in the duct work. the humidifier conditions Control Dehumidification (MASD) a cooling coil, you may select includes control. It is important to note that If your application dehumidification typically requires dehumidifying coil, but a reheat coil may not be required if the reheat coil is zone based. a reheat However controls to dehumidify . In these applications, cooling has two functions, both , it is difficult for state-based may be required option time. Selecting the dehumidification control of which requires choosing to use at any given sensor either Humidity or Return Air Humidity Zone for control. the Optional Features (MASD) These selections provide the logic for controlling the operation of the application. The Unit Enable logic includes the option to delay after controller restart (Power Fail Restart). startup options for Optional are: The selection Features • Control (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency Mode Network Input Smoke Smoke Support and the for UL-864-UUKL State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create Sequencing Control values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize, depressurize, purge, state or shutdown. For example, Mode Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller if the Emergency to the desired in the State Selection Table. states condition Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based on the Network • (BV). If Unit Input Enable is selected, then when the Network Input Switch not have a valid command from the network, it is does considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop). input Unit Enable Input (BI): This option determines whether the application operates based on the Hardware • Switch is selected, the Network (BI). If Unit Enable Input does not have a valid command from the network, then when unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be it is considered Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop). • Power This feature is available as part of the Fail Restart: Determination State Generator module. Unit Enable When this option is selected, after a restart (power cycle, transfer to the controller , or manual restart command), Time (default the application state for the Power Fail Restart is held in the shutdown = 60 seconds). 395 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

396 N2 Compatibility Options (MASD) Options selection a solution for replacement of N2-based products that are no longer The N2 Compatibility provides you select for those the application provides mappings When points that are the same as they this option, available. application. in the legacy were The selection options for N2 Compatibility Options are: AHU Series • Replacing Controller • Replacing Controller UNT Series DX9100 Controller • Replacing Series Mixed Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection Sensors (MASD) Optional sensors. These the option for loading extra, monitor-only provide selections The selection options for Optional Sensors are: • Position Feedback: This option provides feedback inputs for monitoring only purposes. If you want to generate an alarm or other using the position feedback inputs, you must create custom coding to do so. functionality Damper - Modulated Outputs • No Position Feedback Input per Output • Analog Input • Binary per Output - Modulated Valve Outputs Feedback • No Position Input • Analog per Output • Binary Input per Output - Two Position Damper Outputs • No Position Feedback • Binary Input per Output Inputs • Two Binary per Output - Two Position Valve Outputs Feedback • No Position • Binary per Output Input • Two Binary Inputs per Output - VSD Outputs • No Feedback • Motor (RPM) Speed • Drive Frequency (Hz) • Motor Percent (%) • Outdoor Air - Temperature - Humidity 396 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

397 - CO Sensor 2 - Air Flow • Velocity Tube) Pressure (Pitot (Scaled) Measurement • Flow Air Outdoor • Minimum - Air Flow Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Velocity Measurement (Scaled) • Flow Air Temperature • Preheat Air • Mixed - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 Coil Leaving • Cooling Air Temperature • Reheat Coil Leaving Air Temperature • Discharge Air - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 Pressure - Static - Air Flow • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Flow (Scaled) Measurement - Minimum Flow Protection For Staged Heating • Return Air - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 - Static Pressure - Air Flow • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Flow Measurement (Scaled) 397 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

398 • Relief Air - Air Flow • Velocity Tube) Pressure (Pitot (Scaled) • Flow Measurement • Zone - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 • Misc - Building Static Pressure Air Temperature - Heat Recovery for a zone Room This option adds an analog input Temperature: sensor that monitors the Mechanical - temperature room. in the mechanical If a Sensor for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System Selection, the option is not available is required here. The Minimum for Staged Heating can be selected if Staged Preheat (in Mixed Air) or Staged Reheat Flow Protection and the Discharge Flow is available (either due to selecting Return Fan Volume Matching or an optional is selected Discharge Flow sensor). Optional Equipment (MASD) selections provide sensors for an optional pre-filter , final filter, or both. These monitor-only for Optional Equipment are: The selection options • Pre-Filter Switch - Filter Differential - Filter Sensor Pressure Filter • Final - Filter Switch Differential Pressure Sensor - Filter • Return Filter - Filter Switch - Filter Pressure Sensor Differential Monitored Safeties (MASD) These selections provide inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and Low Static Pressure Switch inputs and shut down and High and Low Temperature inputs are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer Switch the application when tripped. 398 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

399 The selection options Safeties are: for Monitored • Discharge - High Static Switch Pressure - Smoke Detector Pressure Switch - Low Static • Return Pressure Switch - Low Static - Smoke Detector - High Static Pressure Switch • Low Limit Temperature Switch • High Limit Switch Temperature • Humidity Alarm • Fire Dampers (Options for One through Eight) - - Fire Damper Alarm Reset Strategy • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) 399 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

400 Mixed Air Dual Duct Applications sections for information s logic and selections. See the following on this application’ System See the for a list and description of the module and System Selection changes that section Files Upgrading the last release of the tool. since made were Mixed Core Logic Air Dual Duct (MADD) Modules use the core logic listed as follows: All Mixed Air Dual Duct Applications Network Inputs • APP-MODE (Application Mode) TUNING-RESET : This module is used to reset the tuning parameters • values present after the initial to the default transfer . to the device Network Input section. See the Modules Inputs (Cold Temperature) • CD-T Deck Modules See the Input section. Generation State • Air Start Mixed ( Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air) ) Stop Sequencing • Mode Determination : This module Application out the Water Flush application mode for separate separates connection to State Selection and passes the remaining application modes to State Selection. • Water System Pass Through ( Pass Through ): This module passes the Water Flush system mode to a Flush State open. input so that when water flush is requested, the valves always separate Selection • Mixed ( Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD) ) Air Cold Duct Sequencing • controller PID Tuning forces every output Reset to reset the Proportional Band and Integral time : This module of every PID to default values based on current process ID. Output Control • Heating LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) Required • Required LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) Cooling Mixed Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection Fans (MADD) selections provide the logic for the main fans. These The selection options for Fans are: Supply Fan • Single Speed • Variable Speed 400 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

401 • Fan Status - Loss Strategy of Airflow Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart (BI) Switch - Unit Reset Management • Alarm - Lockout Switch Fault - Frequency Converter Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) Overload Tripped - Motor Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset - Belt Alarm • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset (BI) Switch Return Fan • Single Speed • Variable Speed - Volume Matching Note: When you select a Volume Matching Return Fan and select either Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or EAD & RAD Proportional, air volume is controlled by the differential flow between the outdoor and Return air temperature and the supply the Supply is controlled by modulating the return Fans, air dampers. and exhaust • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Flow Measurement (Scaled) • Calculate Flow from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors Discharge • Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints - Building Static Pressure - Track Supply Fan 401 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

402 • Fan Status - Loss Strategy of Airflow Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Alarm Management Switch - Lockout Converter Fault - Frequency • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Motor Overload Tripped • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Belt Alarm • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset (BI) Switch • Fan to Start First - Supply - Return 402 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

403 Variable Speed Fan (Bldg Static Press Control) Relief • Fan Status - Loss of Airflow Strategy Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart (BI) - Unit Reset Switch Management • Alarm - Lockout Switch Converter Fault - Frequency Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual Switch - Unit Reset (BI) - Belt Alarm • Automatic Restart Restart • Manual - Unit Reset (BI) Switch Exhaust Fan • Toilet Exhaust Fan - Fan Status • Loss of Status Strategy - Automatic Restart Restart - Manual Switch (BI) • Unit Reset - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch • Motor Tripped Overload - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Blocking Protection • Exhaust Fan General - Fan Status • Loss of Status Strategy - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Alarm Management 403 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

404 Lockout Switch • Overload Tripped • Motor - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Blocking Protection (that is, it is selected by default) as well as an optional Return or Relief A Supply Fan is required Fan. Speed Fan is required in order to select a Variable Speed Supply Fan. A Variable Return Damper(s) (MADD) Economizer selections provide the logic for the Economizer Damper(s). If no economizer control (also known as Free These is required, Cooling) options should not be selected (use Two Position Min OA Damper instead). these options Damper(s) are: The selection for Economizer • Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) • Separate Proportional • EAD & RAD Outputs - Separate Output - Common OAD - Two Position & RAD Proportional • OAD - Separate Outputs - Common Output - Two Position EAD • Economizer Suitability - Network Command - Enthalpy Switch (BI) Air - Outdoor • Dry Bulb Temp Economizer • Temp & Enthalpy Economizer outdoor Return Air: • compares Outdoor air with return air to switch the economizer . Air versus This option , Exhaust, or both Air Damper • Outdoor Position Reset by CO Sensor Minimum 2 CO Sensor - Use Zone 2 CO Sensor - Use Return 2 • Damper Minimum Position Reset by OA Flow - Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) - Flow Measurement (Scaled) Dampers ASHRAE - Selecting Outdoor Per and Relief Guideline16-2003 for Air-Side Economizer Systems , , Return, OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate Outputs is required if Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected. OAD & RAD Proportional is only allowed if Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching is selected. 404 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

405 Minimum Outdoor Damper (MADD) Air Fan and/or selections provide Minimum Outdoor Air Damper and/or a Minimum Outdoor Air Fan These the logic for a dedicated damper Fan) with optional . (Injection for Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or The selection are: options Damper Damper • Two Position • Proportional Damper Minimum - Adjustable Outdoor Air Damper Position • Single Injection Fan Speed Damper - Two Position Speed Injection Fan • Variable Pressure (Pitot Tube) - Velocity - Flow (Scaled) Measurement - Unreliable Flow Sensor Operation • Close Damper - Turn Off Fan • Open Damper - Fan Maximum Speed - Two Position Damper • Fan Status - Loss of Airflow Strategy Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart Switch (BI) - Unit Reset • Alarm Management Switch - Lockout Converter - Frequency Fault Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart Switch (BI) - Unit Reset - Motor Overload Tripped • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart Switch - Unit Reset (BI) - Belt Alarm Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Damper End Switch (that is, if fan or damper The Fan Status End Switch are available only for selection if applicable and Damper is selected). 405 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

406 Reduce Outdoor (MADD) Air on Low Temperature loads logic that reduces of outdoor air when the temperature is low. This reduction is This selection the intake dampers, Matching the volume differential (if Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume by closing accomplished reducing and turning off or closing two-position fans or dampers. control is selected), downstream coil is located plenum (that is, it is in the mixed air), the Preheat Temperature If a preheat of the mixing of the coil) serves as the process variable for this control strategy . Otherwise, the Mixed (downstream Air Temperature serves variable. as the process logic for the low limit strategy directly into the Output Control modules and activated simply The control is embedded the appropriate setpoint and process variable. The logic takes precedence over all logic other than by connecting Emergency Modes. is allowed Air Damper , Minimum Outdoor Air Fan, or Minimum Outdoor This selection if any of the Economizer options is selected. Damper Temperature Control Strategy (MADD) These selections provide the logic for determining the setpoints of the Cold Deck and Hot Deck temperature control loops. The Hot Deck options apply only if a Hot Deck heating coil is selected. Setpoint options Control Strategy are: The selection for Temperature • Fixed Hot, Cold, or both Deck Temperatures or both Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T • Hot, Cold, Temperature Reset from RA-T • Hot Deck Control Occupancy (MADD) selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode These Determination. The selection options for Occupancy Control are: • Always Occupied • Scheduled Occupancy Support - Override Switch (BI) - Occupancy Strategy - Unoccupied Night Operation • Intermittent • Off during Unoccupied If any options are selected for separate Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or Temporary Occupancy , the Always Occupied cannot be selected. option Heat Recovery (MADD) The selection options for Heat Recovery are: Enable Type • Dry Bulb • Enthalpy 406 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

407 Enthalpy Wheel Speed • Single Dampers - Modulated Bypass Speed • Variable - Bypass BO Damper • Wheel Status Strategy - Loss of Status • Automatic Restart Restart • Manual Switch - Unit Reset (BI) Management • Alarm Switch - Lockout Converter Fault - Frequency • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Motor Overload Tripped • Automatic Restart Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset - Belt Alarm • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode functionality . If the wheel is off for the wheel an extended the wheel turns on for a short time to keep period, free of dirt and dust. 407 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

408 Glycol Loop • 3-Way Valve - Proportional Actuator Actuator - Incremental Pump • Circulation - Pump Status of Status Strategy • Loss Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) Management - Alarm • Lockout Switch • Motor Overload Tripped Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart Switch (BI) • Unit Reset Blocking - This option provides monitoring of the command to a motor (typically a pump). If the Protection: is off for an extended the motor of time (for example, 7 days), command starts for a short time (for period the motor 30 seconds). prevents blocking (that is, it prevents example, from seizing up). This feature Coils (Preheat) (MADD) These selections provide the logic to control a Preheat coil. Preheat coils may be located in the Outdoor Air Duct (ahead of the mixing If this is the case, a Preheat coil is always set to Control to Preheat Air Temperature. plenum). in the Mixed a coil may either be controlled by a dedicated sensor or sequenced with the other When Air Duct, During startup, Preheat controls devices. or CD-T to the OALT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint). the PH-T The selection options for Coils (Preheat) are: Preheat Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air Location • Outdoor Air air • Mixed with Cold Deck Control Strategy - Sequenced - Control Air Temperature to Preheat Staged Heating • Device Rotation • No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior . 408 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

409 • High Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a High Temperature alarm occurs. Temperature of Stages • Number - One Stage - Two Stages - Three Stages - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages Stages - Seven Stages - Eight Hot Water or Steam • Proportional Output - Two Valves and Bypass - Face Damper • Proportional Actuator Actuator • Incremental • Incremental Output - Face and Bypass Damper • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Two Position Output and Bypass - Face Damper • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator Water Temperature • Entering Water Temperature • Leaving • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost - Low Temperature Circulation - Both Pressure/Flow & Low Temp Circulation: This option combines the existing two sequences to start air temperature the pump when the valve command exceeds zero or when the outdoor either drops below the setpoint. 409 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

410 - Dual This option adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby configuration. Pumps: to Balance Runtime: you select this option with Dual Pumps, the application automatically Rotate When • operating with the lowest the lead to the pump shifts hours. - Pump Status Strategy • Loss of Status Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart (BI) Switch • Unit Reset Management - Alarm • Lockout Switch Overload Tripped • Motor Restart - Automatic Restart - Manual Switch (BI) • Unit Reset to a motor Protection: provides monitoring - This option (typically a pump). If the Blocking of the command is off for an extended period command 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for of time (for example, example, 30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from seizing up). - Shutdown AHU when pump is in Alarm: For applications with Preheat pumps, this option prevents the unit from starting if there pump during cold weather . is a fault in the preheat and Bypass Switchover • Face Air Temperature - Based on Outdoor on Mixed Air Temperature - Based - Based on Network Input Strategy • Shutdown - Off in Control - Remain Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - Protect to force Low OA Temperature Water Control: This option adjusts the state - entries - Leaving the table application to control for Low OA temperature while in shutdown. - User Defined Position • Loss of Airflow Strategy - Off - Remain in Control - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature Low OA Temperature - Water Control: This option turns on the coil pump if the outdoor air - Leaving temperature is lower than the setpoint and the unit is off. The preheat valve is modulated to control the leaving water temperature. - User Defined Position • Unreliable Sensor Operation - Off - Hold 410 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

411 - Protect Coil Based Air Temperature on Outdoor Defined Position - User Valves for two sequenced steam valves. This option does not support The option is intended for Two Proportional & Bypass Damper or Circulation Pump using Face controls. and Bypass option is applicable only when either Switchover or Incremental valve actuator The Face a Proportional with Face and Bypass Damper . This option specifies how to determine when the valve should is selected be in control the Damper at full face) and when the damper should be in control (with the Valve fully open). (with in Control either Strategy is available only when a proportional valve is selected (with The Remain Shutdown or incremental proportional actuator). of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic The Loss option for the Supply Fan Status Restart Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected. Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) (MADD) These selections the logic to control a Cooling coil. provide options (Cooling - Cold Deck) are: The selection for Coils Cooling - Cold Deck Alarm: This option adds a binary input for a condensate sensor Condensate the cooling when activated. that stops • on Alarm: This option places the system Shutdown mode when the condensate alarm is active. in shutdown Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air DX Cooling • Device Rotation of Stages • Number - One Stage - Two Stages - Three Stages - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages - Seven Stages - Eight Stages Chilled Water • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Two Position Actuator - Face and Bypass Damper • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Entering Water Temperature • Leaving Water Temperature 411 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

412 • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost Circulation - Low Temperature - Pump Status Strategy • Loss of Status Restart - Automatic Restart - Manual • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch Tripped Overload • Motor - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) Blocking Protection: This option provides - of the command to a motor (typically a pump). If the monitoring command period of time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for is off for an extended 30 seconds). blocking prevents example, (that is, it prevents the motor from seizing up). This feature Strategy • Shutdown - Off - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - User Defined Position • Loss of Airflow Strategy - Off - Remain in Control - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - User Defined Position Sensor • Unreliable Operation - Off - Hold - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - User Defined Position The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow is selected. Strategy - Hot Deck) Coils (Heating (MADD) selections provide the logic to control These temperature using a Heating coil. the Hot Deck The selection options for Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) are: Heating - Hot Deck Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air 412 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

413 Staged Heating Rotation • Device Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. No Flow loss of airflow sequencer • The current the proper behavior . provides High Temperature Lockout: • turns off staged heating when a High Temperature alarm occurs. This option • Number of Stages - One Stage - Two Stages - Three Stages - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages - Seven Stages - Eight Stages Hot Water or Steam • Proportional Output - Two Valves • Incremental Output • Entering Water Temperature Water Temperature • Leaving • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost - Low Temperature Circulation - Both Pressure/Flow & Low Temp Circulation: This option combines the existing two sequences to start air temperature the pump when the valve command exceeds zero or when the outdoor either drops below the setpoint. 413 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

414 - Dual This option adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby configuration. Pumps: to Balance Runtime: you select this option with Dual Pumps, the application automatically Rotate When • operating with the lowest the lead to the pump shifts hours. - Pump Status Strategy • Loss of Status Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart (BI) Switch • Unit Reset Management - Alarm • Lockout Switch Overload Tripped • Motor Restart - Automatic Restart - Manual Switch (BI) • Unit Reset to a motor Blocking provides monitoring of the command This option (typically a pump). If the - Protection: is off for an extended period of time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts command time (for for a short example, This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor 30 seconds). up). from seizing • Shutdown Strategy - Off - Remain in Control - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - User Defined Position of Airflow Strategy • Loss - Off in Control - Remain Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - Protect - User Defined Position Sensor Operation • Unreliable - Off - Hold Coil Based - Protect Air Temperature on Outdoor Defined - User Position for Two Proportional Valves is intended The option steam valves. This option does not support for two sequenced including Face & Bypass Damper or Circulation Pump controls. is selected The Remain Strategy is available only when a proportional valve Shutdown (with either in Control proportional or incremental actuator). The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss Strategy is selected. of Airflow Humidification (MADD) These selections provide the logic to control a humidifier if present. 414 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

415 The selection options are: for Humidification • Staged - One Stage - Two Stages Stages - Three - Four Stages This option status feedback of the operation of the humidifier . Humidifier provides - Status: Proportional • Steam Valve Valve - Isolation • Modulated Packaged Unit Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation - Packaged Unit Humidifier of the Modulated (humidifier). This option is for a scrubber humidifier , which is a shower head, pump, and basin located Scrubber: • in the This type of humidifier requires 3 BOs: a pump BO, a drain valve BO, and a BO to close the fill valve. ductwork. valve and fill valve BOs should actuate together (if draining, close The drain and disable the pump). the inlet valve The operational level is maintained by a mechanical float valve. water Drain Valve: provides an output for the drain valve and an output for the fill valve. - This option monitoring Open is inactive: This option provides if scrubber of and indicates the status of the • valve command and a network input to open the drain valve. If the network pump requests the valve to input open command has been off for a period of time, the drain valve opens. If the pump is or if the pump the sump required valve closes for a period of time to allow the drain to fill before starting the to start, pump. • Open valve on Network Input - Humidifier This option provides status feedback of the operation of the Modulated Packaged Unit Status: (humidifier). • Control Sensor - Zone Humidity • During Mode Unoccupied - Return Air Humidity High Limit Control Humidity • Hot Deck Unoccupied Mode option is applicable only when Scheduled Occupancy is selected. The During Features (MADD) Optional selections the logic for controlling the operation of the application. The Unit Enable logic includes the These provide to delay startup option restart (Power Fail Restart). after controller The selection options for Optional Features are: • Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create for UL-864-UUKL or shutdown. values Output Controller to provide state control, pressurize, depressurize, purge, for each normal For example, if the Emergency Mode Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table. based • determines whether the application operates This option on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Unit Enable: Enable Switch is selected, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is 415 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

416 considered unreliable If both BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable (and the unit is enabled). (that is, either input state to cause the unit to stop). for the unit to operate can be in a shutdown based Switch determines whether the application operates This option on the Hardware Input Unit Enable (BI): • then when the Network Input does not have a valid command (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, from the network, unreliable If both BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be it is considered (and the unit is enabled). for the unit to operate input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop). Enable (that is, either • Fail Restart: This feature is available Power Unit Enable Determination State Generator module. as part of the When is selected, after a restart (power cycle, transfer to the controller , or manual restart command), this option is held in the shutdown for the Power Fail Restart Time (default = 60 seconds). the application state N2 Compatibility Options (MADD) Options selection provides a solution for replacement The N2 Compatibility products that are no longer of N2-based available. you select this option, the application provides When for those points that are the same as they mappings were in the legacy application. The selection options Options are: for N2 Compatibility Options • N2 Compatibility Series Controller - Replacing AHU UNT Series - Replacing Controller - Replacing DX9100 Series Controller Air Dual Duct Control Logic Mixed Selection Optional (MADD) Sensors sensors. selections the option for loading These monitor-only provide extra, The selection options for Optional Sensors are: • Position Feedback: This option provides feedback inputs for monitoring only purposes. If you want to generate an alarm or other using the position feedback inputs, you must create custom coding to do so. functionality Damper - Modulated Outputs Feedback • No Position • Analog per Output Input • Binary Input per Output - Modulated Valve Outputs • No Position Feedback Input per Output • Analog • Binary per Output Input - Two Position Damper Outputs • No Position Feedback • Binary Input per Output • Two Binary Inputs per Output 416 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

417 - Two Position Valve Outputs Feedback • No Position per Output • Binary Input per Output Inputs • Two Binary - VSD Outputs • No Feedback (RPM) • Motor Speed Frequency • Drive (Hz) • Motor Percent (%) • Outdoor Air - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 - Air Flow Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Velocity Measurement (Scaled) • Flow Outdoor Air • Minimum - Air Flow • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Flow Measurement (Scaled) • Preheat Air Temperature Air • Mixed - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 • Discharge Air - Humidity Sensor - CO 2 - Air Flow • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Flow Measurement (Scaled) - Minimum Flow For Staged Preheat Protection • Hot Deck - Temperature - Humidity - Static Pressure - Air Flow • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Flow Measurement (Scaled) 417 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

418 • Cold Deck - Static Pressure - Air Flow • Velocity Tube) Pressure (Pitot (Scaled) Measurement • Flow Air • Return - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 Pressure - Static - Air Flow • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) Measurement (Scaled) • Flow Air • Relief - Air Flow • Velocity (Pitot Tube) Pressure • Flow Measurement (Scaled) • Zone - Temperature - Humidity Sensor - CO 2 • Misc - Building Static Pressure - Heat Recovery Air Temperature - Mechanical Room Temperature: This option adds an analog input for a zone sensor that monitors the temperature in the mechanical room. is required made in the Mechanical System Selection, the option is not available If a Sensor for one of the selections here. The Minimum Protection for Staged Preheat can be selected if Staged Preheat (in Mixed Air) is selected and Flow the Discharge Flow is available (either due to selecting Return Fan Volume Matching or an optional Discharge Flow sensor). Equipment (MADD) Optional These selections provide monitor-only sensors for an optional pre-filter , final filter, or both. 418 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

419 The selection options Equipment are: for Optional • Pre-Filter - Filter Switch Pressure - Filter Differential Sensor • Final Filter - Filter Switch Pressure Sensor - Filter Differential • Return Filter Switch - Filter Differential - Filter Sensor Pressure Safeties Monitored (MADD) selections provide inputs for monitoring These safeties. The High and Low Static Pressure Switch inputs equipment and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shut down the application when tripped. options Safeties are: The selection for Monitored • Discharge - High Static Pressure Switch Detector - Smoke • Return - Low Static Pressure Switch - Smoke Detector • Low Limit Temperature Switch • High Limit Temperature Switch • Humidity Alarm • Fire Dampers (Options for One through Eight) - - Fire Damper Alarm Reset Strategy • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) 419 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

420 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Applications sections for information s logic and selections. See the following on this application’ System See the for a list and description of the module and System Selection changes that section Files Upgrading the last release of the tool. since made were Air Single Duct 100% Logic Outdoor Core (OASD) Modules Air Single use the core logic listed as follows: All 100% Duct Applications Outdoor Network Inputs (Application Mode) APP-MODE • TUNING-RESET : This module is used • the tuning parameters to the default values present after the initial to reset transfer . to the device Network Input section. See the Modules Inputs (Discharge • DA-T Air Temperature) Modules See the Input section. Generation State • Stop Sequencing 100 OA Start Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100 OA) ) ( • Mode Determination : This module Application out the Water Flush application mode for separate separates connection to State Selection and passes the remaining application modes to State Selection. • Water System Pass Through ( Pass Through ): This module passes the Water Flush system mode to a Flush State open. input so that when water flush is requested, the valves always separate Selection • 100 OA Single ( Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100 OASD) ) Duct Sequencing • controller PID Tuning forces every output Reset to reset the Proportional Band and Integral time : This module of every PID to default values based on current process ID. Setpoint/Miscellaneous • Air Setpoint Discharge Determination Output Control • Required Heating Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) LV ( • Cooling Required LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) 100% Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection Outdoor Fans (OASD) These selections provide the logic for the main fans. The selection options for Fans are: 420 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

421 Supply Fan Speed • Single Speed • Variable - Two Duct Static Pressure Sensors • Dual Supply Fans - Run Together - Lead/Lag - Run/Standby • Fan Status - Fan Array • Analog Fan Status - Number of Fans • Three • Four • Five • Six • Eight • Nine • Ten • Twelve 421 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

422 • Fifteen • Sixteen of Airflow Strategy - Loss • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Alarm Management - Lockout Switch Fault Converter - Frequency • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset (BI) Switch - Motor Tripped Overload Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset - Belt Alarm Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Separate Damper Command for Fan - Damper Status Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual - Unit Reset Switch (BI) Exhaust Fan • Single Speed • Variable Speed - Volume Matching • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Flow Measurement (Scaled) • Separate and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints Occupied - Building Static Pressure - Track Supply Fan • Dual Exhaust Fans - Run Together - Lead/Lag - Run/Standby 422 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

423 • Fan Status - Fan Array Analog Fan Status • - Number of Fans • Three • Four • Five • Six • Eight • Nine • Ten • Twelve 423 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

424 • Fifteen • Sixteen of Airflow Strategy - Loss • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Alarm Management - Lockout Switch Fault Converter - Frequency • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset (BI) Switch - Motor Tripped Overload Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset - Belt Alarm Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Separate Damper Command for Fan - Damper Status Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual - Unit Reset Switch (BI) Exhaust Fan Supplemental Toilet Exhaust Fan • - Fan Status • Loss of Status Strategy - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset (BI) Switch - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch • Motor Overload Tripped - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) 424 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

425 Blocking Protection - General Exhaust • Fan - Fan Status of Status • Loss Strategy - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart (BI) • Unit Reset Switch - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch • Motor Overload Tripped - Automatic Restart Restart - Manual Switch • Unit Reset (BI) Protection - Blocking Fan is required (that is, it is selected by default) as well as an optional Exhaust or Relief Fan. A Supply Speed Supply Fan is required in order to select a Variable Speed Exhaust Fan. A Variable Temperature Control Strategy (OASD) These selections the logic for the basic Temperature Control Strategy for the application. The Discharge Air provide Control (fixed setpoint and Reset from Outdoor Air Temperature) are designed for providing air to separately options controlled zones. The Zone or Exhaust Control options are designed for directly controlling a single zone (whether reset the sensor or in the exhaust duct) and controls to the Discharge Air Temperature to a setpoint is in the zone based on the Zone or Exhaust Air Temperature. 425 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

426 The selection options Control Strategy are: for Temperature Discharge Air Control • four parameters from This option loads a module that uses Air Temperature: to define the - Outdoor Reset band and the associated outside setpoints. reset discharge Alternate From Outdoor Air Temperature: This option Reset a module that uses four parameters - loads the outside reset band and the associated setpoint and offset band. to define Zone or Exhaust Control • air Discharge by Exhaust Air Temperature: This options resets the discharge Reset - Air Temperature based on zone or return air temperature. setpoint Add Exhaust/Zone Reset by OA: • resets the zone/exhaust air setpoint based on the outdoor This option air temperature. Air Temperature by Zone Temperature - Discharge Reset • Setpoint Adjust - Common Setpoint Adjust - Warm Cool Adjust • Temp Occ Support • Add Exhaust/Zone by OA: This option resets the zone/exhaust air setpoint based on the outdoor Reset air temperature. - Summer/Winter Setpoint Shift Compensation Occupancy Control (OASD) selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determination. These options for Occupancy Control are: The selection Occupied • Always Occupancy • Scheduled Support - Override Switch (BI) - Occupancy - Unoccupied Strategy • Intermittent Night Operation • Off during Unoccupied , the Always are selected Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or Temporary If any options for separate Occupancy Occupied option cannot be selected. Heat Recovery (OASD) These selections provide the logic to control a Heat Recovery Enthalpy Wheel or Glycol Loop. The selection for Heat Recovery are: options Enable Type • Dry Bulb • Enthalpy • Always On 426 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

427 Enthalpy Wheel Speed • Single Dampers - Modulated Bypass Speed • Variable - Bypass BO Damper • Wheel Status Strategy - Loss of Status • Automatic Restart Restart • Manual Switch - Unit Reset (BI) Management • Alarm Switch - Lockout Converter Fault - Frequency • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Motor Overload Tripped • Automatic Restart Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset - Belt Alarm • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode functionality . If the wheel is off for the wheel an extended the wheel turns on for a short time to keep period, free of dirt and dust. 427 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

428 Glycol Loop • 3-Way Valve - Proportional Actuator Actuator - Incremental • Circulation Pump - Pump Status of Status Strategy • Loss Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart (BI) • Unit Reset Switch Management - Alarm • Lockout Switch Tripped Overload • Motor - Automatic Restart Restart - Manual • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to a motor (typically a pump). If the Blocking command period of time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for is off for an extended up). 30 seconds). example, blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from seizing This feature prevents Air to Air Heat Exchanger • Modulated Bypass Dampers Coils (Preheat) (OASD) These selections the logic to control a Preheat coil. During startup, Preheat controls the DA-T to the OALT-SP provide Limit (Low Setpoint). options for Coils (Preheat) are: The selection Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air Preheat Staged Heating • Device Rotation • No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The current loss of airflow sequencer provides behavior . the proper • High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a High Temperature alarm occurs. • Number of Stages - One Stage - Two Stages - Three Stages - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages 428 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

429 - Seven Stages Stages - Eight Hot Water or Steam • Proportional Output - Two Valves and Bypass Damper - Face • Proportional Actuator Actuator • Incremental • Incremental Output - Face Damper and Bypass • Proportional Actuator Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Two Position and Bypass - Face Damper • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Entering Water Temperature • Leaving Water Temperature • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost - Low Temperature Circulation Both Pressure/Flow - This option combines the existing two sequences to start & Low Temp Circulation: the pump either when the valve command exceeds zero or when the outdoor air temperature drops below the setpoint. 429 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

430 - Dual This option adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby configuration. Pumps: to Balance Runtime: you select this option with Dual Pumps, the application automatically Rotate When • operating with the lowest the lead to the pump shifts hours. - Pump Status Strategy • Loss of Status Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart (BI) Switch • Unit Reset Management - Alarm • Lockout Switch Overload Tripped • Motor Restart - Automatic Restart - Manual Switch (BI) • Unit Reset to a motor Protection: provides monitoring - This option (typically a pump). If the Blocking of the command is off for an extended period command 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for of time (for example, example, 30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from seizing up). - Shutdown AHU when pump is in Alarm: For applications with Preheat pumps, this option prevents the unit from starting if there pump during cold weather . is a fault in the preheat and Bypass Switchover • Face Air Temperature - Based on Outdoor on Network Input - Based • Shutdown Strategy - Off - Remain in Control Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - Protect to force Low OA Temperature Water Control: This option adjusts the state table entries - Leaving the - application to control for Low OA temperature while in shutdown. - User Defined Position • Loss of Airflow Strategy - Off - Remain in Control - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature Low OA Temperature - Water Control: This option turns on the coil pump if the outdoor air - Leaving temperature is lower than the setpoint and the unit is off. The preheat valve is modulated to control the leaving water temperature. - User Defined Position • Unreliable Sensor Operation - Off - Hold 430 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

431 - Protect Coil Based Air Temperature on Outdoor Defined Position - User • Analog Gas Coil - Include Enable BO Heating Valves is intended for two sequenced steam valves. The option does not support for Two Proportional This option Face & Bypass Damper or Circulation Pump controls. including and Bypass Switchover option is applicable only when either a Proportional or Incremental valve actuator The Face with Face is selected Damper . This option specifies how to determine when the valve should be in and Bypass (with be in control at full face) and when the damper should control (with the Valve fully open). the Damper is selected in Control The Remain is available only when a proportional valve Shutdown (with either Strategy proportional or incremental actuator). The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow is selected. Strategy (OASD) Coils (Cooling) selections provide the logic to control a Cooling coil. These options for Coils (Cooling) are: The selection Cooling Condensate This option adds a binary input Alarm: sensor that stops the cooling when activated. for a condensate • Shutdown on Alarm: This option places the system in shutdown mode when the condensate alarm is active. Cooling Lockout Air from Outdoor DX Cooling • Device Rotation • Number of Stages - One Stage - Two Stages Stages - Three - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages - Seven Stages - Eight Stages Chilled Water • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Two Position Actuator - Face and Bypass Damper • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Entering Water Temperature 431 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

432 • Leaving Water Temperature • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost Circulation - Low Temperature & Low Temp Circulation: This option combines Pressure/Flow two sequences to start - Both the existing when the valve command exceeds zero or when the pump air temperature drops below either the outdoor the setpoint. Pumps: This option adds a second Dual to operate in a duty/standby configuration. - coil pump Rotate to Balance • When you select this option with Dual Pumps, the application automatically Runtime: shifts with the lowest operating hours. the lead to the pump Status - Pump of Status Strategy • Loss - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart Switch (BI) • Unit Reset Management - Alarm Switch • Lockout Overload Tripped • Motor - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended of time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for period from seizing 30 seconds). blocking (that is, it prevents the motor prevents up). example, This feature Strategy • Shutdown - Off Coil Based Air Temperature - Protect on Outdoor Defined - User Position of Airflow Strategy • Loss - Off in Control - Remain - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - User Defined Position • Unreliable Sensor Operation - Off - Hold Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - Protect Defined - User Position Cooling cannot be selected if Common Heating-Cooling is selected. The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected. 432 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

433 Coils (Reheat) (OASD) selections provide a Reheat coil. These the logic to control for Coils are: options (Reheat) The selection Reheat from Outdoor Reheat Lockout Air Heating Staged • Device Rotation No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The current loss of airflow sequencer • the proper provides . behavior when High This option turns off staged heating Lockout: a High Temperature alarm occurs. • Temperature of Stages • Number - One Stage - Two Stages Stages - Three - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages Stages - Seven - Eight Stages Hot Water or Steam • Proportional Output - Two Valves • Incremental Output Water Temperature • Entering Water Temperature • Leaving Both Pressure/Flow & Low Temp Circulation: This option combines the existing two sequences to start the • the outdoor pump the valve command exceeds zero or when when air temperature drops below the either setpoint. • Dual Pumps: This option adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby configuration. - to Balance Runtime: When you select this option with Dual Pumps, the application automatically Rotate shifts the lead to the pump with the lowest operating hours. • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost - Low Temperature Circulation 433 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

434 - Pump Status of Status Strategy • Loss Restart - Automatic Restart - Manual • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch Overload • Motor Tripped Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart (BI) • Unit Reset Switch to a motor Protection: provides monitoring - This option (typically a pump). If the Blocking of the command is off for an extended period of time (for example, 7 days), command starts for a short time (for the motor example, This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from seizing up). 30 seconds). Strategy • Shutdown - Off - Remain in Control Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - Protect Defined - User Position of Airflow Strategy • Loss - Off - Remain in Control Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - Protect - User Defined Position • Unreliable Sensor Operation - Off - Hold Coil Based on Outdoor - Protect Air Temperature Position Defined - User • Analog Gas Coil - Include Heating Enable BO cannot be selected if Common Heating-Cooling is selected. Reheat not support for Two Proportional is intended for two sequenced steam valves. This option does Valves The option including Face & Bypass Damper or Circulation Pump controls. The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator). the Automatic of Airflow options are available The Loss Strategy Restart option for the Supply Fan Status only when Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected. Coils (Common (OASD) Heating-Cooling) These selections provide the logic to control a Common Heating-Cooling (2-pipe) coil. 434 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

435 The selection options (Common Heating-Cooling) are: for Coils Heating-Cooling Common Alarm: This option adds a binary input for a condensate sensor that stops the cooling when • Condensate activated. alarm - places the system in shutdown mode when the condensate on Alarm: is active. Shutdown This option Actuator • Proportional • Incremental Actuator • Two Position Actuator and Bypass Damper - Face Actuator • Proportional Actuator • Incremental • Entering Water Temperature Water Temperature • Leaving • Coil Pump Boost - Pressure/Flow - Low Temperature Circulation Both Pressure/Flow & Low Temp Circulation: This option combines - two sequences to start the existing the pump when the valve command exceeds either the outdoor air temperature drops below zero or when the setpoint. - Dual Pumps: This option adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby configuration. • Rotate Runtime: When you select this option with Dual Pumps, the application automatically to Balance the lead to the pump operating hours. shifts with the lowest - Pump Status • Loss of Status Strategy Restart - Automatic Restart - Manual Switch (BI) • Unit Reset Management - Alarm Switch • Lockout Overload Tripped • Motor - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to a motor (typically a pump). If the command period of time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for is off for an extended example, 30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from seizing up). • Summer/Winter Strategy Switchover - Local Switch (BI) - Network - Supply Water Temperature 435 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

436 • Shutdown Strategy - Off - Remain in Control on Outdoor Coil Based Air Temperature - Protect - User Position Defined • Loss of Airflow Strategy - Off - Remain in Control on Outdoor - Protect Coil Based Air Temperature Defined - User Position Operation Sensor • Unreliable - Off - Hold - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature Defined Position - User Heating-Cooling Common be selected if either Cooling or Reheat is selected. cannot in Control (with Strategy is available only when a proportional valve is selected The Remain either Shutdown or incremental actuator). proportional the Automatic of Airflow options are available The Loss Strategy Restart option for the Supply Fan Status only when Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected. Humidification (OASD) selections provide a humidifier if present. These the logic to control for Humidification are: options The selection • Staged - One Stage - Two Stages - Three Stages - Four Stages Humidifier - This option provides status feedback of the operation of the humidifier . Status: • Steam Proportional Valve - Isolation Valve • Modulated Packaged Unit - Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier). • This option is for a scrubber humidifier , which Scrubber: head, pump, and basin located in the is a shower ductwork. This type of humidifier requires 3 BOs: a pump BO, a drain valve BO, and a BO to close the fill valve. 436 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

437 The drain valve BOs should actuate together (if draining, close the inlet valve and disable the pump). and fill valve water level is maintained float valve. The operational by a mechanical Valve: - an output for the drain valve and an output for the fill valve. This option Drain provides of and indicates valve This option provides monitoring is inactive: the status of the Open • if scrubber and a network input to open the drain valve. If the network input requests the valve pump command to or if the pump has been off for a period of time, the drain valve opens. If the pump is open command the the drain to start, for a period of time to allow the sump to fill before starting valve required closes pump. • Open valve on Network Input Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback - of the Modulated Packaged Unit of the operation (humidifier). Sensor • Control - Zone Humidity Mode Unoccupied • During Air Humidity - Exhaust • Discharge Humidity High Limit Control Mode option is applicable only when The During Occupancy is selected. Unoccupied Scheduled Control (OASD) Dehumidification These selections provide the logic for dehumidification control. options for Dehumidification The selection are: Control • Zone Humidity Air Humidity • Exhaust be selected unless both Cooling and Reheat cannot Dehumidification are selected. Features (OASD) Optional selections provide These the operation of the application. The Unit Enable logic includes the the logic for controlling option to delay startup after controller restart (Power Fail Restart). The selection options for Optional Features are: • Smoke Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create Control State pressurize, for each Controller to provide normal control, values depressurize, purge, or shutdown. state Output if the Emergency Mode Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller For example, to the desired states in the State Selection Table. condition Unit Enable: Input determines whether the application operates based on the Network • (BV). If Unit This option does Switch then when the Network Input is selected, not have a valid command from the network, it is Enable considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop). input Unit Enable Input (BI): This option determines whether the application operates based on the Hardware • Switch is selected, the Network (BI). If Unit Enable Input does not have a valid command from the network, then when unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be it is considered Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop). • Power This feature is available as part of the Fail Restart: Determination State Generator module. Unit Enable When this option is selected, after a restart (power cycle, transfer to the controller , or manual restart command), Time (default the application state for the Power Fail Restart is held in the shutdown = 60 seconds). 437 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

438 N2 Compatibility Options (OASD) Options selection a solution for replacement of N2-based products that are no longer The N2 Compatibility provides you select points the application provides mappings for those When that are the same as they available. this option, application. were in the legacy The selection options for N2 Compatibility Options are: • N2 Compatibility Options AHU Series Replacing - Controller - Replacing Controller UNT Series DX9100 Series - Replacing Controller Air Single Outdoor Control Logic Selection 100% Duct Sensors (OASD) Optional sensors. selections the option for loading extra, monitor-only provide These The selection options for Optional Sensors are: • Position Feedback: This option provides feedback inputs for monitoring only purposes. If you want to generate an alarm or other using the position feedback inputs, you must create custom coding to do so. functionality Damper - Modulated Outputs • No Position Feedback Input per Output • Analog Input • Binary per Output - Modulated Valve Outputs Feedback • No Position Input • Analog per Output • Binary Input per Output - Two Position Damper Outputs • No Position Feedback • Binary Input per Output Inputs • Two Binary per Output - Two Position Valve Outputs Feedback • No Position • Binary per Output Input • Two Binary Inputs per Output - VSD Outputs • No Feedback • Motor (RPM) Speed • Drive Frequency (Hz) • Motor Percent (%) • Outdoor Air - Temperature - Humidity 438 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

439 - CO Sensor 2 - Air Flow Pressure (Pitot • Velocity Tube) (Scaled) Measurement • Flow • Preheat Air Temperature • Cooling Coil Leaving Air Temperature Air Temperature • Reheat Coil Leaving • Discharge Air - Humidity Sensor - CO 2 - Static Pressure - Air Flow • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) Measurement (Scaled) • Flow Flow • Minimum Heating Protection For Staged Air • Exhaust - Temperature - Humidity Sensor - CO 2 - Static Pressure - Air Flow Pressure Tube) (Pitot • Velocity • Flow Measurement (Scaled) • Zone - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 • Misc - Building Pressure Static Recovery - Heat Air Temperature Mechanical Room Temperature: This option adds an analog - for a zone sensor that monitors the input temperature in the mechanical room. If a Sensor is required for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System Selection, the option is not available here. The Minimum Protection for Staged Heating can be selected Flow Preheat or Staged Reheat is selected if Staged and the Discharge Flow is available (either due to selecting Exhaust Fan Volume Matching or an optional Discharge Flow sensor). 439 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

440 Optional Equipment (OASD) options for Optional are: The selection Equipment • Pre-Filter Switch - Filter Differential Pressure Sensor - Filter • Final Filter - Filter Switch Pressure Sensor Differential - Filter • Exhaust Filter - Filter Switch Differential - Filter Sensor Pressure Monitored (OASD) Safeties inputs selections inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and Low Static These Switch provide Pressure and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shut down the application when tripped. The selection options Safeties are: for Monitored • Discharge - High Static Switch Pressure - Smoke Detector Pressure Switch - Low Static • Exhaust Pressure Switch - Low Static - Smoke Detector - High Static Pressure Switch • Low Limit Temperature Switch • High Limit Switch Temperature • Humidity Alarm • Fire Dampers (Options for One through Eight) - - Fire Damper Alarm Reset Strategy • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) 440 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

441 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Applications sections for information s logic and selections: See the following on this application’ System See the for a list and description of the module and System Selection changes that section Files Upgrading the last release of the tool. since made were Air Dual Duct 100% Logic Outdoor Core (OASD) Modules Air Single use the core logic listed as follows: All 100% Duct Applications Outdoor Network Inputs (Application Mode) APP-MODE • TUNING-RESET : This module is used to reset the tuning parameters to the default values • after the initial present transfer . to the device Network Input section. See the Modules Inputs (Discharge • DA-T Air Temperature) Modules See the Input section. Generation State • Stop Sequencing ( Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100 OA) 100 OA Start ) • Mode : This module separates out the Water Flush application mode for separate Application Determination connection Selection and passes the remaining application modes to State Selection. to State • Water System Flush Pass Through ( Pass Through ): This module passes the Water Flush system mode to a separate State input so that when water flush is requested, the valves always open. Selection • 100 OA Single ( Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100 OASD) ) Duct Sequencing • Reset : This module forces every output controller to reset PID Tuning Band and Integral time the Proportional of every values based on current process PID to default ID. Setpoint/Miscellaneous • Discharge Air Setpoint Determination Output Control • Heating LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) Required • Required LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) Cooling 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection Fans (OADD) selections provide the logic for the main fans. These The selection options for Fans are: Supply Fan • Single Speed • Variable Speed 441 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

442 • Fan Status - Loss Strategy of Airflow Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart (BI) Switch - Unit Reset Management • Alarm - Lockout Switch - Frequency Converter Fault Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart Switch - Unit Reset (BI) - Motor Tripped Overload Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset - Belt Alarm Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Separate Damper Command for Fan - Damper Status Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual - Unit Reset Switch (BI) Exhaust Fan • Single Speed • Variable Speed - Volume Matching • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Flow Measurement (Scaled) • Calculate Flow from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Inputs Discharge • Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints - Building Static Pressure - Track Supply Fan 442 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

443 • Fan Status - Loss Strategy of Airflow Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart (BI) Switch - Unit Reset Management • Alarm - Lockout Switch - Frequency Converter Fault Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart Switch - Unit Reset (BI) - Motor Tripped Overload Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset - Belt Alarm Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Separate Damper Command for Fan - Damper Status Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual - Unit Reset Switch (BI) Supplemental Exhaust Fan • Fan Toilet Exhaust - Fan Status • Loss of Status Strategy - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch • Motor Overload Tripped - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Blocking Protection 443 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

444 General Exhaust • Fan - Fan Status • Loss of Status Strategy - Automatic Restart Restart - Manual • Unit Reset (BI) Switch - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch • Motor Overload Tripped Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Blocking Protection Fan is required (that is, it is selected by default) as well as an optional Exhaust or Relief Fan. A Supply A Variable Speed Fan is required in order to select a Variable Speed Exhaust Fan. Supply Control (OADD) Temperature Strategy selections provide the logic for determining the setpoints of the Cold Deck and Hot Deck temperature control These loops. The Hot Deck options apply only if a Hot Deck heating coil is selected. Setpoint options for Temperature Control Strategy are: The selection • Fixed Hot, Cold, or both Deck Temperatures • Hot, Cold, or both Deck Reset from OA-T Temperature Temperature Reset • Hot Deck from EA-T (OADD) Control Occupancy These provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determination. selections options The selection Control are: for Occupancy • Always Occupied Occupancy • Scheduled - Override Support Switch (BI) - Occupancy - Unoccupied Strategy • Intermittent Night Operation • Off during Unoccupied , the Always are selected Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or Temporary If any options for separate Occupancy Occupied option cannot be selected. Heat Recovery (OADD) These selections provide the logic to control a Heat Recovery Enthalpy Wheel or Glycol Loop. The selection options for Heat Recovery are: 444 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

445 Enable Type • Dry Bulb • Enthalpy Enthalpy Wheel Speed • Single - Modulated Dampers Bypass • Variable Speed BO - Bypass Damper • Wheel Status of Status Strategy - Loss Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset • Alarm Management Switch - Lockout Converter Fault - Frequency • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Motor Overload Tripped Restart • Automatic Restart • Manual - Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Belt Alarm Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode functionality . If the wheel is off for the wheel an extended the wheel turns on for a short time to keep period, free of dirt and dust. 445 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

446 Glycol Loop • 3-Way Valve - Proportional Actuator Actuator - Incremental Pump • Circulation - Pump Status of Status Strategy • Loss Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) Management - Alarm • Lockout Switch • Motor Overload Tripped Restart - Automatic - Manual Restart Switch (BI) • Unit Reset Blocking - This option provides monitoring of the command to a motor (typically a pump). If the Protection: is off for an extended the motor of time (for example, 7 days), command starts for a short time (for period the motor 30 seconds). prevents blocking (that is, it prevents example, from seizing up). This feature Coils (Preheat) (OADD) These selections provide the logic to control a Preheat coil. During startup, Preheat controls the CD-T to the OALT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint). options for Coils are: The selection (Preheat) Preheat Lockout Preheat Air from Outdoor Staged Heating • Device Rotation • Lockout: This option loads the flow switch No Flow heating. The current loss of airflow sequencer for staged provides the proper behavior . when • Lockout: This option turns off staged heating Temperature a High Temperature alarm occurs. High • Number of Stages - One Stage - Two Stages Stages - Three - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages - Seven Stages - Eight Stages 446 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

447 Hot Water or Steam • Proportional Output - Two Valves - Face and Bypass Damper Actuator • Proportional • Incremental Actuator Output • Incremental - Face and Bypass Damper Actuator • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Output • Two Position and Bypass Damper - Face • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Entering Water Temperature • Leaving Water Temperature • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost Circulation - Low Temperature Both Pressure/Flow & Low Temp Circulation: - combines the existing two sequences to start This option the pump either when the valve command exceeds zero or when the outdoor air temperature drops below the setpoint. 447 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

448 - Dual This option adds a second coil pump to operate in a duty/standby configuration. Pumps: to Balance Runtime: you select this option with Dual Pumps, the application automatically Rotate When • operating with the lowest the lead to the pump shifts hours. - Pump Status • Loss of Status Strategy - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) Management - Alarm • Lockout Switch Overload Tripped • Motor - Automatic Restart Restart - Manual Switch • Unit Reset (BI) Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to a motor (typically a pump). If the - is off for an extended of time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for command period 30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor example, up). from seizing - AHU when pump is in Alarm: Shutdown with Preheat pumps, this option prevents the For applications unit from starting if there is a fault in the preheat pump during cold weather . • Face and Bypass Switchover on Outdoor Air Temperature - Based Input - Based on Network Strategy • Shutdown - Off - Remain in Control on Outdoor Air Temperature Coil Based - Protect Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control: This option - the state table entries to force the adjusts application for Low OA temperature while in shutdown. to control - User Position Defined • Loss of Airflow Strategy - Off - Remain in Control - Protect Coil Based Air Temperature on Outdoor Low OA Temperature if the outdoor Water Control: This option turns on the coil pump - air - Leaving is lower than the setpoint and the unit is off. The preheat valve is modulated to control the leaving temperature water temperature. - User Position Defined • Unreliable Sensor Operation - Off - Hold - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - User Defined Position 448 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

449 The option for Two Proportional is intended for two sequenced steam valves. This option does not support Valves Face & Bypass or Circulation Pump controls. including Damper Switchover valve is applicable only when either a Proportional or Incremental and Bypass actuator The Face option when with Face . This option specifies how to determine Damper the valve should be in is selected and Bypass (with the Damper at full face) and when the damper should control (with the Valve fully open). be in control The Remain Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional valve is selected (with either in Control or incremental proportional actuator). of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic Restart The Loss for the Supply Fan Status option Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected. Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) (OADD) These selections provide the logic to control a Cooling coil. The selection options (Cooling - Cold Deck) are: for Coils - Cold Deck Cooling that stops This option a binary input Condensate sensor adds the cooling when activated. Alarm: for a condensate Shutdown on Alarm: • places the system in shutdown mode when the condensate alarm is active. This option Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air DX Cooling • Device Rotation • Number of Stages - One Stage - Two Stages Stages - Three - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages - Seven Stages Stages - Eight Water Chilled • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Two Position Actuator - Face and Bypass Damper • Proportional Actuator • Incremental Actuator • Entering Water Temperature • Leaving Water Temperature • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost - Low Temperature Circulation 449 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

450 - Both & Low Temp Circulation: This option combines the existing two sequences to start Pressure/Flow either when command exceeds zero or when the outdoor air temperature drops below the pump the valve the setpoint. Dual This option adds a second - to operate in a duty/standby configuration. coil pump Pumps: to Balance Runtime: When you select this option with Dual Pumps, the application automatically • Rotate the lead to the pump with the lowest operating hours. shifts - Pump Status of Status Strategy • Loss - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Alarm Management Switch • Lockout • Motor Overload Tripped - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart Switch • Unit Reset (BI) Blocking Protection: This option provides - of the command to a motor (typically a pump). If the monitoring command is off for an extended period of time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example, 30 seconds). prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from seizing up). This feature Strategy • Shutdown - Off - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - User Defined Position of Airflow Strategy • Loss - Off - Remain in Control Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - Protect Defined - User Position Sensor Operation • Unreliable - Off - Hold - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - User Defined Position Fan Status The Loss options are available only when the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Strategy of Airflow Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected. Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) (OADD) These selections provide the logic to control the Hot Deck temperature using a Heating coil. The selection for Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) are: options Heating - Hot Deck 450 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

451 Reheat Lockout Air from Outdoor Heating Staged • Device Rotation loss of airflow Lockout: loads the flow switch for staged No Flow The current This option sequencer • heating. the proper behavior . provides High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a High Temperature • occurs. alarm • Number of Stages - One Stage - Two Stages - Three Stages - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages Stages - Seven - Eight Stages Hot Water or Steam • Proportional Output - Two Valves • Incremental Output • Entering Water Temperature Water Temperature • Leaving • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost - Low Temperature Circulation - Pump Status of Status Strategy • Loss - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset (BI) Switch - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch • Motor Tripped Overload Restart - Automatic Restart - Manual • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to a motor (typically a pump). If the command period of time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for is off for an extended example, 30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from seizing up). 451 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

452 • Shutdown Strategy - Off - Remain in Control on Outdoor Coil Based Air Temperature - Protect - User Position Defined • Loss of Airflow Strategy - Off - Remain in Control on Outdoor - Protect Coil Based Air Temperature Defined - User Position Operation Sensor • Unreliable - Off - Hold - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature Defined - User Position The option Valves is intended for two sequenced steam valves. This option does not support for Two Proportional Face controls. Damper or Circulation Pump including & Bypass is selected in Control Strategy The Remain only when a proportional valve Shutdown (with either is available proportional or incremental actuator). The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow is selected. Strategy (OADD) Humidification provide the logic to control a humidifier if present. These selections for Humidification are: The selection options • Staged - One Stage - Two Stages Stages - Three - Four Stages - Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation Humidifier . of the humidifier • Steam Proportional Valve - Isolation Valve • Modulated Packaged Unit of the operation - This option provides status feedback Status: of the Modulated Packaged Unit Humidifier (humidifier). • Scrubber: This option is for a scrubber humidifier , which is a shower head, pump, and basin located in the valve ductwork. requires 3 BOs—a pump BO, a drain This type of humidifier BO, and a BO to close the fill valve. 452 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

453 The drain valve BOs should actuate together (if draining, close the inlet valve and disable the pump). and fill valve water level is maintained float valve. The operational by a mechanical Valve: - an output for the drain valve and an output for the fill valve. This option Drain provides of and indicates valve This option provides monitoring is inactive: the status of the Open • if scrubber and a network input to open the drain valve. If the network input requests the valve pump command to or if the pump has been off for a period of time, the drain valve opens. If the pump is open command the the drain to start, for a period of time to allow the sump to fill before starting valve required closes pump. • Open valve on Network Input Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation of the Modulated - Unit Packaged (humidifier). Sensor • Control - Zone Humidity Mode Unoccupied • During Air Humidity - Exhaust • Hot Deck Humidity High Limit Control Mode option is applicable only when Scheduled Occupancy The During Unoccupied is selected. Features Optional (OADD) provide the logic for controlling selections of the application. The Unit Enable logic includes the These the operation option startup after controller restart (Power Fail Restart). to delay The selection for Optional Features are: options • Smoke Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency Mode Smoke Input and the Control Network Control for UL-864-UUKL State Generator Sequencing In the State Selection Table, you can create module. state values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize, depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller Mode to the desired condition Selection Table. states in the State This option (BV). whether the application operates based on the Network Input Unit Enable: If Unit • determines not have is selected, the Network Input does then when a valid command from the network, it is Enable Switch unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected, considered of both must be Enable the state for the unit to operate input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop). (that is, either Input Unit Enable (BI): This option determines whether • operates based on the Hardware Switch the application (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, then when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop). (that is, either • Power This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable Determination State Generator module. Fail Restart: transfer When after a restart (power cycle, is selected, to the controller , or manual restart command), this option the application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time (default = 60 seconds). N2 Compatibility Options (OADD) Options selection provides The N2 Compatibility for replacement of N2-based products that are no longer a solution available. When you select this option, the application provides mappings for those points that are the same as they were in the legacy application. 453 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

454 The selection options Options are: for N2 Compatibility AHU Series • Replacing Controller Controller UNT Series • Replacing DX9100 Series Controller • Replacing Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection 100% Outdoor (OADD) Optional Sensors provide the option These extra, monitor-only sensors. selections for loading options for Optional The selection are: Sensors • Feedback: This option provides feedback inputs for monitoring only purposes. If you want to generate Position custom or other an alarm the position feedback inputs, you must create functionality coding to do so. using - Modulated Damper Outputs • No Position Feedback • Analog Input per Output • Binary Input per Output Valve Outputs - Modulated • No Position Feedback per Output Input • Analog • Binary per Output Input - Two Position Damper Outputs Feedback • No Position Input • Binary per Output Inputs per Output • Two Binary - Two Position Valve Outputs • No Position Feedback • Binary Input per Output • Two Binary Inputs per Output - VSD Outputs • No Feedback Speed (RPM) • Motor • Drive Frequency (Hz) Percent (%) • Motor Air • Outdoor - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 - Air Flow Pressure (Pitot Tube) • Velocity • Flow Measurement (Scaled) • Preheat Air Temperature 454 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

455 • Discharge Air - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 - Air Flow Pressure Tube) • Velocity (Pitot • Flow Measurement (Scaled) Protection For Staged Heating - Minimum Flow • Hot Deck - Temperature - Humidity - Static Pressure - Air Flow • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) Measurement (Scaled) • Flow • Cold Deck - Static Pressure - Air Flow • Velocity Tube) Pressure (Pitot (Scaled) Measurement • Flow Air • Exhaust - Temperature - Humidity - CO2 Sensor Pressure - Static - Air Flow • Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) Measurement (Scaled) • Flow • Zone - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 • Misc - Building Pressure Static - Heat Recovery Air Temperature Mechanical Room Temperature: This option - an analog input for a zone sensor that monitors the adds temperature in the mechanical room. If a Sensor is required for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System Selection, the option is not available here. The Minimum Protection for Staged Preheat Flow if Staged Preheat is selected and the Discharge can be selected Flow is available (either due to selecting Exhaust Fan Volume Matching or an optional Discharge Flow sensor). 455 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

456 Modules (OADD Sensors) Optional Sensors selection the following modules in these Control View columns: The Optional loads Network Inputs This module is loaded when a physical Outdoor Air Temperature): input is not (Outdoor • OA-T Air Temperature selected. Low Limit): This module • FLOW-LL when Minimum Flow Protection For Staged Heating is (Airflow is loaded It is the minimum discharge flow required before staged heating is enabled. selected. Network See the Modules section. Input Inputs (Outdoor Air Temperature) • OA-T Air Humidity) • OA-H (Outdoor • OA-Q (Outdoor Air Quality) • OA-VP (Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure) (Outdoor Air Flow): The measurement is scaled using AI Output Range • OA-F High. • PH-T Temperature) (Preheat (Discharge • DA-H Air Humidity) • DA-Q (Discharge Air Quality) (Discharge • DA1-P Pressure 1) Air Static • DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure) • DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI object’ s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes. (Hot Deck Temperature) • HD-T Humidity) • HD-H (Hot Deck Static Pressure) • HD-P (Hot Deck Velocity Pressure) (Hot Deck • HD-VP (Hot Deck Flow): The flow scaling • HD-F by setting the AI object’ s Output Range High and Maximum is configured Value attributes. (Cold Deck Static Pressure) • CD-P (Cold Deck Velocity Pressure) • CD-VP • CD-F (Cold Deck Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI object’ s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes. • EA-T Air Temperature) (Exhaust (Exhaust • EA-H Air Humidity) • EA-Q (Exhaust Air Quality) (Exhaust • EA-P Pressure) Air Static • EA-VP (Exhaust Air Velocity Pressure) • EA-F (Exhaust Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI object’ s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes. (Zone Temperature) • ZN-T • ZN-H (Zone Humidity) • ZN-Q (Zone Quality) 456 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

457 • BLDG-P (Building Pressure) Static (Heat Recovery • HR-T Temperature) Closed • CLG-CL Status) (Cooling & Bypass Position) • CLGFBD-POS Damper Face (Cooling • CLGFBD-S Damper Status) (Cooling Face & Bypass Open Status) • CLG-OP (Cooling Position) • CLG-POS (Cooling Status) • CLG-S (Cooling Recovery EA FBD Closed Status) • HREAFBD-CL (Heat Recovery EA FBD Open Status) (Heat • HREAFBD-OP (Heat Recovery EA FBD Position) • HREAFBD-POS (Heat • HREAFBD-S EA FBD Status) Recovery (Heat Recovery Status) • HROAFBD-CL OA FBD Closed Recovery Status) (Heat OA FBD Open • HROAFBD-OP Recovery • HROAFBD-POS (Heat OA FBD Position) (Heat Recovery OA FBD Status) • HROAFBD-S (Heat • HR-POS Position) Recovery • HR-S Recovery Status) (Heat (Heating where X is 1-2) • HTGX-POS X Position, (Heating • HTGX-S where X is 1-2) X Status, • HUM-S (Humidifier Status) • PHX-POS (Preheat X Position, where X is 1-2) • PHX-S (Preheat where X is 1-2) X Status, (Preheat Closed • PH-CL Status) Face Damper Position) (Preheat & Bypass • PHFBD-POS • PHFBD-S & Bypass Damper Status) (Preheat Face (Preheat Open Status) • PH-OP (Preheat • PH-POS Position) (Preheat • PH-S Status) • RH-POS (Reheat Position) (Reheat • RH-S Status) See the Input Modules section. Setpoint/Miscellaneous • Outdoor Air Flow Calculation ( Flow Calculation ) • Discharge Calculation ( Flow Calculation ) Flow • Flow Calculation ( Flow Calculation ) Hot Deck • Cold Deck Flow Calculation ( Flow Calculation ) • Calculation Flow Calculation ( Flow Exhaust ) 457 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

458 State Generation • Loss of Airflow is loaded when Minimum Flow Protection For Staged Preheat is selected. Sequencing : This module (OADD) Equipment Optional provide monitor-only sensors for an optional pre-filter , final filter, or both. These selections for Optional Equipment are: options The selection • Pre-Filter - Filter Switch Differential Pressure Sensor - Filter Filter • Final Switch - Filter Pressure Sensor - Filter Differential Filter • Exhaust - Filter Switch - Filter Differential Pressure Sensor (OADD Modules Equipment) Optional The Optional selection loads the following modules Equipment Control View columns: in these Inputs • PFILT-S (PreFilter Status) • PFILT-DP (PreFilter Diff Pressure) • FFILT-S (Final Filter Status) (Final Filter • FFILT-DP Diff Pressure) Modules Input See the section. Monitored Safeties (OADD) selections provide inputs for monitoring These safeties. The High and Low Static Pressure Switch inputs equipment and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shut down the application when tripped. The selection options Safeties are: for Monitored • Discharge - High Static Pressure Switch - Smoke Detector • Exhaust - Low Static Pressure Switch - Smoke Detector • Low Limit Switch Temperature • High Limit Temperature Switch • Humidity Alarm • Fire Dampers 458 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

459 (Options for One through - Eight) Alarm Reset - Fire Damper Strategy Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) (OADD Modules Safeties) Monitored The Monitored selection loads the following Safeties in these Control View columns: modules Inputs • DAPHI-A (Discharge Air High Duct Pressure) • DA-SD (Discharge Alarm) Air Smoke (Exhaust Air Low Duct Pressure) • EAPLO-A • EA-SD Air Smoke Alarm) (Exhaust • LT-A (Low Temperature Alarm) • HT-A (High Temperature Alarm) • HUMHI-A High Limit) (Humidity See the Input Modules section. 459 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

460 Rooftop Unit Applications sections for information Unit (RTU) application’ s logic and selections. See the following on the Rooftop Selection System for a list and description of the module and System section changes that Upgrading See the Files since the last release of the tool. were made Logic Core Rooftop Modules (RTU) All Rooftop use the core logic listed as follows: Applications Network Inputs (Application Mode) APP-MODE • TUNING-RESET : • is used to reset the tuning parameters to the default values present after the initial This module transfer . to the device Network Modules section. See the Input State Generation • Mode Determination : This module separates out the Water Flush Application mode for separate application connection Selection and passes the remaining to State modes to State Selection. application • Water System Flush Pass Through ( Pass Through ): This module passes the Water Flush system mode to a separate State input so that when water flush is requested, the valves always open. Selection • Mixed Duct HR Sequencing ( Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR) v51 ) Air Single • controller : This module forces every output PID Tuning to reset the Proportional Band and Integral time Reset of every PID to default values based on current process ID. Output Control • Heating LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) Required • Required LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) Cooling Rooftop Mechanical System Selection Fans (RTU) selections provide the logic for the main fans. These The selection options for Fans are: 460 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

461 Supply Fan - Single Speed Based Variable • Temperature Speed • Fan Status of Airflow • Loss Strategy - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart (BI) Switch • Unit Reset Exhaust Fan Toilet Exhaust Fan • - Fan Status • Loss Strategy of Status Restart - Automatic Restart - Manual Switch (BI) • Unit Reset - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch • Motor Overload Tripped - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart Switch • Unit Reset (BI) - Blocking Protection General Exhaust Fan • - Fan Status • Loss of Status Strategy - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Alarm Management • Lockout Switch • Motor Overload Tripped - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart • Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Blocking Protection 461 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

462 Economizer Damper(s) (RTU) options for Economizer are: The selection Damper(s) Mixed Air Damper • Common Proportional Output (BO) Enable • Packaged Economizer Suitability • Economizer Command - Network (BI) - Enthalpy Switch - Outdoor Air • Dry Bulb Temp Economizer Economizer • Temp & Enthalpy Minimum Position Reset by CO • Mixed Sensor Air Damper 2 - Use Zone Sensor CO 2 - Use Return CO Sensor 2 Outdoor Air on Low Temperature • Reduce Outdoor The Reduce selection enables logic that reduces the intake of outdoor air when Air on Low Temperature Air Temperature air intake reduction is accomplished by modulating the outdoor the Mixed is low. This outdoor closed. The control logic for the low limit strategy is embedded directly into the Output Control modules dampers over and activated the appropriate setpoint and process variable. The logic takes precedence by connecting simply all logic other than Emergency Modes. Temperature Control Strategy (RTU) These selections provide the logic for the basic Temperature Control Strategy for the application. The Discharge Air Control options setpoint and Reset from Outdoor Air Temperature) provide air to separately controlled zones. (fixed (whether or Return directly control a single zone options the sensor is in the zone or in the return The Zone Control For single zone control, the application can be optionally duct). to control the Discharge Air Temperature configured to a setpoint based on the Zone or Return Air Temperature. reset options for Temperature Control Strategy are: The selection • Discharge Air Control - Reset from Outdoor Air Temperature Zone Control • or Return Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return - Discharge - Cycle Occupied During - Return Air Temperature - Zone Temperature • Setpoint Adjust - Common Setpoint Adjust - Warm Cool Adjust • Temp Occ Support - Summer/Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift If Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected, Cycle During Occupied cannot be selected. 462 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

463 Occupancy Control (RTU) selections provide Mode Determination. These the logic for Occupancy for Occupancy are: options The selection Control • Always Occupied • Scheduled Occupancy Support - Override Switch (BI) - Occupancy - Unoccupied Strategy • Intermittent Night Operation Unoccupied • Off during If any options are selected Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or Temporary Occupancy , the Always for separate option be selected. Occupied cannot (RTU) Coils (Cooling) selections a Cooling the logic to control These coil. provide The selection for Coils (Cooling) are: options Cooling Condensate Alarm: This option adds a binary input for a condensate sensor that stops the cooling when activated. • Shutdown This option places the system in shutdown mode when the condensate alarm is active. on Alarm: Lockout from Outdoor Air • Cooling • DX Cooling - Device Rotation of Stages - Number • One Stage • Two Stages • Three Stages • Four Stages • Five Stages • Six Stages • Seven Stages Stages • Eight • Chilled Water - Proportional Actuator - Incremental Actuator - Two Position Actuator • Face and Bypass Damper - Proportional Actuator - Incremental Actuator - Entering Water Temperature - Leaving Water Temperature 463 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

464 - Coil Pump • Pressure/Flow Boost Circulation • Low Temperature • Pump Status Strategy - Shutdown • Off Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature • Protect • User Defined Position of Airflow Strategy - Loss • Off in Control • Remain Coil Based • Protect Air Temperature on Outdoor Defined • User Position - Unreliable Sensor Operation • Off • Hold Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature • Protect • User Defined Position The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow is selected. Strategy (RTU) Coils (Heating) selections provide the logic to control a Heating coil. These options for Coils (Heating) are: The selection • Heating - Heating Lockout from Outdoor Air - Staged Heating • Device Rotation • Gas Bonnet Switch • Number of Stages - One Stage - Two Stages - Three Stages - Four Stages - Five Stages - Six Stages 464 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

465 - Seven Stages Stages - Eight - Hot Water or Steam Output • Proportional - Two Valves Output • Incremental Water Temperature • Entering Water Temperature • Leaving • Coil Pump - Pressure/Flow Boost Circulation - Low Temperature - Pump Status • Shutdown Strategy - Off - Remain in Control - Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature - User Defined Position of Airflow Strategy • Loss - Off - Remain in Control Coil Based on Outdoor - Protect Air Temperature Position Defined - User • Unreliable Operation Sensor - Off - Hold Coil Based on Outdoor - Protect Air Temperature - User Position Defined Switch is only supported for Zone The Gas Bonnet Control (not DA-T Reset) when the unit has an opportunity or Return to use it for triggering start up. This option applies when Cycle During Occupied or Intermittent Night Operation is selected. The option Valves is intended for two sequenced steam valves. This option does not support for Two Proportional Face or Circulation Damper including Pump controls. & Bypass a proportional in Control The Remain is available only when Shutdown valve is selected (with either Strategy proportional or incremental actuator). the Automatic The Loss options are available only when Strategy Restart option for the Supply Fan Status of Airflow Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected. Humidification (RTU) These selections provide the logic to control a humidifier , if present. 465 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

466 The selection options are: for Humidification • Staged - One Stage - Two Stages Stages - Three - Four Stages Valve • Steam Proportional Valve - Isolation • Modulated Unit Packaged Sensor • Control Humidity - Zone • During Mode Unoccupied Air Humidity - Return • Discharge Humidity High Limit Control Mode The During is applicable only when Scheduled Occupancy is selected. Unoccupied option Control Dehumidification (RTU) provide control. selections the logic for dehumidification These for Dehumidification Control The selection options are: Humidity • Zone • Return Air Humidity Hot Gas Reheat during • Activate Dehumidification Dehumidification be selected unless both Cooling and Reheat are selected. cannot Features (RTU) Optional provide the the operation of the application. The Unit Enable logic includes These selections the logic for controlling startup after controller restart (Power Fail Restart). option to delay options for Optional Features are: The selection • Smoke Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency Mode Network Input and the Control Smoke Control for UL-864-UUKL State Generator Sequencing In the State Selection Table, you can create module. state values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize, depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller Mode to the desired condition Selection Table. states in the State on the Network This option whether Unit Enable: operates based determines Input (BV). If Unit • the application Switch is selected, then when the Network Enable does not have a valid command from the network, it is Input considered (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected, the state of both must be Enable unreliable (that is, either input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop). for the unit to operate • Unit Enable Switch (BI): This option determines whether the application operates based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, then when unreliable the state If both BI and BV are selected, it is considered of both must be (and the unit is enabled). for the unit to operate Enable input can be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop). (that is, either • Power Fail Restart: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable Determination State Generator module. transfer When after a restart (power cycle, is selected, to the controller , or manual restart command), this option the application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time (default = 60 seconds). 466 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

467 N2 Compatibility Options (RTU) Options selection a solution for replacement of N2-based products that are no longer The N2 Compatibility provides you select points the application provides mappings for those When that are the same as they available. this option, application. were in the legacy The selection options for N2 Compatibility Options are: • N2 Compatibility Options UNT Series Controller Replacing - Rooftop Logic Selection Control Sensors (RTU) Optional provide the option These extra, monitor-only sensors. selections for loading options for Optional The selection are: Sensors • Feedback: This option provides feedback Position for monitoring only purposes. If you want to generate inputs an alarm or other functionality using the position feedback inputs, you must create custom coding to do so. - Modulated Damper Outputs Feedback • No Position per Output • Analog Input per Output Input • Binary Valve Outputs - Modulated • No Position Feedback Input per Output • Analog Input • Binary per Output Damper - Two Position Outputs • No Position Feedback • Binary per Output Input • Two Binary Inputs per Output - Two Position Valve Outputs • No Position Feedback Input • Binary per Output Inputs per Output • Two Binary - VSD Outputs • No Feedback • Motor Speed (RPM) • Drive Frequency (Hz) • Motor (%) Percent • Outdoor Air - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 467 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

468 • Mixed Air - Temperature - Humidity Sensor - CO 2 Air • Discharge - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 • Return Air - Temperature - Humidity - CO Sensor 2 • Zone - Temperature - Humidity Sensor - CO 2 If a Sensor for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System Selection, the option is not available is required Sensors in the Optional section. Equipment (RTU) Optional selections These monitor-only sensors for an optional pre-filter , final filter, or both. provide The selection options for Optional Equipment are: • Pre-Filter - Filter Switch Differential Sensor - Filter Pressure • Final Filter - Filter Switch Differential Pressure Sensor - Filter Filter • Return Switch - Filter - Filter Differential Sensor Pressure Monitored Safeties (RTU) These selections provide inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and Low Static Pressure Switch inputs and shut down and High and Low Temperature inputs are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer Switch the application when tripped. 468 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

469 The selection options Safeties are: for Monitored • Discharge - High Static Switch Pressure - Smoke Detector • Return - Smoke Detector • Low Limit Temperature Switch • High Limit Temperature Switch 469 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

470 Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Applications sections for information (Mixed Air Dual Duct) application’ s logic and selections. See the following on the Multizone System Files for a list and description of the module and System Selection changes that section See the Upgrading the last release of the tool. since made were Air Dual Duct) Core Logic Multizone (Mixed (MADD-MZ) Modules portion of Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) applications use the core logic listed The Air Handling Unit configuration options modules if the AHU Only or AHU + Zones configuration The following are selected. as follows. are loaded Inputs Network APP-MODE (Application Mode) • • TUNING-RESET This module is used to reset the tuning parameters to the default values present after the initial : to the device . transfer Input section. See the Modules Network Inputs Deck • CD-T (Cold Temperature) Input Modules section. See the Generation State • Start (AHU Mixed Air) Stop Sequencing • Application Determination : This module separates out the Water Flush application mode for separate Mode to State Selection and passes the remaining application modes to State Selection. connection • Water System Flush Through ( Pass Through ): This module passes the Water Flush system mode to a Pass the valves State so that when water flush is requested, input always open. separate Selection • Air Cold Duct Sequencing ( Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD) ) Mixed • time : This module forces every output controller to reset the Proportional Band and Integral PID Tuning Reset of every values based on current PID to default ID. process Output Control • Heating Required LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) • Cooling LV ( Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float) ) Required (Mixed Multizone Duct) Mechanical System Selection Air Dual Configuration Options (MADD-MZ) These selections allow the user to select the portion(s) of the Multizone logic to include in this system. The selection options are: • AHU Only - Zone Heating Valve Mode Output - Zone Staged Heating Mode Output • Zones Only • AHU + Zones 470 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

471 Air Handling (MADD-MZ) Unit Configuration Fans (MADD-MZ) These selections provide the logic for the Air Handling Unit fans. The selection options for Fans are: 471 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

472 Supply Fan - Single Speed • Fan Status - Loss of Airflow Strategy Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Alarm Management Switch - Lockout - Motor Overload Tripped • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart Switch - Unit Reset (BI) - Belt Alarm • Automatic Restart Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset Return Fan - Single Speed • Fan Status - Loss of Airflow Strategy • Automatic Restart Restart • Manual Switch (BI) - Unit Reset • Alarm Management Switch - Lockout Overload Tripped - Motor • Automatic Restart • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) - Belt Alarm Restart • Automatic • Manual Restart - Unit Reset Switch (BI) • Fan to Start First - Supply - Return 472 Controller Tool Help: Air Handling Unit Applications

473 Exhaust Fan Toilet Exhaust Fan • - Fan Status of Status Strategy • Loss - Automatic Restart - Manual Restart (BI) Switch • Unit Reset - Alarm Manageme